CadnaA - Manual V3 - 5

Manual
Version 3.5
The specifications and data given in this documentation are subject to modification without prior
notice. Unless otherwise stated, any names and data used in the examples are completely fictitious. No
part of this documentation may be reproduced or transmitted for whatever purpose, in any form or by
any means (electronic or mechanical), without the express permission in writing from DataKustik
GmbH.
DataKustik GmbH. All rights reserved.
Greifenberg 2005
CadnaA is a registered trademark of Datakustik GmbH, Greifenberg, Germany.
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 1 Contents
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
Configuration of Calculation
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
Project Organisation
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 1 Inhalt
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Brief Overview
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphic
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 1 Contents
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 2 Register
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 2 Register
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Contents
2.1 1
Chapter 2 Register
2
2.1 Contents
2.2
Licence Agreement
2.3
Conventions Used in this Manual
2.4
Attribute Abbreviation
2.5
Operators and Functions
2.6
Literature
2.7
Strings and Operators
2.7.1
Replacing a String
Manual
2.1
Chapter 2 Register
Contents
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Licence Agreement
2.2
Licence Agreement
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO USER: THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND

CONDITIONS APPLY TO THE TRANSFER OF THE CadnaA
SOFTWARE. YOU HAVE THE RIGHT TO RETURN THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE UNOPENED AND SEALED - IF IT WAS
SEALED - WITHIN ONE WEEK IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS LICENCE AGREEMENT. IN THIS CASE, ANY PAYMENTS WILL BE REIMBURSED.
LICENCE AGREEMENT
1. SUBJECT MATTER OF THE AGREEMENT: DataKustik GmbH
grants the customer a non-exclusive licence for the CadnaA software. The property right and the copyright in the software do not
pass to the customer. The licence is issued for use on one single
computer workstation. For any further computer workstation, a
separate licence agreement will be required. The customer is
responsible for the selection of the licensed software and its use.
2. HARDLOCK PROTECTION: The CadnaA software is hardlockprotected. This hardlock represents the value of the program. It
cannot be replaced free of charge, if lost.
3. PROHIBITON OF COPYING: Neither the licensed software, nor
the documentation, in whole or in parts, may be copied. The only
exception to this rule is the generation of a machine-readable
copy of the software for backup or archiving purposes. Any copy
made by the customer for these purposes shall be clearly
labelled like the original software, including the same complete
notices regarding confidentiality, property right and copyright of
DataKustik GmbH.
4. ASSIGNMENT AND TRANSFER: The assignment to third parties of rights and obligations arising out of this licence agreement, and the transfer of the software for use is subject to prior
written consent by DataKustik GmbH, Munich, Germany.
5. USE OF TRADEMARKS: The customer is permitted to use the
Manual
2.2 1
2.2
Chapter 2 Register
Licence Agreement
6.
7.
8.
9.
trademarks and commercial names used by DataKustik GmbH

to identify printouts, provided that (a) these printouts were produced by the licensed software using an electronic printing
medium, (b) these trademarks and commercial names are identified in the same way as done by DataKustik GmbH, and (c) the
customer stops using these trademarks and commercial names
upon termination of this licence agreement.
PROHIBITION OF MODIFICATION: The customer may not
modify the licensed software in any way, or have it modified by
third parties.
UNAUTHORISED USE: The customer undertakes to ensure
that his employees and any other person subject to the customer's instructions, having access to the licensed software,
comply with all obligations of safeguarding and the duty of care
and diligence arising out of this agreement. The customer furthermore undertakes to ensure that no person gains access to
the licensed software with the aim of deriving the source code. If
the customer becomes aware of any such persons as indicated
in the first sentence of this clause, using the software in violation
of the obligations of safeguarding and the duty of care and diligence mentioned, he shall immediately take any possible action
to prevent such use contrary to agreement. He shall inform
DataKustik GmbH in writing of any such use contrary to agreement, should it continue nonetheless.
INDEMNITY: DataKustik GmbH is entitled to the protection
rights and the copyright in the licensed software. The customer
can be held liable by DataKustik GmbH for any violation of such
protection rights which he is answerable for.
WARRANTY: The customer recognises that errors in the programs and the pertinent documentation cannot be excluded
given the state of the art. If, within 30 days from delivery to the
customer, the customer asserts any deviation of the programs
from the program specifications/description, he has the right to
return the defective software including the hardlock key to his
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Licence Agreement
supplier, and to demand delivery of a new software version. If

remedial measures cannot be taken, or fail, the customer has
the right to demand cancellation of the agreement. In this case,
the customer shall destroy any and all copies that he may have
generated. In states where national legislation requires a term of
notice of defect of more than 30 days, that legally provided term
shall be taken to apply, if the software is purchased and used
there.
ANY FURTHER WARRANTY CLAIMS ARE EXPRESSLY
EXCLUDED. DataKustik GmbH NEITHER WARRANTS THAT THE
PROGRAM FEATURES SATISFY THE CUSTOMER'S REQUIREMENTS NOR THAT THEY ARE COMPATIBLE IN THE SELECTION MADE BY THE CUSTOMER. ANY LIABILITY FOR LOST
PROFIT, FOR DAMAGE TO OR LOSS OF SAVED DATA, AND
FOR ANY OTHER INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
IS ALSO EXCLUDED, UNLESS RESULTING FROM GROSSLY
NEGLIGENT OR WILFUL ACTION BY DataKustik GmbH. ANY
WARRANTY, LIABILITY OR INDEMNITY, ETC. PROMISED BY A
THIRD PARTY (E. G. A DEALER) TO BE GRANTED BY DataKustik GmbH IS NOT BINDING FOR DataKustik GmbH.
9. PROTECTION RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES: If the customer is
held liable by a third party because of an alleged violation of a
patent right, copyright, or any other protection right that said third
party may have in the licensed software, DataKustik GmbH shall
immediately be informed in writing of the alleged violation of protection rights, and DataKustik GmbH shall be supported sufficiently in any lawsuit. If the customer is held liable by a third
party in this way, DataKustik GmbH has the right to choose, at its
own discretion, to either provide the customer with the appropriate licence by the third party in question, to modify the licensed
software, to supply the customer with an equivalent different
software, or to take back the licensed software, in which case
the licence fees shall be fully reimbursed to the customer.
DataKustik GmbH is not liable for violations of protection rights
Manual
2.2 3
2.2
Chapter 2 Register
Licence Agreement
which are due to the fact that the customer altered or modified
the licensed software to suit his needs, or that the licensed software is used or sold in combination with other software, hardware or consumables not supplied by DataKustik GmbH. This
material liability is the total of any liability assumed by DataKustik GmbH for violations of any patent right, trademark right, copyright or other intangible property rights.
10. SOFTWARE UPDATES: DataKustik GmbH reserves the right to
supply to the customer the most recent version of the licensed
software. DataKustik GmbH reserves the right to charge the customer with additional licence fees for such updated versions,
and the customer has the right to decline acceptance of such
deliveries.
11. LEGAL INVALIDITY OF CONTRACTUAL PROVISIONS:
Should single or several provisions of this agreement be or
become invalid, this shall not affect the effectiveness of the
remaining provisions of the agreement. The invalid provision(s)
will then have to be re-interpreted or supplemented in such a
way that the originally intended commercial purpose is lawfully
achieved.
CadnaA is a registered trademark of DataKustik GmbH, Munich,
Germany.
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index
2.3
Index
Numerics
3D-Camera 13.15.0-5
3D-Reflector 9.10-1
A
absolute coordinates 5.5.2-1
absolute Height 10.4-3
Absolute Height at Every Point 10.4-3
Absolute Height/Ground at every point 10.4-4
Absorption
Alfa 9.2-1
Spectra 16.3.5-1
Acoustic Transparency 9.3.1-1
Action
activation 5.7.16-1
Activation 5.7.16-1
Additional Width of Road G-3
Adjusting column width 15.2.6-1
Affine Transformation 6.3.4-5
Aircraft Tab 12.4.12-1
Appearance of Grid 11.5.2-1
ArcView 6.4.3-1, 17.3.4-1
Area (m) 8.6.5-1
Area Source 8.5-1
Area source
horizontal 8.5-1
vertical 8.5-1
Areas With Specified Ground Absorption 9.81
Arithmetic 9.3.6-4
Arithmetik 11.5.5-1
Ascii-file 10.7-2
Ascii-Poly 6.4.14-1
Manual
2.3 1
Ascii-Raster 17.3.1-1
Atlas GIS 6.4.4-1
Attenuation 8.6.6-1
Auralisation 8.14-4
Auto save 18.9-1
AutoCad 17.3.3-1
AutoCad-DXF 6.4.2-1
Automatic Saving of Files 18.9-1
B
Barrier 9.5-1
automatically optimize noise barriers
9.7.1-1
the floating 9.5.1-1
with Cantilever 9.5.2-1
Barrier Coefficient 12.4.9-6
Bastian, connection with CadnaA 17.5-1
Batch Operation 18.7-1
Bitmap 6.4.11-1, 14.2-1, 17.3.1-1, 17.4.1-1
calibrate 14.2.1-1
fix 14.2.1-4
show bitmap 14.2.1-4
Web-Bitmaps 14.4-1
BMP 17.3.1-1
BNA,BNX 17.3.1-2
BPL option G-1
Break
Areas 5.7.9-1
into pieces (line-like objects) 5.7.15-1
Bridge 9.6-1
Example of a street bridge elevated by
two embankments 9.6.2-1
Example of How to Enter a Bridge 9.6.1-1
how to enter a 9.6.1-1
Building 9.3-1
acustic transparency 9.3.1-1
2.3
Chapter 2 Register
Index
Deactivate Point Objects in Buildings

9.3.0-1
Generate Building 9.3.4-1
Height Points 6.4.13-1
Level-Difference-Map 9.3.8-1
Level-Difference-Map for 9.3.8-1
Noise Maps of 9.3.6-1
Residential and Outbuilding 9.3.2-1
Result Table for the Building Noise 9.3.71
Snap Point to Building Facade 9.3.3-1
Building Evaluation 9.3.5-1
Building Height Points 6.4.13-1
Built-Up Areas 9.9-1
Button Bar 15.2.1-1
C
Cadna.dat 16.2-2
Calc Width of Roads 8.9.8-2
Calculate
Limits 13.2.0-4
Calculation
Batch Operation 18.7-1
Compact Protocol 12.7-1
Grid 11.5.4-1
Limits 13.2.0-4
Protocol 12.6-1
Selecting Data for 12.5-1
Calculation Methods implemented 12.4.2-1
Calculation Protocol 12.6-1
Calculator -3
Change Color 5.7-2
Change Dimensions 5.4.3-1
Check Box 4.11.0-1
Check Consistency 11.2.3-1
Check ID 1-2
Clipboard
copy to 5.4.5-2
Closing Buildings 11.6.5-1
Cluster of Height Points 10.7.0-1
Combo box
Combo box \gScale 1: 13.3-1
Compact Protocol 12.7-1
Compatibility mode for Industry 12.4.6-4
Condition 5.7.2-2
Configuration 12.4-1
Conflict Maps 11.6.2-1
Connect Lines
Snap Radius 1-2
Context Menu
Deleting Objects 5.4.7-1
Force Rectangle 5.7.5-1
Parallel Object 5.7.13-1
Context menu
break areas 5.7.9-1
break into pieces (line-like objects)
5.7.15-1
convert to 5.7.14-1
Duplicating Objects 5.7.1-1
modify objects 5.7.2-1
Spline 5.7.12-1
Contour Lines 10.5-1
Control Elements 4.11-1
Check Box 4.11.0-1
List Box 4.11.0-1
Option Button 4.11.0-1
Convert to 5.7.14-1
Coordinate Grid 13.4-1
Coordinate Transformation 6.3.4-1
Coordinates
General Transformation 6.3.4-6
Copy 15.2.1-1
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index
Copy Data Records 15.2.7-1

Copying
Copying Objects 5.4.5-1
Copying within the Graphic 5.4.5-1
Copying Objects 5.4.5-1
Correction
for multiple Reflections 8.9.8-1
Country Tab 12.4.1-1
Criteria for the Calculation of Reflections
Min. Distance Source to Reflecting Object 12.4.8-5
Crossings with Traffic Lights 8.10-1
Cylinder 9.4-1
D
Database
ODBC interface 6.5-1
Deactivate Point Objects in Buildings 9.3.0-1
Decimal separator 5.5.4-1
Delete 10.7-2
and interpolate height of polygon points 7
delete
Data record 15.2.0-2
Delete Grid Points 11.5.1-4
Deleting Objects 5.4.7-1
Designation of Land Use 11.3-1
Deviation G-2
Diagram 8.6.3-3
Dialog boxes
ID 5.5.3-1
Info 5.5.3-1
Name 5.5.3-1
Digitizer 7.2-1
Calibrate Digitizer 7.3-2
Info 7.2-4
Manual
2.3 3
Initial string 7.2-4

Option 7.2-4
Tablet Menu 7.3-3
Terminal 7.2-5
Text 7.2-2
Type 7.2-1
Digitizing
Digitizing a Map 7.3-1
Digitizing a Road 7.4-1
Directivity 8.7-1
Directional Sound Radiation 8.7-1
frequency dependent 8.7.3-1
Sound Radiation from Building Elements
and Openings According to
AL 8.7.2-1
Sound Radiation from Chimney Outlets
8.7.1-1
Display Ground Height 10.8-1
Display Ground height 10.8-1
Display real Width of Roads 8.9.1-1
Displaying Sound Rays 12.3-1
Distance of the outer lanes 8.9.1-1
Distance Source to Reflecting object 12.4.8-5
Diural Patter 8.9.4-1
Dongle 4.3-1
Drefl dB(A) 8.9.8-1
Druck_Gr.TXT -3
DTM
fit objects to 10.3-1
DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab 12.4.7-1
Duplicating Objects 5.7.1-1
Action Duplicate 5.7.1-2
DXF 17.3.3-1
E
EDBS 6.4.6-1
2.3
Chapter 2 Register
Index
Edit
Result Table 15.3.1-1
Search 5.6-1
Source dialog 8.6-1
table cells 15.2.3-1
2
edit
objects edit dialog 5.5.1-1

Edit dialog
of a source 8.6-1
edit dialog
ID 5.5.3-1
Edit mode F-3, 5.4-1
Editing
Template Files 17.2.2-1
Editing a Template File 17.2.2-1
Editing Objects 5.5-1
Editing Table Cells 15.2.3-1
Einzug 17.4.3-3
Embankment 9.7-1
Emission
attenuation 8.6.6-1
A-weighted Emission Value 8.6.1-1
Emission Spectrum 8.6.3-1
Ko without ground 8.6.8-1
Lm,E in dB(A) for roads 8.9.3-1
normalised A 8.6.2-4
operating time 8.6.7-1
Railway 8.12.1-1
Sound Reduction 8.6.4-1
sound-radiatin area 8.6.5-1
Ergebnistabelle
Textvariable fr GLK 9.3.7-4
Evaluation 11.6.3-1
Evaluation Parameter Tab 12.4.6-1
Example
Defining a group 18.2.1-2
Digitizing a Road 7.4-1
Hierachy of Groups and their Partial Sum

Level 18.2.1-2
Noise Map in Levels differences for Buildings 9.3.8-1
of a Street bridge elevated by two embankments 9.6.2-1
of How to Enter a Bridge 9.6.1-1
Examples
Formulas and Operators 2.6-2
Managing Files Using Folders G-4
Template File for Graphics User-defined
Printout 17.2.8-1
Export 17.3-1
ArcView 17.3.4-1
ArcView Shape 17.3.4-1
BMP 17.3.1-1
BNA,BNX 17.3.1-2
DXF 17.3.3-1
Formats 17.3.1-1
Immis Luft files dbf 17.3.1-2
RTF 17.3.2-1
Text file TXT, RTF 17.3.2-1
TXT 17.3.2-1
Export Limadateien 17.3.1-2
Export.RTF -3
Exporting
Export.RTF -3
F
Fault Lines 10.6-1
File 17.4.4-4
Database 6.5-1
New 5.2-1
Save as 5.2-1
FileDatum 17.4.5-5
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index
FileExpIn 17.4.6-6
FileExpOut 17.4.7-7
FilePrint 17.4.8-8
FileZeit 17.4.9-9
Fit Objects to DTM 10.3-1
fix
Bitmap 14.2.1-4
Floors 11.2.6-1
Foliage 9.9-1
Font 17.4.10-10
Force Rectangle 5.7.5-1
Formats
Export 17.3.1-1
Formulas 2.6-1
Frahme
Symbol 13.11.3-1
Frame
Station Mark 13.11.4-1
Frames 13.11-1
Functions 2.6-1
G
Gebudelrmkarte
Textvariable 9.3.7-4
General and Special Sources 8.2-1
General Sources
area source horizontal 8.5-1
area source vertical 8.5-1
Line Source 8.4-1
General Tab 12.4.3-1
Generate Building 9.3.4-1
Geometry 10.4-1
according to RLS90 8.9-3
Edit dialog 10.4-1
Enter Absolute Height at Every Point
Manual
2.3 5
10.4-3
Geometry Tables 17.4.32-37
Gradient (%) for road 8.9.7-1
Graphic
Marker size G-1
Graphics
Bitmap 14.2-1
Druck_Gr.Txt -3
print 17.2.3-1
Settings for Objects with Frames 13.11-1
synchronize graphics with table 15.2.1-1
update during drag 13.2.0-3
Vector graphics 14.2-1
Grid
Appearance of Grid 11.5.2-1
Arithmetik 11.5.5-1
Calculating a grid 11.5.4-1
Conflict Maps 11.6.2-1
creating a grid of receiver points from IsodB-lines 11.5.6-1
Evaluation 11.6.3-1
vertical
Vertical Grid 11.5.3-1
Grid of Receiver Points 11.5-1
Grid specification 11.5.1-1
Ground Absorption
Areas with Specified Ground Absorption
9.8-1
Use Map of 12.4.9-3
Groups
Hierachy of Groups 18.2.1-2
Partial Sound level 18.2.1-2
Partion Sound Level 18.2.2-1
2.3
Chapter 2 Register
Index
H
2
Hardlock-Key (Dongle) 4.3-1

Hardlock-Server 4.4-1
Height
Display Ground Height 10.8-1
enter height at every point 10.4-3
Height Points 10.7-1, 10.7-2
delete 10.7-2
Generate Contour Lines from 10.7.1-1
Import Ascii-file 10.7-2
Hold Value 13.11.2-1
I
icon
icon bar 4.7-1
icon bar 4.7-1
Icons 4.6-2
ID 5.5.3-1
If, Tag 17.4.11-11
Immis Luft files dbf 17.3.1-2
Implemented Calculation Methods 12.4.2-1
Import 6.2-1, 10.7-2
Allocate Object type to layer 6.3.1-1
Format 6.4-1
formats 6.4-1
Height Points 6.4.7-1
Importing in Section only 6.3.2-1
Importing selected Object Types 6.3.3-1
Layer 6.2-1
MITHRA 6.4.11-1
Number of Trains 6.4.10-1
ODBC 6.5-1
Options 6.2-1, 6.3-1
QSI 6.4.11-1
T-Mobil 6.4.11-1
Import / Export of Tables listing number of

Trains 6.4.10-1
Import formats
NTF 6.4.11-1
ArcView 6.4.3-1
Ascii-Poly 6.4.14-1
Atlas Gis 6.4.4-1
AtlasGIS 6.4.4-1
AutoCad-DXF 6.4.2-1
Bitmap 6.4.11-1
Building Height points 6.4.13-1
CadnaA 6.4.1-2
EDBS 6.4.6-1
MapInfo 6.4.9-1
Niedersachsen 6.4.11-1
Sicad 6.4.5-1
Slip 6.4.11-1
SOSI 6.4.11-1
special formats 6.4.11-1
Stratis 6.4.8-1
third-party programs 6.4.12-1
WINPUT 6.4.7-1
Import Options
Allocate object type to layer 6.3.1-1
Importing in Section only 6.3.2-1
Importing selected Object Types 6.3.3-1
Industry Tab 12.4.9-1
Infringement 11.2.1-1
Inhabitants
Inhabitants/km 11.6.4-2
Initial strings 7.2-4
Insert a Row 15.2.2-1
Insert Bitmaps 14.2-1
Installation
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index
CadnaA 4.2-1
Hint for Windows95 F-2
K
Keyboard 4.9.0-1
Keyword
Aircraft 17.4.32-37
Ampel 17.4.32-35
Gruppe 17.4.32-36
Hline_Geo 17.4.32-37
ImmSpek 17.4.32-36
AircraftZvh 17.4.32-37
Bebauung 17.4.32-35
Bebauung_Geo 17.4.32-37
Bewuchs 17.4.32-35
Bewuchs_Geo 17.4.32-37
Bitmap 17.4.1-1
Bodenabs 17.4.32-35
Bodenabs_Geo 17.4.32-37
Bplan 17.4.32-35
Bruch_Geo 17.4.32-37
Bruecke 17.4.32-35
Bruecke_Geo 17.4.32-37
CalcConf 17.4.32-34
Einzug 17.4.3-3
File 17.4.4-4
FileDatum 17.4.5-5
FileExpln 17.4.6-6
FileExpOut 17.4.7-7
FilePrint 17.4.8-8
FileZeit 17.4.9-9
Flugplatz 17.4.32-37
FlugplatzRwy 17.4.32-37
Flugstrecke 17.4.32-37
FlugstreckeAnz 17.4.32-37
Manual
FlugstreckeGeo 17.4.32-37
Font 17.4.10-10
FQ 17.4.32-35
FQ_Geo 17.4.32-37
FV 17.4.32-35
FV_Geo 17.4.32-37
Geometry Tables 17.4.32-37
GruppeNacht 17.4.32-36
GruppeTag 17.4.32-36
Haus 17.4.32-35
Haus_Geo 17.4.32-37
Hausbeurt 17.4.32-35
If, Tag 17.4.11-11
Imm 17.4.32-36
ImmSpekN 17.4.32-36
ImmSpekT 17.4.32-36
Kraftwerk 17.4.32-35
Legende 17.4.12-12
LegendeNutz 17.4.13-13
LibAlf 17.4.32-37
LibL 17.4.32-37
LibR 17.4.32-37
Libraries (local) 17.4.32-37
LineAbs 17.4.15-15
LineRel 17.4.16-16
LQ 17.4.32-35
LQ_Geo 17.4.32-37
Metafile 17.4.17-17
MoveAbs 17.4.18-19
MoveRel 17.4.19-20
NeueSeite 17.4.20-21
Nutz 17.4.32-36
Nutz_Geo 17.4.32-37
Object Tables 17.4.32-34
PanAttr 17.4.22-24
Plan 17.4.21-22
PosPop 17.4.23-25
2.3 7
2.3
Chapter 2 Register
Index
PosPush 17.4.24-26
PPL 17.4.32-35
PPL_Geo 17.4.32-38
PPLRLS 17.4.32-35
PQ 17.4.32-35
RasterBewertung 17.4.26-28
RectAbs 17.4.27-29
RectRel 17.4.28-30
Richtw 17.4.32-35
Scale 17.4.29-31
Schiene 17.4.32-35
Schiene Zkl 17.4.32-35
Schiene_Geo 17.4.32-38
Schirm 17.4.32-35
Schirm_Geo 17.4.32-38
Seite 17.4.30-32
Strasse 17.4.32-35
Strasse_Geo 17.4.32-38
Tab 17.4.31-33
Table 17.4.32-34
Tables Air-traffic noise 17.4.32-37
Tables Immissions 17.4.32-36
Tables Miscellaneous 17.4.32-36
Tables Obstacles 17.4.32-35
Tabs 17.4.33-39
Teilpegel 17.4.32-36
TeilpegelNacht 17.4.32-36
TeilpegelNachtS 17.4.32-36
TeilpegelTag 17.4.32-36
TeilpegelTagS 17.4.32-36
Tennis 17.4.32-35
Text 17.4.34-41
VarianteM 17.4.36-43
Variants 17.4.35-42
Version 17.4.37-44
Wall 17.4.32-36
Zabst 17.4.38-45
Zeit 17.4.39-46
Zugzahlen 17.4.32-35
Zylinder 17.4.32-36
Zylinder_Geo 17.4.32-38
Ko without Ground 8.6.8-1
L
Labelling of Printing Ranges 17.2.1-3
Land Use 11.3-1, 11.4-1
Lateral Diffraction 12.4.9-1
Layer 6.2-1
Left Mouse Button G-1
Legende 17.4.12-12
LegendeNutz 17.4.13-13
LegendeObj
Keyword
LegendeObj 17.4.14-14
Level Box 13.11.2-1
Level-Difference-Map for Building Noise
9.3.8-1
LfU-Studie 1993 8.13-2
LfU-Study 2003 8.13-3
Li 16.3.2-2
Libraries
Absorption Spectra 16.3.5-1
Cadna.dat user-defined entry for global library 16.2-2
global placed on server 16.2-2
Libraries Manager 16.4-1
Limadateien 17.3.1-2
Limits
Background 13.2.0-2
calc 13.2.0-4
Calculate 13.2.0-4
Line Source 8.4-1
LineAbs 17.4.15-15
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index
2.3 9
Line-like Objects 10.3.2-1

LineRel 17.4.16-16
List Box 4.11.0-1
Long Straight Road 8.11-1
Lw 16.3.2-4
Moving a Polygon Point 5.4.1-1

Moving Objects 5.4.4-1
Multiple Selections G-1
NeueSeite 17.4.20-21
New 5.2-1
Noise Map
PCSP 18.6-1
Noise Maps and their Evaluation with CadnaA
11.6.1-1
Noise Maps of Buildings 9.3.6-1
Noise Source
Area Source 8.5-1
general and special sources 8.2-1
Line source 8.4-1
optimized area source 8.15-1
point source 8.3-1
normalised A 8.6.2-4
NTF 6.4.11-1
Number of Trains 6.4.10-1
MapInfo 6.4.9-1
Marker size G-1
Match Points 6.3.4-3
max. Error (dB) 12.4.3-1
Metafile 17.4.17-17
Meterology correction C0 (dB) 12.4.9-7
Min. Distance Source to Reflecting Object
12.4.8-5
Miscellaneous
MITHRA 6.4.11-1
Modify objects 5.7.2-1
activated or deactivated objects 5.7.2-2
activation 5.7.16-1
all 5.7.2-2
condition 5.7.2-2
group of objects 5.7.2-2
inside, outside, on the borderline of the
polygon 5.7.2-2
Parallele Object 5.7.13-3
Monetary Evaluation of Noise according to
BUWAL 11.6.7-1
Mouse Buttons 4.10-1
Click with Left Mouse Button G-1
Click with Right Mouse Button G-1
Double-click with Left Mouse Button G1
MoveAbs 17.4.18-19
MoveRel 17.4.19-20
Manual
O
Objects edit dialog 5.5.1-1
Objects 5.3-1
edit objects (edit mode) 5.4-1
insert objects 5.3-1
modify objects 5.7.2-1
Tables 15.2-1
with frames 13.11-1
Objectss Geometry 10.4-1
Object-Scan 11.6.6-1
Obstacles
3D-Reflector 9.10-1
10
2.3
Chapter 2 Register
Index
areas with specified ground absorption

9.8-1
Barrier 9.5-1
Bridge 9.6-1
Built-Up Areas 9.9-1
Bulding 9.3-1
Cylinder 9.4-1
Embankment 9.7-1
Foliage 9.9-1
reflection properties 9.2-1
Obstacles within Area Source do not Shield
12.4.9-4
ODBC interface 6.5-1
Operating Time 8.6.7-1
Operators 2.8-1
Functions -1
Replacing a String 2.8.1-2
Operators and Functions 2.6-1
Optimisable Area Source
Noise Allotment -2
Usability -3
Optimisable Source Tab 12.1-2, 12.4.13-1
Optimized Area Sources 8.15-1
optimized area sources 8.15-1
Option
XL(formaly SIP) 11.6-1
Option Button 4.11.0-1
Option XL 11.6-1
closing buildings 11.6.5-1
Evaluation 11.6.3-1
Monetary Evaluation of Noise according
to BUWAL 11.6.7-1
Object-Scan 11.6.6-1
Population Density 11.6.4-1
Options
icon bar 4.7-1
Land Use 11.4-1

Options menu
Marker size G-1
P
Parallel Object 5.7.13-1
Parallele Object
between defined station marks 5.7.3-4
Parking Lot
Emission L*m,E in dB(A) 8.13.0-4
LfU-Studie 1993 8.13-2
RLS90 8.13-2
Parking Place 8.13-1
LfU-Study 2003 8.13-3
Partial Levels 11.2.5-1
Partial Sound Level 18.2.1-2, 18.2.2-1
Partition Tab 12.4.4-1
Pass-by
Video 8.14-8
Pass-by levels for line sources 8.14-1
Pass-by Levels for Line Sources with the Noise Levels Time History 8.14-1
paste 15.2.7-1
PCSP - Program Controlled Segmented Processing 18.6-1
Plan 17.4.21-22
PlanAttr 17.4.22-24
Point Source 8.3-1
Point-like Objects 10.3.1-1
Polar 5.5.2-1
Polygon Point Mode 5.4.1-1
Population Density 11.6.4-1
Positioning Method 1: Insertion of Points
5.3.1-1
Positioning Method 2: Polygons and Lines
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index
5.3.1-1
Positioning Method 3: Text Boxes and Zoom
+ 5.3.1-2
PosPop 17.4.23-25
PosPush 17.4.24-26
Preview 17.2.9-1
Zoom 17.2.9-1
Print
Druck_Gr.Txt (Graphics) -3
Preview 17.2.9-1
Print Graphics 17.2.3-1
Reports 17.2.2-1
Printing
Druck.TXT -3
Editing a Template File 17.2.2-1
Example Graphics Printout 17.2.8-1
Reports 17.2.2-1
Printing Reports 17.2.2-1
Projection Method for extended Sound
Sources 12.2.3-1
Protocol 12.6-1
Purge List of Numbers-of-Trains 8.12.5-1
Purge Tables 18.11-1
Q
QSI 6.4.11-1
R
Railroad Tab 12.4.11-1
Railway 8.12-1
Emission Level Lm,E 8.12.1-1
purge list of numbers-of-trains 8.12.5-1
Speed (km/h) 8.12.2-2
Manual
2.3 11
traffic-count calculator 8.12.4-1

Train Class local 8.12.2-1
train classes 8.12.2-1
train classes user-defined 8.12.3-1
Raster factor 12.4.4-1
RasterBewertung 17.4.26-28
RBLrm 92, Method 1 12.4.4-1
Receiver Point
Calculation and Presentation of Results
11.2.2-1
Check Consistency 11.2.3-1
Floors 11.2.6-1
Grid 11.5-1
Grid specification 11.5.1-1
Receiver Points 11.2-1
RectAbs 17.4.27-29
RectRel 17.4.28-30
Reference Point 10.4.0-4
Reference Time Tab 12.4.5-1
Reflection 12.2.4-1
Absorption coefficient alpha 9.2-1
Reflection of the 1st Order 12.2.5-1
Reflection Properties of Obstacles 9.2-1
Reflection Tab 12.4.8-1
Reflections of Higher Order 12.2.6-1
relative coordinates 5.5.2-1
Replacing a String 2.8.1-2
Residential and Outbuilding 9.3.2-1
Result Table for the Building Noise 9.3.7-1
Rich Text Format (RTF) 17.3.2-1
Road 8.9-1
Additional Width G-3
Calc Width of Roads 8.9.8-2
Correction for Multiple Reflections 8.9.81
correction for multiple reflections 8.9.8-1
12
2.3
Chapter 2 Register
Index
Display real Width of Roads 8.9.1-1

Distance of the outer lanes 8.9.1-1
Diural Patter 8.9.4-1
Drefl dB(A) 8.9.8-1
Emission 8.9.3-1
Emission Lm,E in dB(A) 8.9.3-1
Geometry 8.9-3
Gradient 8.9.7-1
Gradient (%) 8.9.7-1
lateral slope 8.9.2-1
long straight 8.11-1
multi lane road 8.9.1-4
Screen G-3
Self-Screening G-3
Specification of Road Widths 8.9.1-1
Speed 8.9.5-1
Speed Limit (km/h) 8.9.5-1
Standard Cross Section (SCS)/Distance
(m) 8.9.1-3
Surface 8.9.6-1
Total width of road from curb to curb
8.9.1-1
Traffic Density 8.9.4-1
Traffic Lights 8.10-1
Widening of a Road from 1 to 2 Lanes
8.9.1-4
Road Surface 8.9.6-1
Road Tab 12.4.10-1
Roof 10.4-3
Rotation and Displacement -1
Rounding up by the last digit 15.3.2-2
RTF 17.3.2-1
S
Save as 5.2-1
Save Settings 4.12-1

Saving 18.9-1
Scale 17.4.29-31
Combo box 13.3-1
Zoom - 13.3-2
Zoom + 13.3-2
Scale Dimension 13.11.1-3
Screen (Road) G-3
Search 5.6-1
Search Radius (m) 12.4.3-1
Search Radius for Reflecting Objects 12.4.8-2
Seite 17.4.30-32
Selecting a Template File 17.2.2-1
Selecting Data for the Calculation 12.5-1
Selecting one row G-1
Selecting several consecutive rows G-1
self-screening of buildings 12.4.11-2
Self-Screening of Road G-3
SET
Option SET 8.16-1
Shape 17.3.4-1
Sicad 6.4.5-1
sigma G-2
SIP 11.6-1
SIP see XL
Slip 6.4.11-1
Snap Point to Building Facade 9.3.3-1
Sorting columns 15.2.4-1
Sosi 6.4.11-1
Sound Pressure Level 11.2.4-1
Sound Rays 12.3-1
Sound Rays and Reflection 12.2-1
Sound Rays from extended Sources 12.2.2-1
Sound Rays from Point Sources 12.2.1-1
Sound Reduction
Sound Radiation from Building Facades
8.6.4-1
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index
Sound-radiatin Area (m) 8.6.5-1

Special Formats 6.4.11-1
Spectra
Absorption-Spectra 16.3.5-1
ID 16.3.1-2
Li 16.3.2-2
Lw 16.3.2-4
Spectra Diagram 8.6.3-3
Speed Limit (km/h) 8.9.5-1
Spline 5.7.12-1
Split Tab
RBLrm 92, Method 1 12.4.4-1
Splitting Acc. to RB-Lrm 92, Method 1
12.4.4-1
Standard Cross Section (SCS)/Distance (m)
8.9.1-3
Standard Deviation G-2
Standard Level 11.2.1-1
Status Bar 4.6-2
Status bar
Information 13.2.0-3
Stratis 6.4.8-1
Strings 2.8-1
Symbol 13.11.3-1
Synchronize Graphics with table 15.2.1-1
System Requirements
minimum requirements 3.5-1
T
Tab 17.4.31-33
Table 17.4.32-34
adjusting the column width 15.2.6-1
Button Bar 15.2.1-1
Copy 15.2.1-1
Copying and Pasting Data Records
Manual
2.3 13
15.2.7-1
delete Data Record 15.2.0-2
editing table cells 15.2.3-1
Geometry 17.4.32-37
Inserting a Row 15.2.2-1
purge tables 18.11-1
Result Table for the Building Noise 9.3.71
sort column 15.2.4-1
Tables 15.2-1
Air-traffic noise 17.4.32-37
Immissions 17.4.32-36
Libraries (local) 17.4.32-37
Miscellaneous 17.4.32-36
Obstacles 17.4.32-35
Tabs 17.4.33-39
Druck.Txt -3
Editing 17.2.2-1
Export.RTF -3
Labelling of Printing Ranges 17.2.1-3
Tennis 8.8-1
Terrain, uneven 10.2-1
Text 17.4.34-41
Text block
how to enter a 16.6.0-2
Text Box 13.11.1-1
The Foliage and Built-Up Areas 9.9-1
Third-Party Programs 6.4.12-1
Tile Project 18.6-1
T-Mobil 6.4.11-1
Toolbox
Areas With Specified Ground Absorption
9.8-1
Topography
14
2.3
Chapter 2 Register
Index
Building Height Points 6.4.13-1

Contour Lines 10.5-1
display ground height 10.8-1
Fault Lines 10.6-1
Height Points 10.7-1
Total width of road from curb to curb 8.9.1-1
Traffic Density 8.9.4-1
Traffic Lights 8.10-1
Traffic-Count Calculator 8.12.4-1
Train Class local 8.12.2-1
Train classes 8.12.2-1
Train Classes User-defined 8.12.3-1
Transformation 6.3.4-1
Match Point 6.3.4-10
TXT 17.3.2-1
Wildcards 2.8-1
WINPUT-DGM 6.4.7-1
X
XL 11.6-1
Z
Zabst 17.4.38-45
Zeit 17.4.39-46
Zoom - 13.3-2
Zoom + 13.3-2
U
Uncertainty 12.4.3-2
uneven Terrain 10.2-1
Update automatically/ Hold Value 13.11.2-1
Update during Drag 13.2.0-3
Updates F-3
Use Map of Ground Absorption 12.4.9-3
Utilization 11.2.1-1
V
VarianteM 17.4.36-43
Variants 17.4.35-42
Vector graphics 14.2-1
Version 17.4.37-44
Video 8.14-8
W
Web-Bitmaps 14.4-1
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
2.4
The following list comprises all conventions used in this manual.

Words or characters that you are supposed to type
appear in font type Curier.
ENTER/RETURN
Names of keyboard keys and hotkeys are in small
capital letters, for example ENTER and CTRL+C.
CTRL+V
A plus sign (+) between two key names means
that you must press those keys at the same time
(hotkey). For example, CTRL+V instructs you to
hold down the CTRL key while typing the letter V.
DOWN KEY
The arrow keys are named by the direction each
arrow indicates. (LEFT ARROW KEY, RIGHT
ARROW KEY, UP KEY). The term "arrow keys" is a
collective term referring to all of these four keys
together.
Grid|Appearance of This style instructs you to first click the Grid
menu, and then, from the submenu that opens, the
Grid|Options
menu item Appearance of Grid. As a rule, this
will open a dialog where you are supposed to
click, for example, the Options button.
Press the RIGHT
This instruction tells you to position the mouse
pointer on the border of an object, or on the cenmouse button
treline of a line object, and then press the right
mouse button. In these cases, a context menu
opens, offering further commands relating to the
object in question.
Select or Confirm
You are instructed to click the respective feature,
command, or button, using the LEFT MOUSE BUTTON.
Double-click
Instructs you to rapidly press and release the left
mouse button twice.
instructs you to do something.
)
setup
Manual
2.4 1
2.4
Chapter 2 Register
With the key
INS insert
2
A Step-by-Step instruction, which can be omitted

by existing basic knowledge.
two new rows
alerts you to essential information.
Industry.cna
For the stated example you will find a file on the

CadnaA-CD-Rom. Open the file to follow the
example.
For the stated example you will find a file on the
CadnaA-CD-Rom with the example already
completed.
The mentioned literature is saved on your program CD as PDF file in the folder DatakustikInfos
BuildingNoiseMap.cna
Datakustik-Infos|
950_22.pdf
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Attributes and Abbreviations
2.5
2.5 1

Abbreviation
Meaning
ABSNR
Buildings reflecting=0/absorbent=1/highly absorbent=2
ABST
Mean distance between buildings (m)
ALFAL
Absorption coefficient alpha left
ALFAR
Absorption coefficient alpha right
ANZMAXT
ANZMAXTN
Option FLG: Number of exceedings (T) day or (N) night at the

receivers
APBEZX
x coordinate, right (AzB module)
APBEZY
y coordinate, top (AzB module)
AREA
area (in square meters)
area_i
see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"
area_p
area_w
ART
short name of land use
ARTI
land use integer (0 = without use; 1 = first typ of land use in

numerical ascending order according to the dialog etc.)
ARTL
long name of land use
ART_AUTO
determine designated land use
AUTO
intern - not relevant
density of the buildings (%)
BABS
ground absorption G
BASISQ
basic source (Power Plant Option!)
BELN
Parking lots occupied (%) night-time
BELT
Parking lots occupied (%) daytime
Manual
2.5
Chapter 2 Register
BEWERT
Frequency weighting (linear; A-weighted (A); B-weighted (B);Cweighted (C); D-weighted (D))
BEWN
Parking lot events per hour, night-time
BEWT
Parking lot events per hour, daytime
BEZ
Objects Name
BEZRAW
- (only for program-internal use)
BOXL / R / T / B
Bitmap reference of coordinates of the left lower and the right

upper corner
BTYPNR
Type of building
CANTI_HORZ
Horizontal Overhang by Cantilevers
CANTI_VERT
Vertikal Length of the Overhang by Cantilevers
D1 . . . . D10
Attenuations 1 through 10 (power plant module)
DAEMPF
Attenuation by buildings
DAT_VON/DAT_BIS
Date interval
DBEB; DBEW
Attenuation from Foliage and Building developement (RLS90)
DBEB_L; DBEB_R
Distance of building development (left/right)
DBR
bridge penalty
DBUE
Correction for railway crossing Db (dB)
DEN_NUM
Number of target value LP1 till LP4
DFB
Correction for type of railway track Dfb (dB)
DIFFK
Diffusion correction (power plant module)
DIR
for Result Table output of Degree No. 0-360 with 0 symbolized

North direction
DIR_AUTO
1 = automatic; 0 = manuel (then vector x, y, z of directivity)
DIR_TAUS
Exhaust Gas Temperatur in C
DIR_TYP
Name of the saved directivity
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
DIR_VAUS
Windspeed in m/s
DIR_VX (_VY, _VZ)
directivity factor x, y, z
DMP
Attenuation point, line or area source
DP
Correction for type of parking lot
DRA
Correction for railway radius of curvature
DREFL
Correction for multiple reflections (dB(A))
DSTRO
Correction for road surface (dB(A))
DTV
Mean daily traffic density
DURCH
Diameter (m)
EGHOCH/STHOCH
Height of resp. distance between storeys, height of ground floor
EINFB
Start of interweaving section (AzB module)
EINFE
End of interweaving section (AzB module)
EINW
Inhabitants / Population
EXCL
exclude bevor calculation (x = actual)
FBABST
standard cross section (SCS/distance (m)
F_COLOR
color code decimal
F_COLORX
color code hexadecimal
FLAECHE
radiating surface aerea (qm)
FLAECHK
Area correction (power plant module)
FONTCOLOR
Text color
FREQ
Dominant frequency (Hz)
GRENZT/GRENZN
Limiting value daytime/nighttime
GRENZ1...GRENZ4
Limiting value of the corresponding target value LP1 till LP4
GWT / GWN
(could be the maximum value of land use or the maximum level

at the receiver point depending on which parameter is used)
Manual
2.5 3
2.5
Chapter 2 Register
object height (m)
Height of each point
HA
Object initial height (m)
HA_ATT
Object initial height attribut:

r = relativ
a = absolut
g = above building roof
h = height on each point
hb or hg = height/ground on each point
hb
Ground height of each point
HBEB_L; HBEB_R
average height (m) of building development (left/right)
HB_LPT
Building Evaluation Day- and Nighttime
HB_GWT
Building Evaluation Maximum Value Day
HB_GWN
Building Evaluation Maximum Value Night
HBEB
Mean height of buildings (m)
HB_LPMINT /
HB_LPMINN
Building Attributt by Building Evaluation - Minimum-Level Dayand Nighttime
HE
Object final height (m)
HE_ATT
Object final height attribut:

r = relativ
a = absolut
g = above building roof
h = height on each point
hb or hg = height/ground on each point
HIRI
in Result Table output of Direction with one letter (N-North, OEast, S-South, W-West)
HIRI2
in Result Table output of Direction with two letters if necessary

(e.g. NW-North-West, SO-South-East)
HO
Height of air route (AzB module)
HREL
Relative height above the ground (m)
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
ID
Identification
KANK
Duct correction (power plant module)
KILO
the first station point (e.g. 510) m
KILO_DESC
Station ascending = 0, descending = 1
KN
Night-time correction
KO
Directivity index K0
KRBREITE
Crest width (m)
KT
Daytime correction
LAT
Degree of latitude (AzB module)
Lden
Noise Level (d=day, e=evening, n=night
LAERMART
Noise type (road/railway/industry/aircraft/total)
LEN
Length (m)
len_i
len_p
LIN / LIT
Indoor level Li (dBA) night-time / day-time
LIBZZ
Table listing the number and type of trains
LKNICKT/LKNICKN
Salient point of usability function power level daytime/nighttime
LMEN
Emission level (dB) night-time
LMET
Emission level (dB) daytime
LMINT/LMINN/
LMAXT/LMAXN
Minimum level daytime/nighttime

Maximum level daytime/nighttime
LON
Degree of longitude (AzB module)
LPMINT / LPMINN
Attribut of the Building Evaluation Symbol for the minimum level

day and night-time
LP1 - LP4
Alias for the four target values in Caluclation|Configuration|Target Values
Manual
2.5 5
2.5
Chapter 2 Register
LPT
LPN
Calculated sound Level at the receiver point day-time

Calculated sound Level at the receiver point night-time
LPT or LPN without No. refers to the current displayed variant
LPT<n>
LPN<n>
Calculated sound Level at the receiver point day-time

Calculated sound Level at the receiver point night-time
refers to the variant stated by the number <n> (LPT03 or LPN03
refers to the sound level of the variant 3.)
LPT_<n>
Just as above with regard to a corresponding band of a spectrum

with the number after the underscore (see chapter 15.3.3)
LUECK_L; LUECK_R
gaps proportion (left/right) of building development
LW_LI
Indoor level, sound power level, or sound power level per unit
length or unit area
LWA
Presently not supported
LWLIN
Presently not supported
LWN
Sound power level (dB(A)) night-time
LWSN
Sound power level per unit length or unit area (dB(A)) night-time
LWST
Sound power level per unit length or unit area (dB(A)) daytime
LWT
Sound power level (dB(A)) daytime
LWTYP
Sound power, type: LI=indoor level; LW=sound power level, or

otherwise sound power level per unit length or unit area
Mean reciprocal length of edge (m) (1/m)
MARK
State of activation (indifferent/activated +/deactivated -)
MEMO
Info box
MKN
Model correction (Switzerland) night-time
MKT
Model correction (Switzerland) daytime
MN
Hourly traffic density M night-time
MT
Hourly traffic density M daytime
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
N_31-8000
Frequency spectrum nighttime
NACHT
Traffic light active during night-time
NAIND
Limiting value of industry for a type of land-use
NASTR
Limiting value of roads for a type of land-use
NASCH
Limiting value of railways for a type of land-use
NAFLG
Limiting value of aircraft noise for a type of land-use
NEIG
Inclination of wall (1:value)
NO_K1
K1 correction (blank = correction)
NORM_A
Figure = normalized A-weighted level; blank or empty means not

normalized
PLAN
Proportion of low-noise trucks (Austria) night-time
PLAT
Proportion of low-noise trucks (Austria) daytime
PLN
Proportion of lightweight trucks (Austria) night-time
PLT
Proportion of lightweight trucks (Austria) daytime
PN
Proportion of trucks % night-time
PO_AREA
area (m) of a closed Polygon
PO_HABSMIN
minimum height of all polygonpoints

( absolute height at every Point)
PO_HABSMAX
maximum height of all polygonpoints

( absolute height at every Point)
PO_HREL_P1
relative height of the 1. point by a Polygon
PO_HGND_P1
ground height of the 1. point by a Polygon
PO_LEN
length (m) of a Polygon
PO_LENAREA
length (m) of a open Polygon or area (m) by a closed Polygone
PO_PKTANZ
Number of polygon points
PPLTYP
Type of parking lot acc. to RLS or VDI
Manual
2.5 7
2.5
Chapter 2 Register
PPLTYPI
0=RLS; 1=VDI
prop
prop_l
PT
Proportion of trucks % daytime
QTYP
Source type Spherical source=KU; line source=LI; area

source=FH; vertical area source=FV (power plant module)
QUELLE
Source of data (libraries)
R_31-8000
Sound reduction index R (dB) in the range from 31.5 to 8000 Hz
ROUND
Rounding value
RQ
Standard cross section of road
RVL
Reflection loss, left side
RVR
Reflection loss, right side
RW
Sound reduction index R (dB)
S_31. . . .8000
Level spectrum in the range from 31.5 to 8000 Hz
SIGMAD;SIGMAE
SIGMAN
The resulting uncertainty sigma dB for Day, Evening and Night.
SIN_31. . . .8000
Internal - do not assign anything!
SP<n>
SP - Column of the result table

<n> consecutive number of the column, e.g.,
SP4 (is the 4. column). To count the column number use either
the dialog Edit Result Column or the dialog Table column and
not the Result table itself because the invisible columns are
counted as well.
SSCR_ADDWID
Roads selfscreening - additional road width
SSCR_H_R
SSCR_H_L
Roads selfscreening - walls height Left (L) and Right (R)
STEIG
Slope of road %
STELL
Number of parking spaces on parking lot
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
STHOCH
Heigth or distance between floors
STRGATT
Type of road
STRGATTNR
Type of road (internal numbering)
STRO
Identification of road surface (currently for output purposes only)
STRONR
Road surface number
STW
in Result Table output of Floor Identifier
STYPI
Spectrum type (0 = Li; 1 = Li from interiour sources; 2 = Lw; 3 =

Lw calculated from Lp + area + nearfield correction; 4 = Lw calculated from Lp + area + nearfield correction)
T_31-8000
Frequency spectrum daytime
TAG
Traffic light active during daytime
TAKTMAX
Correction for maximum level during specified intervals

(blank=no correction)
TEINWN
Time of operation during night-time (min)
TEINWR
Recreation time (min)
TEINWT
Time of operation during daytime (min)
TOTD, TOTN
Total Noise Level day- and nighttime (total day, total night)
TRANSP
acoustical Transparency (%)
VtLKW
Truck speed
VPKW
Passenger car speed
Angle of approach (AzB module)
WG
x = residential building / blank = outbuilding
WG_NUM
1 = residential building / 0 = outbuilding
WKNICKT/WKNICKN
Salient point of usability function daytime/nighttime
x coordinate
X1
Coordinates of power plant source
Manual
2.5 9
10
2.5
Chapter 2 Register
X2
y coordinate
Y1
Y2
Z1
Z2
ZAUSD
Dimension along z direction
ZKLST_ASC
ASCII Table of Trainclass
ZYL_MX
x coordinate of centre of cylinder
ZYL_MY
y coordinate of centre of cylinder
ZYL_R
Cylinder radius
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
2.6
The following operators and functions can be used in formula boxes. Examples are:
Calculation|Configuration|General tab|Total Level

the common edit dialogs for sources, in the PWL, Sound Reduction,
and Attenuation boxes.
==
equals
!=
is not equal
>=
greater or equal
>
greater than
<=
less or equal
<
less than
++
level addition
-level subtraction
+
addition
subtraction
*
multiplication
/
division
(
open bracket
)
close bracket
max
maximum max(1,2) = 2
min
mimimum min(1,2) = 1
pow
power: pow(a, b) = a^b
abs
absolute value or magnitude
log10
logarithm to the base 10
log
logarithm to the base e
exp10
xth power of 10 (10 to the x)
exp
xth power of e (e to the x)
sqrt
square root
sin
sine (argument to be expressed in radians)
cos
cosine
tan
tangent
ctg
cotangent
Manual
2.6 1
2.6
Chapter 2 Register
deg2rad
rad2deg
arcsin
arccos
arctan
iif
rand(x,y)
Examples of Formulas
and Operators:
2.6
conversion from degrees to radians

conversion from radians in degrees
arc sine
arc cosine
arc tangent
iif(x, a, b) returns a, if x!=0, and b if x==0
generated a random number in interval between
x and y
Example entry for Attenuation - LWA - Sound Reduction on an edit

source dialog.
Expression
((8+4+3.5+2)++17.5)-19)
SP_002++SP_005
where SP_002 and SP_005 refer to spectra
stored in the local library
SP_002 - 3
3 dB are subtracted from the current level in
each frequency band of the spectrum
x - 55
reduces the current number by 55
x+2
increases the current number by 2
x ++ 50
adds 50 dB to the current level respecting rules
for the addition of levels
x -- 50
subtracts 50 dB from the current level respecting rules for the subtraction of levels
Operators:
++
energetic addition (level addition) (40 ++ 40 = 43)
-energetic difference (level subtraction) (43--40 = 40)
+
arithmetic addition (40 + 40 = 80)
arithmetic difference (80 - 40 =40)
max(a,b)maximum level of the levels calculated separately for the two
source groups a and b.
min(a,b) minimum level of the levels calculated separately for the two
source groups a and b.
Manual
2.6 3
Chapter 2 Register
You can use all arithmetic terms or combinations thereof.

In CadnaA you can integrate user-defined functions by using DLL-files
(dynamic loadable library).
On your CadnaA program CD in Support\CNA_FUNC you will find a
CadnaA example (CNA_FUNC) and a README file, which describes the
interface CadnaA and DLL.
As precondition you will have to make an entry in the Cadnaa.ini file for
each function and the function name must be entered in a formula field,
e.g. in the PWL field of a point source in its edit dialog.
Manual
User-defind
Function
2.6.0
2.6
Chapter 2 Register
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Literature
2.7
Literature
/1/
18th regulation for the execution of the Federal Immission Protection Act (Regulation concerning the protection from noise from
sports facilities - 18. BImSchV) dated 1991-07-18, Bundesgesetzblatt, annual set 1991, part 1, p. 1588
/2/
DIN 52210-1 Tests in building acoustics; airborne and impact

sound insulation; measuring methods
/3/
DIN EN ISO 3744 "Acoustics - Determination of sound power

levels of noise sources using sound pressure - Engineering method
in an essential free field over a reflecting plane (ISO 3744:1994);
German version EN ISO 3744:1995"
/4/
Parking Lot Study 1995 - Precise

Wolfgang Hendlmeier: "Noise control at parking lots and underground car parks", Clause 12.2: Precise calculation method (for
parking lots, where the distribution of traffic between the parking
spaces can be estimated with sufficient precision), Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protection (LfU), Depts. 2/4 and 2/5,
November 1994
/5/
Parking Lot Study 1995 - Approximate

Wolfgang Hendlmeier: Noise control at parking lots and underground car parks, Clause 12.3: Approximate calculation method
(for parking lots, where the distribution of traffic between the parking spaces cannot be estimated with sufficient precision) , Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protection (LfU), Depts. 2/4 and 2/
5, November 1994
/6/
Parking Lot Study of Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protection

Study concerning sound emission from parking lots, scrap yards
and bus terminals, 1993 Edition, Issue 89, Collection of publications of the Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protection (LfU),
Munich
Manual
2.7 1
2.7
Chapter 2 Register
Literature
/7/
Parking Lot Study of Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protection 2003

The new revised 4. study concerning sound emission from parking
lots, bus terminals, mulit-storey car park and subterranean garage
of housing estates, August 2003 Edition, Issue 89. Collection of
publications of the Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protecton
(LfU), Augsburg; Kessler Verlagsdruckerei, 86399 Bobingen,
ISBN 3-936385-26-2, ISSN 0723-0028; http://www.bayern.de/lfu
/8/
Schall03 Guidelines for the Calculation of Sound Immission from

Railways Schall 03, Akustik 03, Ed. 1990, DB (German Railways),
Central Administration, Munich
/9/
RLS90 Guidelines for Noise Control at Roads (RLS-90) Published

by the German Federal Ministry of Transport, Dept. for Road Construction, Ed. 1990, Traffic Gazette 44 (1990)
/10/
16th regulation for the execution of the Federal Immission Protection Act (Regulation concerning the protection from traffic noise 16. BImSchV) dated 1990-06-12, Bundesgesetzblatt I, p. 1036
/11/
TA-Lrm Sixth general administrative regulation concerning the

Federal Immission Control Act (Technical instruction for noise
protection TA-Lrm) dated 1998-08-26, published in Gemeinsames Ministerialblatt dated 1998-08-28
/12/
VDI 3760" Computation and measurement of sound propagation in

workrooms ", February 1996, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin, Kln
/13/
VDI 2720 Sheet 1, " Noise control by barriers outdoors", March

1997, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin, Kln
/14/
VDI 2058 Sheet 1, " Assessment of working noise in the vicinity",

September 1985, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin, Kln
/15/
VDI 2571 " Sound radiation from industrial buildings", August

1976, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin, Kln
/16/
VDI 2714 " Outdoor sound propagation", January 1988, Beuth-
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Literature
2.7 3
Verlag, Berlin, Kln

/17/
Updated information of the German Railways central administration, Munich - Acoustics - Effects of Wheel Absorbers), 016,
103.10313, 962/6302, dated 1991-04-19
/18/
Updated information of the German Railways central administraton, Munich - Acoustics - "Schall 03, Aerodynamic Effects", 021,
103.10313, 962/6302, dated 1991-08-17
/19/
Probst, Wolfgang: Noise emissions from sports facilities and their

quantitative consideration for the purpose of immission control
prognosis", Federal Institute for Sports Sciences, Cologne, 1994 Collection of publications on sports facilities and sports equipment;
B94,2, ISBN 3-921896-84-3
/20/
Probst, Wolfgang: Computer Aided Noise Allotment", talk given

at a conference on quality management of software programs in
Munich
/21/
ISO 9613
Acoustics - Attenuation of sound during propagation outdoors Part 1: Calculation of the absorption of sound by the atmosphere,
1993
Part 2: General method of calculation (ISO 9613-2:1996)
ISO International Organization for Standardization, Switzerland
Beuth Verlag, Berlin
/22/
DIN 18005-1 : 1987-05

Noise abatement in town planning; calculation methods, Beuth Verlag Berlin
/23/
VDI 3770 Characteristic noise emission values of technical sound

sources; Sports and recreational facilities; First working draft as of
February 1996
/24/
AL Guideline #28, Sound Radiation and Sound Propagation,

December 1987, Austrian Association for Noise Abatement
Manual
2.7
Chapter 2 Register
Literature
/25/
NORM S 5011 : 1995-04 Determination of noise immission

caused by rail traffic - Railway traffic, shunting and cargo handling
operations
/26/
DIN EN ISO 717-1 : 1997-01 Acoustics - Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements - Part 1: Airborne sound
insulation (ISO 717-1:1996); German version EN ISO 717-1:1996,
/27/
ISO 11654 : 1997 Acoustics - Sound absorbers for use in buildings

- Rating of sound absorption, Beuth Verlag, Berlin
/28/
RVS 3.02 Protection from Noise, December 1997, Austrian Research Association for Road and Traffic, Echenbachgasse 9, A-1010
Wien, Austria
/29/
RAS-Q 82 Guidelines for the construction of roads RAS, Part:

Cross sections, Research Association for Traffic and Transport,
Working Group on Road Design
/30/
RAS-Q 96 Guidelines for the construction of roads RAS, Part:

Cross sections, Research Association for Traffic and Transport,
Working Group on Road Design
/31/
Calculation Examples concerning the Guidelines for Noise Control

at Roads RBLrm-92, German Federal Ministry of Transport, Dept.
for Road Construction, Ed. 1992, Office of the Research Association for Traffic and Transport, Konrad-Adenauer-Str. 13, D-50996
Kln, Germany
/32/
Kutruff, H.:ber Nachhall in Medien mit unregelmig verteilten

Streuzentren, insbesondere in Hallrumen mit aufgehngten Streukrpern,Acustica 18 , 1967
/33/
Probst, W.:Schallabstrahlung und Schallausbreitung - Berechnungsmodelle und Schalleistungsbestimmung, Forschungsbericht

Fb. 556 der Bundesanstalt fr Arbeitsschutz, Dortmund 1988
/34/
Probst, W., Neugebauer G., Kurze U., Jovicic S. und Stephenson
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Literature
2.7 5
U.: Schallausbreitung in Arbeitsrumen, Forschungsbericht Fb

621 der Bundesanstalt fr Arbeitsschutz, Dortmund 1990
/35/
Probst, W.; Huber, B.: The Calculation of Noise Emission by

Multi-Storey Car Parks, Zeitschrift fr Lrmbekmpfung 5/2000,
47. Issue, Page 175 (published in German)
950_03_Car_Park.pdf
/36/
Probst, Wolfgang: Calculation of Noise Levels in an Environment

with highly reflecting Objects and Surfaces, Euronoise 1998,
Munich
EURONOISE98.pdf
/37/
Vierundzwanzigste Verordnung zur Durchfhrung des BundesImmissionsschutzgesetzes (Verkehrswege-Schallschutzmanahmenverordnung - 24.BImSchV, Bundesgesetzblatt Jahrgang 1997
Teil I Nr. 8, ausgegeben zu Bonn am 12.2.1997
/38/
VDI-Richtlinie 2719 Schalldmmung von Fenstern und deren

Zusatzeinrichtungen, August 1987, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin und Kln
/39/
Magnetschwebebahn-Lrmschutzverordnung vom 23.9.1997

(BGBl. 2329, 2338)
/40/
Probst, W. : Geruschentwicklung von Sportanlagen und deren

Quantifizierung fr immissionsschutztechnische Prognosen,
Bericht B2/94 aus der Schriftenreihe Sportanlagen und Sportgerte des Bundesinstituts fr Sportwissenschaften, sb67 Verlagsgesellschaft, Bleriotstr. 6, 50827 Kln, 1994, ISBN 3-921896-84-3
/41/
DIN ISO 3746 Akustik, Bestimmung der Schalleistungspegel von

Geruschquellen, Hllflchenverfahren der Genauigkeitsklasse 3
ber einer reflektierenden Ebene, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin
/42/
TAL98 - Zur Bestimmung der meteorologischen Dmpfung - Eine

Anleitung mit Beispielen - Landesumweltamt NRW, Postfach
102363, D-45023 Essen
/43/
Environmental noise from industrial plants - General prediction

method. Danish Acoustical Laboratory, The Danish Academy of
Technical Sciences, Report no. 32, 1982
Manual
2.7
Chapter 2 Register
Literature
/44/
Railway Traffic Noise - The Nordic Prediction Method, TemaNord

1996:524, Nordic Council of Ministers, Store Strandstraede 18,
DK-1255 Copenhagen K, ISBN 92 9120837 X, ISSN 0908-6692
/45/
Road Traffic Noise - Nordic Prediction Method, TemaNord

1996:525, Nordic Council of Ministers, Store Strandstraede 18,
DK-1255 Copenhagen K, ISBN 92 91208361, ISSN 0908-6692
/46/
MLus 92, Ausgabe 96, Merkblatt ber Luftverunreinigungen an

Straen - Teil: Straen ohne oder mit lockerer Randbebauung, Ausgabe 1991, Genderte Fassung 1996, Forschungsgesellschaft fr
Straen- und Verkehrswesen e.V., Kln, Arbeitsgruppe Verkehrsfhrung und Verkehrssicherheit.
/47/
23. BImSchV - Dreiundzwanzigste Verordnung zur Durchfhrung

des Bundes-Immissionsschutzgesetzes (Verordnung ber die Festlegung von Konzentrationswerten) vom 16. Dezember 1996
(BGBl. 1 S. 1962
/48/
DIN 45687 Akustik - Software-Erzeugnisse zur Berechnung der

Geruschimmission im Freien - Qualittsanforderung und Prfbestimmungen - diese Norm ist zur Zeit der Drucklegung im Verabschiedungsverfahren.
/49/
Literature reference in VDI 3733 Noise at Pipes, Juli 1996,

Bibliography [80] by Reinicke and Danner, UBA-Fb 81-33, 1981
/50/
NMPB-Routes 96 - Mthode de calcul incluant les effets mtorologiques, version exprimentale, Bruit des infrastructures routires,
Janvier 1997 - Centre dtudes sur les rseaux, les transports,
lurbanisme et les constructions publiques
Service dtudes techniques des routes et autoroutes - Laboratoire
central des ponts et chausses - Centre scientifique et technique du
btiment
/51/
Concawe - the oil companies international study group for conservation of clean air and water - europe (established in 1963), report
no. 4/81, the propagation of noise from petroleum and petroche-
Manual
2.7 7
Chapter 2 Register
Literature
mical complexes to neighbouring communities, Prepared by C.J.

Manning, M.Sc., M.I.O.A. Acoustic Technology Limited (Ref.AT
931), CONCAWE, Den Haag May 1981
/52/
Probst, Wolfgang; Donner, Ulrich: The Uncertainty of Sound

Pressure Levels calculated with Noise Prediction Programs,
published in German in ZfL 3/2002 Mai 49. Jg., Springer Verlag,
Dsseldorf, http://www.technikwissen.de and translated in English
by Wolfgang Probst
/53/
EN 12354: Building acoustics - Estimation of acoustic performance

of buildings from the performance of products Part 1: Airborne sound insulation between rooms; German version
prEN 12354-1:1996
Part 2: Impact sound insulation between rooms; German version
prEN 12354-2:1996
Part 3: Airborne sound insulation against outdoor sound; German
version prEN 12354-3:1997
/54/
ISO 717: Acoustics - Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of

building elements Part 1: Airborne sound insulation (ISO 717-1:1996); German version EN ISO 717-1:1996
Part 2: Impact sound insulation (ISO 717-2:1996); German version
EN ISO 717-2:1996
/55/
Schriftenreihe Umwelt Nr. 301, Lrm: Wirtschaftliche Tragbarkeit

und Verhltnismssigkeit von Lrmschutzmassnahmen; Bundesamt
fr Umwelt, Wald und Landschaft (BUWAL) Bern, 1998. Bezugsquelle: BUWAL Dokumentation, Ch-3003 Bern,
http://www.admin.ch/buwal/publikat/d/
/56/
ZTV-Lsw88: Zustzliche Technische Vorschriften und Richtlinien

fr die Ausfhrung von Lrmschutzwnden an Straen, Verkehrsblatt - Dokument Nr. B 6508 - Vers. 88.2, Der Bundesminister fr
Verkehr, Abteilung Straenbau, Verkehrsblatt-Verlag Borgmann
GmbH & Co KG, Hohe Strae 39, P.O. Box 100555, 46000 Dort-
Manual
2

950_22_Uncertainty.pdf
2.7
Chapter 2 Register
Literature
mund, Germany
(Additional Technical Regulation and Guideline for the Construction of Noise Barriers at Roads)
2
/57/
Wolfgang Probst, Bernd Huber: Modelling of Chimneys and

acoustically transparent plants, Zeitschrift fr Lrmbekmpfung
published in German
/58/
Directive 2002/49/EC of the European Parliament and of the

Council of 25th June 2002 relating to the assessment and management of environmental noise, Official Journal of the European
Communities, L189/12, EN, 18.7.2002
/59/
AzB - Bekanntmachung der Datenerfassungssysteme fr die

Ermittlung von Lrmschutzbereichen an zivilen (DES) und militrischen Flugpltzen (DES-MIL) sowie einer Anleitung zur Berechnung, Der Bundesminister des Innern, GMBl 1975, Nr. 8, Seite 126
/60/
Railway Noise: The Netherlands national computation method

"Standaard-Rekenmethode II" published in "Reken- en Meetvoorschrift Railverkeerslawaai '96, Ministerie Volkshuisvesting, Ruimtelijke Ordening en Milieubeheer, 20. November 1996".
/61/
TA-Luft 2002: Erste Allgemeine Verwaltungsvorschrift zum Bundes-Immissionsschutzgesetz (Technische Anleitung zur Reinhaltung der Luft - TA Luft) Vom 24. Juli 2002 (GMBl. 2002, Heft 25
- 29, S. 511 - 605)
/62/
22. BImSchV: 22. Verordnung zur Durchfhrung des Bundesimmissionsschutzgesetzes, 11.September 2002 BGBlI2002, 3626
/63/
ECAC DOC 29: European Civil Aviation Conference Document

29, Report on Standard Method of Computing Noise Contours
around Civil Airports, 2nd edition, 1997
/64/
DIN 45684-1 Ermittlung von Fluggeruschimmissionen an Landepltzen, Teil 1: Berechnung (Entwurf 2004-03)
/65/
VDI 3945 part 3 (Environmental meteorology - Atmospheric dis-
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Literature
2.7 9
persion models - Particle model), Dsseldorf, September 2000

/66/
Harmonoise - Harmonised Accurate and Reliable Methods for the

EU Directive on the Assessment and Management of Environmental Noise: WP3: Engineering Models. Programming The Point-ToPoint Propagation Model. Type of Document: Technical report;
Document reference: HAR34TR-041124-CSTB01; Level of confidentiality: Public, Date: 24/11/2004; Author: Dir Van Maercke
/67/
Kozak, J., Liberko, M.: Updated Method for Calculation of Road

Traffic Noise (in Czech), Annex of the Newsletter of the Ministry
of the Environment of the Czech Republic. 1996, No. 3, p.1-16
/68/
TNM - FHWA Federal Highway Administration Model (http://

www.trafficnoisemodel.org) TNM Version 2.5, McTrans Center
University of Florida, 2088 Northeast Waldo Road, Gainesville, Fl
32609, http://mctrans.ce.ufl.edu
Manual
10
2.7
Chapter 2 Register
Literature
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
2.8
On some dialogs, complex search criteria can be specified, which serve to

narrow down search results or selections of records. Examples are:
Edit|Search: Name: and ID boxes (see chapter 5.5.3)

File|Import|Option Layer selection (see chapter 6.3.1)
Tables|Groups: Expression box (see chapter 18.2.1)
Tables, when applying the Change Column command from the context menu (see chapter 15.2.5)
Examples:
Element searched for
Operator
Example
finds
single character
m?t
mat, met
character string
l*t
*
lot, loot, latent, lost, last

all characters
one of the characters mentioned
[]
b[au]ll
ball, bull
a single character in an alphabetical sequence
[-]
[m-k]strae
((o))
Nstreet, Ostreet, but not

Bstreet. The alphabetical
sequence must be given in
ascending order.
a single character except those

mentioned in the brackets
[^]
[^g]ut
but, but not gut
Logical relations
100|200
100 or 200
ab(c|de)f
abcf or abdef
Manual
2.8 1
2.8.1
Chapter 2 Register
Replacing a String
2.8.1
2
Replacing a String
To replace character strings in table columns, use the Edit Column command from the context menu.
\1
\2
\n
#
denotes the entire character string as is

denotes the first section in brackets
denotes the nth section in brackets
denotes automatic numbering
Examples:
Current value: FBxyz_01
Search for: (*)xyz_(*)
Replace by:
\1
\2uvw_\3
\3u\2
##
enclose characters to be retained in brackets

(FB) is the first section in brackets,
(01) is the second section in brackets
results in
FBxyz_01
FBuvw_01
01uFB
automatic numbering with two digits, i. e. 01
to 99; from 100 on, the numbering will start
over with 00, 101 will become 01, etc.
This flexible logic allows you to perform practically any operation required to convert strings.
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 3 Introduction
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Manual
Contents
3.1 1
3.1 Contents
3.2
CadnaA - the Software Program for Noise Prediction
3.3
CadnaAs additional options
3.4
Selecting Standards for Calculation
3.5
System Requirements
3.6
How to learn CadnaA
Manual
3.1
Contents
Manual
3.2
CadnaA - the Software Program for

Noise Prediction
CadnaA for Windows is a program for noise and air pollution prediction
and efficent for expert purposes.

The program calculates and predicts noise immission in the neighborhood
of
trade enterprises and industrial plants

sports and leisure facilities
traffic systems like
road and railways

airports and landing strip or
any other noisy facilities
according to national and international standards and regulations.

The air pollution is calculated and evaluated according the German guidelines TA-Luft /61/ and 22. BImSchV /62/.
CadnaA is suitable for noise protection as well as for detailed analyses for
mapping noise in large cities (additional XL option).

Extensive features like screen display, treatment and output of graphical
grids enable the usage of scanned plans (additional BMP option).
CadnaA automatically or semi-automatically promotes optimization and
allocation of the permissible area-related level of sound power for partial

areas of projected industry regions (addional BPL option).
The aircraft noise in the vicinity of airports according to the German regulations AzB (Instruction for calculation of aircraft noise zone) and general
landing strips and other aeronautics facilities is calculated with the additional option AzB.
A high priority is made of the import and export of existing data from
third-party programs like ArcView, MapInfo, DXF etc. or the import of
data from databases via the ODBC-interface.
Manual
3.2 1
3.2
The sound level during by-pass with time history and auralisation of moving sources, the different project-views like 3D-special as a photorealistic
secenario which you may move through, the PCSP (Program Controlled
Segmented Processing) to accelerate calculation of big projects, the groups
and project variants and result tables are only some highlights of CadnaA
- in your daily work with the program you will find much more and enjoy
it.
For quick access to CadnaA you will find a practical introduction in chapter 4.14 Quick start which gives you an overview for some important
features.
Manual
3.3 1
3.3
CadnaA is a modular program system. This structure interlinks all possib-
le program performances. The calculated, evaluated level in the vicinity

of an airport can be added and depicted to the evaluated level of a railway
and/or roads (prerequisites are the corresponding program options)
The basic program includes all features and types of calculation except the
following mentioned options. The basic program is a prerequisite for all
options.
Options only in connection with the basic program!
Options
The option BMP imports bitmaps (e.g. BMP, PCX, TIF etc) with scanned
maps (ground plans, cadastral plans) or digital photos. Such bitmaps, when
loaded as background images in CadnaA, serve as templates for the defi-
BMP (Bitmap)
nition of sources, receiver points, buildings and other objects. CadnaA is

capable of processing serveral bitmaps at a time (see Chapter 14 Pictures).
The option BPL is for the optimisation of the area-related levels of sound
power for industrial areas. (see Chapter 8.15 Optimized Area Sources)
BPL
This option is an expert system to find the sound power spectra for many
noise sources like motors, gears, vans, ventilation systems, cooling towers
on the basis of given technical parameters. With CadnaA-SET you can
create modules with up to 10 input and 10 output channels for sound power spectra. You may define the creation of a sound power spectrum with
your own algorithms. If such a module is defined, it can be refered to all
sources in CadnaA. More than 100 predifined modules based on many
years experience and on many coupled output-inputs, so that even complex plants are simulated correctly in your project. (see Chapter 8.16 CadnaA-SET Option).
SET
Option XL allows you to both calculate the noise by taking into account
about 16 million buildings in one run, and to perform calculations with
XL
Manual
3.3
3.3
complete noise maps, and to evaluate a situation on the basis of given

noise levels and the number of persons living under the impact of these
levels. (see Chapter 11.6 CadnaA Option XL).
3
Option AzB for the calculation of areas affected by air-traffic noise.
AzB
FLG
(formerly AzB)
3.3.0
The option CadnaA-FLG calculates the noise emitted from civil and military airports based on the following calculation methods:
AzB - Guidance for the calculation of noise protection areas at civil

and military airports according to the German act on aircraft noise
(Fluglrmgesetz, dated 30 March 1971)
European Civil Aviation Conference Document 29 (ECAC Doc. 29),

Report on Standard Method of Computing Noise Contours around
Civil Airports, 2nd edition, 1997 (adopted to the requirements of the
EC-directive according to AR-INTERIM-CM Adaptation and Revision of the Interim Noise Computation Methods for the Purpose of
Strategic Noise Mapping, March 2003)
DIN 45684-1 Determination of aircraft noise exposure at airfields,

Part 1: Calculation method (in German, draft 2004-03)
With these calculation methods CadnaA-FLG covers all procedures for

aircraft noise assessment relevant on the European level.
APL
3.3.0
The option CadnaA-APL marks a step by extending the features of

CadnaA to the calculation, assessment and presentation of exposure to air
pollutants. Using the CadnaA-PCSP-technique (Program Controlled Segmented Processing) for full-automatic tiling, project distribution and processing on a network exposure maps for various air pollutants are
calculated for arbitrary project limits.
CadnaA-APL combines the well-known user-friendly user interface of
CadnaA with the calculation model AUSTAL2000 developed by the German Environmental Protection Agency (UBA - Umweltbundesamt Berlin). The implemented Lagrange particle model follows the specifications
of the German guideline VDI 3945 part 3 ((Environmental meteorology -
Manual
3.3 3
Atmospheric dispersion models - Particle model), Dsseldorf, September

2000.
Manual
3.3
Manual
3.4 1
3.4
By selecting a desired country from the menu Calculation|Configuration|Tab Country the system will be adapted to the corresponding standards for calculation of industry, road and railways if the standards have
been implemented and purchased.
However, standards do not describe all possible situations or scenarios, so

that a logical interpretation of scopes has been made in many cases.
We must point out that the program user is responsible for the professional use. We cannot take the liability for false calculation and its
consequences which are caused by inputs and system configuration.
The licence agreement, which is accessible also in the online help
with the same-named keyword, will be accepted with program use.
Please also pay attention that not all data or values can be adapted
afterwards automatically according to the subsequently selected
standards if you switch the standards after the parameters of sources
have been entered. If necessary you must check and adapt the data
yourself.
If you e.g. choose first the German standards, input the train classes
to evaluate the emission level and afterwards switch e.g. to the
French standards you would produce a false emission level for the
French standard because in France you may not have the same train
classes and penalties.
The correct calculation will be proved with the official available test
task. The official test task is unambiguously defined test cases from authorized institutions.
For the time being the following proofs have been made:
the Test Tasks for the checking of calculation programs according to

the guidelines for Noise Abatement on Roads - Test 94 by the Federal
Ministry for Traffic, Germany.
Manual
Certificate
3.4.0
3.4
the Draft of Test Tasks for the checking of calculation programs

according to the guidelines for Calculation of sound immission of railways - Test-Schall 03 - 95 by Deutsche Bahn AG, Akustik 03.1, Status Feb. 1996
the Test Tasks for the checking of calculation programs according to

the appendix to the Magnet Hoover Train-Noise Abatement enactment
- Test-Transrapid - Akustik 03.2 Status Januar 1997
Comparative Calculation and Certification correspondig with a test airport of the German Federal Environmental Office Berlin
the test examples, in the appendix of the RVS 3.02 Lrmschutz, per
letter of the Federal Minister for Economic Affairs on August 13th
1998 (Austria).
The future published test task according to DIN 45687 /48/ is also taken
into account to ensure the correct calculation of CadnaA. If necessary please ask for the current status.
Manual
3.5 1
System Requirements
3.5
System Requirements
IBM-compatible PC 486 with VGA-Bildschirm

Windows 95 (Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corp., USA)
minimum RAM 16 MB
at least 5 MB of free disc space for the program CadnaA
CD-Rom drive
Microsoft-compatible mouse and printer
Minimum
requirements
IBM-compatible PC Pentium
Windows2000 or higher
Screen with OpenGL graphic card and 3D-accelerator (recommended
for the 3D-special view)
1 GB RAM
CD-Rom drive
Microsoft-compatible Wheel mouse (comfortabel for zooming) and
printer
Recommend
The drive space depends on the size of the projects you want to treat. The
experience shows that the drive space cannot be big enough.
CadnaA is a 32-bit-version.
Manual
3.5
3.5
System Requirements
Manual
How to learn CadnaA
3.6
3.6 1
How to learn CadnaA
In this manual you will also find information on all features in CadnaA
and how to work with CadnaA with examples and practical hints.
The documentation assumed that you are familiar with the MS Windows
operating system, mouse operation and handling of a computer. Should
that not be the case refer to the according Microsoft manuals.
To get to know CadnaA we suggest you read at least the following chapters:
Chapter 2.4 Conventions Used in this Manual

Chapter 4.6 The Main Window of CadnaA
Chapter 4.8 The Toolbox
Chapter 4.9 CadnaA Menues
Chapter 4.14 Quick start
Afterwards you will have an overview of the technical terms and tools
used in CadnaA like icons and control elements and how to insert, edit and
delete objects and how to check your project with the different kinds of
views.
Explanations to the terms used in the CadnaA dialogs are located in the
online help or in the index of the manual with the same-named keyword.
Should that ever not be the case we would be glad to hear from you.
Read the chapter 4.14 Quick start and work with the examples. That would
take about one hour. Afterwards you will know CadnaA already quite well
so you may start with a real project.
In chapter TUTORIAL you will find practical hints and examples as PDF
files on your CD-Rom which are supposed to ease your project work. This
chapter will be continued by user request. If you have problems to solve
with CadnaA do not hestitate to contact us.
Manual
3.6
How to learn CadnaA
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 4 The First Steps
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Manual

Contents
4.1 1
4.1 Contents
4.2
Installation
4.3
The Hardlock-Key (Dongle)
4.4
The Server Hardlock-Key
4.5
Language
4.6
The Main Window of CadnaA
4.7
Icon Bar
4.8
The Toolbox
4.9
CadnaA Menues
4.10
Mouse Buttons
4.11
Control Elements
4.12
Save Settings
4.13
Help
Manual
4.1

Contents
4.14
Quick start
4.14.1
4.14.2
4.14.3
4.14.4
4.14.5
4.14.6
4.14.7
4.14.8
4.14.9
4.14.10
4.14.11
4.14.12
4.14.13
3D-Special-View
Insert a Road
Receiver Point Calculation
Insert a Barrier
Insert a Building
Duplicate Objects
Import Objects
Edit Objects
Grid Calculation
dB-Level and Text Boxes
Generate Floors
Copy to the clipboard
Summary
4.15
Create Groups
Manual

Installation
4.2
4.2 1
Installation
Use the following procedure to install CadnaA from the CD-Rom. Note
that you cannot run the CadnaA components from the CD; you must install the program onto your hard disc.
Before you start your Computer
The program is copy-protected with a hardlock key. Connect the

hardlock plug on the corresponding interface - parallel/seriel or USB.
By a parallel hardlock you should connect the plug to the parallel
interface before you switch on your computer to prevent a damage of
the plug because of electrostatic discharge.
Start your Computer and the Windows operating system.
Before you install the program finish and close all other programs
Insert the CadnaA-CD in your drive (for e.g. drive D).
In the start menu of your operating system choose the appropriate

command to install the SETUP. EXE from the CD-Rom-Drive
The installation program is started - just follow the instruction
Execute the standard installation
Manual
4.2
Hint for
Windows 95

Installation
If, during the starting of CadnaA under Windows 95, the message
OpenGL file not found should appear, this file has not yet been
installed with Windows 95 on your system. This file is essential to
the 3-D special view.
In this case, you can subsequently install this application by repeating
the Windows 95 SETUP, or copy it from the CadnaA CD-ROM. (We
supply the necessary data by way of precaution.) To copy the
OpenGL files from the CadnaA CD-ROM, use the following steps:
Change to the drive where you inserted the CadnaA CD-ROM (e. g.,
D), and select its Support\OpenGL95 folder.
Copy the two DLL files from that folder to the c:\Windows\System
folder on your hard disk.
The problem should be eliminated.

Hints for
Windows NT, Windows
2000 and XP or higher
When Windows NT, 2000, XP or higher is used, you must additionally

install the Hardlock driver once as follows:
Log in as administrator.
Select the corresponding Start menu|Run
Change to the drive where you inserted the CadnaA CD-ROM (e. g.,
D), and select its Support\Hardlock folder
Corresponding to your operating system run

either the HLDRV32.EXE (for Windows NT; 2000, XP)
or the HASPUserSetup.exe (for Windows XP with SP2)
files available in that folder. The Hardlock driver is being installed.
Afterwards, you can log off as administrator.
CadnaA has now been completely installed.
Manual

Installation
4.2 3
You will find more information about how to install hardlock drivers in
the next chapter.
If you want to know how to best customise your desktop in order to conveniently start the desired programs, please refer to your Windows manual.
If you get CadnaA updates you may overwrite the older version or you
may install it in a different folder. The updates are always full versions
therefore the older version is not required.
Please pay attention to the fact that with an older version you may not
be able to correctly open files saved with a newer version. We guarantee the compatibility of the files to the newest but not to the older
versions.
Manual
Hints to Updates
4.2

Installation
Manual

The parallel Hardlock-Key (Dongle)
4.3
The CadnaA-dongle can be either put on the parallele or on the serial port.
The plug sides are indicated correspondingly.
4.3 1
Please pay attention - do not plug on the dongle if your computer

is switched on!
Usually the dongle is plugged in the parallel port without any problemes.
Should that not be, you may use the serial port - Com1 or Com 2. But in
this case you have to make some additional settings in the AUTOEXEC.BAT as follows:
open start menu|settings|control panel|system or the analogous

menus
in Device manager double-click on ports (Com and Lpt).
Device manager in the system menu
Manual
Hardlock plug
(Dongle) parallel/
seriel
4.3.0
4.3

Choose the desired port on which you want to plug the dongle e.g.
Com1 and afterwards the bottom Options.
In register Ressources look up the entry for the I/O adress e.g. 03f8
- afterwards quit the system control with Cancel.
Enter the I/O adress in the AUTOEXEC.BAT as follows:
The AUTOEXEC.BAT is usually on the hard disc-drive \C. In Windows-Explorer click on the file with the RIGHT mouse button and
choose Edit - the file opens.
The input for the above example Com1 should be

SET HL_SEARCH=3f8s
Between SET and HL is a blank.
An eventual leading zero of the I/O entry has to be deleted and in any
case you have to attach an s behind the input.
Manual

4.3 3
Save the AUTOEXEC.BAT and restart your computer.
For Windows NT or Windows 2000 or higher set the environment variable

HL_SEARCH via Controll Panel|System|Environment.
Hint for Windows NT/

Windows 2000
Manual
4.3

Manual

4.4
4.4 1
You may use a server license either on a computer which is only a server
but not a computer working place or on a computer working place which
is also simultaneously a server. The type of use has to be declared if you
purchase a server license so that the hardlock-key can be configured correctly.
1.
Plug the server hardlock-key on the parallele interface or an USB key

on the USB interface of the server.
2.
On the server log in as administrator (WinNT/2000 or higher) if

necessary.
3.
Insert the CadnaA-CD in the CD drive of your server and change to

the folder SUPPORT\HARDLOCK\HLSERVER.
4.
Double-click on the file HLSW32.EXE.
5.
The installation of the server hardlock starts - during the installation,

state the folder in which the server hardlock should be installed.
6.
Confirm the further installation questions.
7.
If the installation has been finished you have to install the monitor
program, too. Double-click on the AKSMON32.EXE which is located in the stated folder. If you execute the monitor program the following dialog appears:
Manual
4
Windows
95/98/NT/2000/XP
4.4
4.4

Start dialog of the HL-Server administrator
The program is now searching in the net for the hardlock-key. The server
should be found and displayed e.g. servername_local. Mark the server
name and insert one of the following applicable numbers
Server is not working place:
1908
Server is working place:
1907
CadnaA-Calc-Hardlock1
1912
Confirm with Add and quit the program.
The hardlock monitor program must not run to use CadnaAs server licenses. After configuration it only shows a history of how many computer are
loged in and how many licenses are used.
After all this you may log out as administrator.
1. With CadnaA-Calc you cannot insert or edit objects - its only a multiuser calculation
licence.
Manual

Language
4.5
4.5 1
Language
CadnaA is multi lingual. For the time being you may operate the program
in either German, English, Italian or French. Please asked for the current
languages. You can see the languages in the menu Option|Language.
The language option depends also on the level you have purchased.
4
But at the moment manuals and online help are only available in German
or English. Asked about the current state.
When CadnaA is started, it automatically selects the language corresponding to the country setting in the Windows system. This setting is also the
default setting for CadnaA. If a language not available in CadnaA is required, the program will be started in English.
In Options|Language, click the language in which you wish to run
CadnaA. Then terminate the program and start CadnaA again. The selection of language is active now.
Manual
Change Language
4.5

Language
Manual
4.6 1

4.6
Double-clicking the program icon on the Windows Program Manager or a

single click on the Cadna_A entry on the Start menu of the Windows operating system starts CadnaA and opens the main window.
Starting
Main Window
On the main window, all objects can be entered and edited using mouse,
keyboard, and digitizer in parallel. Inserting an object at the same time creates a new data record in the pertinent object list (Tables menu).
Dialogs, edit dialogs, and also the toolbox can be re-arranged on the desktop by positioning the mouse pointer on the upper edge of the box while
pressing the right mouse button. Now drag the box to the desired position
with the mouse button held down.
Manual
Parallel working with

mouse, keyboard or
digitizer
4.6
Icons

CadnaA features icons, so-called shortcuts, which, when being clicked,
immediately trigger the function they represent.

For most icons, the pertinent function is indicated on the status bar in the
lower-left corner of the CadnaA main window as long as the mouse pointer is positioned on that icon with the left mouse button held down (see
also Help text under Show Icon Bar).
For users yet unfamiliar with handling menus, dialogs, scroll bars, or system menus, it is recommended you go through the respective chapters in
the Windows manual.
Status Bar
The status bar runs horizontally along the bottom of the CadnaA main
window.
If, with the left mouse button held down, the mouse pointer is positioned
on an icon from the icon bar or from the toolbox, information about the
pertinent function will appear on the left side of the status bar.
As the mouse pointer is moved across the screen, the right site on the status bar will show the coordinates and, after a calculation, also the levels
(L) calculated and, if applicable, also the ground hight (G), for that point
which the mouse pointer is currently positioned on.
The status bar can be turned on and off via the Options menu by clicking
the menu item Show Status Bar.
Manual

Icon Bar
4.7
4.7 1
Icon Bar
The icon bar can be turned on and off by clicking Options|Show Icon
Bar. Following icons are available:
Scale list box to set the desired scale by selection
from the list or by entering a user-defined value.
To select a scale, click the arrow.
Listbox to choose and to display an existing variant
Listbox to choose an evaluation parameter which has
been defined before in menu Calculation|Configuration
.
Opens an existing file
Save file
Print graphic
Exports result log according to settings in the
template file
Copies contents, Section or selected object from the CadnaA
main window to the clipboard
Triggers calculation according to specified configuration for
specified receiver points (for calculation of the receiver point
grid, click Grid|Calculate Grid)
n/a: see listbox for output parameter further above
Manual
4.7

Icon Bar

Menu calibrated digitizer

Fix objects
Display Bitmap
Help-Cursor for topic related help
Opens online help menu
Manual

The Toolbox
4.8
4.8 1
The Toolbox
Generating and inserting various sources and objects is a piece of cake

thanks to the toolbox feature.
The toolbox is part of the CadnaA main window and contains the icons representing the different object types. It can be re-arranged on the desktop
as you like. To this end, click its upper border with the LEFT mouse button
and hold the button depressed while moving the mouse to a different position on the window. When you have reached the desired position, release
the mouse button.
An object type is activated by clicking the desired icon, or, if available, by
pressing the pertinent hotkey, i. e. the CTRL KEY plus the respective letter
key at the same time.
Toolbox
Manual
4.8
Toolbox Icons

The Toolbox
Instead of activating a feature by clicking the pertinent icon, some icons

can also be accessed via hotkeys. In this case, you have to press the CONTROL KEY, designated Ctrl or Strg depending on the keyboard used, plus the
respective letter key at the same time. If such a hotkey exists, it is indicated below the icon it belongs to.
4
Edit Mode
(CTRL+e)
1)
Point Source
(CTRL+q)
2)
Road (CTRL+s)
1)
Tennis Point of
Service
2)
Building
(CTRL+h)
2)
Built-up Area
3)
1)
1)
Zoom +
Zoom -
Zoom all
2)
2)
General Line Source

(CTRL+l)
1)
Crossing with Traffic
Lights (CTRL+a)
2)
Optimisable Area
Source
2)
Barrier (CTRL+w)
2)
Foliage
Horizontal Area
Source
(CTRL+f)
2)
Parking Lot
(CTRL+p)
1) + 2)
Power Plant
Source
2)
Bridge
2)
Contour Line
2)
Vertical Area
Source
2)
Railway
(CTRL+b)
2)
3D-Reflector
2)
Ground
Absorption
2)
Fault Line
Manual

The Toolbox
2)
4)
Cylinder
embankment
1)
1)
Receiver Point
(CTRL+i)
3)
Insert Bitmap
2)
Auxiliary Polygon
Building Evaluation
1)
Level Box
3)
Symbol
vertical Grid
2)
Calculation Area
3)
Text Box
2)
Designated
Land Use
3)
Section
1)
Station Mark
Note: The numbers in brackets indicate which method of positioning

the object is used (see Online help keyword: Inserting objects).
Manual
4.8 3
4.8

The Toolbox
Manual
4.9 1

CadnaA Menues
4.9
CADNAA Menues
In CadnaA, selecting some menu items causes functions to be executed

immediately while selecting other menu items opens a dialog. When you
choose an item followed by ellipses (...), a dialog appears. A hotkey is often indicated next to a menu item. Using this hotkey allows you to access
the pertinent command without having to open the menu first.
By means of the identification letters (underlined letters), you can call
CadnaA menu items from the keyboard as follows: Hold ALT KEY down,
type identification letter of the menu in question, release ALT KEY, and
then type only the identification letter of the desired command. If, for example, you wish to select the Save command, press ALT+F at the same
time (File menu opens), release both keys, and then type s for Save (document is saved).
But it is not only menu items that can be accessed from the keyboard. There are also some frequently used icons in the toolbox which can be activated by using a hotkey. To this end, hold down the Control (CTRL) key and
type the respective letter.
Manual
4
Keyboard
4.9.0
4.9

CadnaA Menues
Manual

Mouse Buttons
4.10
*
4.10 1
Mouse Buttons
"Click" means to press and release a mouse button once.

"Double-click" means to rapidly press and release the LEFT mouse
button twice.
To select an option, execute a command, select an object, or activate an

object icon, place the mouse pointer on that option, icon, command, or, in
the graphic representation, on the border or the centreline of an object or
line object and click the mouse button.
Click with Left Mouse

Button
Unless you are instructed otherwise, mouse actions always refer to the left
button. If you are left-handed, or the mouse was configured differently, use
the appropriate button instead.
CadnaA features dialogs with lists where you can highlight and select se-
Multiple Selections
veral rows at the same time.

Click the desired row using the LEFT mouse button. Clicking a different
row deselects the one selected before.
Selecting one row:
Click the first row using the left mouse button, press and hold down SHIFT
while clicking the last row to be selected. All rows lying in between are
highlighted and selected as well.
Selecting several consecutive rows:
Press and hold down the CTRL key while clicking the desired rows.
Selecting several rows in

an arbitrary sequence:
Double-clicking an existing object or a data record in a table opens the

pertinent Edit Object dialog where you can enter the relevant parameters.
Double-click with Left

Mouse Button
Clicking with the right mouse button means to rapidly press and release
the right mouse button. Depending on which mode you are working in,
using the right mouse button has two different effects.
Click with Right Mouse

Button
Manual
4.10

Mouse Buttons
When using the mouse to insert an object in the CadnaA main window, clicking with the right mouse button
- terminates the insertion mode for the object presently entered and
- again with a subsequent click with the Right mouse key on the
object the edit dialog opens.
Edit mode
Wheelmouse
In the edit mode when the right mouse button is used to click on an
existing object or a data record in a table, a context menu appears (for
more information see online help keyword: context menu).
If you are owner of a wheel mouse (a mouse with two keys and a wheel in
the middle of them) you may use the wheel to zoom in and out of your
graphic display very quickly.
Manual
4.11 1

Control Elements
4.11
Control Elements
Option Button
4.11.0
Option buttons are control elements indicating whether a condition is true

or false. If true = yes, a black dot appears in the option button. The mouse
pointer is used for activation/deactivation. Within one set of options, only
one option can be active at one time.
Check Box
4.11.0
List Box/
Combobox
4.11.0
Check boxes are control elements indicating whether a condition is true or

false. When the check box is activated, an X or appears in the square, indicating that the condition is true (active). Otherwise, the condition is false
(inactive).
A list box contains a list of data of which only one value can apply. The
value selected will be displayed in the list box, and the selected option is
thus activated. In combobox, you can either select a value or enter a userdefined one.
To make the list drop down, click the arrow to the right of the box.
In some cases, like in the example above, you will find an option button
next to the list box. Click this first to activate the list box.
Manual
4.11

Control Elements
Manual

Save Settings
4.12
4.12 1
Save Settings
If Options|Save Settings is clicked in the current version, the following

settings will be saved for later sessions of CadnaA:
options for the exporting of DXF files;

printing options as well as header/footer entries for the printed reports;
showing or hiding of icon and status bar.
If you prefer non-standard settings for your work which may not be possible to save - like e. g. a different palette for the legend of color-level, several calculation configurations etc. - these settings can still be retained
for easy access by a prototyp file .
Manual
4.12

Save Settings
Manual

Help
4.13
4.13 1
Help
While you are working with CadnaA, Help is always just one click away.
Online Help System
To call Help
Press F1 (or click the Help icon on the icon bar), or
Click the Help cursor on the icon bar: The mouse pointer turns into
the Help pointer icon. Now click any menu item, or
On any dialog box, click the command button Help.
1.
In the help menu, select the Search command (or click the Search
register in the online help). CadnaA opens the Search dialog box.
2.
Enter the first letter of the topic to be found. During the entry, new
index items are displayed in the list box.
3.
Double-click that index item which corresponds to the desired topic

(or select the index item and press the ENTER key). The online help
displays further topics, if any, referring to this index item.
Users who are not yet familiar with Help, please refer to the Windows manual for further information, or in CadnaA, select the Use Help option on
the HELP menu.
The Help texts may not yet be up to date! We trust in your kind
understanding - CadnaA is subject to constant progress.
Manual
Finding a Topic in the

Online Help System
4.13

Help
Manual

Quick start
4.14
Quick start
To get familiar with the main basic function of CadnaA, we recommend

you work with the examples offered in this chapter. By doing so you will
insert your first objects by mouse, change their data and dimensions in the
graphic presentation, execute calculations and create noise maps among
other things.
Of course you have more possibilities to insert objects in CadnaA than
only by mouse, like
digitizing from a plan with a usual digitizer with MS Windows interface

input of the object coordinates via keyboard
importing digital data using different formats e.g. for graphic files like
DXF, different GIS formats like AtlasGis, ArcView, Sicad, Windput
DGM and of course each CadnaA-file. You may also import data via
ODBC-database interfaces like MS-Access, MS-Excel, FoxPro etc. If
necessary ask for the actual interfaces.
Particularly for big projects these input possibilities minimize the expenditure considerably.
You will find the example files on your CD-Rom in the directory
MANUAL|SAMPLES|04_Quickstart. For comfortable working,
copy them onto your hard disc.
Now start CadnaA by double-clicking the program icon on your

desktop or by clicking the corresponding start menu buttom|program|cadnaa if necessary. The CadnaA main window opens.
Manual
4.14 1
4.14

Quick start
Manual

3D-Special-View
4.14.1 1
4.14.1 3D-Special-View
At first - test your computer to see if all components are installed correctly
and completely to work properly with CadnaA.
Therefore open the file Racingcourse.cna by double-clicking its name in
File|Open..
The open file Racingcours.cna
The file Racingcourse.cna contains some objects which are accessible in

CadnaA like roads, bridges, contour lines and points, embankments,
screens etc. We come back to it later. Now, see what performance your
computer has.
With the RIGHT Mouse key click once on the middle axis of the road
or on the auxiliary polygon which is drawn over the road axis. As
shown in the following picture a context menu opens with a function
Manual
Racingcourse.cna
4.14.1

3D-Special-View
refering to this object Road.
In the edit mode if an object is marked with a Right mouse click a context menu opens with a
different function suitable to the marked object.
Choose the function 3D (Special) by clicking the same-named command once.
Now it could be that you have to wait for some seconds till the 3D-special
window opens. How long it needs depends among other things on the dimension of the project file, on your RAM or on the quality of your graphic card. Your graphic card should have a 3D accelerator in any case.
Now you will find out exactly how it works.
Manual
4.14.1 3

3D-Special-View
You should not wait longer than about 3 seconds till your 3D-special window opens. If is takes longer then we recommend purchasing a new graphic card with a 3D accelerator. The newer cards will have it any way.
The file Racingcourse.cna with opened 3D-special window default placed in the upper left corner.
If necessary maximize the 3D-special window by clicking on the equivalent icon in the upper right corner. Then the window expands to the size of
your screen. You may also enlarge or reduce the window using the mouse.
Maximize
Press the RETURN-key - now you are driving through this szenario
with a speed of 100 km/h and a camera position 1 m above the road.
Is this not the case - you should arm your computer so that you can take
advantage of the CadnaAs powerful performance.
Incidentally - you do not need to wait until your trip stops. You may force
that by pressing the RETURN-key. From the stopped position you may now
Manual
Esc stops
4.14.1

3D-Special-View
go further by using the arrow keys from your numeric keyboard. With these keys you can navigate through the szenario independently.
Numeric keyboard:
- Key 8 and 2 ahead or back
- Key 4 and 6 left or right turn
- Key 9 and 3 upward or downward
- Key 5 back to the starting position
- Key 7 vertical upward
- Key 1 vertical downward
For more information see manual chapter 13.14 "3D-Special View".

With this view you are able to check the correctness of your project modelling and see all objects with acoustic relevance which are taken into account for a calculation.
In the 3D-Special view you may also double-click on an object to open the
edit dialog for this object and if necessary to change its data.
Try and change a parameter in the edit dialog in the 3D-Special view like
the following example:
Drive through the 3D-Special view - start with the RETURN-key and
stop pressing the ESC-key after passing the first bridge close to both
noise protection walls (barriers). If necessary use the arrow keys to
attain the right position.
As you may recognize the center of the left barrier seems to hang in
the air - there is no connection to the ground. Obviously this is an
error and has to be corrected.
Manual

3D-Special-View
4.14.1 5
For that double-click on the left barrier - the edit dialog of the barrier
should open.
The edit dialog Barrier - the barrier is activated as a floating screen with a z-extent of 3 m.
Inadvertently the barrier was defined as a floating screen. Correct

this by clicking on the same-named checkbox to deactivate this
option (no hook).
Manual
4.14.1

3D-Special-View
Afterwards confirm by clicking on the OK button. The edit dialog

closes.
Now, the noise protection wall stands correct on the ground.

Try another point of view:
4
3D-CENTER
If necessary activate the auxiliary polygon named 3D-CENTER

(its the doted gray line) by double-clicking it. In the edit dialog click
on the IDs checkbox. The ID must turn black. Close the Window
with OK.
With the mouse cursor point on the pink circle and press the RIGHT
mouse button and select 3D-Special from the context menu.
If you press return you will fligh around on the circle always with
the gaze on the bridge.
If you enter the expression 3D-CENTER in an auxiliary polygons

ID field you will always look in the direction of its first polygon
point without any matter on which object you have started the command 3D-Special View.
If you start the 3D-Special command on the road again while the 3DCENTER polygon is still activated you will then suddenly drive forward, backwards and sidewards on the road because your view is always
in direction of the bridge. Just try it.
Close Window
Close the 3D-Special window by clicking on the closing-icon and the

program by clicking File|Exit.
Hereby you have made your first excursion with CadnaA. We hope you
enjoyed it.
Do not be discouraged if your trip was not as exciting as it should have
been because your hardware was not fast enough - you may change that.
It would be best if you went on now with the next exercise.
Manual

Insert a Road
4.14.2 1
4.14.2 Insert a Road

Start CadnaA or - in case it is still open - click File|New.
Now you enter your first object on your own - a road.
For that point to the car icon in the toolbox and click.
After clicking you are in the Insert mode. The mouse pointer is dragging
the Car icon.
Position the mouse pointer on that point where your road is supposed
to begin and use the LEFT mouse button to click. A line suspended
from the mouse pointer like a rubber band then allows you to define a
road as you wish. For each change of direction, insert a new point by
pressing the LEFT mouse button again. After the last point has been
defined, the insertion is completed by pressing the Right mouse button.
The inserted points of the road define only the road course - the
acoustical subdivision occurs separately during calculation.
Manual
4.14.2

Insert a Road
An inserted marked in the Edit mode
An inserted graphic object is also inserted in the object table as a data

record automatically (menu Tables|Sources).
Manual

Insert a Road
4.14.2 3
If an object is inserted a hook appears on the corresponding table description (see the above picture).
When the road has been inserted correctly,
click the Edit Mode icon (or CTRL+E). This mode allows you to edit
any inserted object.
In the Edit mode, double-click the polygon line or the centreline of

the inserted road. The edit dialog appears.
In the Edit mode if you make a double click on an object in CadnaA

the corresponding edit dialog of this object opens. It contains all data
for an object.
Another alternative is to click on the object with the RIGHT mouse
key once directly after entering the object (Insert mode) to open the
edit dialog. In that case, after closing the edit dialog, you are still in
the Insert mode. Therefore you do not need to change in the Edit
Manual
Edit Mode
4.14.2

Insert a Road
mode if you only want to edit object parameters.

In the edit dialog in some text boxes you may enter data by choosing
them in the list boxes, by others you enter them from the keyboard by
typing the desired value.
4
Road edit dialog according to the German standard RLS90
Card Index
The appearance of the edit dialogs and the possible entries are
adjusted to the chosen countrys respective standards. You may specify this in Calculation|Configuration|Tab Country. The description of the chosen standard appears in the dialog header. If necessary
complete the textboxes accordingly.
Click the Card Index icon to the right of the SCS/Dist. (m) text box.
Another dialog box opens, allowing you to select either the width of
the road by clicking the relevant standard cross section or to enter either the distance of the centerlines of the outer lanes or the total width
of road from curb to curb.
Manual

Insert a Road
4.14.2 5
The line source of a road is always the centerlines of the outer lanes.
In the menu Options|Appearance you can choose if e.g. an additional width for the curbs should be displayed or not.
Choose the value b2 by clicking on it. Now it is marked.

4
If the desired value is not visible use the scroll bar or the arrow keys on
your keyboard. While using the arrow keys (UP, DOWN) of your keyboard
to select an SCS value, holding the DOWN key or UP key depressed will
cause the display to show the eligible road cross sections continuously as
in a movie.
Confirm your choice with OK.
The dialog Cross Section closes and the chosen value is entered in the edit
dialog of the road. Alternatively you may also enter an arbitrary value in
the SCS/Dist. (m) text box of the edit dialog Road.
To get training just enter all data as showed in the edit dialog. You
may enter the emission values Lm,E either directly or by activating
the Counts values of the MDTD (mean daily traffic density).
Please watch how the emission values are continuously adapted as

individual parameters are modified. This edit dialog is a highly con-
Manual
4.14.2

Insert a Road
densed version of the national guideline for the calculation of traffic

noise.
L01.cna
Having entered all data, click OK to close this dialog box.
Road after entering a distance
CadnaA contains additional objects, with the object road you can use:
Bridge (see chapter 9.6) and

Barrier (see chapter 9.5) for a noise protection wall on roads or railways or
the Floating Screen (see chapter 9.5.1) as noise protection wall on a
bridge and
the Mound/Embankment (see chapter 9.7).
You will find further information in the online help or in the manual see
chapter 9.6.1 Entering a Bridge.
Also pay attention to the mentioned objects in the file Racingcourse.cna in
the 3D-special view.
Manual

Insert a Road
4.14.2 7
Model of a bridge in CadnaA in Options|3D-View without hidden edges
Manual
4.14.2

Insert a Road
Manual

4.14.3 1
4.14.3 Receiver Point Calculation

After you have inserted a road insert an receiver point at a distance of
about 20 m.
L02.cna
Different from the receiver points in a grid for the individual receiver
points you may save all interim results from a calculation in a file.
To define a certain distance you may use a polygon and give it the desired
length.
Therefore draw a vertical line (a line with only two points) from the
middle axis of the road using the Auxiliary polygon.
Change to the Edit mode and click on the Auxiliary polygon with
the RIGHT mouse key.
From the opening context menu choose Set Length and enter the
value 20. Close the dialog by confirming with OK.
At the end of the line now insert the receiver point. Therefore at first
click on the corresponding icon in the toolbox and then on the end of
the Auxiliary polygon.
Manual
Auxiliary polygon
Edit Mode
Receiver point
4.14.3

Subsequently click with the RIGHT mouse key on the border of the
receiver point - the edit dialog opens.
Enter a Name and a Standard Level. Therefore activate the samenamed option.
If you have entered a Standard Level then, after a calculation, you

will see at once whether the level has been exceeded or not. In case
the level has been exceeded in the graphics view the receiver point
changes its color to red. The excess value will be indicated in the
corresponding field.
You also have the possibility to select standard levels from a list
which are pre-defined by the user in the menu Options|Land Use
(e.g. different types of land use, like residential area, industry area,
spa or health resort etc.) Furthermore you may determine if the standard or maximum level regards only, e.g., road or railway traffic, or
industry, or if it concerns all noise types together.
You reach the coordinates of the receiver point after clicking on the
Geometry button.
Point Geometry dialog
Manual

4.14.3 3
For all objects you may determine if the height refers to
relative to the height ground

absolute
roof
the object is situated e.g. 2 m above another object in whose layout it is
located (e.g. a ventilator on a building).
Now start the calculation via the Calculator icon on the icon bar
Calculator
Afterwards open the edit dialog for the receiver point by double-clicking its contour. In the dialog you will see the results and eventually
an exceeded value.
Edit mode
If the noise emission of a source is entered spectrally then the sound

pressure level at the receiver point is also calculated, evaluated and
indicated spectrally.
The sound pressure level of a receiver point caused by an individual

source is called Partial level.
The Partial level button in the dialog of the receiver point shows all
sound levels from all sources at the concerned receiver point. The list
of Partial Levels in the menu Tables|Partial Level also shows all
Manual
4.14.3

sound levels from all sources but for each reciever point. The list of
partial levels results, e.g., in an efficient ranking of noise protection
measures.
Manual

Insert a Barrier
4.14.4 1
4.14.4 Insert a Barrier

After inserting a road and an receiver point you should now do something
against the noise from the road. Build a noise protection wall. Therefore
with the RIGHT mouse key click once on the middle axis of the road.
Remember, for that you have to be in the Edit mode. The context
menu opens. Click on the Paralell Object command. The samenamed dialog opens.
In the Edit mode one click with the RIGHT mouse key on an object
opens a context menu with different functions suitable to the marked
object.
Manual
L03.cna
Edit Mode
4.14.4

Insert a Barrier
With a click select Barrier from the list. To open the list click on the
arrow on the right hand side of the Object box.
Left or Right of the object refer to the viewing direction from the
starting to the end point. The distance screen - road axis and height
can be entered.
Enter the data as above and confirm with OK. The dialog closes and
you can see the result on the screen.
A road section with a parallel screen
Manual

Insert a Barrier
4.14.4 3
With the Zoom icons + or - from the toolbox you can easily modify the
scale of the representation on the screen.
Zoom
Select an option by clicking the respective icon and use the left
mouse button to click the position which is supposed to remain
unchanged while the scale is modified. The scale changes by a factor
of 2 with each click. When you use the right mouse button, the scale
changes in the opposite direction.
You may also blow up an arbitrary detail of your representation on

the screen by clicking the Zoom + icon and pulling a rectangle over
the area in question.
This is usually done by pressing the left mouse button with the mouse
pointer positioned on the first corner of the area and sliding the
mouse to the opposite corner with the mouse button held down. Use
the right mouse button to undo these steps.
Enlarged detail
After clicking the tool zomm limits the whole limits will be shown in your
CadnaA window. By pressing the SHIFT-key simultaneously the scale will
be adapted so that you see all objects in the CadnaA window but not obligatorily the complete limits. In this way you can navigate very quickly through your object.
Just try it.
Afterwards switch to the Edit mode and double-click the screen. The
object edit dialog opens.
Manual
Zoom
Edit Mode
4.14.4

Insert a Barrier
Screen edit dialog

Card Intex
You may enter either the reflection loss in decibels or the absorption
coefficient separately for each side. Again, left and right refer to the
viewing direction from the starting point to the end point. Pre-set
values for different surfaces are available via the Card Index icon.
You may also enter the name of an existing frequency spectrum in the
project database.
For more information see online help, keyword: Libraries.
The co-ordinates are always reached via the Geometry button. Double
click one set of coordinates - all edit features are now available. Even if
you want to change the height of each coordinate point you can do so. For
that you just activate the option absolute Height at every Point. If the absolute heights of some coordinates are unknown, just clear the edit field by
deleting the values (it must be empty). After closing the dialog CadnaA
now interpolates the value between the known heights. Modify any value
and, after closing the dialog by clicking OK, watch how the result is displayed on the screen
Manual

Insert a Barrier
4.14.4 5
Object geometry dialog
In CadnaA all tables are synchronized with graphics - e.g. if you are
editing a coordinate point in the dialog Geometry the corresponding
point in the graphics is flashing simultaneously. In this way you
always know where you are.
If necessary close the Geometry dialog and move the edit dialog so
that you can see the polygon points of the screen after opening the
dialog. Watch these while you scroll through the coordinate table by
using the arrow keys. Each point flasches as soon as the data record is
marked.
Manual
4.14.4

Insert a Barrier
The flashing polygon point and the marked data record
You may, of course, also edit the barrier graphically:
Select the barrier, then move or delete any polygon point with the
mouse button held down, or insert a new polygon point (press the
CTRL key and click the desired new point) until you get the desired
course..
Deleting a polygon
point:
Press CTRL+SHIFT key (a minus icon is dragged onto the mouse pointer)
and click on the desired point.
Inserting a polygon
point:
Press CTRL key (a plus icon is dragged on the mouse pointer) and click on
the desired point.
For more information see either online help, keyword: Polygon Point or
manual Chapter 5.4 "Editing graphic Objects"
Manual

Insert a Barrier
4.14.4 7
To insert a barrier in an arbitrary location, first click the Screen icon, then
click the desired points of the screen polygon line.
Update the calculation with a click on the Calculator icon in the icon bar.
If you followed the example your standard level should not be exceeded
anymore and the colour of your receiver point should be black again.
By default CadnaA always calculates the day- and night-time levels simultaneously and displays the results for the day-time in the graphic presentation. If you switch to the night-levels by clicking on the
corresponding icon in the icon bar or vice-versa, the colour of the noise
map or the colour of the receiver point changes normally because e.g. you
may have defined a different pre-set standard level for the night-time.
Try it - switch to the night-time presentation by clicking on the corresponding icon.

As you may see, the receiver point discoloured to red again and
shows that the pre-set standard level has been exceeded for the nighttime.
In menu Calculation|Protocol turn on the protocol by activating the

corresponding checkbox. In that case all interim results will be recorded if you execute the calculation again.
Manual
4
Day- and Nighttime Levels
4.14.4

Insert a Barrier
Afterwards look at the protocol by clicking on Calculation|Protocol|Print|Preview.
For more information see online help, keyword: Protocol.
)
4
Try also again the 3D-special view as described in the first chapter.
Use the road to execute the function.
Right mouse click on the middle axis of the road and

choose 3D-special view from the context menu.
Manual

Insert a Building
4.14.5 1
4.14.5 Insert a Building

Buildings are inserted in the same manner as the objects mentioned before.
Click on the Building icon in the toolbox.

Click the corner points to have the building contour drawn. Contrary
to Road and Screen, buildings are closed polygon lines: When
you finish the insertion by pressing the right mouse button or the
RETURN key, the line is closed automatically by connecting the end
point to the starting point. As you are still in the Insert Building
mode, you may now insert further buildings.
Buildings may be shaped arbitrarily. To insert rectangular buildings, also

hold the SHIFT key down while sliding the mouse. After each click, you
may then continue the polygon at right angles only.
To generate a rectangular building, you should always start with one

of the longer sides and hold down the SHIFT key while inserting it.
As customary, insert the first, second and third point with the SHIFT
key held down by pointing to the respective positions and clicking.
Now position the mouse pointer, not on the fourth corner to be inserted, but on the first one already inserted while still holding the SHIFT
key down. The fourth point is thus inserted at the right position, and
you may close the polygon line to form a rectangle by pressing the
RIGHT mouse button.
Manual
4.14.5

Insert a Building
4
Four polygon points which have to be inserted for a
closed rectangle polygon. A right mouse click matches
the last point with the first one automatically.
Just try it.
Even if you insert nothing but right angles by constantly holding the
SHIFT key down, you will be able to generate any complex/complicated
ground plan for a building with as many projections, oriels, and courtyards
as you like.
ground plan for a building

with multiple edges
3D-View
(menu Options)
Having inserted the building, switch to the edit mode and doubleclick on the edge of the building. The Buildings edit dialog opens.
Manual

Insert a Building
4.14.5 3
The building edit dialog
Behind the button Geometry you will find the coordinates of your building. Here you may also enter the building height.
Click the Geometry button and enter the building Height e.g.
11,50 m. After you have entered all parameters of your first building,
close the dialog by clicking OK. The building should still be selected.
In CadnaA you can build houses and define them as sources by

drawing the plan ground, entering a building height and, in closing,
you just assign emission levels for the facades, caused by indoor levels with the possibility to assign a sound reduction loss. This is a particularly helpful tool for trade enterprises and industrial plants.
For more information see online help, keyword: Generate Building or
in manual chapter 9.3.4 "Generate a Building".
Moreover you have another object - the Cylinder. With this object
you can create tanks, cauldrons and other cylindrical buildings. You
just enter their radius and height. They also have a shielding and
reflecting effect.
For more information see online help, keyword: Cylinder or manual
chapter 9.4 "The Cylinder".
Manual
4.14.5

Insert a Building
Manual

Duplicate Objects
4.14.6 1
4.14.6 Duplicate Objects

Next you generate from one building a whole housing estate.
Open the file L04.cna.
Mark the building by clicking it in the Edit mode.
Point with the mouse pointer on the border of the building and press
the RIGHT mouse button. Again, the context menu appears. Now
select Duplicate.
The Building context menu
A dialog box opens where you may define the number of objects in the
vertical and horizontal direction and the spacings between them.
Manual
L04.cna
4
4.14.6

Duplicate Objects
)
L05.cna
Enter the parameter from the above dialog box and confirm with OK.
The selected object has been multiplied according to the numbers you entered. The parameters you entered for the first building - e.g. building
height 11,50 m - also apply to the other buildings. You are now able to
quickly realise your urban development ideas.
Just select any buildings and move or delete them (using the DEL key) as
you please.
Manual

Duplicate Objects
4.14.6 3
Instead of duplicating objects you can copy them separately. For this
you will find more information in the online help, keyword: Copy
Objects.
Delete a selected object by pressing the DEL key or selecting the Delete
option on the context menu.
In CadnaA you have the command Undo. With this feature you may undo
what has been deleted up to 32 times.
Manual
4.14.6

Duplicate Objects
Manual

Import Objects
4.14.7 1
4.14.7 Import Objects

Maybe you have noticed that the receiver point is missing in the file
L04.cna. After duplicating the buildings, we have saved this project in file
L05.cna. We now use this one for the following example. Please open the
file and proceed analogously if necessary.
Among other formats you can also import complete CadnaA files or only
parts of it or just one specific object type.
Now you will import only the receiver point from the file L03.cna into the
file L05.cna. Therefore
open the file L05.cna and the menu File|Import.
Choose the format type CadnaA and afterwards the filename

L03.cna and finally click on the Optionen button.
Activate the option as shown in the above figure and confirm with
OK. The reciever point will then be imported.
Manual
L05.cna
4.14.7

Import Objects
If you like, try the other formats as well. Use the example files for that.
The option dialog for the import changes depending on the file format you
choose.
Manual

Edit Objects
4.14.8 1
4.14.8 Edit Objects

To stretch or squeeze an object, or to scale it, the Edit mode must be activated. Depending on the object in question the edit mode will be activated
as Polygon Point Mode (for line sources, area sources, barriers, buildings)
or as Stretching Mode (level boxes and text boxes).
If the polygon mode is activated, switch to the stretching mode using the
TAB key and select the object by clicking its edge. Then position the
mouse pointer on one of the small black markers on the lines or corners
around the selected object, press down and hold the mouse button.
The mouse pointer turns into a two-headed arrow. The entire object is
stretched or squeezed by moving the mouse in the desired direction. The
object size can be chosen arbitrarily.
Dragging a corner marker will scale the object (i. e. both dimensions are
multiplied by the same factor).
If you wish to modify the size of an object in discrete steps and/or symmetrically, depress and hold the SHIFT key (symmetrical change) while dragging the marker, or the CTRL key (change in discrete steps) or both of
these keys (symmetrical change in discrete steps).
In the polygon point mode, the object may be resized by moving any of the
polygon points.
Just try it:
Mark a building by clicking and watch the edges. Press the TAB-key.
Keep pressing the mouse button and pull a marker. Press again the
TAB-key and pull once more a marker.
Manual
Edit mode
4.14.8

Edit Objects
By the way - in the menu Options|Appearance you may change

colors, line widths and type and filling of the objects. Also the
appearance of deactivated objects may be decided.
For more information see online help Change dimensions or manual Kapitel 5.4 "Editing graphic Objects"
4
Manual

Grid Calculation
4.14.9 1
4.14.9 Grid Calculation

To get a representation of a colored noise map with line or areas of equal
sound level you have to calculate a grid of receiver points.
Under the menu item Options|Limits, you may enter the x- and y-coordinates for the area to be represented graphically.
Limits dialog
When the grid calculation is started, CadnaA calculates the levels for each
receiver point in the relevant limits unless a calculation area was defined.
Thus, a calculation area is always smaller than the limits.
Please watch the x- and y-co-ordinates in the dialog Limits and click
on the button Calc. After starting this command, the Limits is changed so that all objects are within this area.
If you have started a calculation and some objects are outsite of the
limits CadnaA warns you and gives you the possibility to alter it.
To avoid calculation for a limits of 1 km with the 2.600 receiver points of

the default setting we restrict the grid calculation to the area where you
have inserted your objects.
Manual
4.14.9
L06.cna
Calculation area

Grid Calculation
Click on the Calculation Area icon. Then, in the usual Cadna way,
click the first corner of your calculation area and pull a borderline
around the area to be calculated by clicking each corner. The last corner need not be clicked, but you close this polygon by pressing the
Right mouse button.
CadnaA carries out a calculation for each receiver point within this area,
and displays the results either by lines or by areas of equal sound level.
The calculation area encloses the receiver points. Sound sources are taken
into account even if they lie outside the calculation area.
You may also define several calculation areas and have them calculated simultaneously. You even can exclude areas inside calculation
areas from the calculation. This is maybe useful if on the factory site
Manual

Grid Calculation
4.14.9 3
itself the sound levels do not interest you but the vicinity to the
neighborhood. That saves calculation time.
Choose Grid|Properties.
Here you may define the size and the height of the receiver grid.
4
Dialog Receiver Grid
The finer the grid, the more receiver points are defined, and the more time
is needed for the calculation.
A bisection of the receiver point spacing quadrupled the calculation

time.
Check how fast your computer is by first having it calculate the 20-m grid
in the default setting. Then you may calculate with a denser grid.
Close the dialog box by clicking OK, and trigger the calculation by
clicking the menu Grid|Calc grid.
Manual
4.14.9

Grid Calculation
In menu Option|Misellaneous you may define if you want to see the

progress of calculation by clicking the corresponding option.
The calculation may be aborted at any time by pressing the Stop button.
If you interruped the calculation in CadnaA you may continue at that
break point by pressing the SHIFT-key while you start the calculation
again.
On completion of the calculation, the graphic representation appears, showing either lines or areas of equal sound level, depending on the settings
Manual

Grid Calculation
4.14.9 5
you chose. As you move the mouse pointer across the calculated area, the
respective levels are displayed on the right side of the status bar.
You can select the settings for the layout of the noise map in the menu
Grid|Appearance.
4
Dialog Grid Appearence
Just try out some settings: Switch from Lines of equal sound level to
Areas of equal sound level by selecting the relevant option. Change
the Class Width (dB) from 1 to 5 for Areas of equal sound level,
select Progressive Colours, etc.
In CadnaA you can integrate the color-level-scale like a legend in the

graphic representation on the screen and for your prints.
The option Width of all ... allows you to provide the lines of equal
sound level with different line widths. You could have, e.g. all lines
of x5 dB (like 85 dB), or simply all lines, printed thicker. Change the
colours of the level classes by clicking the Colour button and
modifying the colours in the window which then opens, or by
modifying the level classes themselves (they can be edited).
Manual
4.14.9

Grid Calculation
Any change made on the Grid Appearance dialog will not become
effective until the dialog has been closed again.
Manual

4.14.10 1
4.14.10 dB-Level and Text Boxes

At any time you may also display the sound level at a certain point by inserting a Level-Box. That could be useful if you have defined lines of
equal sound levels for your presentation. But of course before you can indicate sound levels you must have calculated a receiver grid. If you have
not yet done that, open the file L06.cna again, if necessary, and calculate a
grid as described in the above chapter.
L06.cna
In menu Grid|Appearance activate the option lines of equal sound

levels. Confirm with OK.
Now, in the toolbox click on the Level-Box icon and then on the
desired point in your graphics - CadnaA indicates the sound level
value on this point in a box.
Level-Box
Before you go on inserting more Level-Boxes switch to the Edit

mode, click on the Level-Box contour and adopt the size and the layout of it by pulling on the black marker with the mouse. Try also pulling while pressing the SHIFT key.
Make a double-click on the border of the Level-Box - the edit dialog
opens - and change the font or the size of it, or just try some options.
Edit mode
CadnaA transfers the parameter of the last inserted object to the next
inserted one of the same type. So you should modify the objects after
inserting the first one and then insert all others - that saves a lot of
time.
Manual
4.14.10

Dialog Level box

Text Box
The same applies to the text box but you have to enter the text on your
own. Try for yourself.
However, you have to draw the text box first. Therefore you have
to click on that place where you want to have the upper left-hand corner of the text box, press the mouse button while you pull the mouse
to the lower right-hand corner and let the mouse button go.
Change to the edit mode and double-click the edge of the Text Box.
The edit Text Box dialog opens. Now you may enter your text. If
done, confirm by clicking OK.
All other inserted Text Boxes get the same outlook and size if you
just make one click - do not draw - on the desired position.
In CadnaA you may choose additional options for Level, Text and Symbol Boxes as follows:
Manual

Angle () -Inserting a value in d e g r e e s causes the box/frame to be

rotated accordingly about its centre with respect to the x-axis. You may
enter positive and negative values.
You may select the font and size for the labeling of objects.
Box with or without a frame - if the Frame option is activated, the rectangle will be framed and, at the same time, its area hides any objects
that may be lying underneath. If this option is deactivated, the rectangle has no frame and is transparent. Any object underneath shows
through.
Scale Dimensions - the dimensions of the box, the fonts or the symbol
will be scaled with the rest of the graphic representation on the screen.
Up to 33.000 characters may be entered in a Text Box.
Manual
4.14.10 3
Symbol
4.14.10

Manual

Generate Floors
4.14.11 1
4.14.11 Generate Floors

If you want to look at the receiver points more particular you may calculatate them in addition to the receiver grid.
Now you may determine the noise level on several floors of a building.
Therefore you have to place receiver points at the building facade - we assume a building height of 11,5 m.
Click on the function Options|Object Snap and enter a Snap

Radius of 8 pixel.
With that you ensure that receiver points or sources at building facades are not inadvertently placed inside the buildings.
Point sources, vertical area sources and receiver points which are
positioned closer to a facade of a building than the specified snap
radius will be assigned to this facade and will be placed in front of it
at a distance defined in the edit box Distance Points Facade.
With that function other objects like roads or railways etc. can also be
seamlessly joined.
Manual
L06.cna
4.14.11

Generate Floors
For more information see online help, keyword: Object Snap or

manual chapter 13.5 "Object Snap".
To close the dialog confirm with OK and activate the icon receiver
point from the toolbox. Position a receiver point on a building facade
by clicking.
Change in the Edit mode and double-click the contour of the receiver
point - the edit dialog opens.
Open the Geometry dialog by clicking on the same-named button

and enter a relative height of 2,20 m.
To close the dialog confirm with OK again and enter a name for the
receiver point in the box Name, e.g. Im1 and a Standard Level of 50
dB for day-time and 40 dB for the night-time. Close the dialog by clicking OK.
Dialog Receiver Point
Now generate the floors.
Therefore click with the RIGHT instead of with the LEFT mouse button on the existing receiver point Im1. The context menu opens
Manual

Generate Floors
4.14.11 3
again. Choose the option Generate Floors.
Enter the values shown in the dialog box Generate Floors.
Generate Floors dialog from the context menu
When the dialog box is left by clicking OK, CadnaA automatically

generates three further floors, starting from the first receiver point,
with a spacing of 2,80 m each. It also appends the respective floor
number to the existing receiver point name, and enters the relevant
height.
You may check this by selecting the receiver points table on the
Tables menu or just by clicking the key: i.
Close the table and select the 3D-View on the Options menu. It
allows you to have receiver points represented graphically according
Manual
L07.cna
4.14.11

Generate Floors
to floors. When selecting this option, the horizontal projection is the

default setting.
)
4
On the list box of the 3-D View dialog, select Isometric, and blow up
the relevant detail using the magnifier tool. Also try out other types
of representation.
You may also copy this representation to the clipboard and paste it in
another Windows application.
The views Isometric, Cavalier and Cabinet are projections at preset angles - just check them out.
Under the general Parallel Projection you may specify arbitrary
angles under which you can look at the model. In this view you are
able to turn your project by means of the arrow keys on the numeric
keyboard. With the keys 9 and 3 you can modify angle Theta, the
keys 4 and 6 will modify angle Phi.
In 3D-view you can also reach the edit dialog by double-clicking on
the relevant object. To do this you have to be in the edit mode (click
on arrow icon).
Manual

Generate Floors
Also try the 3D-special view again from the context menu of the
road. (If necessary see chapter 13.14)
Should the receiver points be too big either in the normal presentation or in one of the 3D views, you may change that.
Select Options|Appearance|receiver point and change the Symbol
Size from (mm) to (m). The symbol size is then adapted to the scale.
For more information see online help, keyword: Options Appearance.
If you have generated the floors, execute a new calculation. Therefore
if necessary, close all dialogs and click on the Calculator icon in the
icon bar.
Again, the noise levels calculated for each floor are listed on the menu Tables|Receiver points.
The menu Tables|Partial Level shows a total list of all partial levels
at the receiver points of all sources. (In this example it is only a road).
Table of Partial Level from the menu Table
But of course you may also create user-defined result tables. For that see
chapter 15.3.
Manual
4.14.11 5
4.14.11

Generate Floors
Manual

4.14.12 1
4.14.12 Copy to the clipboard

All lists available on the Tables menu may be copied to the Windows clipboard by clicking the Copy button. They may also be used in a different
Windows application (such as WORD, EXCEL etc.) e.g. for the preparation of reports. (Direct printout from CadnaA is not implemented in the
demo version.)
In CadnaA you may also duplicate just a single data record from the
table.
But copying to the clipboard by just one click and pasting in another Windows application is also possible forSection
the entire limits of the graphics (make sure no object is selcted),
a section of the graphics - use the Section icon on the toolbox to draw
a box, switch to the edit mode and select the box - or
an individual object: Just select the desired object.
Manual
4.14.12

Manual

Summary
4.14.13 1
4.14.13 Summary
Now you know how CadnaA works. You may apply it to all other objects:
1.
Click on the desired icon in the toolbox.
2.
Place the object accordingly on the screen using the LEFT mouse button.
3.
The RIGHT mouse button finished the input.
4.
You may also now click once with the Right mouse key or, as an
alternative, switch into the Edit mode and double-click the object.
In both cases the edit dialog opens but in the first case you remain in
the insertion mode and after closing the edit dialog you may insert
further objects of the same type without clicking the object icon
again.
Our little introduction for CadnaA is nearly finished. It would be good if

you could just play a little bit with the other sources and object types from
the toolbox, like point source, line source, area source, parking places and
contour lines.
On the status line appears the name of the icon if you keep pressing
the LEFT mouse button while you point at the icon.
In CadnaA you may calculate either with A-weighted-levels or in

frequency bands. Even a mixture is possible - if only for a few
sources the emission is a known frequency, the contribution to the
immission level will be defined in frequency bands.
Also try out the options on the context menu for the various inserted object
types.
1.
For this purpose, in the Edit Mode use the RIGHT mouse button
instead of the LEFT one to select the existing object.
2.
Choose then by clicking with the LEFT mouse button the desired
option.
Manual
4.14.13

Summary
Further information for the single features you will find in the online help
under their items or in the manual.
Manual
4.15 1

Create Groups
4.15
Create Groups
In the menu Tables|Groups you may find an extremely versatile and powerful tool. A named group is a desired choice of objects. Their membership is defined by characters contained in their ID-box in the edit dialog
box.
4
With this feature you may carry out varying actions of these groups, e.g.:
deleting groups of objects

converting to another object like line sources in roads or railways or
the other way round
coordinate transformations
activate or deactivate objects for calculation
representations of results etc.
The earlier mentioned Partial Levels e.g. - you may also define them for
groups of sound sources called Partial Sum Levels.
Open the file L07.cna again and deactivate the grid appearance
(Grid|Appearance|No Grid) if necessary.
Insert some extra sources - e.g. another Road and two Point
Sources.
Change into the Edit Mode and open the corresponding edit dialog by
double-click on the object.
Enter at least a Name for the object and a Sound Power Level
Enter q for the Point Source in the box ID.
In CadnaA you may easily enter and change text boxes by editing
them in the object tables. With the command Change Column you
may change several columns for different objects with a single command simultaneously.
Manual
L07.cna
4.15
L08.cna

Create Groups
The source Road already has characters in the ID-box D_1. You will find
a complete example in file L08.cna.
If you are finished with the editing,
Calculator
start calculation again with the icon Calculator on the icon bar.
choose Tables|Group on the menu.

The Group list opens containing only the heading of the group list,
showing the column with the names of receiver points. It isnt a defined group yet.
Now insert a group.
Just click on the INS-key to insert new rows, for each group one row.
Double-click the new row. The Group edit dialog opens.
Enter in the box Name industry and in Expression q*.

The group is now defined. All objects containing q as the first character in the box ID are members of this group. The star (*) is a joker for
further characters.
In the dialog Group click on the button Part.Level. You get a list
with each source belonging to the group Industry with their partial
levels caused on each receiver point during day- and night-time.
Manual

Create Groups
4.15 3
Close this list and also the dialog Group by clicking OK.
Now you get the list of Partial Sum levels. Those are the combined levels
caused by the group Industry at each receiver point.
Create another group for roads. If you followed this example the characters D_1 or D* should be entered in the box Expression.
With this list you may determine the priority for noise protection measures. For more information see online help keyword Groups
If you click the botton Copy you may insert this list for your report in your
word processing system by clicking the corresponding command, e.g.,
CTRL+V.
Manual
4.15

Create Groups
Also test again the 3D-special view - remember:
In Edit mode - with RIGHT mouse, click e.g. on the road axis
and choose the function from the context menu.
If the groups have already offered an extremly flexible logic to switch between different project versions, the inclusion of this group structure in the
management of integrated variants (Tables|Variant) results to increased
efficiency.
For more information see online help, keyword: Variant or manual chapter 18.3 "Variants".
With it our exercises are finished and we hope we could ease your lead-in.
The training to operate CadnaA is minimal and you managed it already.
Although CadnaA is intended to be an easy-to-use program it nevertheless
is a precise and professional tool for noise abatement.
Whether you only need to give a brief acoustical expert opinion now and
then, or intend to check the noise propagation caused by your plant, or to
prepare colored noise maps for entire cities - you are already familiar with
many of the necessary steps of operation.
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 5 Basics
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 5 Basics
Manual
Chapter 5 Basics
Contents
5.1 1
Chapter 5 Basics
5.1 Contents
5.2
Files
5.3
Insert Objects
5.3.1
Inserting Objects Using the Mouse
5.4
Editing graphic Objects
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
Polygon Point Mode

Streching Mode
Change Dimensions
Moving Objects
Copying Objects
Inserting from the Clipboard
Deleting Objects
5.5
Editing Objects
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
Edit Object Dialog

Inserting Objects from the Keyboard
The Dialog Boxes Name, ID, INFO
Decimals in Edit Boxes
5.6
Search for Objects
Manual
5.1
Chapter 5 Basics
Contents
5.7
Context Menu
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
5.7.7
5.7.8
5.7.9
5.7.10
5.7.11
5.7.12
5.7.13
5.7.14
5.7.15
5.7.16
5.7.17
5.7.1
5.7.2
Duplicating Objects
Modify Objects
Generate Station
Generate Label
Force Rectangle
Force Right Angles
Breake Lines
Connect Lines
Break Areas
Specify Length
Simplify Geometry
Spline
Parallel Object
Convert to
Break into pieces
Activation
Modify Attribute
Swap Name/ID
Delete Duplicates
Manual
5.2 1
Chapter 5 Basics
Files
5.2
Files
In CadnaA all files have the extension CNA, which need not be entered
when saving a file, but is appended to the file name automatically. The import feature (see there) allows you to also insert your own Cadna-CNA
files.
Activating the New command on the File menu opens a new, "blank" file
where you can enter objects. If a file has already been opened and edited,
but the modifications have not yet been saved, a safety check dialog appears which allows you to save the active file.
File|New
5.2
Save
5.2
Save As
5.2
Exit
5.2
see also chapter 18.8 Prototype File
When this command on the FILE menu is clicked, the currently active file
is saved (including any modifications) under its existing name. If the file
in question is new and has not been saved before, the "Save As" dialog
opens.
With the File|Save As command, the file in process can be assigned a
name and then be saved under that name. If the new file name already exists, a safety check dialog appears allowing you to cancel the Save procedure.
Clicking Yes will overwrite the existing file. Clicking No cancels the Save
procedure in which case the active file must be saved under a different
name that does not yet exist.
Select the FILE|Exit command to exit CadnaA. If the active file has been
edited but not yet been saved, a dialog appears allowing you to save this
file prior to exiting the program.
Manual
5.2
Lock Files
Chapter 5 Basics
Files
5.2
An opened file in CadnaA can be locked. In this case you cannot saving it
with the same name. To do this you just have to select Lock in the menu
File.
Each time you intend to save this file with the same name, a dialog with
refering to the locking of the file will open. In this case you can reverse the
lock by clicking Yes, or cancel by clicking No. A locked file can only be
saved with a different name.
If you have activated Auto-Save in the menu File|Auto-Save the dialog

would open if you have entered the name of the locked file as an autosave-file. Enter a different file name to auto-save your file, if necessary.
Manual
5.3 1
Chapter 5 Basics
Insert Objects
5.3
Insert Objects
All graphical elements available on the CADNA A main window are called
objects. They can be inserted in different ways:
using the mouse (see Chapter 5.3.1)

from the keyboard (see Chapter 5.5.2
via tables (see Chapter 15.2)
by digitizing (see Chapter 7.2)
by importing (see Chapter 6.2) and
single objects also via the Windows clipboard (see Chapter 5.4.6).
When inserting objects, you can always use mouse, keyboard, and digitizer (if configured) simultaneously. You do not need to switch between those
modi.
To position an object, first activate the desired object icon on the toolbox
either by clicking it with the mouse or by pressing the respective hotkey
(see Chapter 4.8). Under the insertion mode, the icon just clicked then
sticks to the mouse cursor.
Now you can insert the object selected in the CadnaA main window either
by pressing the mouse button and/or pulling the mouse or via keyboard
when entering the coordinates. At the same time, this will generate a data
record on the pertinent object table (Tables menu).
An insertion procedure is terminated by either
pressing the RIGHT mouse button, or

pressing RETURN, or
changing to a different object type by clicking the respective icon on
the toolbox or by pressing the pertinent hotkey, or
changing to the Edit mode by clicking the respective icon or pressing
CTRL+E.
Manual
Terminate
Insertion
5.3
5.3
Chapter 5 Basics
Insert Objects
Manual
5.3.1 1
Chapter 5.3 Insert Objects

5.3.1
There are 4 different ways of positioning or inserting objects using the

mouse, depending on which object or toolbox icon was selected. (see
Chapter 4.8).
(e. g. point source, receiver point, level box)
Position the object at the desired location on the CadnaA main window by
clicking with the left mouse button. Each click will insert one object in the
window, and generate the pertinent data record on the respective object table.
(e. g. line sources, roads, railways, barriers, buildings, areas)
To insert lines or polygon lines and polygons, activate the respective icon,
then point to the desired starting point of the line or the desired first corner
of the polygon, and click. By this click, the first polygon point has been inserted. The mouse pointer now pulls a "rubber band" line from that point
to any location the mouse is moved to. Pressing the mouse button again
defines the second polygon point. Press the left mouse button at every
point where the polygon line changes its direction. Each of these clicks
will insert a further polygon point which can be edited or deleted afterwards.
Positioning Method 1:
Insertion of Points 5.3.1
Polygons and Lines 5.3.1
As soon as the line or the polygon has the desired length or dimensions,
terminate the insertion procedure. In the case of polygons, the last point inserted is then connected to the starting point to give a closed polygon line.
Open or closed polygons may have arbitrary shapes. If you want to force a
right angle press the SHIFT key while moving the mouse. In this case you
can only move rectangularly after a click.
If you want to produce a closed rectangular polygon with a mouse

you should always start with the longer side and press the SHIFT key
during input.
Manual
Right Angle
5.3.1

With SHIFT key pressed down enter the first, second , third and if necessary further points in the usual manner by clicking the position
with the mouse cursor.
However do not click the last point on the final edge-point but on the
already entered first point. Therefore is the last point entered on the
right position and you may close the open polygon by clicking with
the RIGHT mouse button.
5
To produce rectangular layouts afterwards see chapter 5.7.5 Force Rectangle and chapter 5.7.6 Force Right Angles.
Text Boxe
and Zoom +
5.3.1
After activation of the respective icon, move the mouse pointer to that location where one corner of the box or rectangle is to be positioned. Press
the left mouse button and hold it depressed while moving the mouse in the
direction of the desired opposite corner. Release the mouse button when
the desired location has been reached.
Cylinder
The cylinder is defined by clicking two points. The first point defines the
radius centre, the second the radius length.
Manual
5.4 1
Chapter 5 Basics
5.4
In the edit mode, you modify existing objects in the graphic representation
by editing their characteristic parameters, thus defining their properties,
positions, and shapes.
To this end, click the Edit Mode icon on the toolbox, or press CTRL+E.
Then select the object by clicking it with the mouse. The object is then
marked. All further commands will apply to the selected object only.
In the menu Options|Miscellaneous you may choose the size of the

marker displayed by a marked object by selecting the pertinent value.
For all line-like objects entered as a series of points and objects limited by
lines, such as area sources, line sources, buildings, and barriers, you can
choose between two different edit modes: stretching mode (see Chapter
5.4.2) and polygon point mode (see Chapter 5.4.1). Clicking the Edit
Mode icon automatically activates the polygon point mode. Press the TAB
key to switch between the two modes under the edit mode.
To select an object, click its border, or, in the case of roads and railways,
its centreline, using the LEFT or RIGHT mouse button. Clicking with the
RIGHT mouse button at the same time opens a context menu offering you
further commands applicable to this object (see Chapter 5.7).
Double-clicking with the LEFT mouse button opens the pertinent object
dialog (see Chapter 5.5.1).
Manual
Selecting
an object
5.4
5.4
Chapter 5 Basics
Manual
Chapter 5.4 Editing graphic Objects

Polygon Point Mode
5.4.1
5.4.1 1
Polygon Point Mode
5
selected polygon line
selected polygon
In the insertion mode (see Chapter 5.3) each click with the mouse defines a
polygon point.
In the polygon point mode, these polygon points bear markers. You can
move, insert, delete, or allocate a height to individual polygon points.
To move a polygon point, click it, and, with the mouse button held down
(the mouse pointer turns into a black arrow), drag it to the desired location.
Manual
Moving a
Polygon Point
5.4.1
5.4.1
Adding or Deleting a
Polygon Point
5.4.1

Polygon Point Mode
To add a polygon point, select the object as described above. Now, if you
press CTRL, the mouse pointer turns into a black arrow carrying along a
box with a plus sign in it. If you click the border of the object using this arrow, a new polygon point will be added.
To delete a polygon point, press both CTRL and SHIFT at the same time.
Again, a black arrow appears, this time carrying along a box with a minus
sign. Any polygon point now clicked will be deleted.
Manual

Polygon Point Mode
5.4.1 3
Manual
5.4.1

Polygon Point Mode
Manual

Streching Mode
5.4.2
5.4.2 1
Streching Mode
Selected polygon under the stretching mode. The object is

marked by an invisible rectangle. By dragging the markers of this rectangle with the mouse button held down, the
size of the object as a whole is modified.
The stretching mode (accessed via the TAB key) does not allow you to insert, delete, or move polygon points, but you can modify the size of the entire object by stretching or squeezing it (see Change Dimensions further
below in this chapter).
Manual
5.4.2

Streching Mode
Manual

Change Dimensions
5.4.3
5.4.3 1
Change Dimensions
If the polygon point mode (see above) is activated, switch to the stretching
mode by pressing TAB, and select the object by clicking its border.
Click one of the markers, and hold the mouse button

down in order to enlarge or reduce the object.
Then position the mouse pointer on one of the black markers at the sides or
corners of the rectangle around the selected object, and hold the mouse
button down. The mouse pointer turns into a two-headed arrow. Now you
can enlarge or reduce the entire object by moving the mouse in the appropriate direction.
Dragging the corner markers enlarges or reduces the object while maintaining its proportions.
You can also adapt the size of an object by pressing SHIFT and/or CTRL.
SHIFT
CTRL
SHIFT+CTRL
Manual
symmetrical change of dimensions

change of dimensions in discrete steps
symmetrical change of dimensions in discrete steps
5.4.3

Change Dimensions
Manual

Moving Objects
5.4.4
5.4.4 1
Moving Objects
To move a selected object, position the mouse pointer on the border, not on
a polygon point, of the object, or, in the case of roads and railways, on the
centreline. Then hold down the mouse button and move the object to the
desired location. The object is moved, and the co-ordinates are updated in
the pertinent object list.
To move an object horizontally or vertically along the x or y axes, press
SHIFT while you move it.
Manual
5.4.4

Moving Objects
Manual

Copying Objects
5.4.5
5.4.5 1
Copying Objects
In CadnaA, you can copy objects within the graphics and into the Windows clipboard. Copying within the graphics refers to a selected object,
whereas to the clipboard, you may not only copy individual objects, but
also the entire graphics or limits, or Section thereof, all at once.
Select the object to be copied. Then hold the mouse button down while
moving the object to the location where you wish to position the copy. Before releasing the mouse button, press CTRL. This generates a copy of the
selected object at the desired location.
At the same time, a further data record, with the transformed coordinates,
but otherwise unchanged data of the copied object, is inserted in the pertinent object list.
To generate a copy of an object and at the same time rotate it by 90 about
the vertical or horizontal axis, press and hold the CTRL+SHIFT keys during copying. This generates an object of the same size and parameters as
the existing object, with its centre at the same x or y coordinate as the copied object.
Manual
Copying within
the Graphics
5.4.5
5.4.5

Copying Objects
To copy objects to the clipboard, you can either

Copying to the
Clipboard
5.4.5
click the pertinent icon on the icon bar, or

select the Edit|Copy command, or
press CTRL+C.
If objects have been copied to the Windows clipboard, you can paste them
in a different Windows application for further editing by selecting the Edit|Paste command, or, alternatively, by pressing CTRL+V.
Select the desired object and execute one of the Copy commands.
Copying a
single Object
5.4.5
Copying
Sections
5.4.5
Use the Section icon (rectangle with broken lines) on the toolbox to define
a Section.
To this end, position the mouse pointer on the upper-left corner of the desired Section. Then, with the mouse button held down, drag the mouse to
the lower-right corner of the desired Section where you release the mouse
button. The area is marked by a rectangle.
Now switch to the Edit mode, select the rectangle and press, e. g.,
CTRL+C. The selected Section is thus copied to tSectionhe clipboard.
The rectangle marking the Section is neither copied nor printed, but only
the objects lying within the Section.
Copying Limits
5.4.5
To copy the entire graphics with the defined limits, execute one of the
Copy commands. During this procedure, none of the objects must be selected.
Manual

5.4.6
5.4.6 1
You may insert the contents of the Windows clipboard with Ctrl+V or with
the function from the menu Edit|Paste into the CadnaA graphics provided
it is a meta file.
The inserted clipboard contents will then be a Symbol object in CadnaA
(see Chapter 13.11.3) and also gets therefore its object options.
With it you are able to insert directly in your CadnaA graphics cross-section figures, 3D-special views or CadnaA tables quickly and easyly.
The inserted meta file from the clipboard may not be bigger then 1024 pixel. If that were so a frame with a cross inside appears. In that case you have
to use the CadnaA option BMP (see Chapter 14.2).
Manual
5.4.6

Manual
5.4.7 1

Deleting Objects
5.4.7
Deleting Objects
Press DEL to delete a selected object. The object will thus be deleted from
the CADNA A main window and also from the object table. If another object of the same type exists, this will be automatically selected after deletion of the previous one so that you could delete this one as well by
pressing the DEL key once again.
5
This method is particularly convenient for the deletion of a small number

of objects. The Delete command from the context menu (see Chapter 5.7)
has the same effect. Using this command also deletes the selected object
only.
If you wish to delete a large number of and/or different objects at once,
you can follow another convenient and quick procedure: the context menu
command Modify Objects Action Delete. (see Chapter 5.7.2)
The Edit|Undo command or the hotkey CTRL+Z allows you to retrieve the
last 32 objects deleted. Just click the Undo (CTRL+Z) command as many
times as needed until the desired deleted object re-appears on your screen.
If you wish to retrieve a data record that was deleted from a row of a table,
first close the table before using the Undo command.
Objects that were deleted via the context menu using the command
Modify Objects|Action Delete, cannot be retrieved using the Undo
command.
Manual
Undo
5.4.7
5.4.7

Deleting Objects
Manual
Chapter 5 Basics
Editing Objects
5.5
Editing Objects
If an object is inserted graphically with its coordinates you must still enter
the necessary object data like, e.g., number of cars per day or hour on a
road, the speed, road surface or just the sound emission value for the
acoustical calculation. This is usualy done in the edit-dialog via the keyboard. But of cause you may also import this data from an external database via the ODBC interface (see Chapter 6.5).
To this end, to edit or to delete a object, first switch to the Edit Mode by
either clicking the pertinent icon or pressing the hotkey CTRL+E. Then in
the graphic representation, you can choose among three different methods
to open the edit dialog:
1.
Insertion Mode (see Chapter 5.3):
)
2.
5.5 1
with the RIGHT mouse button click once on the object either on
the border (e.g. area source, buildings etc.) or on the centreline
(e.g. of a road, railway etc.)
Edit Mode (STRG+E):
Double-click the borderline of the desired object (or the centreline, if the object is a road or railway), or
position the mouse pointer on the border of the object in question. Clicking with the RIGHT mouse button opens a context
menu. Use the LEFT mouse button to click Edit.
If an object has been selected, press RETURN
Editing Data Records in Tables see Chapter 15.2.3
Manual
5.5
Chapter 5 Basics
Editing Objects
Manual
Chapter 5.5 Editing Objects

Edit Object Dialog
5.5.1
5.5.1 1
Edit Object Dialog
An edit dialog of an object serves to enter all parameters characterising an

object.
Example of an Object Dialog
The desired values are entered in the boxes either from the keyboard or automatically by selecting the relevant options.
Depending on the object type selected, different boxes and options are
available. The individual boxes are accessed by pressing the TAB key or by
clicking.
Some boxes are equation boxes in which the equation will be calculated
promptly and the result displayed in the box Result.PWL for Day | Evening | Night.
Manual
5.5.1

Edit Object Dialog
Manual
5.5.2 1

Inserting Objects via Keyboard
5.5.2
First activate the desired object icon on the toolbox. You can now enter the
desired coordinates from the keyboard. As you enter the first number, the
dialog Input of Point opens.
Orthogonal Cartesian coordinates may be entered as x-and-y pairs, and polar coordinates as a pair of radius and angle. In the first case, which is the
default setting, the check box Polar is deactivated, in the latter it is activated.
The coordinates are entered either as absolute coordinates with respect to
the origin x/y = 0/0 (this being the default setting), or as relative coordinates with respect to the last point. In the first case, the check box is deactivated, in the latter it is activated.
When entering several points in a series, you can arbitrarily switch between the insertion modes using the mouse button, keyboard, and digitizer
on the one hand, and between orthogonal and polar, or absolute and relative coordinates on the other hand. The result of an entry can be seen upto-date at any time in the graphic representation.
Insertion of a building of 30 m x 10 m, where the left corner of the 30-m
facade is positioned at a specific location in the map and the front is inclined towards the x-axis by an angle of 40.
Manual
Example
5.5.2

Procedure:
Activate the Building icon by clicking the same on the toolbox or by

pressing the hotkey CTRL+h
Click the desired position of the building corner to be positioned

(using the mouse pointer in the graphical representation of the map
on the screen, or the digitizer magnifier on the paper map)
Enter the value 40, press TAB, enter the value 30, activate the check
boxes Relative and Polar, and confirm by pressing RETURN (the first
side of the building is drawn)
Enter the values 90 and 10 with the same settings and confirm (the
second side of the building is drawn)
Manual

5.5.2 3
Enter the values 90 and 30 (third side of the building) and press
RIGHT mouse button (the rectangle is closed)
Manual
5.5.2

Manual
5.5.3 1

5.5.3
The boxes Name, ID, and the Info button are described below since they
appear on almost every edit dialog of an object. The other features will be
dealt with in the relevant chapters.
The Name box contains an object name which appears in the first column
of the object table. It may comprise several thousand characters. However,
since the column width is adapted to accommodate the longest character
string among the names, it is recommended you use short terms. One of
the possibilities for finding an object is to search for its name (see Chapter
5.6).
Name
5.5.3
A character string of up to 15 characters entered in the ID box allows you

to group, identify, sort, activate or deactivate for a calculation or search for
objects according to different criteria.
ID
5.5.3
Objects belonging to groups (see Chapter 18.2) can be activated and deactivated via these groups. Activated objects will be considered in the calculation. Deactivated objects will not be taken into account. The latter will
appear with dashed lines in the graphical representation (default setting).
(De)activation, ID, and grouping are powerful tools for the controlling of
projects and the handling of various project alternatives while using the
same data stock.
For each defined group you can present the proportionate sound pressure
level on the receiver points as partial sum level.
The check box next to ID allows you to specify 3 different activation
states for an object by clicking:
Manual
5.5.3

If the check box is grey (default), the object is activated. This is the case
shown in the figure ("ID" written in black). The state can be manipulated
by grouping.
If "ID" is written in red, the object has been deactivated via a group and
will not be taken into account in the calculation.
If the box is checked (an x appears in the square), the object will always be
active no matter what group it may belong to and whether or not that
group, if any, is active. Therefore, "ID" will always be written in black.
If the check box is white, the object will always be inactive no matter what
group it may belong to and whether or not that group, if any, is active.
Therefore, "ID" will always be written in red. In the graphical representation, these objects will be drawn with dashed lines (default setting).
Info-button
5.5.3
The Info button is available on every edit dialog of an object. When you
click it, a box opens where you can enter specific object information and/
or string variables. The contents of the info box is not printed but you can
get out the information contained in a string variable. The box may contain
up to 30,000 characters.
If the box contains any information, the button appears blue, otherwise
grey.
Define String Variable
You define a string variable by writting a name for it in the Info-box followed by a equals sign (without any space) and after that - directly behind
without any space again - the desired information or value. Now you can
revert to the contens of a variable just by writting the string variables
name on another location.
Example String Variable
GRN0=08/15
GRNO is in our example the string variable and embodies the number of
the building yard. The number 08/15 can be displayed e.g. in the Result
Table as a contents of a column for a receiver point just by entering the
variables name GRNO as expression.
Manual
5.5.3 3

With the string variables you can also revert to information stored in databases, which have an ODBC-interface (see Chapter 6.5) like MS Excel or
MS Access, to save them by your CadnaA objects in the Info-box.
For that the string variable has to be stored together with the equals sign
and the information in a field of the database.
see also
chapter 15.3.3 String Variable
chapter 8.9.8 Calc Width of Roads
chapter 18.4 Date of Objects in Info box
Standard Deviation Sigma dB: Enter the standard deviation in dB if you
want to calculate the source related uncertainty (see Chapter 12.4.3) of the
emission determination.
Manual
Standard
Deviation
5.5.3
5.5.3

Manual

5.5.4
5.5.4 1
You may choose the decimal separator comma or point in the menu Options|Miscellaneous. The default is the point.
For all numbers with decimals entered in CadnaA, you will have to use the
active separating character. In many cases, the program is able to cope
with a comma or point, mistakenly entered as a separator by interpreting it
as the active separating character. However, this is not possible in all of the
boxes.
For example, in the edit polygon point dialog, but not in the table, you may
separate the decimals of the x, y and z coordinates of a polygon point, of
track centreline distance and slope by either a comma or point. In this case,
CadnaA is able to correct the separator point or the comma by taking it as
the chosen decimal separator.
In other boxes, however, which are used for performing calculation operations, decimals must be separated by a point. Otherwise, the value will be
misinterpreted or its acceptance refused.
If, for example, you enter 98,5 dB as value for LwA in the edit box of a
general source, this value will appear in red which means it is not acceptable. This box is a formula box where you can perform calculation operations such as arithmetic and energetic level additions, or even more
complex equations. In this box, the comma is a special character (max(1,2)
= 2). So here, you must use the point to separate decimals.
Manual
5.5.4

Use the active decimal separator if you are editing in the object tables directly. Otherwise it could be that the values are not correctly interpreted.
The correct interpretation of the decimal separator of CadnaA in

other Windows programs also depends, among other things, on the
country settings of the operating system.
It could happen, e.g., in MS Excel that values inserted from a
CadnaA table via the clipboard are interpreted as a date and not with
the correct number format. In this case you may have chosen the
comma as decimal separator in the system settings. To rectify the
false interpretation adjust the setting with a point for the decimal separator.
Manual
Chapter 5 Basics
Search for Objects
5.6
5.6 1
Search for Objects
Use this command to search within the entire data stock, to identify and retrieve objects for editing. When an object is found, it will be selected and
displayed in the window. Pressing the RETURN key will open the relevant
edit dialog box. The Search dialog must remain opened.
The Search Again button serves to start or continue the search procedure.
Either one or an arbitrary combination of the attributes Object Type, Name and ID (see Chapter 5.5.3) can be used to specify either all objects or
each of the objects to be retrieved. If more than one criterion is given, all
criteria have to be fulfilled (logical and (see Chapter 2.8).
Use the List box to select the type of object. If you select the option: ?(All)
then all kinds of objects are compared to the search criteria. Otherwise,
only objects of the type specified are examined.
Wildcards can be used as customary, e.g., the asterix (*).
This input would search for a point source named either a or c
Manual
5.6
Chapter 5 Basics
Search for Objects
Manual
5.7 1
Chapter 5 Basics
Context Menu
5.7
Context Menu
By selecting an object on the main window while in the edit mode, or by

selecting a data record in a table, using the RIGHT instead of the LEFT
mouse button, a context menu is opened offering a number of commands
relating to the object in question.
5
Selecting an object by clicking it with the
right instead of the left mouse button
opens a context menu.
The following commands may appear in a context menu depending on

which object the function has started:
Commands
Graphical 3-D view with hidden lines, taking into account the visibility of
the individual surfaces. You can also edit the objects in this view directly
and you may move through this scenario either by pressing the Return key
or by using the arrow keys on the keyboard (see Chapter 13.14).
3D-Special-View
Manual
5.7
Chapter 5 Basics
Context Menu
Break Areas
A closed polygon can be divided into several smaller areas with identical
parameters (see Chapter 5.7.9).
Break Lines
A line-like object is divided into at least two objects with identical parameters (see Chapter 5.7.7).
Duplicate
Several objects of identical properties and the same size are inserted in horizontal and/or vertical rows (see Chapter 5.7.1).
Edit
Opens an edit object dialog (alternatively: double-click an object with the

left mouse button (see Chapter 5.5).
Insert before/after
A new row is inserted in a table before or after the selected row. Another
alternative is to press INS-key (see Chapter 15.2.2).
Generate Lable
This option generates the issue of object parameters to be defined within

an automatically generated Text box located at the object. You can do that
for only one object, for all objects of the same object type or for all object
types (see Chapter 5.7.4).
Generate
Station
Inserts station marks at a desired spacing along a line-like object, with indication of distances, e. g. marking of roads by kilometres (see Chapter
5.7.3).
Force
Right Angles
An arbitrary polygon with different angles can be transformed into a polygon with right angles by specifying a snap angle (see Chapter 5.7.5).
Force Rectangle
An arbitrary quadrangle can be transformed into a rectangle (see Chapter

5.7.5).
Manual
5.7 3
Chapter 5 Basics
Context Menu
This command enables you to snap point shaped objects (e.g. point source
or receiver point) onto a building facade after the point has been inserted
or imported. The points are then attached to the facade at the distance definded (see Chapter 9.3.3).
Snap Point to facade
Generates a building with sound-radiating facades and roof (see Chapter

9.3.4).
Generate building
The length of any line-like object can be specified (see Chapter 5.7.10).
Specify Length
Calculation according to the Germany guideline RLS90 for Long Straight

Road (see Chapter 8.11)
Long Straight Road
Deletes the selected object - another alternative: press DEL KEY (see Chapter 5.4.7).
Delete
Different actions can be executed simultaneously on several objects and

also on different object-types or groups of objects. Some actions can also
be enforced on individual objects alone. These are then directly obvious in
the context-menu (see Chapter 5.7.2).
Modify Objects
Generation of objects parallel to the object selected (see Chapter 5.7.13).
Parallel Object
Deletes grid-points inside or outside of a calculation area (see Chapter

11.5.1)
Delete Grid-Points
CadnaA enables you to calculate air pollution caused by road traffic ac-
Air Pollution
cording to the MLuS 92, Issue 96 /46/ (see Chapter 19.2).

Sectional view along a line (see Chapter 13.12)
Manual
Cross Section
5.7
Chapter 5 Basics
Context Menu
Sort
Sorting of table columns in ascending or descending order, numerical or

alphanumerical (see Chapter 15.2.4).
Edit Column
Conversion of numerical values or substitution of character strings in table

columns (see Chapter 15.2.5).
Spline
A selected polygon line is replaced by the segmented curve of a cubic polynomial (see Chapter 5.7.12)
Simplify Geometry
Geometrical objects are simplified for calculation purposes by reducing

the degree to which details are taken into account (see Chapter 5.7.11)
Floors
Automatic generation of a vertical row of receiver points with corresponding heights for the different floors (see Chapter 11.2.6)
Break into pieces
Line shape objects are split into definable parts with identical parameters
(see Chapter 5.7.15).
Convert to
An object type can be converted to another one (see Chapter 5.7.14).
Connect Lines
Individual parts of line-like objects of the same object type can be connected to a single object (see Chapter 5.7.8).
Pass-By-Level
For roads, railways, and other line-like sources, you can also calculate the
time characteristic of the sound pressure level that would result if a single
vehicle with a specified emission were to travel along a certain path (see
Chapter 8.14).
Manual
5.7.1 1
Chapter 5.7 Context Menu

Duplicating Objects
5.7.1
Duplicating Objects
This command can be executed as well from the context menu (see Chapter 5.7) directly at the object or via the context menu Modify objects:Action: Duplicate. In the second case you can enter additional settings. It is
applicable to all graphical objects.
To insert several objects of identical properties and the same size in horizontal and/or vertical rows in the CadnaA main window, you first insert
one object of the desired size and then select it by clicking it with the
RIGHT mouse button - the context menu opens.
Before an object is duplicated, it should be allocated the desired parameters by editing. These parameters will be adopted for all duplicates.
From the context menu, select the Duplicate command. In the dialog that
opens, specify the number of duplicates and the distances between either
the borders or the centres of the objects.
The building context menu
Manual
Duplicate
5.7.1
5.7.1

Duplicating Objects
Duplicate dialog. Specify the number of copies - define

what the distances refer to - enter the distances in meters
Horizontal: positive number placed the duplicates to the right of the existing object, a negative number to the left of it.
Vertical: positive number placed the duplicates above the existing object,
a negative number below.
Action Duplicate
5.7.1
With the command Modify Objects|Action: Duplicate you can enter additional settings:
Move Center Point
5.7.1
The center point of objects being selected can be moved. Upon activation
of the check box enter values accordingly.
Manual

Duplicating Objects
5.7.1 3
Duplicated objects can be enlarged or minimized in horizontal and vertical

direction. Upon activation of the check box enter values accordingly.
Scaling Factor
Duplicated objects can be rotated around their center point. Upon activation of the check box enter values accordingly.
Rotation around Center

Point
5.7.1
See also chapter 5.4.5 Copying Objects and chapter 6.3.4 Coordinate
Transformation, paragraph Duplication by Transformation.
Manual
5.7.1
5.7.1

Duplicating Objects
Manual
5.7.2 1

Modify Objects
5.7.2
Modify Objects
This command on the context menu allows you to simultaneously apply

various actions to several objects and also to different object types or
groups of objects. These actions are also available for individual objects
only, in which case they are directly listed on the context menu.
The following actions can also be performed for several objects or groups
of objects:
Delete (see chapter 5.4.7)

Modify Attribute (see chapter 5.7.17)
Duplicate (see chapter 5.7.1)
Force Rectangle (see chapter 5.7.5)
Force Right Angles - Orthogonalize (see chapter 5.7.6)
Snap point to facade (see chapter 9.3.3)
Spline (see chapter 5.7.12)
Simplify Geo (see chapter 5.7.11)
Break into pieces (see chapter 5.7.15)
Connect Lines (see chapter 5.7.8)
Transformation (see chapter 6.3.4)
Convert to (see chapter 5.7.14)
Generate Station (see chapter 5.7.3)
Generate Building Evaluation (see chapter 9.3.5)
Generate Label (see chapter 5.7.4)
Generate floors (see chapter 11.2.6)
Parallel Object (see chapter 5.7.13)
Activation (see chapter 5.7.16)
Swap Name / ID (see chapter 5.7.1)
Delete Duplicates (see chapter 5.7.2)
Fit DTM to Object or Object to DTM (see chapter 10.3)
Manual
Aktionen
5.7.2
Modify all
Objekts

Modify Objects
5.7.2
If you want to cover all objects in your project file with this function you
must execute the command Modify Objects from the context menu by
clicking with a RIGHT mouse button onto a free space in your plan. You
may not mark an object. If you call the command by marking a object
then it will be excluded from the following action.
Modify a group of
objects
5.7.2
If you do not want all objects to be affected by the chosen action you can
provisionally draw a closed polygon around the object to be or not to be
modified collectively (e.g. a Aux. polygon).
Another alternative is to use an existing polygon, e. g. a building, that is
not to be modified. Click the closed polygon under the Edit Mode using
the RIGHT mouse button, then select the Modify Objects command on the
context menu.
Objects inside, outside,

on the borderline of the
polygon
5.7.2
In the dialog that opens, an Actions list is available for selection. Choose
the action you want to apply to the objects to be defined. By activating the
pertinent check boxes, you specify the position of the object types to be
modified, i. e. inside, outside, or on the borderline of the auxiliary polygon. All these options can apply simultaneously.
If objects are placed on the borderline of the polygon or if they jut

inside or outside the polygon you may enforce the functions Break
Lines (see chapter 5.7.7) or Break Areas (see chapter 5.7.9) from the
polygon context menu to break the lines or areas on the intersection
of the borderline if desired before you excute the Modify
Objects|Action command.
Activated or deactivated
objects
5.7.2
Moreever, you can choose whether the action is only to apply to activated
or deactivated objects. If the option indifferent is checked, it does not
matter whether an object is activated or not.
Condition
Futhermore, a condition can be specified for numerical expressions to restrict the selection of objects. For the specification of a condition all attributes of the object type selected are available. From the pop-up menu
list an attribute for the highlighted object type can be selected. This allows
5.7.2
Manual

Modify Objects
5.7.2 3
to define even complex conditional expressions (see chapter 2.6). The operation will be executed only if the condition is fulfilled (expression <> 0).
These three types of restrictions (range/activation/condition) can be applied separately or in combination of each other.
Now select the object types to which the specified action is to apply (Multiple Selection see chapter 4.10).
Choose Object
type
5.7.2
If you wish to cover all object types, click the All button.
When the dialog box is closed via the OK button, another dialog may appear depending on the action chosen. Enter the appropriate parameters
there. As soon as you have confirmed by clicking OK, the selected action
is applied to the objects as defined. It is possible to cancel the action in
process.
Example: Deleting a
group of
objects
5.7.2
Manual
5.7.2
Industry.cna

Modify Objects
The industrial enterprise in the above example, consisting of one building,

point and line sources, is deleted using the context menu command Modify Objects.
Draw a closed auxiliary polygon around the industrial enterprise.
Select the auxiliary polygon using the RIGHT mouse button.
From the context menu, select Modify Objects - the following dialog appears:
Manual

Modify Objects
5.7.2 5
On the Actions list box, select Delete.
Activate the checked boxes Inside Polygon and On Polygon Borderline and
choose the object type Point Source, Line Source, Building and
Aux.Polygon by clicking while pressing the Ctrl key (in this
example you may also choose all objects by clicking the All button)
confirm with OK
In the dialog appearing next, you can either confirm or cancel the selected
action.
Manual
5.7.2

Modify Objects
Click the All button again and see how fast an industrial area can turn
into a residential area!
In this example, the trade enterprise inside the polygon has been deleted.
If the All button is clicked, a selected action will be applied to all objects
without the need for further confirmation, whereas the Yes button requires
explicit confirmation for each object.
Manual

Modify Objects
5.7.2 7
The object on which the Action command is executed is excluded from

this action - in this example is it the auxiliary polygon. If desired delete
this object separately with the DEL key.
Manual
5.7.2

Modify Objects
Manual
5.7.3 1

Generate Station
5.7.3
Generate Station
The Station feature allows you to generate marks at distances to be defined alongside line-like objects, indicating the distances from station to
station. The stations are generated either automatically, if you select
the command Station from the context menu (see Chapter 5.7) , or
with the command Modify Object|Action: Generate Station (see Chapter 5.7.2)
or semi-automatically via the toolbox icon Station, in which case you
insert the stations individually.
This feature is convenient, e. g. for providing roads with kilometre marks.
To do so, click the road with the RIGHT mouse button, and select
Station from the context menu.
In the dialog that opens, specify the distance between the individual
stations.
Upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, CadnaA generates stations

along the road with the specified distance between each pair of stations.
Manual
Station
5.7.3

Generate Station
250
0
20
150
100
50
The distance indicated at each station is the total of preceding distances

summed up from station to station.
If you prefer the realistic value of the distance, you can specify this by entering in kilometers in the dialog Road the actual position of the road.
Open the Road dialog by double-clicking the road axis.
Click the Geometry button.
At the bottom of the dialog, enter the kilometres in metres, and
Manual

Generate Station
5.7.3 3
In this example the measure starts by 10 km
if required, select Ascending or Descending counting order from the

list box.
Upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, you have to update the dimensioning in kilometers via the menu command Tables|Miscellaneous|Update Station.
The station mark then displays the kilometres and metres separated by a
plus sign.
00
+2
10
If you wish to insert only single stations, use the pertinent toolbox icon,
and click at the desired locations.
Manual
Update Station
5.7.3
5.7.3
Parallel Object
between defined
station marks

Generate Station
5.7.3
For every line source you can define a scale related to its axis in the menu
Geometry|Station. The default setting for the initial point is 0 - but you
can also define it arbitrarily.
With the Parallel Object command from the context menu you can define
a starting and an end point related to the Station Range.
Example:
Insert an abitrary road and input in the Geometry dialog a Station

start point of 12.000 m ascending. The base point of the road is now
12 km.
Close the dialog with OK.
For clarification generate the station marks on your road (mark the
road with the RIGHT mouse button and from the context menu choose
Generate Station.
Define a distance of 10 m and confirm with OK. The station marks

are generated.
Manual

Generate Station
10
0
12
+0
30
12
+0
4
0
0
7
+0
12
12
+0
5
12
+0
2
6
+0
12
12
+0
Choose Parallel Object from the context menu and input the values
from the above Parallel Object dialog.
After confirming with OK a screen will be generated with a distance of

10 m from the road, with a height of 4 m and a length of 30 m between station mark 12.020 and 12050.
Manual
5.7.3 5
5.7.3

Generate Station
Manual
5.7.4 1

Generate Label
5.7.4
Generate Label
This option generates the issue of object parameters to be defined within

an automatically generated Text box located at the object. You can do that
for only one object, for all objects of the same object type or for all object
types.
Mark the object and execute the command in the Context Menu (see
Chapter 5.7) either
1.
for one object: Generate Label or
2.
for several and/or different objects: Modify Objects |Action: Generate Label (see Chapter 5.7.2).
Generate Label
Dialog
5.7.4
Placement defines the alignment of the content inside the label.
Placement
5.7.4
The font alignment, size and type can be adopted in the dialog by clicking
the same-named button (see Chapter 13.11.1).
Text box
5.7.4
Manual
5.7.4

Generate Label
Content
5.7.4
Select the relevant Attribute by clicking in the list box. The range of attributes at your disposal in the list box depends on the selected object with
which you have executed the command Generate Label. If you execute
the command in the menu Modify Objects to label several objects at one
time, only a restricted range will be offered.
Example
5.7.4
If you select the attribute ID in the list box, the string entered in the object
dialog in the edit box ID will be placed in the label.
User defined
5.7.4
The attribute <user-defined> allows the issue of several object parameters

by entry of the relevant attributes in the code box. If you have selected an
attribute in the list box, you can see the actual notation of this attribute
[#(ObjAtt,%1,Parameter)]. If you want to issue more than one object parameter in the label, just enter the actual notation of this attribute into the
code box. You can also enter additional text.
Manual
5.7.4 3

Generate Label
Entry in Code Box
Example
#(ObjAtt, %1, GRENZT, 1, 0.500) dB(A) / #(ObjAtt,

%1, LPT, 1, 0.500) dB(A)
will, after calculation at the receiver point, generate a label with e.g. the
content:
"50 dB(A) / 41,9 dB(A)",
because the daytime maximum (standard) value of this receiver point is
50 dB(A) and the calculated sound level for daytime is rated at
41,9 dB(A).
The parameters of the attribute GRENZT,1, 0.500 mean:
1 = one digit after the decimal point will be issued
0.500 = round up if the value of the last digit after the decimal point is 5
Further availible terms see Chapter 15.3.3 "(user defined)"
Manual
5.7.4
String
Variable
Example

Generate Label
5.7.4
You may display information from the info-box

in the edit dialog of
the Receiver point. Enter the same string in the Variable-box as you did
in the info-box. But first you must choose String variable from the Attribute listbox.
In the info-boxes of the building dialog you may have entered the floor
number of buildings, e.g. f=2, f=3, f=25 etc. In this case f is the string
variable. If you want to display these floor numbers in a label on the building you have to choose the settings as follows.
In this case only numbers would be displayed in the labels. But if you want
to add an expression to the number like floor no. or just fno.: then
you have to choose <user defined> in the attribute list-box and add the
desired expression via the keyboard.
Manual

Generate Label
5.7.4 5
The output in the label of this entry would be fno.: 2 or fno.: 3 or fno: 25
etc.
Manual
5.7.4

Generate Label
Manual

Force Rectangle
5.7.5
5.7.5 1
Force Rectangle
This command can be applied to any closed polygon with four corners.
Using this context menu command allows you to transform an arbitrary
quadrangle into a rectangle.
To this end, click the object with the right mouse button, and, from the
context menu, select the Force Rectangle command.
A quadrangle entered in CadnaA
The same quadrangle after applying the

command "Force Rectangle"
See also chapter 5.7 Context Menu, chapter 5.7.2 Modify Objects and
chapter 5.3.1 Inserting Objects Using the Mouse
Manual
5.7.5

Force Rectangle
Manual

Force Right Angles
5.7.6
5.7.6 1
Force Right Angles
This command can be applied to any closed polygon.

An arbitrary polygon with different angles can be transformed into a polygon with right angles by specifying a snap angle.
5
After executing Force Right Angles

Original polygon
with snap angle 20
See also chapter 5.7 Context Menu

chapter 5.7.2 Modify Objects und
chapter 5.7.5 Force Rectangle sowie
chapter 5.3.1 Inserting Objects Using the Mouse
Manual
with snap angle 45
5.7.6

Force Right Angles
Manual

Breake Lines
5.7.7
5.7.7 1
Breake Lines
This command from the context menu (see Chapter 5.7) can be applied to
any open polygon.
Line-shaped objects, such as line sources, roads, railways, contour lines,
etc. can be broken into separate sections. This splits an object into two objects with identical properties. Breaking down a line object is useful, if,
e. g., the parameters of the sections are supposed to be different. You can
achieve this by using this command and editing the properties of the new
section.
The breaking of line-shaped objects is done by drawing a line with only a
start and end point which intersects the line-shaped object at the point
where it is to be broken. Such a line can be generated, e. g., by selecting
the auxiliary polygon, or any other line-like object, from the toolbox.
This railway is divided into 2 sections, for example, to

allocate a different type of track to one railway section.
First click the Auxiliary Polygon tool. Then generate a line by clicking on
both sides of the point you want to breake.
Manual
5.7.7

Breake Lines
Now switch to the Edit Mode, and click the line just generated using the
right mouse button. From the context menu, select the Break Lines command.
The railway now consists of two sections, which can be shown by deleting
one of them.
Manual

Connect Lines
5.7.8
5.7.8 1
Connect Lines
In CadnaA you can connect sections of line-shaped objects of the same

object type to form one single object by transferring the relevant parameters of the section, which the other sections are connected to, to the other
sections.
Parameter are assigned
One possible application could be, e.g., connecting imported road sections
or buildings which have been generated in a third-party-program in the
form of an open auxiliary polygon and which do not have identical initial
and final points.
You can subject the connection of lines to certain conditions.

Mark the decisive line with the right mouse key and choose Connect Lines from the context menu.
Activate the relevant options in the dialog box and confirm with OK. The
effected sections are then connected to form one single object.
Manual
Connect1.cna
5.7.8

Connect Lines
Optionen
Snap Radius
Enter the radius of the circle within which a connection point is to be

searched. This snap radius is the maximum distance between the final
points to be connected.
Check Height
With this option activated, the snap radius will also relate to the 3-D distance (z-coordinate) instead of only to the 2-D distance (x/y-coordinate).
Search at first/last point
According to the options chosen, the search will be one-way or two-way.
Search recursively
With this option activated, CadnaA will, after having connected two lines,
search from the open point of the next line (etc.) as long as the given requirements are fulfilled.
Check ID
With this option activated only lines with identical ID will be connected.
Strategy for
Ambiguities
You can choose which of several possible lines shall be connected.

See also chapter 5.7 Context Menu and chapter 5.7.2 Modify Objects.
Manual

Break Areas
5.7.9
5.7.9 1
Break Areas
This command can be applied to any closed polygon.

Just as the Break Lines command (see Chapter 5.7) from the context
menu is used for lines, you can divide areas by means of the Break Areas
command (see Chapter 5.7.7). This is useful, e. g., for dividing an existing
industrial area into several smaller areas.
An area is divided by means of a second area protruding into the area to be
broken.
A general area source.
How do you divide the above area?

Insert another area (closed polygon, such as an area source, a parking lot,
or a calculation area). The second area, which is used for breaking, must
not lie completely within the first area.
Manual
5.7.9

Break Areas
Area 2
5
Area 1
Area 1 and a parking lot (Area 2)

which is used to break Area 1.
Area 1 is to be divided into three areas.
Click Area 2 with the RIGHT mouse button
From the context menu, select Break Areas - Area 1 now consists of
three areas.
To prove this, slightly shift Areas 2, 1a, and 1b.
Manual

Break Areas
5.7.9 3
Area 2
Area 1b
Area 1a
5
Area 1
Area source divided using the Break Areas command
If you had selected Area 1 instead of Area 2 before triggering the command, Area 2 would have been divided.
Area 2
Area 2b
Area 2a
Area 1
Manual
5.7.9

Break Areas
Manual

Specify Length
5.7.10 1
5.7.10 Specify Length

You can specify the exact length of all line-shaped objects, such as roads,
railways, line sources, and also of the vertical area source, etc.
First, enter the line-like object with its approximate length. Then click this
object under the Edit Mode using the RIGHT mouse button, and, from the
context menu (see Chapter 5.7), select the Specify Length command. This
results in the line-like object being extended beyond or cut off before the
last entered point.
Manual
5.7.10

Specify Length
Manual

Simplify Geometry
5.7.11 1
5.7.11 Simplify Geometry

You can simplify any geometrical object for calculation purposes by reducing the degree to which its details are taken into account. This can significantly reduce calculation times - particularly for large projects. Any
object point lying at more than the specified distance from the straight line
connecting the two neighbouring points, will be deleted and neglected in
the calculation.
Click the object using the right mouse button and, from the context menu
(see Chapter 5.7), either select the Simplify Geometry command or Modify Object|Action: Simplify Geometry (see Chapter 5.7.2).
In the dialog that opens, enter, e.g., 10 m for the above road section. This
means that all points (for which the above-mentioned criteria is true will
be deleted.
Upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, the road section is "straightened".
Manual
5.7.11

Simplify Geometry
If, also the option Vertical (m) is activated, both conditions - horizontal
and vertical - have to be true to simplify the geometry.
Manual

Spline
5.7.12 1
5.7.12 Spline
This command directly from the context menu (see Chapter 5.7) or via
Modify Object (see Chapter 5.7.2) can be applied to any open or closed
polygon.
A selected polygon line is replaced by the segmented curve of a cubic polynomial.
Fig. A: Before applying the

Spline command
Fig. B: After applying the

Spline command
If, e. g., the polygon line illustrated in Fig. A is clicked with the right
mouse button, and the Spline command is selected, this results in the
curve shown in Fig. B.
Manual
5.7.12

Spline
Manual

Parallel Object
5.7.13 1
5.7.13 Parallel Object

This command can be applied to any open or closed polygon.
Execute the command either directly from the context menu (see Chapter
5.7) of an object or via Modify Object (see Chapter 5.7.2).
An object parallel to the selected one is generated by defining, in the pertinent dialog, at which distance, and to which side of the object the parallel
object is to be inserted.
The choice "to the left/to the right" is made according to the view along
the open or closed polygon line from its initial point to its final point.
If you dont know anymore which one was the starting point, just
have a look at the data record in the geometry table. The graphical
representation and the data record are synchronized. Therefore, open
the Object Dialog by double-clicking the object in the Edit mode.
Shift the dialog so that you can see your object and click to the
Geometry botton. In the polygon table the first data record is marked
and also the pertinent polygon point at the graphical object.
To enter parallel barriers for the road section illustrated above, select the
road using the RIGHT mouse button and, on the context menu which appears, click the Parallel Object command.
In the following dialog, enter the desired parameters.
Manual
5.7.13

Parallel Object
By road and railway the graphical central axis is the reference line for
the distance of the parallel object.
If you execute the command Parallel Object at an open polygon, e.g., at

the object Road, and if you choose a closed polygon as Object type, e.g.,
the object Designated Land Use, and if you also choose the option Left
and Right from the object, CadnaA places then the closed polygon over
or under the road.
.
Manual
5.7.13 3

Parallel Object
In the above figure three parts of roads (1, 2 and 3) are displayed. With the
command Parallel Object the object Designated Land Use has been inserted over the road part 2 with the option Object Type: Designated
Land Use, left and right, Distance 30 m.
Example
If you also define a Station Range, the parallel object will only be generated in this defined range (see Chapter 5.7.3 "Generate Station").
Station Range
In this example, the Object Type Barrier is selected from the list box.
upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, a 3-metre-high barrier is inserted
on both sides of the road at a distance of 10 m each, as defined by the parameters specified above.
You may also execute this command with Modify Object|Action: Parallel Object. This is interesting, e.g., if beyond several single road sections
parallel barriers shall be generated and if station ranges are defined.
Manual
Parallel Object with the

Modify Object
command
5.7.13
5.7.13

Parallel Object
Manual

Convert to
5.7.14 1
5.7.14 Convert to
Object types can be converted to other object types. For example, you can
convert a road to a railway, a contour line to a barrier, a building to foliage
or to a built-up area. Existing parameters are retained where this makes
sense.
In order to convert, e. g., the earler-mentioned parallel barriers along the
road to contour lines, select one barrier using the RIGHT mouse button to
open the context menu, and click the Convert to command.
A pop-up menu appears, listing all object types available. Click Contour
Line. This converts the barrier to a contour line with the barrier co-ordinates and height being applied to the contour line.
You can now easily re-locate the road to lie on an embankment.
Manual
5.7.14

Convert to
Manual

Break into pieces
5.7.15 1
5.7.15 Break into pieces

With the command Break Lines, which you can select after clicking with
the right mouse key on a line-shaped object (e.g. road, linesource) in the
context menu (see Chapter 5.7), you can either
define the desired length of the new sections - the final section will
then be of a different length - or
the number of new sections, which will then all have the same length or
you break the line-shaped object on its polygon points.
This command can be applicated, e.g., in connection with Optimize Walls

If you insert one Road it is described then by one data record in the object
table (Tables|Sources|Roads). After executing the command Break Lines you will find several data records in your table describing each divided
road segment.
Manual
5.7.15

Break into pieces
Manual
5.7.16 1

Activation
5.7.16 Activation
With the Action:Activation of Modify Objects from the context menu
you may change the activations (see Chapter 5.5.3, ID) of all desired objects without opening the object dialog.
If you have choosen all options and objects in the Modify Object dialog,
confirm with OK - the Activation dialog will appear.
The left check boxes show the possible conditions of activation, the right
one the actual state.
Choose from the listbox the kind of activation you like to have. All corresponding objects are then in that condition, no matter which condition they
have been in before.
Example: If you choose inactive - all the concerned objects are deaktivated.
(in)active
If you choose intermediate the objects are neither activated nor inactiveted (default setting of the object).
intermediate
If you choose general, you may decide individually the activation conditions by clicking in the checked boxes on the right.
general
Manual
5.7.16

Activation
Manual

Modify Attribute
5.7.17 1
5.7.17 Modify Attribute

With the command from the context menu Modify Object|Action:Modify
Attribute you can change the parameters of different and/or groups of objects simultaneously.
If you, e.g., want to increase existing object heights by 5 m choose this
command and input the parameter displayed in the following figure.
Select those object types whose Attributes you wish to modify. Depending on the object type selected you have the corresponding attributes at
your disposal in the dialog after pressing OK.
With these parameters the object height (HA) is increased

in each case by 5 m after confirming with OK.
For example, you have imported roads whose base-points (polygon points)
have absolute heights. In this case the option absolute Height at every
Point is activated in CadnaAs Geometry dialog.
But you want relative heights for every base point to be able to adjust the
roads new to your digital terrain model (DTM) in your project.
The following steps are necessary:
Manual
Example:
change height
from absolute to relative
and vice- versa
5.7
5.7.17

Modify Attribute
Click with the Right mouse key on a free place in your file and
choose the function Modify Objects in the context menu.
In the following dialog choose the Action: Modify Attribute, mark

the object Road and confirm with OK.
In the dialog Modify Attribut choose the attribute HA (for the

height of the first point), activate the option Arithmetic and enter the
value 0 (zero). (You may enter an abitrary value - CadnaA adjusts the
heights to the ground model anyway because the heights are relative
after the action).
If you confirm all dialogs, the relative heights are then 0 m and the
option Interpolate from first/last point is activated (that means
relative for a line-like object).
CadnaA shows the new heights, which are adapted then from the
ground model after calculation.
Now, if you want define the new heights as absolut, again repeat the above
described action but this time choose the Attribute HA_ATT (attribute for
the height of the first point). Activate the option Replace String|Replace
with and enter a blank. Confirm all dialogs. The heights are now defined
as absolute and the option absolute height at every point is activated
again. They are not changed again in case of a new calculation.
For point-like objects, e.g., point sources, receiver points etc., you can
change the attribute of the height with r for relative and a for absolute instead with a blank.
Example:
Change Color
5.7
With the function Modify Objects|Modify Attribute you can also change
the colors of auxiliary polygons. Deaktivate the polygons, which color e.g.
you dont want to change and act like follows:
Choose Modify Objects|Modify Attribute|only active object type:

Aux. Polygon and confirm with OK.
Manual

Modify Attribute
5.7.17 3
In the next dialog Modify Attribute select the Attribute L_COLOR

for the line color from the list. In case you like to change the filling of
a polygon choose F_COLOR.
Manual
5.7.17

Modify Attribute
Activate Arithmetisch and enter

RGB(255,0,0)
in the field new Value.
RGB embodies RED - YELLOW - BLUE, the numbers in brackets

are the corresponding values for the color red, yellow and blue. In
this example the polygons color change to red.
If your Aux. Polygons not change their colors then could that be that the
option use global properties is still active. Then you have to change this
as follows:
In the dialog Modify Attribute select the Attribut GLOBAL, activate the
option Replace String and enter a space in that field. After confirming
with OK the polygons display their corresponding color.
See also:
Attribute Abreviation (see Chapter 2.5)
Arithmetics and String-Replacement (see Chapter 15.2.5)
Context menu (see Chapter 5.7)
Modify Objects (see Chapter 5.7.2)
Manual

Swap Name/ID
5.7.1
5.7.1 1
Swap Name/ID
With the command Swap Name/ID from the Contextmenu|Modify Object you can excange, e.g., the entry of the box Name and ID in the object
dialog.
Depending on the file format this maybe necessary after importing a file
from a GIS-system, a file e.g. like DXF with a Dxf-handle. Such systems
store non geometrical data in a seperate database. In order to merge the data, like the distance of a road or the number of cars, with the real graphical
object, the IDs have to be identical in both files.
see chapter 5.5.3 "The Dialog Boxes Name, ID, INFO"
see chapter 5.7 "Context Menu"
see chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects"
see chapter 6.5 "Import via ODBC Interface"
Manual
5.7.1

Swap Name/ID
Manual

Delete Duplicates
5.7.2
5.7.2 1
Delete Duplicates
You can delete objects of the same type and with the same parameters simultanously with the command from the context menu Modify Objects|Action: Delete Duplicates.
This function is sometimes necessary after importing from third-party programs like e.g. ArcView or DXF.
You can choose the concerned object type like, e.g. only for roads.
After confirming with OK a further dialog opens in which you can choose
conditions for the deletion if necessary.
Handbuch
5.7.2

Delete Duplicates
Having chosen several conditions, then all conditions must be true before
the duplicates are deleted (logical AND). Is the condition Geometry activaed you have the possibility to input a deviation (snap in (m)). In this
case the objects may deviate from the Geometry by the value which is still
to be recognized as a duplicate.
The first objects placed in the table would be the originals the following
identical objects the duplicates.
see Chapter 5.7 "Context Menu"
see Chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects"
Handbuch
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 6 Import
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 6 Import
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
Contents
6.1 1
Chapter 6 Import
6.1 Contents
6.2
Importing
6.3
Import Options
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
Allocate Object type to Layer

Importing in Section only
Importing selected Object Types
Coordinate Transformation
6.4
Import Formats
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
6.4.8
6.4.9
6.4.10
CadnaA
AutoCad-DXF
ArcView
Atlas GIS
Sicad Files
EDBS
WINPUT-DGM Files
Stratis
MapInfo
Import / Export of Tables listing number
of Trains
Special Formats
Third-Party Programs
Building Height Points
Ascii-Poly
6.4.11
6.4.12
6.4.13
6.4.14
Manual
6.1
6.5
Chapter 6 Import
Contents
Import via ODBC Interface
Manual
6.2 1
Chapter 6 Import
Importing
6.2
Importing
Data from third-party programs can be imported by CadnaA using various

file formats or via the ODBC interface (see chapter 6.5).
Any objects contained in the current Cadna file will not be deleted, but the
external file will be inserted or existing data will be updated. This enables
you to continuously complete a file by importing external and/or internal
data.
Depending on the file format, CadnaA allows you to specify certain importing options:
Import Options
Selection of layers to be assigned to specified object types (see chapter

6.3.1 "Allocate Object type to Layer").
Layer
Coordinate transformation serving to match the data to those of your

project file (see chapter 6.3.4).
Coordinate
Transformation
Specification of a target area in your project file by using the Section

tool, to where the data are to be imported in order to reduce the amount
of data (see chapter 6.3.2 "Importing in Section only").
Importing in a target area
Selection of object types - by this you may import only the needed
object types from a file, e.g., only roads.
Selection of Object types6.2
Select the Import command from the File menu if you wish to make use
of a file format to insert objects from an external file in your project file
(file formats like, e. g., GIS like ArcView, MapInfo, CAD like AutoCad
DXF and other third-party programs).
In the file selection dialog, first select the File Format from the list box,
then select the file to be imported.
The button Options allows you to specify the import options depending on
the selected file format (see further below in this chapter).
The files are imported by clicking the OK button.
Manual
File Formats
6.2
6.2
6.2
Chapter 6 Import
Importing
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
Import Options
6.3
6.3 1
Import Options
After clicking the Options button on the Open File dialog, you can specify a desired coordinate transformation and, for some file formats like AtlasGis, DXF, and SICAD, enter information concerning layer IDs and the
limits.
CadnaA makes use of the geometrical object types: point, open and closed
lines (see Chapter 10 Topography). If any object to be imported does not

comply with the geometrical object types under CadnaA like, e. g., an
open polygon being imported as an area source it will always be interpreted as an auxiliary polygon, which means it will be irrelevant for the
acoustical calculations. In such a case, you would have to select the Convert to command from the context menu (see chapter 5.7) to convert the
auxiliary polygon to an object of the desired type.
If you intend to import data from third-party programs, we recommend you ensure that the object types conform to the geometrical
object types under CadnaA.
CadnaA may interpret imported points as, e.g., point sources, height
points, crossing lights or tennis balls or imported lines as line sources, roads, railways or barriers etc.
Manual
6.3
Chapter 6 Import
Import Options
Manual
Chapter 6.3 Import Options

6.3.1
6.3.1 1
The Import|Options|Layer dialog serves to identify layers of the imported data with the pertinent object types. You can Save the allocation list to
a file for re-use (Open). CadnaA will interpret all lines belonging to one
layer as objects of the type allocated to that layer in the list.
In order to allocate object types to layers, double-click the pertinent row.

In the Import: Layer dialog, enter the names of the layers containing the
geometry data of the object type in question or select them from a layer
list. A layer list could exist, e.g., in a DXF file if this attribute has been saved as well. In any case you have to know the layer names.
Manual
6.3.1

If several layers are to be identified by common character strings, you can

also use wildcards, such as *, to substitute arbitrary strings (see chapter
2.8).
6
Example:
6.3.1
Roads A through F are on layer STR1, roads G through M on layer STR2.

You can import all of the roads A through M at once by entering STR* in
the Import: Layer dialog for the object type Road.
If roads A through F were to lie on layer STR1, and roads G through M on
layer ROAD, roads A through M could also be imported all at once by entering STR1|ROAD (i. e. STR1 "or" ROAD) in the Import: Layer dialog for
the object type Road.
This "allocation list" can be saved to a file for subsequent re-use by clicking the Save AS button, and can be opened again (Open button) as required.
The data will be imported after confirming with OK.
Manual
6.3.2 1

6.3.2
If you activate Import only Section in the Import|Options dialog, you

must have defined at least one Section with a unique identifier (see chapter
13.10), which can be selected from the list. In this case you can only import from the file the data which lie within an area which coordinates are
identical with the coordinates of the selected Section.
Import only Section
If you enter a value > 0 in the field plus Border (m) then objects surrounding the sections with the specified distance are imported additionally.
plus Border
This option is very convenient in that it can save you a lot of memory by
importing only the area you actually need from a file of many megabytes.
Objects lying within the Section, and extending beyond it, will also be imported. If necessary, delete them using the context menu (see chapter 5.7)
Modify Objects|Action: Delete. You may need to use the Break Lines
and/or Break Areas command from the context menu before deleting.
An area imported using the above option.
You have a large project file in which you have to make an expert report
about a small area in detail. You only want to import that area in question.
Manual
Example
6.3.2
6.3.2
ImportArea.cna

Open the example file. This contains a Section frame named Test
Area (a name is mandatory!). Now, only in this area, shall objects be
imported from another file - Demo1.cna.
The file ImportArea.cna contains only a Section frame in the edit dialog you can see the name and the coordinates of the frame.
Select File|Import|File format: CadnaA and afterwards the file to

be imported from - in our example Demo1.cna in your program folder.
Manual

6.3.2 3
Then click on the Option button and set the parameter as in the
following figure.
Import options available with the file format CadnaA
In the list box you can see all the identified Sections. Select one by clicking on its name.
After confirming all dialogs the objects placed in the target area will be
imported in the Section frame. As you may see, all objects which affect
respectively protrude the area will be imported, too. If necessary, these
objects have to be broken on the border of the Section frame and deleted
outside this area as follows:
Convert the Section frame into another closed polygon as an auxiliary area, e.g., in an area source (with the Section frame, lines or areas
cannot be broken). Therefore mark the object with a RIGHT mouse
click and select Convert to from the context menu.
Afterwards mark the converted object with the RIGHT mouse click
again and select one after the other Break Lines and Break Areas
from the context menu again.
Manual
6.3.2

If you now click on the objects outside the auxiliary area they will be
marked independently of the original complete object. Also buildings
are divided, but not Bitmaps. Bitmaps have to be trimmed separately
in a graphic program.
Once more mark with a RIGHT mouse click the border of the auxiliary area and select from the context menu Modify Objects|Action:
Delete.
Activate the corresponding options as shown in the following figure.

After confirming with OK the concernd objects will be deleted.
At the end you may update the limits (Options|Limits|Calc).
Manual

If you define an additional border area to be imported, objects within this

area will also be imported. This may be necessary if you want to calculate
a noise map for the section and if you must consider the noise impact from
sources and other objects outside the section.
6.3.2 5
Border Aera
6.3.2
Manual
6.3.2

Manual

6.3.3
6.3.3 1
If the function Select Object Type in menu File|Import|Options is available you may choose which object type you want to import from the file.
Multiple choice is possible.
Manual
6.3.3

Manual

6.3.4
6.3.4 1
The transforming of objects and/or complete projects is a strong aid und

distinguishes CadnaA in a special way.
When files are imported, differences in the coordinate systems may have
to be taken into account. Therefore the possibility of coordinate transformations exists in all available import formats of CadnaA.
Import files from thirdparty programs

6.3.4
But maybe you want to duplicate and/or displace a group of objects in

your project or just simply rotate a building - this can also be done easily
with the coordinate transformation. In this case use the function from the
context menu (see chapter 5.7) Modify Object|Action: Transformation.
Duplicate, displace,
rotate, distort objects6.3.4
For the coordinate transformation several possibilities are available:
Rotation and Displacement

Match Points
Affine Transformation
General Transformation
Calculated grids and bitmap files cannot be transfered with this function.
Manual
6.3.4
Rotation and
Displacement
Example:

6.3.4
Enter the coordinates of the pivot, the angle of rotation and the displacements in the x, y and z directions. The rotation about the specified pivot is
performed first, the displacements follow in the three directions. The pivot
is a pair of co-ordinates to be imported from the project.
122,17/41,61 are the coordinates of one corner of a building belonging to
the project being imported. This is the pivot. With the data in the dialog
below, the imported project is rotated about that point by 45, and displaced by 100 m to the right and by 100 m upwards.
Manual

The coordinate transformation option Match Points allows an easy reuniting of project files with different coordinate systems. If you enter the existing coordinates for all three points and the new coordinates for the
transformation you also can get a correction of the project file.
6.3.4 3
Match Points
6.3.4
In the edit boxes x-old/y-old insert the current coordinates of the corresponding points and in the edit boxes x-new/y-new the prospective coordinates of these points, which should be valid after the transforming.
Inserting the coordinates x-old, y-old und x-new, y-new
for one point - a simple offset occurs
for two points - in general, an offset, a rotation and a scaling occurs

(angle remained)
for three points - in general, an offset, a rotation, scaling and a bending

(not angle remained) occurs
Enter in the x/y-old boxes the still currently valid coordinates of the corresponding polyon points from the file to be imported and in the x/y-new boxes the coordinates for these points which should be valid after the import.
Manual
6.3.4

Hint for Professionals: After enforced transformation you may see

the displacement vector in the transformation matrix if you open the
transformation dialog again and activate the option Affine Transformation.
6.3.4
6.3.4
Example
Match Point
6.3.4
The displacement vector in the transformation matrix after transformation
Try this effect with the help of the file Demo1.cna. From three different
objects pick out one coordinate pair in each case. For there open the Geometry dialog of the corresponding polygon point and write down the coordinates x and y. For these coordinates you now have to determine the
new coordinates. Point with the mouse cursor on the place in your project
where the polygon point should be after the translation and look up the values in the status bar.
Click with the Right mouse button on an empty area in your file and
select Modify Object from the context menu.
In the dialog which has been opened activate All objects and confirm
with OK.
In the transformation dialog activate Match Points and enter the old
and new coordinates.
Activate the option Keep Original to see the difference. In this case a
copy of the entire project will be generated.
Manual

A rotation and/or a scaling is specified by the coefficients of the transformation matrix.
6.3.4 5
Affine
Transformation
6.3.4
If all objects of the imported file are to be rotated by an angle of about

the coordinate zero of the file, the values of the matrix result from:
x
y
cos
=
sin
neu
neu
sin x

cos y
To specify a displacement along an axis, enter the offsets of x and y.
The example above results in a 90 counterclockwise

rotation about the coordinate zero, which, after importing,
corresponds to point (10,20).
Manual
6.3.4
General
Transformation

6.3.4
When this option is selected, every new value of the three dimensions,
xnew, ynew, and znew can be assigned an arbitrary nexus of the values of
the three coordinates of the old system. This allows arbitrary distortions,
reflections, and other modifications.
The following transformation generates a rectangle that is parallel to its
axes and transforms it into a parallelogram which is shifted to smaller values of the y-coordinate by 500 m.
Check this out yourself: Draw a rectangle
Then either
Save the file and afterwards File New, Import|Options|Transformation or not touching an object
Modify Objects|Action: Transformation and maybe Keep Original.

(If you dont see the new object then change your scale!)
Manual

Delete polygon points depending on their height z

With the general transformation dialog you may also delete polygon points
from lines and areas depending on a user-defined height of the polygon
points.
6.3.4 7
Delete and interpolate
height of polygon points
This function may be useful for objects which have some points with a
height of zero while the other ones have heights greater than zero and, moreever, the distances to each other are very small. This may happen with a
file imported from a third party program.
With contour lines for e.g. you would have a very jagged digital terrain
model. In this case you may purge these objects by defining a formula in
the z-coordinate field as follows:
iif(z==0,del,z)
(if the height is 0, then delete that point, otherwise do not alter the height).
Of course you may enter a different value for zero. After confirming with
OK the affected points are deleted.
Interpolation of the height z
Instead of deleting the points if their z-heights are not desired, you may interpolate the z-height, depending on the next corresponding z-height and
the distance of these points, with the formula as follows:
iif(z==0,int,z)
Of course you may enter a different value for zero as well. After confirming with OK the affected points are interpolated.
Manual
6.3.4
Duplication by
Transformation

6.3.4
If you want to transfer and simultanously duplicate several and/or different

objects you may also accomplish this by Transformation. Therefore, choose Modify Object|Action: Transformation from the context menu (see
chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects").
Following a simple example with all transformation possibilities in
CadnaA.
The following figure is the starting situation. Six cylinders with point sources shall be duplicated above the existing cylinders.
The central coordinates of a cylinder will be looked up in the Geometry dialog and transcribed - in our example the lower left cylinder with x 179,03
and y 51,09.
The entire construction shall be transfered 60 m going out from the lower
left cylinder up toward the top on the y-axis. The following figure shows
the layout which should emerge after the transformation.
Manual

6.3.4 9
Layout after transformation with activated option Keep Original.
In this case the transformation is executed on the Section frame from the
context menu with Modify Object|Action: Transformation|inside polygon|Cylinder and Point sources.
When choosing this option enter in the column Translation only for the ycoordinate (middle box) 60. In this way the object will be transfered 60 m
upward. With a negativ value (- 60) the object will be transfered downward.
Manual
Rotation and
Displacement
6.3.4
10
6.3.4

Match Point
6.3.4
Affine
Transformation
6.3.4
General
Transformation
6.3.4
When choosing this option, you will need in every case the old and the
new coordinates. For our example enter, for a simple shift upward, only
for P1 old x 179,03 / y 51,09 and for new x 179,03 / y 111,09.
When choosing this option activate the checkbox Rotation/Scaling and
enter also 60 in this column for the y-coordinate.
When choosing this option for our example enter the following:
Xnew = x
Ynew = y + 60
Znew = z
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
Import Formats
6.4
6.4 1
Import Formats
With the extremly efficient interface for many third-party file formats it is
guaranteed that CadnaA users can take advantage of all availible data
sources. Because of continuous developement it cannot be excluded that a
file format has changed and therefore the corresponting data cannot be
correctly imported. It is recommended you check a file format by importing a little test file before importing big data volume.
If a file format, which is supported by CadnaA, cannot be perferctly imported or you require a file format which has not yet been implemented in
CadnaA, please let us know.
The following import formats are currently available:
Manual
6.4.1
Chapter 6.4 Import Formats

CadnaA
6.4.1
CadnaA
CadnaAs internal file format with the extension CNA. Any CadnaA file
can be imported into any other CadnaA file.
Import options:
Select object type (see chapter 6.3.3)

Import only in a Section (see chapter 6.3.2)
Manual

AutoCad-DXF
6.4.2
AutoCad-DXF
Using the DXF format to import geometry data is an option often made
use of. Many CAD programs are capable of exporting DXF files, which
means that practically all maps generated using a CAD system can be imported by CadnaA. This feature, however, is limited to geometry data
other features and parameters are not imported. If necessary, this has to be
done in a second step using the database interface (see chapter 6.5 "Import
via ODBC Interface").
CAD systems can be used in a very flexible manner. Designers are free in
their definition of objects. Buildings need not necessarily be drawn as
closed polygon. The simplest representation consists of four individual
walls (lines). Often, heights are not given, as for many maps two-dimensional representations are sufficient.
To ensure proper interpretation of the DXF data by CadnaA, observe the
following hints:
Allocate all drawing elements belonging to one acoustical object type

in CadnaA to one layer.
Prior to saving the DXF file, all those elements should be removed
from the drawing (such as lettering, structural elements etc.), which are
not required for the representation of the object in CadnaA. (A lettering, e. g., is imported as a set of vectors in many small sections. This
results in more memory being used than actually necessary, which, in
turn, slows down work with your file.).
Points, such as point sources and receiver points, are exported with x,
y, and z coordinates. When CadnaA imports them, the z co-ordinate is
interpreted as absolute height.
All lines must be saved as polygon lines.
Any object represented as a closed polygon in CadnaA (buildings, area

sources, built-up areas, foliage etc.) is to be represented by a closed
polygon line. For three-dimensional objects, such as buildings, the z
coordinate of each point means the absolute height of the roof. The
Manual
6.4.2 1
Hints for importing data

using the DXF
format
6.4.2
6.4.2

AutoCad-DXF
polygon, therefore, defines the outline of the roof area.
Save open lines such as roads, railways, line sources etc. as open polygon lines.
In the case of roads, only the axis (centre line) can be used as a DXF
element. If the axis of several tracks are saved as lines, CadnaA will
accordingly display several parallel roads. In this case, you would have
to assign to each road the width of one of the tracks, and the traffic density applicable to that track. It is therefore much simpler just to import
the main axis of the road and then specify the road cross section as a
parameter.
Our DXF format will intercept some of the individual inputs made by
CAD users. To be able to interpret a polygon as, e. g., a building, CadnaA
requires that the polygon is closed. CadnaA will therefore assume a building to be a closed polygon, although its walls, in the CAD system, are represented by individual lines with, however, identical first and last points
(which, a priori, is not a closed polygon). If the pertinent layer name is given, the polygon is then imported as a building.
Block saving is also supported by the CadnaA DXF format, and the objects are processed accordingly.
see also chapter 11.6.5 Closing Buildings
File extension DXF 6.4.2
File names in DXF format have the extension DXF.
Import Options
6.4.2
Use Object Heights for

Polylines
Object layer (see chapter 6.3.1)

Import only in a Section (see chapter 6.3.2)
Use Object heights for Polylines
Import Blocks as Points
Import DXF-Handle as Name
With the activated option CadnaA adds the z-height and the object height
from the DXF file, and defines this height as object height in CadnaA.
Manual
6.4.2 3

AutoCad-DXF
In a CAD program the layer of an object is, e.g., defined by 15 m, the object height by 20 m. This is in CadnaA an object height of 35 m, absolute.
Example
With the activated option for the DXF-Import only, the "Insertion points"
of the blocks will be imported.
Import Blocks as Points
In a CAD program if height points are drawn as crossing lines and defined
as block, CadnaA will import crosses instead of intersection points if the
option is deactivated.
Example
Sometimes DXF files contain identifiers (ID) so-called Handle. Importing these in CadnaA is only useful if you also want to import interconnected parameters located in a separate database. The ID is the connecting
element between the graphic objects from the DXF file and the parameters
from the database (see chapter 6.5 "Import via ODBC Interface").
Import DXF-Handle
as Name
So, activate this option if the mentioned condition is to be fulfilled.

After importing the DXF file the Handle is entered automaticly in the Name box in the object dialog. Before you merge the data from a database via
the ODBC interface you have to hand over the Handle from the Name
into the ID box of CadnaA.
For that, use the command from the context menu Modify Object|Swap
Name/ID.
Swap Name/ID
Following a DXF import example in which two height references are contained in a file.
Example
Following situation: you get a DXF file in which are saved buildings with
two heights - the base point height and the object height.
DXF Import with

two heights
The base point height shall be imported for the digital terrain modell
(DTM) as contour lines.
The following procedure is started with File|Import|File format|AutoCad DXF:
Manual
6.4.2
6.4.2

AutoCad-DXF
The DXF file has to be imported twice with the below mentioned option
settings.
Contour line - Layer: e.g. xyz (or more layer names which include buildings, too - e.g. xyz|zyx|micky. . . .)
1. Import action
Aux. Polygon - Layer: *

Option: Use Object height for Polylines - not activated!
6
Close the dialog with OK - the file will be imported.

2. Import action:
6.4.2
Building - Layer: xyz

Contour lines - No import!
Aux. Polygon - No import!
Option: Use Object height for Polylines now activated
Close the dialog with OK - the file will be imported.
Manual

AutoCad-DXF
6.4.2 5
Thats it.
But there are probably too many contour lines imported with a slight
height difference which is surely not useful. If necessary, thin the contour
line model by deleting them or eliminate polygon points from the contour
lines with the function Modify Objects|Action: Simplify Geometry from
the context menu (see chapter 5.7.11) or generate new contour lines by
calculating a ground model (see chapter 10.8).
Manual
6.4.2

AutoCad-DXF
Manual

ArcView
6.4.3
6.4.3 1
ArcView
ArcView files are shape files which were generated as exported files from
the ESRI company's Geographic Information System (GIS) using ArcView or ArcInfo software.
Possible import options:
Object Layer (see chapter 6.3.1)

The GIS system is based on layers and themes. These themes are labelled
and contain objects to be specified by the user. The themes "Buildings.shp", e. g., might comprise all buildings in a city, or "Traffic Systems.shp" might include all roads.
Via the ArcView format, CadnaA is capable of exporting shape files and
importing these files, while at the same time allocating the GIS objects to
the appropriate CadnaA objects by entering the themes in the allocation
list (Options button).
Lines (ISO-dB) and areas with equal sound sources (noise map) and the
calculated receiver grid can also be exported to ArcView or ArcInfo. Data
exchange with the ArcView GIS system is thus guaranteed.
In total you will get three files with the same name but different extensions:
the shape file with the extension shp which comprises the geometrical object data;
the database file with the extension dBf with object attributes like,
e.g., object height, MDTD of a road (Mean Daily Traffic Density),
SCS/Distance of a road (Standard Cross Section) or the sound emission
level etc.;
and a so-called index file with the extension shx.
For the importation, these files have to be placed together in the same directory.
Manual
6.4.3

ArcView
In the dialog Import Options enter the theme/file name without the extension shp as the layer name for the appropriate object type. The data
being imported is then allocated to that object type under CadnaA.
Clicking OK closes the dialog and imports the data.
Example Import of
Objects
6.4.3
Example of an import from ArcView into CadnaA:

You have at least three ArcView files in the Shape format (*.shp, *.shx,
*.dBf) and they are all in the same folder.
Within CadnaA import the shp-file with File|Import|File format: Arc
View. This file type comprises the geometrical object references.
After clicking the Option button you may allocate the ArcView files to the
appropriate object types by inputing the file names (themes) in the corresponding layer boxes. You may import several files simultanously.
Mark, if necessary, by multiple choice (see chapter 4.10 "Mouse Buttons"), the files you would like to import.
Afterwards click on the Option button.
Manual
6.4.3 3

ArcView
Enter the ArcView file name without the extension shp and - very
important - with an asterisk (*) behind the filename in the corresponding object type of the layer boxes. The data will be imported after
confirming and closing all dialogs with OK.
In this example data is being imported which is found in the files named
bahn-lin.shp and str-lin.shp.
During importation a code, a combination from the name of the shape file
(e.g. bahn-lin) and the record number (e.g. 001, 002, 003 etc.), will be assigned to the objects automatically and displayed in the ID box in the object
edit dialog in, thus "bahn-lin001", bahn-lin002 etc.
Automatic ID
definition
If further object parameters are available e.g. SCS/Distance of a road,

MDTD or also the building height, if this attribute has not already been
imported from the shp-file, they usually will be simultanously exported
into the file with the dBf extension. You may also import this data into
CadnaA via the ODBC interface (see chapter 6.5).
Parameter importation
via ODBC interface
In this case you have to assign, among others, the Attribute ID to (table+recno) from the Table Column list in order to merge the attributes
with corresponding objects with the matching IDs.
Match ID
Manual
6.4.3

ArcView
Swap Name/ID
If the ArcView dBf-file contains a different ID which you want to use you
may import this ID temporarily in the object field Name and swap the Name with the ID after importing it with the function from the context menu
Modify Object|Action: Swap Name/ID (see chapter 5.7.1).
Bitmap files
If Bitmap files also being delivered by ArcView, and if they are geo referenced, you may import these files with the file format Bitmap without having to calibrate them again.
Manual

Atlas GIS
6.4.4
6.4.4 1
Atlas GIS
The extension of the file format AtlasGis is BNA.

Import options:

Import only in Section (see chapter 6.3.2)
6
Manual
6.4.4

Atlas GIS
Manual

Sicad Files
6.4.5
6.4.5 1
Sicad Files
The allocation of the imported data to the object types is managed by the
layer names in CadnaA (see chapter 6.3.1). The layers in Sicad format are
called levels.
When doing so, please note:
You may enter four different parameters for one layer name. These four
parameters are written in capital letters so as to be separated from each
other for better alignment as follows:
Parameter
Explanation
Example
Level no.
E3
Line Style
M1
Line width
S5
Element type
KR = Circle, LI =
Line
A possible entry in the layer column in CadnaA would be:

E15M1S7TKR
If necessary, references concerning a coordinate transformation may be
entered.
Manual
6.4.5

Sicad Files
Manual

EDBS
6.4.6
6.4.6 1
EDBS
The EDBS file format is a standard file format in many surveying-offices.

Importation options:

Import only in Section (see chapter 6.3.2)
6
Manual
6.4.6

EDBS
Manual

WINPUT-DGM Files
6.4.7
WINPUT-DGM Files
The WINPUT-DGM file is a special Ascii file format which either contains coordinates of height points (one x-y-coordinate pair per row) or contour lines (more then one x-y-coordinate pair per row). The data can be
directly imported as a digital terrain model in CadnaA.
When calculating the sound propagation, ground attenuation and screening
will also be taken into account for height points if Triangulation is choosen for the terrain model in Calculation|Configuration|TGM (see chapter 12.4.7).
Manual
6.4.7 1
Height Points
6.4.7
6.4.7

WINPUT-DGM Files
Manual

Stratis
6.4.8
6.4.8 1
Stratis
Stratis is a program system for road construction and civil engineering by

RIB company .
To export data from STRATIS and import it into CadnaA the following
formats are recommended for the corresponding objects:
in STRATIS
in CADNAA
Object
Export format
Import format
Roads
Soundplan SCA-file
Stratis
Contour lines
Soundplan SCA-file
Stratis
Dam-/Embankment lines
Soundplan SCA-file
Stratis
Build up Area
DXF
DXF
If necessary refer to the STRATIS manual for the mentioned export formats.
For better understanding open the example file Sca_hl.cna in

CadnaA and import the file S1.sca with File|Import|File format
STRATIS.
After a STRATIS file with road axis and embankment has been imported
within a CadnaA project with an existing terrain model. It had been necessary to delete the existing contour lines between road and embankment
base line by hand. This procedure is now automated to some extent.
Manual
Sca_hl.cna and S1.sca
6.4.8

Stratis
Example: terrain model with imported road and embankment base line from Stratis
When importing in CadnaA a closed auxiliary polygon is automatically

laid over the imported embankment base line of the road. If you open its
edit dialog with a double-click you can look up the identifier STRASSENRAUM in the ID box.
Close the edit dialog again and open with the RIGHT mouse key the context
menu of this auxililary polygon.
click on the command Break Lines and
again in the context menu Modify Object.
Choose the following in the opening dialog:
Action: Delete
the options inside and on the border of the polygon
and from the object list Contour Lines
Manual

Stratis
6.4.8 3
Modify Object from the context menu of the auxiliary polygon
After confirming with OK click on the button All in the next dialog.
After deleting the contour lines between road and embankment base line.
Now all contour lines are deleted including the embankment base line.
Manual
6.4.8

Stratis
Afterwards also delete the auxiliary polygon and the road, then
import the road again.
Manual

MapInfo
6.4.9
6.4.9 1
MapInfo
The import format MapInfo (MapInfo Corporation, USA) enables the

importing of so-called MIF files (Ascii) which contain the geometrical references for objects like, e.g., building coordinates.
The generally supplied Ascii data file with the extension MID contains
further parameters like, e.g., object height, MDTD, or road distances etc.
which you may import via the ODBC database interface (see chapter
6.4.9).
If this is a big file, open it in Excel or ACCESS first and save it again as
XLS or mdB format. If possible use an Excel driver or something else but
not a Ascii driver. Ascii-ODBC drivers work very slowly if the data volume is big.
How many columns and which kind of data these files contain can be
looked up in the third supplied file with the extension TAB. The column
headings are usualy missing in the MID file because this reference is included in the TAB file.
If necessary adapt the new saved file accordingly: In the first row write the
column headings, delete columns which are not needed etc. Use this adopted file for the import via the ODBC database interface.
Import options:

Manual
6.4.9

MapInfo
Manual

Import / Export of Tables listing number of Trains
6.4.10 1
6.4.10 Import / Export of Tables listing number

of Trains
Data on number of trains can be imported from text-files. During import it
has to be specified whether the data imported shall be copied to locally defined railway tracks or to library on number-of-trains.
The parameters have to be separated by TABs. The name of the track or of
the train list are in the first row (NOT=Number of Trains):
1. row:
name of track or train list
2. row:
Train_Type|NOT_Day|NOT_Evening|NOT_Night|Speed|...
Train_Length|Percentage_Disc_Brakes|Correction_Dfz|Selection_Train
3. row:
(empty line)
Remark: The last two parameters are just required for the German
calculation model (Schall 03). For all other methods these parameters
shall be zero.
Manual
6.4.10

Import / Export of Tables listing number of Trains
Manual
6.4.11 1

Special Formats
6.4.11 Special Formats

The import of Bitmaps only works correctly if the option BITMAP is
purchased (see see chapter 14.3.
Bitmap
6.4.11
With this import format (Deutsche Telekom MobilNet GmbH) you can import buildings and ArcView-Terrain-Grid.
T-Mobil
6.4.11
The file extension can vary, so that they cannot be used as a file filter in the
import dialog.
Import options:
6.4.11
Special format from the program SLIP by Grolimund & Petermann AG,
Switzerland
Slip
6.4.11
Special Scandinavian file format.
SOSI
6.4.11
Special format for the environmental protection agency Lower Saxony.
Niedersachsen
6.4.11
United Kingdom National Transfer Format
NTF
6.4.11
Data interchange between programs for the calculation of sound propagation according to DIN 45687: Software products for the calculation of the
sound propagation outdoors Quality requirements and test conditions,
Juni 2004, Beuth-Verlag.
QSI
6.4.11
Import of complete project data of the program MITHRA - only possible if

the option Cadna-MITHRA is purchased.
MITHRA
6.4.11
Manual
6.4.11

Special Formats
Manual

6.4.12 1
6.4.12 Third-Party Programs

With this format, files from the program LIMA by Ingenieurgesellschaft
Stapelfeld are imported.
Lima-Files
6.4.12
The files can have different file extensions like, e.g., ert, hge, ind,
spo, nut etc. and therefore cannot be used as a file filter for choosing
the files in the import dialog.
You can import all kinds of files simultanously with multiple choice.
With this format, files from the program SoundPlan by Braunstein and
Berndt are imported.
6
SoundPlan-Files (formerly Schallplan) 6.4.12
These files have no consistent extension and therefore cannot be used as a

file filter in the import dialog.
You can import all kind of files simultanously with multiple choice.
The ground heights are also imported from SoundPlan files (Geometry dialog|Option absolute Height/Ground at every point)
CadnaA imports SoundPlan receiver points as follows:
If SoundPlan receiver points are assigned to Reflex files, the option

Use next building will be activated in CadnaA automatically. This affects
the searching for buildings within 1,5 meters of the receiver point and assigns it the ground height of the next building facade. If no building is
found, the terrain model is evaluated.
If the receiver points arent assigned to any Reflex files, the control line
IHM will be appraised: The base at the receiver point will then be IHM under the Z-height (therefore the option Input of Value will be activated automatically). In case the IHM is not specified the standard of 2,8 m will be
applied.
Manual
Peculiarity
6.4.12
6.4.12

Manual

6.4.13 1
6.4.13 Building Height Points

Use this ASCII format to import building heights previously exported
from CadnaA using the export function of the same name, or obtained as a
separate file from the surveyor's office or the like. It may happen, however, that the file received shows the ground plans of the buildings and,
within these ground plans, points which merely provide information on the
height of these buildings. In the latter case, you will wish to allocate the
heights of these points to the respective buildings as easily as possible.
This can be managed by means of the File Import/Export function Building Height Points.
The ASCII file contains points with x-y-z coordinates which would lie within a building
ground plan. When importing, only the z-coordinates are considered, and the height is allocated to that building in whose ground plan the respective point lies.
Manual
6.4.13

It may happen that you adopt building ground plans from an automated
real-estate map where no height information is supplied. The heights
would then have to be determined in some way or another (e. g. by means
of local inspection or aerial survey, etc.).
Having determined the heights, possibly at great expense, and allocated
them manually to the buildings in your CadnaA file, you will of course
wish to keep the height information even if the building ground plans are
updated.
6
So before transcribing your building ground plans, first export the building
heights using the export format File|Export|Building Height Points, and
save them to an ASCII file by specifying a name.
Having updated your building ground plans, just re-import the heights previously exported using the function of the same name.
At the time of printing the manual, the format still had to be activated
by an entry in the Cadnaa.ini file. So if you do not find the entry
"Building Height Points" in your format list, please add the following
lines to your Cadnaa.ini. The format will then appear on the respective lists for selection.
[ImpExp]
Import=hhpkt
Export=hhpkt
Manual

Ascii-Poly
6.4.14 1
6.4.14 Ascii-Poly
This Ascii format enables the importation of open or closed polylines with
several x-, y- and z-coordinates.
The format has three columns with or without a heading and separated
with TAB. One or two empty rows mark the begin of a new polygon (two
returns). Use a decimal point instead of comma.
The polygon will be imported as closed or open Auxiliary polygons . If
necessary convert these to the desired CadnaA object (see chapter
5.7.14).
The starting position is an Ascii-file with the extension TXT. If you have
only a MS-Excel file save it as Ascii file separated with TAB. The polygon
lines shall be contour lines.
6
Example
Import of Lines
Contourlines.txt
In CadnaA choose File|Import|File format: Ascii-Poly, select the corresponding file and confirm the importation.
Manual
6.4.14

Ascii-Poly
The open polylines will be imported automatically as Auxiliary polygons.

If you cannot see anything after the importation click on the icon Zoom to
Limits. Now convert the Auxiliary polygons into Contour lines. Therefore click with the right mouse key on a free spot in your graphics and select from the context menu Modify Objects|Action: Convert to. Select
the object type Auxiliary polygon and confirm with OK. In the following
dialog Convert Objects to select Contour Lines and confirm with OK
again. With that the polygons are converted into contour lines.
Example
Import of Areas
Starting position is a Ascii-File with the extension TXT with three columns separated with TAB and the individual polygons separated with one
or two empty rows each. Pay attention on the decimal digits, they must be
separated with a dot. The column headers will not be utilized. The closed
polygons shall be Foliage.
Manual

Ascii-Poly
6.4.14 3
Areazones.txt
In CadnaA choose File|Import|File format: Ascii-Poly, select the corresponding file and confirm the importation.
The polylines will be imported automatically as closed Auxiliary polygons.
Manual
6.4.14

Ascii-Poly
If you cannot see anything after the importation click on the icon Zoom to
Limits. Now convert the Auxiliary polygons into Foliage. Therefore
click with the right mouse key on a free spot in your graphics and select
from the context menu Modify Objects|Action: Convert to. Select the
object type Auxiliary polygon and confirm with OK. In the following dialog Convert Objects to select Foliage and confirm with OK again. With
that the polygons are converted.
see also chapter 10.7 Import Ascii-File as Height Points.
6
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
6.5
6.5 1
With CadnaA menu File|Database you may import data from different
data sources via ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) in your project file.
Via this interface you may also import coordinates for geometrical object
points in CadnaA like point sources, tennis sources and crossing lights.
For line or area shaped objects in CadnaA you have to import the geometry from a geografical information system (GIS) like, e.g., AtlasGis, Winput DGM (Digitales Terrain Model), MapInfo or as DXF format (6.4
Import Formats). In this case you have to link the geometrical objects with
their data to their ID (see chapter 5.5.3) to match the right data.
Which objects, or which object data, you may import via the ODBC interface can be infered from the menu File|Database|Definition|Object typs.
If you wish to access the database interface, make sure the desired ODBC
drivers are installed properly on your system. They are not necessarily installed during a default Windows software setup. As a rule, however, this
can be done later by means of a setup program. Please refer to your software manual to find out whether an ODBC interface is available for your
database program. Such an interface is available for MS Access, dBase,
Excel, Paradox, FoxPro, Oracle, etc., to name only a few.
The Control Panel of your system (Main Group in the Program Manager) usually tells you if ODBC drivers are installed on your system, or database connections have been set up.
If necessary, double-click the pertinent icon and install the desired drivers,
or configure database connections.
Manual
6.5
Chapter 6 Import
In other words: It is not sufficient just to have the drivers on your system.
The database with the table from which you wish to adopt the parameters
must also be configured (assign the ODBC driver to the desired database).
Only then will the selected data source appear on the list.
ODBC data source administrator started in the program manager|main group
The displayed dialogs may deviate from yours. They depend on the
installed ODBC version. In that case proceed analogously or look it
up your Windows manual.
You can then access this list under CadnaA by selecting File|Database|Definition. But you also may connect your database in CadnaA directly with that menu function.
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
6.5 3
ODBC data source dialog started in CadnaA File|Database|Definition
First, select the data source in the Database dialog by clicking the card index icon. Then click the data source corresponding to your database. In
our example, this is an Excel file named EXCEL1 (data source). Then close the dialog by clicking OK.
In this Excel file, a section named "Road" (database table) was defined,
containing the road parameters to be imported. This table the pertinent
section of the Excel file is now accessible.
Next, before selecting a table from the specified database, select the object
type ("Road" in our example) for which the parameters are to be imported.
Then click the Import Object Type check box and select the table from
the Table list box.
Manual
6.5
Chapter 6 Import
Then double-click in the Attribute column in the Assign Column section

that row for which data exists, and click the pertinent column name of the
selected database table to allocate it to the object attribute in CadnaA.
You always have to import the object geometry first before you can link
the pertinent object parameter. The connective element between the geometry and the data is therefore the matching ID. The ID can be seen in the
object edit dialog (see chapter 5.5.1) or in the corresponding tables. If necessary, allocate the ID with the function Change Column from the context menu in CadnaA or in the database directly.
Upon completion of the column allocation, and after closing the dialog by
clicking OK, the data can be imported using the command File|Database|Import.
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
For importing, specify whether you want to update existing objects and/or
to insert new objects. Both check boxes may be activated at the same time
but the importation may be faster if only one of the option is activated at
one time.
In chapter 2.5 Attributes and Abbreviations the attribute names are listed
each with a brief description which CadnaA uses on the Column Assign
table of the Database dialog. Where the same attribute name is used with
several object types, the explanation applies analogously.
For an Ascii import example see chapter "ODBC Import Ascii".
Manual
6.5 5
6.5
Chapter 6 Import
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 7 Digitalize
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Manual
Contents
7.1 1
7.1 Contents
7.2
Digitizer
7.3
Digitizing
7.4
Example: Digitizing a Road
7.5
Tablet Menu
Manual
7.1
Chapter 7 DigitalizeContents
Manual
7.2 1
Digitizer
7.2
Digitizer
If the digitizer has been connected to the computer and configured, you
can digitize the coordinates of all objects (sound sources, such as roads,
parking lots, railways, receiver points, buildings, etc.) directly from the
map. In doing so, you can change at any time between digitizer magnifier,
mouse, and keyboard without having to expressly switch from one to the
other.
Upon clicking the Digitizer command on the File menu, you can select the
digitizer to be used, and configure it. The digitizer menu on the icon bar is
only available when the digitizer has been connected and configured.
Select the appropriate digitizer from the Type list box. The default setting
after installation of CadnaA is "Auto": Most digitizers are automatically
recognised. Try this setting first. Only if the system does not recognise
your digitizer, select its type from the list box.
If the WINTAB driver is installed on your system, CadnaA will recognise
this. In this case, the WINTAB driver will configure the digitizer, and you
must specify the settings there.
You can check the success of the configuration before first using the digitizer (see further below in this chapter).
Manual
Type
7.2
7.2
Digitizer
Note:
Before calling our hotline, devote some attention to your digitizer's
manual, configure the interface or the options, and try out the modified settings. Please remember that most digitizers also allow settings
to be made at the device itself. The recommended settings are displayed when you click the INFO button on the Digitizer dialog. If all
else fails, we will be pleased to help you.
Interface
7.2
Once a digitizer has been selected from the list of types, all settings except
the port that remains to be selected should be correct. You can still modify
the settings. To this end, select the appropriate value on the pertinent list
box. You can check the functioning of the digitizer before first using it by
clicking the Test button.
Test
7.2
1.
Test correct co-ordinate transfer:

Continuously increasing x and y values should be displayed on the
screen while you move the magnifier in a preferably straight line
from the left to the right, across the tablet, and from the bottom to the
top of the tablet, respectively, without pressing a button.
If this is not so, the settings are not yet correct.
2.
Test the magnifier buttons:

The check boxes corresponding to Buttons 1 through 4 should be
checked when you press the respective buttons on the magnifier.
CadnaA uses buttons 1 and 4 only. Button 1 is used to select a toolbar
icon, and to position polygon points. Button 4 serves to terminate the
insertion.
Manual
Digitizer
When you press a magnifier button, the corresponding Button check

box in the dialog is activated to show you which button is button 1
and button 4 to CadnaA. The button designation need not be the
same as on the magnifier.
If, e. g., button 0 on the magnifier is pressed, and Button 1 is checked
in the dialog, button 0 on the magnifier is button 1 to CadnaA .
Manual
7.2 3
7.2
Options
Digitizer
7.2
Clicking the Options button on the Digitizer dialog opens the bottom part
of the dialog.
In case an installed digitizer fails to function properly, enter further device

parameters in the option boxes. These depend on the device used. Guidance is given in the instruction manual of your digitizer.
7
Initial
strings:
7.2
\HexHex
represents arbitrary, and also not

printable, Ascii characters like
\1b
for Esc character
\xx
pause of 0.1 sec (for some devices

necessary)
Resolution
7.2
If the resolution of the digitizer is given in Lines per inch (lpi) or Lines per
millimetre (lpmm), the dialog will display the scale of the map for checking, once the reference points have been digitized. If more than two reference points are digitized, two values are given for checking.
Info
7.2
Depending on the type of digitizer selected from the list of types, you can
click the Info button on the Digitizer dialog to find out the recommended
hardware settings on the digitizer itself. Many digitizers allow for saving
different configurations for different applications. These configurations
can then be reactivated by pushing a button. (Please refer to the instruction
manual of your digitizer.)
Manual
7.2 5
Digitizer
Upon clicking this button, a terminal program is opened showing you the
commands the digitizer sends when it is switched on. This information
may be important if a digitizer that seems to be properly configured does
not work.
Terminal
7.2
Once the digitizer test has been completed successfully, and all settings
have been made, you can start digitizing.
Manual
7.2
Digitizer
Manual
Digitizing
7.3
7.3 1
Digitizing
Use a map - one with a scale of, e. g., 1:1,000 to digitize the objects
In order to be able to digitize objects from a map, you must know either
the scale or the co-ordinates of at least two reference points on the map.
This allows you to enter or calculate the width and height (limits) of the
map in terms of coordinates.
Manual
7.3
Digitizing
At least these limits must be defined on the CadnaA Options menu. (see
Chapter 13.2 ).
In the case of the map above, the limits would be defined by the lower-left
corner, 0/0, and the upper-right corner, 308/415. This comprises the entire
map.
If you know only the scale - 1:1,000 for example - you can draw a reference line of 10 cm on the map, and enter the coordinates of its first and last
points.
With the scale as given above, the reference line is 100 m. If you were to
position this reference line at the lower-left corner of the map, you could
enter this point as having x and y coordinates 0/0. The last point of the reference line would then have the coordinates 100/0. These points would
then be the reference points for this map.
The more reference points are given - the maximum being four - the smaller the deviations in the position coordinates of the objects to be digitized.
In order to start digitizing, select the icon on the icon bar. In the dialog
which then opens, calibrate the map on the digitizer. To achieve this, you
need the reference points.
Manual
Digitizing
7.3 3
First, enter the co-ordinates of the reference points. Up to four reference

points can be entered. These can be saved in the reference point list to be
re-used when the map is needed again later.
In order to save, click the Save button, enter a name, and close the "Save
Reference Points" dialog by clicking OK.
In order to re-use saved co-ordinates, click the list box arrow and select the
pertinent name. This results in the co-ordinates being written to the edit
boxes.
The option "Enter Tablet Menu" (see further below) allows direct activation of the toolbox objects in the CadnaA main window by means of the
digitizer. To this end, activate this option.
Having entered all required data - the tablet menu and the map to be digitized are lying on the digitizer - close the "Calibrate Digitizer" dialog by
clicking OK.
Cadna now expects you to enter the corresponding reference points by
clicking them on the map using the digitizer magnifier. The reference point
co-ordinates entered are also displayed during this process.
You can use the zoom magnifiers at your convenience. If necessary, first
zoom out in order to facilitate finding the reference point, then zoom in
again on the area, so as to allow precise clicking of the point.
If the option "Enter Tablet Menu" is active, you will be prompted to enter
further reference points defining the position of this menu on the digitizer.
If under File|Digitizer|Options, the resolution of the digitizer has been
specified, CadnaA will display the scale of the map for checking as soon
as all reference points have been digitized.
Now you can start digitizing the individual objects.
Please note: When inserting objects by digitizing, you can choose
to start by entering all co-ordinate points belonging to one polygon

line, and assign heights to these points afterwards, or
Manual
7.3
Digitizing
to enter the height of each polygon point immediately upon clicking it.
In this context, take a look at the following example
Manual
7.4 1
7.4
Having entered an object, switch to the Edit mode, and open the edit dialog by double-clicking. Clicking the Geometry button opens the Geometry dialog containing a coordinate table in which the heights of the points
are entered.
First Option
We want to digitize a road. The common form for documentation of a road

indicates absolute heights at specific cross sections (see the figure below).
Second Option
356.5
358.3
10
11
12
360.4
In order to properly model the curvature of a polygon, we need to enter

points between these cross sections for which the heights are indicated.
This series of points is numbered on the figure. In the example, absolute
heights are known at points 1, 7, and 12. For all other points, which are
only required to properly model the curvature, heights are interpolated.
This calculation can be performed automatically by CadnaA.
1.
After clicking the road icon or pressing CTRL+S, we digitize the first
two points.
2.
We switch to the edit mode by pressing CTRL+E.
3.
Having double-clicked the polygon line generated on the screen, we

can enter the parameters for this section.
Although you can also do this later, it is recommended we enter all
parameters immediately because CadnaA adopts these values for the
following polygon points until you enter new values. In this example,
the cross section b2 is chosen from the list.
Manual
7.4
4.
We enter all parameters. Then we click the Geometry button and

activate Enter Absolute Height At Each Point.
5.
Double-clicking on the first row of the coordinate table opens the

dialog in which we can enter additional coordinates, the center-line/
axis distance of the outermost tracks, if necessary, and the transverse
slope, if any exists.
Manual
6.
7.4 3
By either
-
skipping from one box to the next using the TAB key, or
dragging the mouse pointer over the z value with the LEFT
mouse button held down, or
double-clicking,
the current value is selected (highlighted).
7.
Enter the desired z value and, after using the TAB key, the transverse
slope, if any exists.
8.
Switch to the next point by pressing the arrow button.

It may be faster using the keyboard. The hotkey ALT+SHIFT+ >
(move forward through list) bring us to the next point where we can
immediately enter the next value in the box already selected. When
using the hotkey, we will always automatically hop to the last edited
box on the preceding record.
If we do not know the height and wish CadnaA to calculate the

unknown height, we delete the value in the z co-ordinate box using
the DEL or SPACE key. The box must be blank.
CadnaA then provides interpolated values. We can check this by re-
Manual
7.4
opening the geometry dialog when all points have been entered.
9.
We press ALT+N with the coordinate dialog still open (or we click the
New button) to create a new point.
10. Click this third point on the digitizer tablet using the digitizer magnifier. The coordinates in the active dialog are updated (when a new
point is created, its x and y coordinates are set to 0/0).
11. Enter the height of the third point from the keyboard, or delete it (the
value on the Height box is already selected).
7
12. Proceed as from 10. ....ALT+N .... etc. until all points have been digitized.
If a track distance and/or a transverse slope is given in the Geometry

table, the program will adopt these values for all following polygon
points until we insert a new value. All subsequent points are then
assigned the new value. For those points, for which the preceding
value applies, no value is listed on the table.
Consequently, when calculating, the preceeding value is taken into
account for an empty box in the table in the column Distance (m)
and Slope (%).
Manual
Tablet Menu
7.5
7.5 1
Tablet Menu
The tablet menu consists of the toolbox icons which are suitable for digitizing.
7
CadnaA Tablet menu
The file TABMENU.BMP on the CD-ROM contains these icons. You can
open and print this file using an appropriate application (such as PAINT or
PAINTBRUSH from the Windows accessories group). Put this hard copy
on your tablet. This allows you to switch to the desired mode and to select
the appropriate object by means of the digitizer magnifier on the tablet instead of using the mouse pointer on the screen. The reference points P1,
P2, and P3 of the tablet menu must be clicked when the digitizer is calibrated (see above in this chapter).
Manual
7.5
Tablet Menu
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 8 Sources
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 8 Sources
Manual
Chapter 8 Noise Sources

Contents
8.1 1
8.1 Contents
8.2
General and Special Sources
8.3
Point Source
8.4
Line Source
8.5
Area Source
8.6
The Edit Dialog of a Source
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
8.6.6
8.6.7
8.6.8
A-weighted Emission Value

normalised A
Emission Spectrum
Sound Reduction Sound Radiation from Building Facades
Sound-radiating Area (m)
Attenuation
Operating Time
Ko without Ground
8.7
Directional Sound Radiation
8.7.1

or Stacks with directivity
Sound Radiation from Building Elements and Openings According to AL
Frequency-dependent Directivity, General
8.7.2
8.7.3
Manual
8.1

Contents
8.8
Tennis Point of Serve
8.9
Roads
8.9.1
8.9.2
8.9.3
8.9.4
8.9.5
8.9.6
8.9.7
8.9.8
Specification of Road Widths

Lateral Slope
Emission in dB(A)
Traffic Density
Speed Limit (km/h)
Road Surface
Road Gradient (%)
Correction for Multiple Reflections
8.10
Crossings with Traffic Lights
8.11
Long Straight Roads
8.12
Railways
8.12.1
8.12.2
8.12.3
8.12.4
8.12.5
Emission Level dB(A)

Train Classes
Train Classes User-defined
Traffic-Count Calculator
Purge Lists of Numbers-of-Trains
8.13
Parking Places
8.14
Pass-by Levels for Line Sources with

the Noise Levels Time History
8.15
Optimized Area Sources
8.16
CadnaA-SET Option
Manual
8.2 1

8.2
In the calculation CadnaA is capable of taking into account the emissions

of general sources (see there) in combination with single-number or frequency-dependent values. After a frequency-dependent calculation, the
rating level or the respective evaluation parameters (see Chapter 12.4.6) at
the receiver point will also be given in frequency bands.
General Sources
Spectra are entered in the local or global libraries (see Chapter 16.2), and
are referred to in the edit dialog of the source by entering their ID (see
Chapter 5.5.3). Spectra may have different weightings.
Special sources, such as
Roads (see Chapter 8.9)

Railways (see Chapter 8.12)
Parking Places (see Chapter 8.13)
Traffic Lights (see Chapter 8.10)
Tennis Serve Points (see Chapter 8.8)
require either an input of an emission value (Lme) or other parameters

from which the emission value is calculated (parameters, e.g., such as
MDTD, counts, speeds, or train classes). These parameters are usually
necessary according to the selected guideline or standard.
For the insertion of objects, please refer to chapter 5.3 "Insert Objects".
The general sources like
Point, (see Chapter 8.3)

Line (see Chapter 8.4) and
Area Sources (see Chapter 8.5), horizontal and vertical,
can be used to simulate various noise sources, including the sound radiation from buildings. They can also have a directional sound ratiation (see
Chapter 8.7).
By specifying an object snap (see Chapter 13.5), the point and vertical area
sources are placed at a user-defined distance in front of the building fa-
Manual
Special
Sources
8.2
8.2

cade. This serves to prevent any source from erroneously being placed inside a building.
For an explanation of the parameters, see Chapter 8.6 "The Edit Dialog of
a Source"
Manual

Point Source
8.3
8.3 1
Point Source
Position the mouse pointer and click in order to place the point source at
the desired location. The source is represented by a cross.
graphic presentation of the point source
Point sources are noise sources whose dimensions are small in comparison
to the distance from the point sources to the receiver points. Examples are
ventilation inlets and outlets, pumps, motors, and people shouting.
8
Manual
8.3

Point Source
Manual

Line Source
8.4
8.4 1
Line Source
Line sources are open polygons.

Line sources are noise sources extending in only one direction, while the
dimensions in the other two orthogonal directions are small as compared
to the distance to the receiver points. Examples are pipelines, conveyor
belts, and traffic routes on a factory site.
When performing a calculation for an receiver point, CadnaA subdivides
the line source in a two-step procedure: First, the line source is subdivided
into sections being shielded and sections not being shielded by any of the
shielding objects lying between the receiver point and the source (see
Chapter 12.2.3 "The Projection Method for extended Sound Sources").
Then, in the second step, the distance between the receiver point and each
section is determined and, if the length of a section exceeds the mandatory
distance criterion, a further subdivision is made.
Manual
8.4

Line Source
Manual
8.5 1

Area Source
8.5
Area Source
Area sources are closed polygons.

Area sources are noise sources extending in two perpendicular directions,
while the dimension in the third perpendicular direction is small in relation
to the distance from the area source to the immission points.
Area sources are plane surfaces surrounded by a closed line which you
may imagine as a fine grid of point sources. This is also what CadnaA
does during the calculation: The area is subdivided into sufficiently small
partial areas, each of which is replaced at the centre by a substitute point
source with the appropriate partial sound power.
8
Horizontal area sources are inserted by entering their horizontal projection.
Area Source
horizontal
8.5
Area Source
vertical
8.5
Examples of area sources are parking lots (see Chapter 8.13), sports facilities, and even entire industrial or commercial areas.
Vertical area sources are inserted by entering their horizontal projection as

an open polygon line.
When performing a calculation for an receiver point, CadnaA subdivides
the area source in a two-step procedure: First, the area source is subdivided
into partial areas being shielded and partial areas not being shielded by any
of the shielding objects lying between the receiver point and the source
(see Chapter 12.4.4 "Projection of:"). Then, in the second step, the distance between the receiver point and each partial area is determined and, if
the largest dimension of a partial area exceeds the mandatory distance criterion, a further subdivision is made.
Manual
8.5

Area Source
Geometric definition of the vertical area source
If, e. g., a window, as illustrated below, is to be considered as a sound-radiating area, enter the window in the horizontal projection by inserting the
vertical area source as a polygon line at a short distance in front of the facade. For a clear distinction, a distance of approximately 0.05 m is appropriate. This distance is automatically obtained by specifying it on the
Object Snap dialog (see Chapter 13.5 Options|Object Snap).
Building
Vertical area source
Vertical area source in front of a facade
Manual

Area Source
8.5 3
In the edit dialog of the vertical area source, specify the position of the top
edge under Geometry|Height. As with any other object, this height may
be given as relative or absolute value, or with respect to the roof of a building (the latter being particularly convenient when entering vents for a lantern roof). The bottom edge is then specified according to the z dimension
as illustrated.
Complicated outlines of vertical sound-radiating areas are approximated
by several rectangular areas.
For the calculation, the vertical area source is replaced by a series of line
sources with a spacing of 1 m. These are then subdivided into sections as
described above.
8
Manual
8.5

Area Source
Manual
8.6 1

8.6
The resulting sound power level for the three time periods Day | Evening |
Night is influenced by the following settings on the edit source dialog:
Type
Hz
Correction
PWL, PWL, PWL
Sound Reduction
Attenuation
Area (m)
normalised A:
8
The noise level is calculated and displayed when you enter the parameters.
The edit dialog of a point source is described below by means of an example. It is representative for all other general sources.
The only difference between a line source and an area source is that for the
line source
you may choose to enter the emission value in terms of the total sound
power level, PWL, or the sound power level per unit length (per
meter), PWL
area source, horizontal or vertical

you may choose to enter the emission value in terms of the total sound
power level, PWL, or the sound power level per unit area (per square
meter), PWL'.
If the sound power level per unit length, PWL, is entered for a line source,
or the sound power level per unit area, PWL, is entered for an area
source, the total sound power level resulting from the dimensions of the
source in question is displayed as Result PWL.
As the height of the terrain at the polygon points is not yet known when
the values are entered, this total sound power level will, if relative heights
were used, refer to the horizontal projection of the source. Consequently, it
Manual
Result PWL
8.6
8.6

is not yet correct for inclined line or area sources. During the calculation,
however, even in this case, the absolute height at the polygon points is calculated, and the correct total sound power level is determined.
Consequence: If sound power levels per unit length or unit area are
entered for inclined line or area sources whose heights were given as
relative coordinates, the total value displayed under Result PWL is
not yet correct. It will be so, however, after the first calculation.
To be able to follow the example below, you should be familiar with
the basic techniques (see Chapter 5 Basics) and

the handling of local and global libraries (see Chapter 16.2).
Manual
8.6 3

Insert a point source, and enter the values shown in the figure. Watch
the effect of single parameters being modified on the calculated emission value Result PWL.
Example: Point
Source
8.6
Enter a Name characterising the type of source. It should be a short

name because it will appear in the first column of the list of point
sources.
Also enter an ID code. This will be the actual identifier of the data
record to be refered to for different purposes, such as grouping (see
Chapter 18.2).
In the list Type we can switch between Single band and Spectrum
Choose Single band (Spectrum see Chapter 8.6.3)
Manual
Type Single band /

Spectrum
8.6
8.6

Manual
8.6.1 1
Chapter 8.6 The Edit Dialog of a Source

8.6.1
By default the following options are available depending on the source

type:
with point sources: sound power level PWL,
with line sources: sound power level PWL, sound power level per unit
length PWL' or sound power level PWL-Pt of a moving point source,
with area sources: sound power level PWL, sound power level per unit
area PWL" or sound power level PWL-Pt of a moving point source.
This box may contain a single-number value, the reference to a spectrum,

a combination of both, or even a formula.
If we select Single Band, the sound power level entered under PWL - 104
in the example - is interpreted as the total level. All frequency-dependent
calculations are performed for the frequency entered in the Hz box to the
right.
Single band
8.6.1
To consider different emissions for day-, evening- and night-time, you can
specify a Correction for each of these periods.
Correction
8.6.1
In the example, the night-time level is set to lie 10 dB(A) below the
day-time level by entering a correction of -10.
The total level resulting from all inputs - except for operating time and
K0 - which is used in the calculation of sound propagation is displayed under Result PWL.
In the PWL box you may enter a formula up to 15 characters.
If, as in the example, the Sound Reduction box is deactivated, the dialog
deals with the direct radiation of airborne sound from an outdoor source.
(See below for the radiation from buildings, which applies when the
Sound Reduction option is active.)
Manual
8.6.1

In the Sound Reduction box you may enter a formula up to 15 characters.
If a number is entered under Attenuation, this value is interpreted as the

reduction in level occurring during propagation from the point where the
sound is generated to the point of radiation. It is, therefore, reduced from
the sound power level.
In the example, a fan having a daytime sound power level of 104 dB(A)
could be equipped with a downstream silencer reducing the sound power
level by 8 dB(A).
Enter 8 in the Attenuation box, and watch the change in the Result
PWL.
You may also enter complex formulas or the ID of a spectrum in the

Attenuation box. The maximum characters you may enter are 63.
In the present case, with different attenuations, the airborne sound radiated into a duct by the fan could be attenuated by, e. g., bends, changes in the
pipe cross section, fittings, and silencers. The remaining effective portion
of sound radiated from the outlet is then described in terms of the resulting
sound power level. To simulate this, enter, for example,
8+4+3.5+2
on the Attenuation line. You could, of course, determine a single-number
value from this sum and enter this directly, but giving the details as shown
above has the advantage that the formula, and thus the individual attenuations, will be recorded in the pertinent column of the source lists.
The line will, however, cope with far more complex formulas.
Try, e. g.,
((8+4+3.5+2)++23)-19
As described for other input boxes, ++ stands for the energy-equivalent (or
level) addition, and for the level subtraction.
Manual

8.6.1 3
(see also Chapter 2.6 Operators and Functions)

To model a moving point source enter the PWL of the point source, the
number of events per hour Q and the speed (in km/h). Based on these data
the resulting sound power level PWL, and - with line sources - the sound
power level per unit length PWL', and - with area sources - the sound power level per unit area PWL'' is calculated. With area sources the speed is
not required.
Sound Power Level of a

PointSourcePWL-Pt8.6.1
Line source
PWL = PWLPt + 10 lg
Q
l
v
+ 10 lg
10 lg
30 dB
1
( m)
(km / h)
(h )
Q
v
PWL = PWLPt + 10 lg 1 10 lg
30 dB
(km / h)
(h )
Area source
PWL = PWLPt + 10 lg
Q
(h 1 )
Q
S
PWL = PWLPt + 10 lg 1 10 lg 2
(h )
(m )
Manual
8.6.2

normalised A
8.6.2
normalised A
When the checkbox normal. A: has been activated and a number has been
entered, a constant of K dB is subtracted from or added to the frequencyband levels resulting from the PWL so as to obtain that number as the total
A-weighted sound power level.
Manual

Emission Spectrum
8.6.3
8.6.3 1
Emission Spectrum
Frequency-dependent calculations show what this concept is really capable of. All input options described in see Chapter 8.6.1 "A-weighted Emission Value" apply here, too. The only difference is that you can enter the
names (ID codes) of frequency spectra instead of numbers.
Let us assume that the following entries are listed in the local library (siehe
Chapter 16 Libraries) of sound levels (Tables|Libraries (local)):
Name
ID
Type
Weight. 31.5
Test Spectrum SP_001

Compressor 1 SP_002
Li
Li
Compressor 2 SP_003
Li
63
125
Oktave Spectrum (dB)

250
500 1000 2000
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
133.9 120.7 110.6 103.1
87.0
88.0
89.0
91.0
Source
4000
8000
lin
0.0
97.7
0.0
94.5
0.0
93.3
0.0
93.5
0.0
7.0
9.5 Example
95.6 104.0 134.1 Example
90.0
89.0
89.0
86.0
84.0
95.1
98.1 Example
where the total A-weighted levels are 7, 104 and 95.1 dB(A), and the spectra of sound reduction index:
Name
ID
Oktave Spectrum (dB)

31.5
63
125
250
500
1000
Source
2000
4000
8000
Rw
Silencer
R_SD_01
Cross Section Jump R_QS_95
0.5
4.0
2.8
4.0
5.4
4.0
7.8
5.0
9.5
5.0
12.4
5.0
12.2
6.0
11.5
5.0
11.4
5.0
12 Example
6 Example
R_Flap
0.0
4.5
4.8
5.0
5.8
5.4
4.5
4.0
4.0
6 Example
R_001
To follow the example, you may find it convenient to enter these

values.
To calculate with frequency spectra,
select Spectrum in the Type box in the edit dialog of a source.
By entering in the PWL box the ID code of compressor 1, you refer to that
spectrum.
Enter the string SP_002
directly from the keyboard
Manual
8.6.3

Emission Spectrum
or first alternative
via the local library (click the card-index icon) by clicking the
second row and then OK to adopt it,
or second alternative
via the global library. (Hold the SHIFT key down before clicking
the card-index icon.)
This alternative kills two birds with one stone.
*
8
By clicking a spectrum in the global library via an edit dialog of a

source, the data record of the spectrum is copied to the local library,
and its ID code is adopted in the PWL box.
The resulting frequency spectrum should now be displayed on the little

monitor window of the point source edit dialog.
If you were to click the card-index icon again to select a different spectrum, clicking OK would result in the existing entry being overwritten.
To add a second spectrum to the first by energy-equivalent addition, i. e,.
respecting the rules of level addition, you have to hold the CTRL key down
before clicking the card-index icon. Upon selection of a spectrum, its ID
Manual
8.6.3 3

Emission Spectrum
code will be appended to the existing one with a ++ operator (which symbolises energy-equivalent level addition).
Of course, you can also enter this summing formula from the keyboard. As
you enter the formula, red colour indicates that the formula is not yet complete, or not yet in a condition that can be interpreted by CadnaA.
The monitor at the bottom right corner of the edit dialog displays the frequency spectrum. Click it to have the diagram shown with a different
weighting - Linear, A, B, C or D.
Spectrum
Montior
8.6.3
Manual
8.6.3

Emission Spectrum
Manual

Sound Reduction - Sound Radiation from Building Facades
8.6.4
8.6.4 1
Sound Reduction Sound Radiation from Building Facades
All types of general sources explained above can be used to simulate the
sound radiation from buildings. For example, you may simulate the slottype openings on all sides of a multi-storey garage (see Chapter "Modeling Multiple Storey Garages") by entering circumferential line sources.
In order to mark a building facade as a sound-radiating area, and to be able
to calculate the emission from the indoor level, activate Reduction on the
edit dialog of a sound source and enter in the pertinent box the sound reduction index in terms of a single number or the ID code of a spectrum for
a sound reduction index. All techniques for the selection of spectra from
the libraries and the handling of user-defined formulas, which were described under Point Source, apply as always.
If the checkbox Reduction is activated, but the Reduction is zero we must

enter the value 0. A sound level cannot be calculated if the field is empty.
(see Chapter 8.6.5 "Sound-radiating Area (m)")
Manual
8.6.4

Sound Reduction - Sound Radiation from Building Facades
Manual
8.6.5 1

8.6.5
For line and point sources which simulate radiating surfaces, the sound-radiating area must always be entered when the calculation is to be performed on the basis of an indoor level. To this end, click the check box,
and enter the relevant area.
For a vertical or horizontal area source, an input is only required where the
actual sound-radiating area differs from the geometrical area of the area
source.
The sound radiation from a glass facade is simulated by a vertical area
source in front of it. The massive parts of the facade, which do not radiate
sound, are accounted for by entering the area of the actual glass surfaces.
If the Area (m) check box is not activated, CadnaA considers the entire
area source in the calculation. Enter a value, if this is not desired.
Always watch the Result PWL. As long as it is set to 0, parameters

are still missing. When calculating on the basis of the indoor level,
this might be, e. g., the area or the sound reduction index.
The length (m) of the line source and the area of the area source (m) can
be seen in the Geometry dialog. For the vertical area source - drawn with
only two polygon points - this value is 0, as the area entered refers to the
horizontal projection. The area of this source can be seen after a calculation in the field Area (m) in the edit dialog.
You can specify the exact length of a line-like object (see Chapter 5.7.10).
See also Construct Building, Chapter 9.3.4 Generate a Building
Manual
Exampel
8.6.5

Manual

Attenuation
8.6.6
8.6.6 1
Attenuation
The Attenuation box also allows you to combine arbitrary spectra retrieved from the local and global libraries (see Chapter "Chapter 16 Libraries") by making reference to their ID codes. For two changes in cross
section and one silencer, the dialog could look like the one illustrated below.
Manual
8.6.6

Attenuation
Manual

Operating Time
8.6.7
8.6.7 1
Operating Time
If the check box Operating Time is not activated, no time-interval correction is taken into account. This means that the entered noise emission is
constant over the entire reference time (see Chapter 12.4.5). Recreationtime penalties are only applied if combined evaluation parameters (see
Chapter 12.4.6) are calculated like Lden, Lde, Ldn, Len.
If, on the other hand, the check box is activated when performing a calculation, the time intervals entered under Day/Recreation(Evening)/Night
are considered as the operating times of the source. In this case also a penalty is added to the level for the time period entered in the
Calculation|Configuration|Reference Time tab if the evaluation parameter is a combined value like Lden, Lde, Ldn etc.
Consequently the applied time-interval correction results from the operating times entered and the reference time defined globally under the calculation configuration. This gives you sufficient flexibility to apply any
method of assessment.
see also:
Special Reference Time for Industry see Chapter 12.4.5 and
Compatibility mode for Industry (Recr./Evening is added to Day incl. Penalty) Chapter 12.4.6 Absatz "Evaluation Parameter Tab"
Manual
8.6.7

Operating Time
Manual

Ko without Ground
8.6.8
8.6.8 1
Ko without Ground
The solid angle coefficient K0 (dB) according to VDI 2714 /16/, the directivity index D according to ISO 9613 /21/ (equivalent for other guidelines).
The excess level in the direction of sound radiation due to reflecting surfaces close to the source can be accounted for by a global penalty, the solid
angle coefficient K0/D. Since the reflection from the ground is already accounted for in the calculation according to ISO 9613-2 Equation 11 (for
calculations on the basis of A-weighted levels), or in the degree DBM,Okt /
AGround of attenuation in the ground and meteorology (for frequency-dependent calculations), only the remaining reflecting surfaces are to be considered when determining K0.
Source at arbitrary height above the ground
K0 = 0
Source at arbitrary height above the ground in front of a wall
K0 = 3
Source at arbitrary height above the ground in a corner
K0 = 6
In case K0 > 0 the reflection from the building itself must not be calculated
for the source in question, as the excess level is already accounted for by
K0. In order to retain the reflectivity of the building for all other sound
contributions, it is advisable to enter a value of 0.5 as Min. Distance from
Source to Reflecting Object on the Calculation|Configuration|Reflection tab (see Chapter 12.4.8).
Manual
8.6.8

Ko without Ground
Manual

8.7
8.7 1
Not all sound sources radiate sound uniformly in all directions. There is,
for example, a directivity of the radiated sound for power-plant chimneys,
which depends on the exhaust velocity of the gas and its temperature. But
there are many other examples, such as the ground run-up of aeroengines
in a test facility, or the blow-off from valves, where the sound pressure level is not the same for all directions and not only a function of the distance.
In order to account for this fact, directional sound radiation was integrated
into CadnaA, both in a general way and for specific source types.
When a point source is specified, the pertinent option button in the edit
source dialog lets you assign a directivity to that source.
8
Point Source Edit Dialog
Performing a grid calculation with the inputs shown in the dialog above
will produce the following graphic.
Manual
8.7

60.0
65.0
55.0
65.0
60.0
65.0
55.0
65.0
59.9
55.0
Omnidirectional radiation from a point source
Manual
Chapter 8.7 Directional Sound Radiation

Sound Radiation from Chimney Outlets or Stacks with directivity
8.7.1
8.7.1 1

or Stacks with directivity
Chimney mouth directivity is integrated according to an older publication

/49/.
Upon clicking the Directivity button on the point source edit dialog,
specify the principal axis of sound radiation as the positive x axis (x/y/
z = 1/0/0) and select the directivity of a chimney. Specify an exhaust gas
velocity of, e. g., 30 m/s, and a temperature of 200 degrees.
Dialog for the calculation of the directivity of a power-plant chimney
With all other data of the point source left unchanged, the following graphic will result from the calculation.
Manual
8.7.1

63.9
54.3
58.6
69.1
63.6
53.9
58.6
69.1
64.0
58.6
Radiation pattern of chimney tilted to the horizontal plane;
parameters as above
In practice, the point source will be positioned at the centre of the cross
section chimney of the outlet , and the principal direction of radiation will
be the normal vector on this outlet cross section, pointing upwards, (x/y/z
= 0/0/1). If no vector is defined, the upwarded flow is automatically chosen.
For the following simplified scenario, the chimney outlet is assumed to be
at a height of 30 m.
The chimney directivity shown above includes the lower radiation downwards - it would therefore be wrong to attach this directivity to a point
source simulating the chimney opening if this point source is screened by
the chimney cylinder. It is recommended to suppress this screening of the
chimney cylinder for the upper radiation if chimney directivity is used. If a
Manual

8.7.1 3
chimney of, e.g., 30 m height should be modelled the following steps are
necessary:
1.
Enter a cylinder with radius and height of the chimney and define it
to be reflective if necessary.
2.
Enter a point source in the center of the cylinder (chimney) with the
height of 0.01 m less than the cylinder so that it is placed inside.
(Geometry|Height: -0.01|Roof).
3.
In Calculation|Configuration|Industry activate Src. in Building/

Cyl. do not shield (see Chapter 12.4.9).
4.
Select chimney directivity in the edit dialog point source and enter
the corresponding parameters.
You must take into account that now all sources in buildings and cylinders
radiate free and you get no warning if a source is located inside.
Line of section
Horizontal projection with residential buildings and power plant with 30-m chimney
Manual
8.7.1

8
Oblique view of the (simplified) power plant and chimney
Now enter a height of 40 m for the auxiliary-polygon line of the cross section as illustrated above. For the sectional view thus generated, perform a
grid calculation (see Chapter 11.5.3) with a grid spacing of 1 m to obtain
the level distribution in this plane which is caused by the chimney.
Manual

8.7.1 5
Level distribution around the chimney in the vertical plane
Summary of the chimney directivity predefined in CadnaA:

Simplification for determining the radiation characteristic of chimneys and
cooling towers observing certain preconditions (following VDI 3733
(draft), September 1993) and /49/:
This information is valid with the following conditions:
diameter of the outlet di m = 5...7m;
wind speed WL 3ms-1;
with emission medium: CO2 and temperature TF = 473...773K;
with emission medium: water vapour and temperature TF = 308K.
Manual
Radiation
Characteristik
of Chimneys
8.7.1
8.7.1

The angle is calculated as follows::

1
= 90 + arc tan ( h s ) arc sin ( h + s 10 ) arc tan ( ( W L T F ) ( W F T L ) )
Directivity Index K
f in Hz
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
8k
30
2,0
2,5
2,5
3,6
3,0
2,0
2,0
2,0
45-60
4,0
4,8
3,2
4,1
4,8
4,8
4,8
4,8
75
1,0
1,5
1,5
1,5
0,8
0,5
0,5
0,5
90
-2,0
-2,5
-3,0
-3,5
-4,8
-5,6
-5,6
-5,6
105
-4,0
-5,5
-7,0
-9,0
-10,0
-10,6
-10,0
-10,0
120
-5,0
-7,5
-9,2
-11,5
-15,2
-19,8
-20,0
-20,0
The used equation characters signify (see also the following figure):
h
source height relative (torward receiver) [in m]
distance receiver source axis (z-coordinate) [in m]
WL
downwind speed [in ms-2]
TF
temperature of the emission medium [in K]
WF
exit speed of the emission medium [in ms-2]
TL
ambient temperature [in K]
Manual

8.7.1 7
Situation sketch for the sound emission of chimneys (by

Reinicke, W. and J. Danner: Schallabstrahlung von
Schornsteinen, Messung und technische Mglichkeiten zu
ihrer Minderung. Umweltbundesamt-Texte 17/81,
Forschungsber. 105.03.301. Berlin: November 1981)
(Sound Radiation of chimneys, technical possibilities for
abatement and measurement, Environmental Agency Texts 17/81, research report 105.03.301. Berlin: November 1981)
Manual
8.7.1

Manual

8.7.2
8.7.2 1
Sound Radiation from Building Elements

and Openings According to AL
According to the Austrian Guidelines, also the sound radiation from building elements and openings is assigned a directivity (though frequency-independent). If you select the directivity for sound-radiating elements,
according to AL, for the point source of the scenario described above,
the calculation will result in the following graphic (direction of radiation
x/y/z = 1/0/0).
65.0
60.0
55.0
65.0
Radiation from elements according to AL
The next figure also illustrates the radiation from openings according to
AL.
Manual
8.7.2

65.0
60.0
60.0
70.0
65.0
Radiation from openings according to AL
In practice, the two types of sources mentioned last are located on the outside of buildings. To select the correct reference direction for the sound radiation on the Directivity dialog, leave the default setting Determine
Direction Automatically (Nearest Building) activated, as illustrated below.
Now if you position a point source next to a building facade (an object
snap of approximately 6 pixels specified under Options|Object Snap will
be helpful), CadnaA automatically determines the direction of radiation
perpendicular to the facade at this point.
For the 6-m-high, L-shaped building in the figure after the next one, the
level distribution is thus obtained without further adjustments.
Manual

Automatic determination of the direction of radiation

for sound-radiating elements and openings according to AL
46.0
65.0
60.0
50.0
65.0
60.0
Level distribution calculated for elements according to

AL using automatic determination of the direction of
radiation (the sound power effectively radiated is
precisely the same as for the other grid calculations)
Manual
55.0
45.0
55.0
8.7.2 3
8.7.2

You can easily assess the effect of different specifications on the calculated
level distributions. The next figure, for example, illustrates the result of a
grid calculation where no directivity has been assigned to the point source
simulating the sound-radiating element. In this case, the level distribution
results exclusively from the intrinsic shielding effect of the building.
47.8
63.9
59.9
55.6
46.8
51.8
64.2
60.7
56.7
Calculated level distribution caused by the sound-radiating element, when the directivity according to AL has
been deactivated (thus for omnidirectional radiation)
As the position of the level boxes has not been changed, the levels exactly
show the difference between the two methods. When the numerical difference of the two level distributions in the two scenarios above is calculated,
the lines of equal difference clearly show the essential differences.
Manual

8.7.2 5
-2.0
1.8
1.8
1.0
2.0
1.8
2.0
-1.0
0.0
1.0
Lines of equal level difference between omnidirectional

sound radiation and sound radiation according to AL
We will not comment on these differences here, but the example is an impressive demonstration of how CadnaA's grid arithmetic allows you to
easily investigate the consequences of specific normative provisions.
Manual
8.7.2

Manual

8.7.3
8.7.3 1
To use any directivity that is taken from measurments or from literature, a

very general and flexible concept is integrated. In Tables|local Library|Directivity for each directivity pattern a new line can be inserted. Double click on this line opens a matrix form with frequency-columns and
lines spaced 15 degrees. This form allows to define an axial symetric directivity pattern, that is sufficient in most cases. (A complete general description would effort the directivity index in each frequency band
independance of two angles). With Name a string is entered, which can be
refered to in the PWL input line of any point-, line- or area source during
calculation.
The form allows to enter the directivity indices for all octave bands from
31.5 Hz to 8000 Hz in angular increments of 15 degrees. If values are only
available for larger increments, use the DEL key to delete the zeros for the
15-degree-increments where no such values are available. CadnaA will
then fill in these values by interpolation.
Frequency-dependent directivity indices in increments

of 30 degrees. The values for the intermediate angles are
deleted.
Manual
8.7.3

When you close the dialog above by clicking OK and open it again, the
missing values are added in the empty fields automatically by CadnaA.
Frequency-dependent directivity indices with interpolated values
Now we can assign to a point-, line- or area source a previously specified

frequency-dependent directivity by selecting its name from the list box Directivity.
A specified directivity can be selected by clicking its name on the list
In the example, the calculation will result in the level distribution shown
below.
With the example shown we get the following noise contours after a grid
calculation.
Manual
8.7.3 3

64.9
61.3
62.8
67.6
56.1
69.7
62.5
64.7
72.0
67.6
63.5
Level distribution resulting from the selected directivity
When the calculation is performed for an receiver point, the directivity index calculated on the Directivity dialog is added to the sound power level.
With the option standardized activated, the correction is increased or reduced by a constant factor for all directions so as to leave the sound level
specified on the edit dialog of the source unchanged although this directivity is taken into account. This enables you to enter directly the octave band
sound pressure levels that you have measured on a half circle with the
source as pivot.
Manual
Normalised
Directivity
8.7.3
8.7.3
Paste

8.7.3
Clicking the Paste button on the edit dialog Directivity under Tables|Sources|Directivity allows you to paste ASCII format data from the
clipboard in the form.
ASCII format: Cells separated by TAB stops, lines separated by carriage
RETURNs.
Manual

8.8
8.8 1
This type of noise source is only usable in Germany because the emission
is related to the mesuring procedure of the Taktmaximalpegel.
Manual
8.8

Manual

Roads
8.9
8.9 1
Roads
The source Road is radiating to all sides if the option Self-Screening is

not activated (see below in this chapter).
The values of some parameters can vary from polygon point to polygone
point, e.g., for the parameters
cross sections or distance (see Chapter 8.9.1)

lateral slopes (see Chapter 8.9.2)
road heights and ground heigths (see Chapter 10.4).
The Parallel Object command (see Chapter 5.7.13) on the context menu
opened for a selected road allows you to generate barriers, embankments,
or contour lines at specified distances, or use the Station command (see
Chapter 5.7.3) for the automatic insertion of kilometre marks.
The parameters of a road section are entered under the edit mode on the
dialog that opens after double-clicking the roads centre-line.
The boxes in the dialog are described, by way of example, for the application of RLS-90 /9/. They apply analogously to the other guidelines.
Manual
8.9

Roads
The Edit Road Dialog
Manual
8.9 3

Roads
Hint: The height entered in the Geometry dialog is the road surfaces
height. CadnaA adds to this value 0,5 m automatically as the source
height for calculation. Therefore the roads z-coordinate is always
the surface height (see Chapter 10.4).
Geometry
according
to RLS90
If the option Self-Screening is activated in the Geometry dialog of the

Road screening occurs at all points below the road surfache niveau. Therefore you can insert roads which run at a slant up or down, without using
the extra element of the object Bridge (see Chapter 9.6).
Self-Screening
Because the margin of the Road in CadnaA represents the axis of the outer middle lane you should widen the Road to the real width by entering an
Additional Width > 0. The half of the entered width is added to both sides
of the road. As the case may be this entry could overwrite the entered additional width in Options|Appearance (see also 8.9.1 Specification of Road
Widths).
Additional Width
In addition to the widened road you can generate screens on the road, on
one or both sides, by entering a left or right height > 0. The screens are absorbent at both sides. This property cannot be changed. Reflecting screens
or cantilevers (overhangs) can be entered with the object Screen (see
Chapter 9.5).
Screen
In each case if you generate screens the additional width of the

road has to be >0.
The generated screens are a property of the Road and therefore only
displayed in the 3D-special view.
Manual
8.9
8.9

Roads
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

8.9.1
8.9.1 1
If you click on the card index icon of the field SCS/Dist. (m) in the Road
dialog the Road Width dialog appears and you can choose the desired
width by activating the corresponding option. Either
Distance of the centerlines of the outer lanes (noise source) or
Total width of road from curb to curb (m) or
Cross-Sections according to RAS-Q 82+96
The road width represented on the screen corresponds to the entered width.
The borderlines of the road are the centerlines of the outer lanes (noise
sources).
Distance of the
outer lanes
The road width represented on the screen corresponds not to the entered
width because a default distance of 1,75 m is presumed between the centerlines of the outer lanes to the curb. Therefore a road with a total width
of 10 m from curb to curb has a distance of 10 - (2*1,75) = 6,5 m between
the centerlines of the outer lanes.
Total width of road

from curb to curb 8.9.1
In menu Options|Appearance you have the possibility to display the real

width of roads. For that mark the objekt type Road and enter an additional
Width. In that case the road width represented on the screen is the real
Display real
Width of Roads
Manual
8.9.1
8.9.1
8.9.1
Chapter 8.9 Roads

width of the road (distance between the centerlines of the outer lanes plus
the additional width).
8
Inserted additional widthof 1,75 m for the object type
Road in Options|Appearance.
With the object type Road2 you can display the centerlines of the outer
lanes (sound source) supplementary, e.g. dashed.
Object type Road2 enables you to display the sound source

(centerlines of the outer lanes), too.
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

8.9.1 3
Road layout with additional width and display of the centerlines of the outer lanes
The chosen design of the road affected all roads in a project similarly.
List box for selection of standardized (German standards) cross sections.
The standardized cross sections of roads can be selected from the list by
marking the desired parameter and confirming with OK.
The border-lines of the road represented on the screen are not identical with those of the road or the pavement, if any. They are the centrelines of the outermost lanes if no additional width is choosen (see
above: Display real Road Width)
The examples below shows the correct inputs for application of RLS-90.
Manual
Standard Cross Section

(SCS)/Distance (m) 8.9.1
8.9.1
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Single Lane Road 8.9.1
For a single-lane road, enter 0 in the Standard Cross Section/Distance box

in the edit dialog Road or, if 0 is displayed as the default value, leave it unchanged.
Multi-lane
Road
8.9.1
For a multi-lane road, either the distance between the centre-lines of the
outermost lanes is entered as a number, or the appropriate cross section is
selected after clicking the card-index icon. When selecting a6ms according
to RAS-Q 82 /29/ for a six-lane road, a distance of 24.75 m results between the centre-lines of the two outermost lanes which is the measured
value in the cross-sectional view and also the width of the road section
represented on the screen with the selected scale.
Widening of a Road
from 1 to 2 Lanes 8.9.1
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

8.9.1 5
If the lane distance or the transverse slope changes along a road, each polygon point may be edited individually via the Geometry (see Chapter
10.4) button
For this click the button Geometry
double-click a row in the Geometry list.
In the edit dialog Road Polygon Point enter the appropriate values for the
distance of the axis of the outermost lanes.
The arrow buttons serve to access the next or previous polygon point, or
use the New button to insert a new point.
The roads polygon point will be flashing in the graphic while being edited
in the edit dialog. In order to see this, you may have to move the dialog
box.
We must not enter a value if the the next polygon point should have
the same distance/cross section. The entered value is valid until a
Manual
8.9.1
Chapter 8.9 Roads

new value is entered at another polygon point.
Widening of a road from 1 to 2 lanes
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

The next example is a crossing with straight through-lanes.
To generate this example, just enter the two intersecting roads. If, as it
would usually be the case, the traffic densities of the four adjacent road
sections are different, it is convenient and acoustically appropriate to buttjoint the four sections in the middle of the crossing.
Even if two sections each are supposed to abut in the middle of the crossing, you can first enter straight through-lanes to split them later on.
Manual
8.9.1 7
Crossing with straight
Through- lanes
8.9.1
8.9.1
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Splitting of Roads into

Sections:
1. Possibility
8.9.1
Open the context menu by clicking a roads centre-line with the right
mouse. Selecting Break Lines then splits the crossing road right in the
middle. You can check this by clicking the splitted road because only the
clicked half will be selected. Afterwards, by clicking one of the road sections obtained by splitting, and by using the Break Lines command once
again, you can split the road that has not yet been split.
But pay attention: Should there be other objects being intersected

by roads, which are to be subdivided, they are split at the intersection,
too.
If this is the case, and you do not wish the other objects to be split, proceed
as follows:
8
2. Possibility
8.9.1
Instead of using the crossing roads as intersection lines for splitting, place
an arbitrary auxiliary line, such as a line source or an auxiliary polygon, on
top of the centre-line of the road to be split, and apply the Break Lines
command to this auxiliary line in order to split the road. Then delete the
auxiliary line.
After splitting the roads, you can allocate different parameters such as traffic densities to the sections thus obtained.
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

8.9.1 9
Crossing with Filter
Lane
8.9.1
This is a combination of the arrangements already dealt with. In the transitions from the two-lane roads to the crossing and in the area of the crossing
proper, the lanes are configured by roads with SCS = 0. These are followed by two-lane roads in all four directions.
Any other geometric gradation may be easily derived from the above examples.
See also chapter 7.4 Example: Digitizing a Road
Manual
10
8.9.1
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Lateral Slope
8.9.2
8.9.2 1
Lateral Slope
In addition to the distance of the lanes centre-line (see Chapter 8.9.1

"Standard Cross Section (SCS)/Distance (m)"), you can enter the percentage of the lateral slope after clicking the Geometry button in the dialog
Polygon Point. Select the option: absolute Height at every Point from
the list below the coordinate table.
The lateral slope refers to the outer lane axis which is rotated around the
roads centre-line. A positive value lifts the outer right lane, a negative value the outer left lane. Right and left refer to the initial point when looking
toward the final point.
The entered value is valid for all the following points. Therefore we
only need to enter a new value if the lateral slope changes at another
point. From this point on, this new entered value is valid for all following ones.
see also chapter 10.4 The Objects Geometry
Manual
8.9.2
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Lateral Slope
Manual
8.9.3 1
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Emission in dB(A)
8.9.3
Emission in dB(A)
The sound emission of a road caused by motor traffic is characterised by

the emission level, which CadnaA calculates automatically and online
from the specified parameters and in accordance with the selected guideline. According to RLS-90, this is the time-averaged level in a free field at
a distance of 25 m from the centre-line of an infinitely long straight road.
Activate Ld and Ln in Calculation|Configuration|Tab Eval. Parameter

to calculate the assessment level for day and night according to RLS90. In
this case the time interval Day|Evening|Night is not taken into account.
Note
Manual
8.9.3
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Emission in dB(A)
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Traffic Density
8.9.4
8.9.4 1
Traffic Density
Average daily traffic density Vehicles/24h. Number of vehicles passing a

section of the road per day, averaged over all days of the year (see also
Precise Counts below).
Counts, MDTD
8.9.4
This item is accessible after clicking the Options button in the edit dialog.
When Precise Counts is activated, the Counts, MDTD option is deactivated. The relevant hourly traffic density, M (Vehicles/hour) for the daytime and the night-time can be entered, as well as the mean proportion of
trucks p in % (vehicles with a gross weight over 2,8 t as percentage of the
relevant traffic density).
Precise Counts
8.9.4
Clicking the arrow of the editable list box allows you to select the classification of the road according to the chosen standards. On the basis of this
classification, default values for the proportion of trucks and for the hourly
traffic density are considered.
Type of Road
8.9.4
To calculate the two noise indicators Lden and Ln according to the EU-directive /58/ the diurnal patterns for each road are required. This allows to
assign the respective traffic counts to the three time intervals. To this end,
the diurnal pattern for each road type has to be entered to the global or the
lokal library first. The following figure shows an example.
Diural Patter
8.9.4
Manual
8.9.4
DiurnalPatter.cna
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Traffic Density
Open the file DiurnalPatter.cna in SAMPLES|ROAD on your CD-Rom.
The edit dialog of a diurnal pattern
To address this diurnal pattern to a specific road it has to be referenced via

the list box Road Type on the edit dialog for roads. By default, the road
types according to RLS-90 (or according to any other guideline for calculating road noise) are selectable. In case diurnal patterns are available from
the library these will be listed at the end of the list. In this example the diurnal pattern with the ID-code "TG_1" is selected.
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Traffic Density
8.9.4 3
When calculating the noise indicators Lden for roads the assignment of the
daily hours to the time intervals day/evening/night and the time penalties
for day/evening/night (see Chapter 12.4.5) are relevant.
Manual
8.9.4
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Traffic Density
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Speed Limit (km/h)
8.9.5
8.9.5 1
Speed Limit (km/h)
We enter the maximum speed, in km/h, permissible on the relevant road

section for cars and trucks. The speed is taken into account according to
the choosen standard.
For the RLS 90 e.g., the german standard, the speed limit lies between
30 km/h and 80 km/h for trucks, and 30 km/h and 130 km/h for cars. The
default value for trucks will be the same value as given for cars. If a different speed limit shall apply for trucks, click the Truck check box (an X appears in the box), and enter the desired speed limit in the text box from the
keyboard.
If a value below 30 km/h is entered, 30 km/h will automatically be assumed in the calculation. Likewise, if a speed limit above 130 km/h is entered, 130 km/h for cars, and 80 km/h for trucks, will automatically be
assumed in the calculation.
Manual
Example RLS 90
8.9.5
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Speed Limit (km/h)
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Road Surface
8.9.6
8.9.6 1
Road Surface
Depending on the selected standard we can make a correction for road

surfaces either by entering a value in decibels (dB) or by choosing a material from the Surface list.
An example for surface correction values according to RLS-90,
Table 4
DStrO *) in dB(A)
for a speed limit of
no
Road surface material
30 km/h
40 km/h
50 km/h
1.
smooth mastic asphalt, asphalt concrete or blinded mastic asphalt
2.
concrete or corrugated mastic asphalt
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.
pavement with a smooth surface
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.
other pavements
3.0
4.5
6.0
*) For low-noise road surface materials which have proved to provide a lasting noise reduction due to recent technological developments in structural engineering, different DStrO corrections may be taken into account, e. g. minus 3 dB(A) for open-pore asphalt for speed
limits above 60 km/h.
The declared corrections as per items 5. through 9. apply to roads outside villages
where the speed limit exceeds 60 km/h (according to Allgemeines Rundschreiben
Straenbau No. 14/1991)
>60 km/h
5.
concrete according to ZTV Beton 78 with steel broom

stroke with smoothing tool
1.0
6.
concrete according to ZTV Beton 78 without steel

broom stroke with smoothing tool, textured with a jute
cloth
- 2.0
7.
asphalt concrete <= 0/11 and blinded mastic asphalt 0/8

and 0/11 without grit
- 2.0
open-pore asphalt covering layers containing at least

15 % of voids, when new
8.
- with 0/11 grain size
- 4.0
9.
- with 0/8 grain size
- 5.0
Manual
8.9.6
France
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Road Surface
Choosing the French standards (Calculation|Configuration|Country) the

road will then be calculated according to NMPB-Routes 96 /50/ and consequently a possible road surface correction will be calculated as a spectrum.
In this case we have in CadnaA the possibility of entering spectra in Tables|Libraries (local)|Sound Reduction Indices (see Chapter 16.3.4
"Spectra of Sound Reduction Index") to which we then get access in the
Road Surface list. Prerequisite is the term NMPB_(Number) in the ID of
the sound reduction spectrum (e.g. NMPB_01, NMPB_25 etc.). (Number)
is the wildcard for an abitrary integer number and of course a spektra name
which is shown in the list for selection.
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Road Gradient (%)
8.9.7
8.9.7 1
Road Gradient (%)
In the edit dialog Road we can either enter a value for the Road Gradient
(%) or CadnaA calculates the average gradient of the road in view of
their z-coordinates and the digital terrain model and inserts the values automatically if we click the menu item Tables|Miscellaneous|Calc Gradient of Roads.
Because the value applies for the entire road, we have to pay attention that, already with the inputing of the road, we divide it into
equivalent sections if the slope changes with respect to the road.
The automatic slope calculation occurs for all roads simultaneously. If this
is not intended, deactivate those roads which are to be excluded from the
slope calculation. Re-activate them afterwards.
Values less than 5 % do not have any effect on the emission value.
Manual
8
Hint for RLS90
8.9.7
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Road Gradient (%)
Manual
8.9.8 1
Chapter 8.9 Roads

8.9.8
According to RLS-90, first-order reflections are to be taken into account

by considering first-order mirror sound sources in addition to the original
sound source "Road". This is done automatically if, on the tab Calculation|Configuration|Road, the option Strictly according to RLS-90 (see
Chapter 12.4.10) is activated, no matter which order of reflection was
specified on the tab Calculation|Configuration|Reflection (see Chapter
12.4.8).
If the option Strictly according to RLS-90 is deactivated, however, any
reflection may be excluded by specifying 0 as the order of reflection in the
Calculation|Configuration.
If there are closed built-up areas on both sides of the road, the resulting excess level has to be accounted for by an additional correction for multiple
reflections, which depends on the average height of both built-up areas and
on the distance between them.
We can enter the correction for multiple reflections after clicking the Options button in the edit dialog.
This is the excess sound level due to multiple reflections.
Drefl dB(A)
8.9.8
The average height of the buildings making up the closed built-up area
along the road.
Average
Height (m)
8.9.8
The average distance between the buildings on both sides of the road.
Distance (m)
8.9.8
If this item is activated in the edit dialog Road, you can enter a level in the
edit box. If this item is deactivated, you can enter average height and distance and specify the absorptive properties of the buildings along the road.
These data then serve to determine Drefl in dB.
Specify the properties of the buildings as reflecting, absorbing or highly

absorbing by selecting from the list box.
Manual
8.9.8
Chapter 8.9 Roads

But you also can force CadnaA to calculate either the multiple reflections
and/or the average height and distance and to enter the values in the corresponding fields. See the following paragraph.
Calc Width
of Roads
8.9.8
With the command Calc Width of Roads (Tables|Miscellaneous)

CadnaA determines the average height, distance and gaps proportion of
buildings straight at the roads. The results are stored in string variables and
entered in the Info-box of the corresponding Edit dialog of the roads.
Info-Box with the corresponding string variables after

executing the command Calc Width of Roads.
After that you can let CadnaA insert the values of the string variables in
the corresponding fields of the Roads edit dialog and determine the correction of multiple reflections. CadnaA calculates on the basis of the buildings average heights and distances of both sides of the roads first a value
which is displayed in the not yet activated field Drefl. If a correction of
multiple reflection has to be taken into account for calculation or not depends also on the gaps proportion of buildings located straight by the
roads. Even this you can calculate it with CadnaA.
Manual
8.9.8 3
Chapter 8.9 Roads

Open the file XL_01.cna on your CD-ROM.
Execute the command Calc Width of Roads (Tables|Miscellaneous).
Now let CadnaA enter the average height of buildings in the field Average Height (m) in the Roads edit dialog. For that we need the value of the
string variable HBEB_L (average height left) and HBEB_R (average
height right). Both values have to be added and divided with 2. Therefore
XL_01.cna
Example
RIGHT mouse click on a free area in your project file and choose
Modify Objects|Action: Change Attribute from the context menu
and highlight the object type Road - confirm with OK.
8
The next dialog opens - select the Attribut HBEB, activate Arithmetic und enter the following expressen:
Manual
8.9.8
Chapter 8.9 Roads

(MEMO_HBEB_L+MEMO_HBEB_R)/2
After confirming with OK the calculated value is entered in the field

Average Height (m).
Now let CadnaA also enter the distance of the buildings (DBEB) in the
corresponding field. Therefore in the dialog Modify Attribute select the
attribute ABST and enter following formula:
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads

8.9.8 5
MEMO_DBEB_L + MEMO_DBEB_R
CadnaA now calculates with both entries the correction of multiple reflec-
tion.
But if actually a correction of multiple reflection has to be taken into account depends also on the proportion of the buildings gaps. If those are
smaller than 30 % - e.g. according to RLS90 - you have to calculate with a
surcharge for multiple reflections. If you want CadnaA to calculate this
Manual
8.9.8
Chapter 8.9 Roads

value you have to enter the following formula for the attribute DREFL in
the dialog Modify Attribute:
iif(max(MEMO_LUECK_L,MEMO_LUECK_R)<0.3,DREFL,0)
After confirming the dialog with OK the option DREFL will be activated
and if the proportion of the gaps left or right are smaller than 30 % the value already calculated by CadnaA is valid otherwise 0 (zero) will be entered and therefore for these roads no multiple reflection will be calculated.
The following string variables are created automatically by CadnaA if the
commannd Calc Width of Roads (Tables|Miscellaneous) is executed:
DBEB_L; DBEB_R
Distance of building development (left/

right)
HBEB_L; HBEB_R
average height (m) of building development (left/right)
LUECK_L; LUECK_R
proportion of gaps (left/right)
From other locations you can revert to the string variable with the prefix
MEMO_ in front of the name (e.g. MEMO_DBEB_L).
Manual

8.10
8.10 1
If we allocate a traffic light to a crossing or junction, the relevant penalty

for receiver points nearby is automatically calculated according to the active standard.
The calculation takes into account at what time, day, evening or night, the
traffic light is active.
The check boxes allow us to separately specify the day-time, evening and
night-time activity of the traffic light.
For a crossing with traffic lights, if calculated strictly according to RLS90, a Traffic Lights icon is inserted at each crossing point on the outer
lanes, i. e., exactly at the corners of the crossing area in the graphic representation of CadnaA.
Click the traffic light icon on the toolbox, then click the first crossing point
on the outer lane axis in order to position the traffic light. We enter all parameters for the first traffic light before we insert the next one because the
parameters specified for the first traffic light will be adopted for all following ones.
Manual
Example for RLS90
8.10

EditTrafficLightdialog8.10
8
Traffic Light
is active
8.10
If a traffic light is allocated the relevant penalty for receiver points nearby
then it is automatically calculated according to RLS-90, sub-clause 4.2,
table 2.
An active traffic light is indicated by a cross within the quadrangle.
Manual

8.10 3
In the symbol bar you can choose one of the defined evaluation parameters (see Calculation|Configuration|Evaluation parameter) like Lden, Lde etc. In the above
example the crossing symbol (down to the right) is not
active if you choose Lde because this crossing is only
active at night.
Any road lying within a certain distance to this crossing with traffic lights
and, therefore, to be allocated to this crossing, will be considered accordingly in the calculation, and will be listed on the Associated Roads box.
The option Find Automatically is activated by default.
Associated Roads
According to RLS 90 the distance is less than 20 m.
Hint for RLS 90
We insert roads manually by clicking the Insert button and selecting the
corresponding road from the object table.
Manual
8.10

To allocate a road to a crossing with traffic lights, position and/or activate

at least one receiver point and start the calculation by clicking the calculator icon (pocket calculator on the icon bar).
Calculator icon on the icon bar.
Manual

Long Straight Roads
8.11
8.11 1
Long Straight Roads
Using the Long Straight Road feature from the context menu (see Chapter 5.7) or from the menu Tables|Miscellaneous allows us quickly to perform an approximate immission calculation for roads complying with the
requirements of RLS-90, subclause 4.4.1. This calculation must not be
used in combination with the other calculation methods according to RLS90.
When you click the Long Straight Road command, the calculation sheet
appears where the sound emission LmE Day and Night as well as the result, in terms of the rating level Lr Day and Night, will be calculated
while you enter the relevant parameters.
8
We can save the calculation via the Save button, and load it again by clicking the Open button. The extension lgs is appended to the file name.
We can also open the calculation sheet via the context menu if we have inserted a road in CadnaA and click it with the RIGHT mouse button while
still in the edit mode.
Manual
8.11

Long Straight Roads
Data that we have already entered in the edit dialog Road will be adopted
in the calculation sheet.
Press the Print button to print the calculation sheet.
Manual
8.12 1

Railways
8.12
Railways
All guidelines and standards for railway noise (incl. SRMII) calculate the
noise immission only for two time intervals (day/night). If you like to calculate according to EU-Interim method you have to activate the option
Use Non-Standard Reference Time D/E/N = 12/4/8 in Calculation|Configuration|Tab Railway. Via this option you are able to calculate
as usal with two time intervals or also with three time intervals according
to EU-Interim method (for more information see chapter 12.4.11 "Railroad
Tab").
By way of example, the edit railway dialog is described for the application
of Schall 03 /8/. It applies analogously for the other guidelines.
8
The height (z-coordinate) of the railway in the Geometry dialog refers to

the top side of the rail. The default value is 0,6 m.
See also chapter 10.2 General Information for Working with Uneven Terrain in CadnaA.
Manual
Edit Dialog
Railway
8.12
Geometry
8.12
8.12

Railways
Manual
8.12.1 1
Chapter 8.12 Railways

8.12.1 Emission Level dB(A)

The emission level for railways is calculated according to the chosen guidline.
For Example, according to Schall03, the emission level Lm,E, in dB(A)
for railways, is the time-averaged level determined in a free field at a distance of 25 from the centre-line of the track in question, and at a height of
3.5 m above the top edge of the rail, assuming the railway track is straight
and infinitely long.
If this option is activated, the types of trains and train classes, numbers of
trains and corrections, can be edited, selected from editable list boxes, or
taken into account via option boxes. CadnaA will automatically calculate
the emission level from the specified values (see Chapter 8.12.2).
Train classes
and Penalties
Dfb (dB) will take into account the effects of different kinds of track. If
Dfb (dB) is activated, you can enter a value from the keyboard. Alternatively, use the list box to select the kind of track from a list. To do so activate the Option button next to this list box.
Correction Dfb
(dB)
8.12.1
Dbr = Correction for the effect of a bridge
Bridge
(Dbr = +3dB)
8.12.1
Level/Grade
Crossing
8.12.1
When the relevant range for the radius of curvature has been selected, the
emission value will, if necessary, be penalised according to the provisions
of the national standard.
Radius of
Curvature
8.12.1
A correction for multiple reflections is taken into account in the calculation when high-rise buildings close to railways are specified by their distance and their mean height.
Multiple Reflections
at Railways
8.12.1
If a value for Vmax is entered the train speed will be adjusted if necessary.
For the calculation the smaller value of both values is taken into account.
Vmax
Db = Correction for the effect of a level/grade crossing
Manual
8.12.1
8.12.1
8.12.1

Manual

Train Classes
8.12.2 1
8.12.2 Train Classes

Instead of entering the Emission level we can generate a Train Class list to
calculate the emission level according to the chosen guideline.
The train class list can be edited. Therefore we have to activate the option
field Train Classes and Penalties.
We have two ways to fill out the train class list:

1.
by directly completing one row after the other in the edit dialog:
Select the local list of train classes from the list box.
2.
by refering to a numbers-of-trains table compiled under

Tables|Numbers-of-Trains: Select the identifier of the numbers-oftrains table from the list box.
Completing the local list of train classes only makes sense if one section of
railway is concerned. Otherwise, if you were to split this railway track into
several smaller sections, due to modified parameters, such as track type or
bridge penalty, you would have to enter any changes, e. g., in the numbers
of trains, individually for each section. You can avoid this by compiling a
numbers-of-trains table.
Manual
Train Class
List local
8.12.2
8.12.2

Train Classes
Numbers-of-Trains
Table
8.12.2
The Numbers-of-Trains Table under Tables|Sources allows you to compile for a route a list of train classes from the global library (Tables|Library (global)|Train Classes) and the numbers of trains. This table can
then be referred to by its identifier. Any changes in the numbers-of-trains
table have to be entered only once. They will have an effect on all railway
sections to which that table was allocated, no matter whether you make the
changes via the Tables menu or in the list of train classes in the edit dialog.
Train Class
Boxes
8.12.2
Train Type
8.12.2
The train type is selected via Library (global)|Train Classes (see above
in this chapter), from the list of Train Types. The relevant parameters,
such as train length and speed, are thus specified.
Percentage of Disk Brakes

P (%)
8.12.2
p % = the percentage of the train length including the engine, occupied by

vehicles using disk brakes.
Numer of Trains
day and night
Specify the numbers of trains separately for daytime and night-time. (see
also Table of Numbers of Train above)
8.12.2
Note: If the numbers are given in trains per hour, multiply them by 16 for
the daytime number and by 8 for the night-time number before entering
them in the edit box.
Speed v (km/h)
8.12.2
Train Length
(m)
8.12.2
v is the speed limit for a specific railway section or the relevant travelling
speed limit for trains which may not drive at that speed.
l is the train length belonging to the relevant train class.
Correction for Train Type

Dfz (dB)
8.12.2
The correction Dfz accounts for the affect of different kinds of vehicles.
If the Train Type Dfz option is activated, a correction value may be entered from the keyboard. Alternatively, you can select a train type from the
list box, in which case the correction is allocated automatically.
Manual

Train Classes
8.12.2 3
The emission level for a train class, resulting from the pertinent parameter
settings, is displayed here. For velocities of more than 250 km/h, a 1-dB
penalty for aerodynamic noise is included as required by the "Aktuelle Information des BZA Mnchen 021 vom 7.8.1991" /18/.
Emission Lm,E,i
incl. Dae (1dB)
8.12.2
ASCII tables of train classes can be imported via the ODBC interface.
Object variable: ZKLST_ASC.
Import Train
Classes
8.12.2
Tables listing number of trains can be im- and exported (menu FILE) - for
details see Import, chapter 8.12.2 "Train Classes".
Number of Trains
8.12.2
Manual
8.12.2

Train Classes
Manual
8.12.3 1

8.12.3 Train Classes User-defined

For different train classes you can enter user-defined data records of sound
emission (according to table 1 of S5011 /25/ and Nordic Prediction Method) and use them by refering to their identifiers (ID). A train type is defined in the library Sound Levels (see chapter 16.2) by entering the
frequency spectra of emission.
The related spectra for different speeds of a train type are indicated by
their ID.
Austria
Manual
8.12.3

Spectra-ID
8.12.3
At least two spectra with different speeds should exist and be sorted
in ascending order in the library.
Requirements for spectra ID:

general description: S5011_xxxx_yyy
S5011_ is mandatory
xxxx_ wildcard for a maximum of 4 characters to describe the train type
yyy
wildcard for a maximum value of 3 digits for a train speed
S5011.cna
Example:
S5011_UBAN_60
S5011_UBAN_100
Both IDs describe a train type with 60 km/h and 100 km/h.
Name
You can enter an arbitrary name for the spectra. But because the name is
also visible, in addition to the ID with four characters (xxxx), in the list of
train types, you should choose a short name if possible.
Nordic Prediction
Method
8.12.3
For the user-defined train classes according to Nordic Prediction Method

the above describtion applies analog. But one train class needs two spectra
A and B - this is mendatory!
Requirements for spectra ID:
NORDR_xxxx_A and NORDR_xxxx_B
NORDR_is mandatory
xxxx_ wildcard for a maximum of 4 characters to describe the train typ
A
is mandatory
B
is mandatory
Manual

8.12.4 1
8.12.4 Traffic-Count Calculator

With the Traffic-Count Calculator in Tables|Miscellaneous you can split
comfortable present numbers of trains or aeroplanes for the time intervals
day/evening/night without additional calculation or paperwork.
If it is applied for numbers of aeroplanes you have to pay attention that the
evaluation parameters Ld/Le/Ln are selected (Calculation|Configuration|Eval.Parm tab).
By calculation according to EC-directive it is therefore possible the so far
only for the time interval day/night defined numbers of trains or aeroplanes to allocate for the three time intervals day/evening/night. The variables
for the flow figures of the three time intervals are for day nd, evening ne
and night nn.
With the example in the above screen shot the present flow figures of the
local train list for day and night will be allocated also for evening with
25 % from the day value plus 20 % from the night value. Therefore the
flow figures are lowered to 75 % of the primary value for the day and 80 %
for the night.
Manual
8.12.4

If you mark all options Apply to all corresponding tables are taken into account simultaneously (local list of train classes and the list with number of
trains predefined in the Library and the flow figures of the aeroplans.
Manual

Purge List of Numbers-of-Trains
8.12.5 1
8.12.5 Purge List of Numbers-of-Trains

When importing files which also contain lists of numbers of trains these
will be appended to those already available. To prevent the list from growing longer and longer, you can update it by using the Tables|Miscellaneous|Purge command. This deletes all those lists of numbers-of-trains
which are allocated to none of the railway sections.
Manual
8.12.5

Purge List of Numbers-of-Trains
Manual

Parking Places
8.13
8.13 1
Parking Places
For the time being we can choose to calculate the sound emission of parking lots according to
RLS-90 see Chapter /9/

LfU-Study 1993 see Chapter /6/
LfU-Study 1995 Precise see Chapter /4/
LfU-Study 1995 Approximate see Chapter /5/
LfU-Study 2003 /7/
and to calculate the sound immission or propagation according to
RLS-90, for public parking lots or

for commercial parking lots according to the standard for industry.
The boxes available in the edit dialog Parking Lot are adapted to suit the
option that is selected for the calculation.
Manual
8.13
Edit Dialog
Parking Lot

Parking Places
8.13
Calculation
according to:
8.13.0
From the editable list box, select the method to be used for the calculation
of the sound emission.
RLS90
8.13
Guidelines for Noise Control at Roads (RLS-90); published by the German Federal Ministry of Transport, Dept. for Road Construction, Ed.
1990, Traffic Gazette 44 (1990)
LfU-Study 1993
8.13
Parking Lot Study, study concerning sound emission from parking lots,
scrap yards and bus terminals, 1993 edition, issue 89, collection of publications by the Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protection (LfU), Munich
LfU-Study 1995
precise
8.13
Wolfgang Hendlmeier: "Noise control at parking lots and underground car

parks", clause 12.2: Precise calculation method (for parking lots where the
distribution of traffic between the parking spaces can be estimated with
sufficient precision), Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protection,
Depts. 2/4 and 2/5, November 1994
Manual

Parking Places
8.13 3
When calculating according to this method, you must also enter the distances covered within the parking lot and calculate them according to
RLS-90.
Wolfgang Hendlmeier: "Noise control at parking lots and underground car
parks", clause 12.3: Approximate calculation method (for parking lots
where the distribution of traffic between the parking spaces cannot be estimated with sufficient precision), Bavarian Ministry for Environmental
Protection, Depts. 2/4 and 2/5, November 1994
LfU-Study 1995 approximate

8.13
Distances covered within the parking lot in search of a parking space need
not be entered separately but are considered in the parking lot calculation.
In the new study /7/ more detailed information about vehicle movements
have been included. The number of events are referred to the number of
parking spaces and to further quantities depending on the type of lot. Additionally, two different procedures for the calculation of the noise emission
by parking lots on flat ground are described.
LfU-Study 2003
8.13
In CadnaA, both procedures are implemented, the so-called "combined

evaluation" (normal case) and the "separate evaluation" (special case).
By the combined evaluation the emission caused by the transit traffic is accounted for approximately by the parameter KD. This increase just depends on the number of parking spaces ng or any other specified reference
quantity n (e.g. per bed for hotels; per 10 m area for restaurants or stores).
The Bavarian Environmental Protection Agency (LfU Bayern) has straighten out upon request that the parameter KD is to be calculated for all kinds
of parking lots based on the number of parking spaces ng or any other specified reference quantity n, although the study just refers to the variable
ng.
combinedevaluation8.13.0
By the separate evaluation the emission resulting from parking movements

and from search resp. transit traffic is accounted for separately. In the calculation of the noise emission the parameter KD is not applied. Thus,
search and transit traffic has to be accounted for by modelling the road lines separately (e.g. according to RLS-90).
separate evaluation 8.13.0
Manual
8.13

Parking Places
Emission
L*m,E in dB(A)
8.13.0
Counts, Parking
Spaces
8.13.0
Library Parking Lot

Events
8.13.0
8
Penalty
Dp dB(A)
The sound emission of a parking lot due to parking traffic is characterised

by the emission level L*m,E. This is the time-averaged level in a free field
at a distance of 25 m from the centre of the parking lot, assuming that the
total emission originates from this single point.
Events per hour and parking space. You may enter the values or adopt
them from a table with pre-defined numbers of events for different parking
spaces. To open this table, click the card index icon. A selected data record
is adopted via the OK button.
The table Number of Events (movements) is edited either directly via the
edit dialog Parking Lot or via the menu Tables|Libraries|Parking Lot
Events. Entries are saved globally and are thus still available when
CadnaA is re-started.
8.13.0
8.13
Dp dB(A) is a correction for different types of parking lots (when calculating according to LfU parking lot study = Dlpa).
We edit the correction for different types of parking lots by activating the
Dp option. Alternatively, we can select a type of parking lot from the list
box (Activate this option by clicking the option button next to the list
box!).
Type of
Parking Lot
8.13
When selecting a type of parking lot from the list box, e. g., motorcycle
parking lot, the corrections suggested in the selected study (Calculation
according to box) are immediately adopted.
Manual

Pass-by Levels for Line Sources with the Noise Levels Time History
8.14
8.14 1
Pass-by Levels for Line Sources with

the Noise Levels Time History1
For roads, railways, and other line-like sources CadnaA allows us to calculate according to the choosen standards, the time history of the sound
pressure level that would result from a single vehicle or other source with
a specified emission travelling along that line.
Generating this level characteristic allows you to check very effectively,
e. g.,
whether the effect of a noise-control device, such as a barrier, would be

sufficient for all affected partial areas,
which noise reduction may be expected by providing a reflecting building facade with absorbent cladding, or
by which amount the sound pressure level resulting from single motor
vehicles travelling by is reduced if, e. g., a zone with a speed limit of
30 km/h is established in an ordinary inner-city street.
With the RIGHT mouse key we click the command Pass-By Level from the
context menu of the line object.
1.
The Pass-By Level command in the context menu of a line source is

only available if a receiver point is inserted.
that is the recorded noise level over a period of time
Manual
8.14

Dialog for calculation of the time history at a receiver point

as a vehicle is passing by on a road.
The possible specification depends on the object type used for the command Pass-By Level, such as road, railway or general line source.
Source Type
User-defined
8.14
8.14
Light or Heavy
8.14
If we select light or heavy from the Source Type box we cannot enter the
sound power level, but it will be determined with the entered Speed (km/
h). The predefined sound power level for roads is determined according to
RLS 90 if the national standard does not describe anything about it.
Train list
8.14
We can choose previously entered train types (see Chapter 8.12.2 "Train
Classes") from the Source Type box if we use the line source Railway. We
select a train as source type by clicking on it.
If we select User-defined from the Source Type box we can enter our
own data for all provided parameters.
Manual
8.14 3

The following table lists the average sound power levels for passenger cars
and trucks, as a function of speed, which have to be assigned to the vehicles so as to yield the emission value as an example prescribed by RLS-90
for the speed in question.
Sound Power Level

and Speed
8.14
Sound power levels, in dB(A), of individual vehicles, as a function of

speed:
Speed, in km/h
30
50
80
100
120
Passenger car
92.5
97
103
106.4
109.4
Truck
105.5
110.5
115.1
Accordingly, a sound power level of 97 dB(A) can be entered for a passenger car driving at 50 km/h. (Of course, it would be possible to automatically assign this value, but other values may have to be assumed in some
situations.)
Sampling time and speed together determine the section lengths through
which the fictitious vehicle or the source is moved between one calculation and the next. A sampling time of 1 s may suffice to check the necessary calculation time, a value of 0.1 s may be appropriate to represent a
level record showing all level variations due to shielding and reflections.
Sample Time
8.14
We can select the direction of traffic with respect to the direction in which
the road was inserted. Positive means the driving direction from the initial
to the final point and negative vice versa.
Driving direction
negativ/positiv
8.14
With the activated option Append to Diagram we are able to simulate

serveral pass-bys consecutively.
Append to
Diagram
8.14
Just try it: Keep the Pass-By diagram open and mark once again the same
object or a different one with the RIGHT mouse key and choose Pass-By
Level again from the context menu. Mark the option Append to Diagram
Manual
8.14

and for the driving direction select negative instead of positive or vice
versa depending on what you have selected before.
Pass-By
Diagram
8.14
If we drag the Y-axis in the Pass-By diagram in a horizontal direction then

the vehicle symbol in the graphic will also move along the line source/
road/railway.
Another alternative is to choose a value from the Animation menu. The
Pass-By then runs with the selected speed automatically.
Auralisation
8.14
Hardware requirement: At least a sound card and loudspeaker or earhead.

In the menu Auralization|Properties the saved sound file of the relevant
process is opened after selection of a sound type in the list box and is reproduced - regarding level height - according to the calculated time history
of the pass-by level.
8.14
With the option 3D-Auralization the Doppler effect, when switching from
approach to departure, will be simulated realistically.
Listening direction at
Receiver
Point:
8.14
Automatically to source: View directly towards the source (shortest distance possible)
Direction ()
8.14
Direction: View in the given angle towards the source, relative to x-axis
Calibration
8.14
Calibration: Select the desired volume in the list box and adjust the corresponding playback on your audio-appliance.
3D-Auralisation
Manual
8.14 5

For practice:
Test the Pass-By with a simple arrangement as in the following

figure.
Example
Pass-By
8.14
Pass-By.cna
Simple arrangement of a road, buildings and a receiver point IP1.
Open the context menu by clicking the road axis with the RIGHT
mouse key and selcet the command Pass-By Level.
From the Imm.point (receiver point) list select the desired receiver
point for which the pass-by level shall be calculated - in our example
IP1.
In the next box, Source Type, select light.
Adjust the Sampling Interval to 0.1 s.

After we have confirmed with OK the diagram opens with the calculated levels time history. The calculation time depends on the complexity of the project.
Manual
8.14

For a light vehicle calculated level time-history
Now move the mouse cursor in the diagram und press the LEFT
mouse key. On this position a vertical cursor line appears, whose
time and sound pressure level is indicated in the upper dialog bar and
a symbol (black box) indicates the vehicles position on the road lane
in the graphic, in the driving direction on the assigned lane axis.
If we now drag the cursor line horizontally in the diagram then the
vehicle symbol also will move along the road. We can also choose a
value from the Animation menu.
Regarding the vehicles position relative to the location of buildings we

will be able to recognise reflections (increases in level) and shielding effects (reductions in level) concerning the level fluctuation.
Manual

The levels time history can by copied for other programs like Excel or
Word either as sequences of numbers or as a chart.
Therefore activate the Level-Time diagram by clicking on it - the

upper dialog bar is then highlighted, normally blue. Now copy to the
clipboard by pressing the key c.
In the other program - e.g. Excel or Word - choose Edit|Paste and

confirm either graphic or text.
8.14 7
Copy the Levels Time
History
8.14
Indicating the vehicle on the road with a symbol (black

box) and in the diagram with a vertical cursor line
Test further pass-by possibilities. Vary the reflection of single buildings by switching them on and off alternately and watching the
effect on the levels time history.
Manual
8.14

This diagram also facilitates the optimisation of barriers, because you can
immediately see the effect of any modification. Going beyond the mere
consideration of time-averaged levels, the pass-by feature offers you a tool
which allows you to examine and visualise the effects of level-reducing
measures on the instantaneous levels.
Video
8.14
You can record the pass-by as video film in AVI format which you can replay with each standard video program such as Windows Media Player.
If you click on the button VIDEO you can configure the recording. Choose
a desired section either the whole limits or a userdefined section. The usderdefined section needs a name in order to select it from the corresponding list. For a try-out we recommend to defined a smaller userdefined
section that it doesnt take too much time for recording.
For the video recording you need a so-called compression program which
you can choose if you have entered a file name.
The list of compression programs shows all installed programs of your operating system. Choose and configure one of them accordingly. After confirming with OK the pass-by is calculated and recorded.
Manual

8.15
*
8.15 1
This source is only available if the BPL module was purchased!
Clicking this icon allows you to specify the boundary of a maximized area
source. The source is characterised by the following features.
The method for the calculation of sound propagation is done as it was

for the general area source (see Chapter 8.5), i. e., the area is split into
partial areas taking into account its distance from the receiver point and
possible shielding objects. The partial areas are replaced by point
sources.
When determining noise quotas using Maximized Area Sources you

should generally activate the option so that shielding objects within do
not affect the emission of area sources. This option is available for any
area source. (see Chapter 12.4.9 Calculation|Configuration|Industry|Src. in buildings/Cylinders do not shield.)
The edit dialog can be switched from day-time to night-time. The entry
of either the area-related sound power level PWL or the total sound
power level PWL refers to the respective time.
By the other entries in the bottom part of the dialog, the Maximized
Area Sources differs from a general area source. These entries support
the maximalisation with respect to the allocation of noise quotas.
Manual
8.15

65.0
65.0
(10/10)
(250/10)
70.0
8
The procedure is explained below.
If immission-sensitive residential areas are situated in the vicinity of a
planned trade or industrial area the latter is so partitioned as to provide individual areas with different maximum permissible emissions. These permissible emission values are determined under the condition that:
the relevant immission limits for the neighbourhood are complied with
in any case, and
the intended use of the individual areas is prevented or restricted in the

least possible way
This generally is called noise allotment. CadnaA supports this in an extremely flexible manner using the Maximized Area Source, without forcing the user to follow a particular program-inherent philosophy of
maximalization.
In order to achieve this, a usability function is assigned to each partial
area.
Manual

8.15 3
It assigns an area-related usability in % to each area-related sound power

level. The fact that the gradient of the curve decreases as the emission values increase shows that a further increase in the permissible emission cannot be exploited due to the intended use. On the other hand, the usability
decreases excessively when a particular emission required for the intended
use is further reduced.
Thanks to this concept /20/ the individual requirements of planning concerning institutions and parties can be accounted for in the maximalisation.
The usability function of CadnaA is approximated by two lines. This requires three emission values for each partial area as a basis for the maximalisation.
PWL max
Manual
is the maximum exploitable emission (depending

on the branch of industry - value may be up to
80 dB(A) for industries with permanent truck
traffic)
8.15

PWL min
is the minimum required emission [determined on

the basis of the absolutely necessary noise-relevant processes - e. g. a 10-minute truck ride
across an area of 1,000 m2 results in 55 dB(A).]
PWL Turning
Point
is the emission value where the gradient of the usability function changes. Below the turning point
level, a 1-dB reduction results in a stronger reduction in usability than a 1-dB increase in the range
above, and enhances the usability. Here we
should enter the value that should be "retained" in
the maximalisation.
8
The usability specified at the turning point determines the curve and thus
the "maximalising strategy".
Common data for industrial areas::
PWL min
57 dB(A)
Turning Point
80 % / 60 dB(A)
PWL max
65 dB(A)
The bottom part of the edit dialog for the Optimized Area Source contains a slider control serving to select an emission value within the range
from min to max like the current value which is displayed in the dialog
above. For a first test, push the slider to the extreme right, thus selecting
the maximum emission value.
Manual
8.15 5

The most critical receiver points are entered with their relevant standard
immission levels as customary. Clicking the calculator icon on the icon bar
starts the calculation. If no receiver point turns red for either day or night,
the standard levels are complied with in spite of the maximum values
which were assumed - in this case it is not necessary to reduce emission
values.
Calculation
8.15.0
In the calculation, all sources existing in the project - roads, railways, industry or even air-traffic noise - are taken into account as the initial immission. The individual or group (see Chapter 18.2) deactivation, or
deactivation of entire types of noise sources allows you to generate and analyse any scenario for large limits.
The procedure described so far is the same as for the calculation of ordinary area sources.
If red colour shows that the standard levels have been exceeded at individual receiver points, the emission from the partial areas with the strongest
influence on the relevant point are reduced in steps.
CadnaA does not require a new calculation for each step. Double-clicking
the respective partial area and shifting the position of the slider will show
you the resulting change of receiver points in the graphic - practically online. Depending on the desired strategy the emission values can be reduced
until compliance with the standard levels is ensured at all receiver points.
Manual
Manual
Maximalisation
8.15.0
8.15

*
Automatic
Maximalization
8.15.0
Follow this procedure separately for day-time and night-time.
Selecting Optimized Area Sources on the Calculation menu will result

in an automatic, iterative reduction of the emission values by CadnaA. It is
always the reduction of emission resulting in the smallest decrease of the
area-related usability according to the concept explained above which is
carried out in this stepwise procedure.
With
Si
area in m of the ith partial area
wi
area-related usability in % of the ith partial area
the total usability is
w=
wi S i
Si
Its value is displayed at the beginning and the end of the maximalization.
The result calculated by CadnaA need not be the best if further aspects,
not accessible to the above usability function, are to be considered. In this
case, the automatic optimisation is a suitable starting point, whereas manual modifications of the emission values using the slider (see above: Manual Maximalisation) allow you to further adapt the scenario in the desired
way.
When the maximalisation has been completed and fixed, the Optimized
Area Source can be converted to an general area source (see Chapter
5.7.14). This is particularly useful where large data stocks are to be supplemented for noise immission maps.
See also:
Chapter "Noise Quota for Urban Land-Use Planning" and Chapter
12.4.13 "Optimisable Source Tab"
Manual

CadnaA-SET Option
8.16
8.16 1
CadnaA-SET Option
Technical Sound Sources Modelling, Sound Calculation and Noise Reduction with CadnaA-SET Module for Calculation of Sound Emission and Transmission
CadnaA-SET is a additional program option with a revolutionary concept.

Without CadnaA-SET immission prognoses for technical facilities you
do not hit the state of the art.
Manual
8.16

CadnaA-SET Option
Main Features:
The frequency spectra of radiating sound power are determined from

the technical parameters.
Complex facilities and devices with multiple sound sources and radiating areas are reproduce with their inner sound flux.
The already existing sound source models establish a pool with immediately accessible know-how
This pool can be extended arbitrarly with the userdefined models (the
work of all employees concerning projects extended the library).
The insertion of a silencer at a location in a sound flux string reduced

the emission of all following radiating areas automatically
The impact at receiver points refering to the noise reduction concepts

can be checked easily by adjusting the technical parameters accordingly (volume flux, thickness of sheet metal).
The SET-Manual:
The CadnaA-SET manual is a powerful compendium regarding technical
sound sources.
Each sound source description consists of one or more pictures
SET-Module Diagram with input (IN) and output (OUT)
Technical-physical specification
Information for the sound genesis mechanismen
Calculation basis in the SET module (name of the SET module, used
equation, parameter terms)
Additional hints for peculiarities such as tone incorporation, possible

noise reduction measure and details for the application insecurity of
this prognosis method.
Literature/References concerning the applied literature, guidelines and

standards
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Contents
9.1 1
Chapter 9 Obstacles
9.1 Contents
9.2
Reflection Properties of Obstacles
9.3
Building
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.3.6
9.3.7
9.3.8
Acoustic Transparency (%)

Residential and Outbuilding
Snap Point to Building Facade
Generate a Building
The Building Evaluation
The Noise Maps of Buildings
Result Table for the Building Noise
9.4
The Cylinder
9.5
The Barriers
9.5.1
9.5.2
The floating Barrier

Barrier with Cantilever
9.6
The Bridge
9.6.1
9.6.2
Entering a Bridge
Example of a Street bridge elevated
by two embankments
Manual
9.1
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Contents
9.7
Embankment
9.7.1
Automatically Optimize Noise Barriers
9.8
Areas with Specified Ground

Absorption
9.9
The Foliage and Built-Up Areas
9.10
3D-Reflector
Manual
9.2 1
Chapter 9 Obstacles
9.2
One of three options can be activated to specify the reflectivity of the surfaces of obstacles. If the properties of the building elements, e. g. of a barrier, are known, the absorption coefficient of the surface may be entered
directly.
Example edit dialog Building
No reflection is calculated for this object.
No Reflection
9.2
Enter the acoustical loss due to reflection in decibels, or click the card-index icon and assign it in terms of the surface classification (in accordance
with RLS90 /9/, Table 7).
Reflection Loss
9.2
Enter a single-number value, a formula, or the reference to an absorption

coefficient spectrum (siehe Kapitel 16.2 The local and global Libraries).
Absorption
Coefficient
Alpha
9.2
For the following options, it is required that under Calculation|Configuration|Reflection tab (see Chapter 12.4.8), an order of reflection of 1 or
more is specified.
Manual
9.2
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Building
9.3
9.3 1
Building
Buildings are objects with vertical walls and an arbitrary closed polygon
as base. The rectangular shape can be forced. The roof is not considered a
reflecting or shielding object. (If necessary, enter a barrier, the top edge of
which is defined by the roof top.)
Reflections at the outer surfaces of the building will be taken into account
according to the mirror sound source method if this option has been selected under Calculation|Configuration (see Chapter 12.4.8).
Sources will be shielded if the are lying within the building because their
facades are be taken into account as barriers. We can determine this by activating or deactivating the option Sources in Buildings/Cylinders do not
shield on the tab Industry in Calculation|Configuration (see Chapter
12.4.9 "Industry Tab").0
The heights of a building is entered as customary in the edit dialog, under

Geometry.
With the function Deactivate Point Objects in Buildings (Tables|Miscellaneous) you can deactivate point like objects (e.g. height points, point
sources) which are within the building base. That maybe sometime useful
after a third-party programs import. Now you can easily delete the deactevated objects with the funktion Modify Object (see Chapter 5.7.2).
Manual
Deactivate Point Objects

in Buildings
9.3.0
9.3
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Building
For further information concerning buildings see chapters:
Quickstart Object Building see Chapter 4.14.5

Acoustical Transparence see Chapter 9.3.1
Generate Building see Chapter 9.3.4
Force Rectangle in the contex menu, see Chapter 5.7.5
Rectangular Plan, see Chapter 5.7.6
Barriers, see Chapter 9.5
Object snap see Chapter 11.2 Allocating a Receiver Point to
a Building
Snap Point on Building Facade see Chapter 9.3.3
Building Evaluation see Chapter 9.3.5
Building Noise Map see Chapter 9.3.6
Import Building Height Points see Chapter 6.4.13
Manual
9.3.1 1
Chapter 9.3 Building

9.3.1
We can allocate the object Building a parameter value acoustic transparency in % by inputing a value > 0 in the corresponding edit box.
Application
With a value larger than zero the defined percentage of the sound energy
is added to the diffracted sound energy when the sound energy is attenuated by diffraction with transparency zero. This property and the described
effect in the calculation method, is only active with industrial noise, that
means with the general point-, line- and area-sources calculated according
to VDI-guideline 2714 /2720 or ISO 9613-2
VDI 2714 / 2720 / ISO

9613-2
General Sources
This feature allows the modeling of more or less open structures that are in
reality an accumulation of pipes, vessels and other technical equipment
that can be penetrated by sound energy. This modeling is performed with
the object Building which has the same shape as the described structure,
and a transparency value that is derived from the open cross section.
In the most general case several objects lie in the path of propagation.
At first we check, which of these objects influence the diffraction calculation according to the rubber-band method (small objects that don't touch a
rubber stretched from source to receiver point remain unconsidered).
If the sound energy at the receiver point is reduced by dE according to the
screening calculation, then with a collective transparency of X % the energy (X/100)*dE is added to the sound energy calculated with transparency
zero.
The total degree of transmission for many buildings is the product of all
single transmission factors.
The calculation method with CadnaA is as follows:
At the receiver point two sound contributions are added energetically. The
first contribution is the diffracted sound over and if necessary around the
arrangement and is calculated as for objects not acoustically transparent.
Manual
Effect
9.3.1

The second contribution is calculated as direct sound energy, not taking

into account the shielding objects, but multiplying this energy value by the
resulting transmission factor defined above.
With direct sound contribution Edir and the resulting transmission factor ,
this second contribution is Edir * .
Attention: This method was implemented because of user demands.

It is not described in any standard or guideline. The expanding of
transparently defined objects has no influence on the result of calculation. The value of the acoustic transparency is considered to be the
same for all directions.
Manual
9.3.1 3

The acoustic transparency of the building is 0 %:
Example
Case 1
9.3.1
9
50
35
50
Manual
9.3.1
Example
Case 2

The acoustic transparency of the building is 50 %:
9
50
47
50
Manual
9.3.1 5

If this option is activated in Calculation|Configuration|Industry the general sources as point-, line- and area sources can be placed within the
building plan. The building, in which the sources are placed, does not affect the emission of these sources. For other sources and receiver points
outside the building a shielding calculation will be taken into account according to the choosen configuration.
Sources in Building/
Cylinderdonotshield9.3.1
With this option the radiation out of almost open structures can be carried
out. So a plant, consisting of open bundles of pipelines, can be modeled as
a house with a predefined transparency considering each specific sound radiating valve as a point source.
Application
Example:
9.3.1
Manual
9.3.1

56
56
56
Manual
9.3.2 1

9.3.2
A building can be labelled a "Residential Building" (default setting). If

"Residential Building" is not marked in the edit dialog, the building in
question is an outbuilding. Residential buildings and outbuildings are thus
automatically marked by different hatchings. Furthermore, only residential
buildings are considered in the automatic determination of the population
density (XL module, see Chapter 11.6.4).
Residential and
Outbuilding
9.3.2
Outbuilding
Residential building
Residential buildings and outbuildings have different hatchings
Specify the appearance of the hatching as shown on the dialog below (Options|Appearance, see Chapter 13.6)
Appearance dialog
For documantation you can enter the real number of residents and with the
option XL you can use this value for further calculations.
Manual
Residents:
9.3.2
9.3.2

Manual

9.3.3
9.3.3 1
The command Snap Point to Facade in the Context Menu of the marked
object or in the Context menu|Change Objects enables you to locate objects (e.g. point, line or area source or receiver point etc.) at a defined distance in front of building facades after they have been inserted.
The objects are attached to the facade with the distance definded in the edit
box Distance Points-Facade.
Distance
Points-Facade
9.3.3
The operation is applied for all points with a distance smaller than the
snap radius.
Snap Radius
9.3.3
This could be necessary, e.g.,
if objects have been inserted without activated Object Snap (see

Chapter 13.5) but shall have a defined distance to the facade
if objects have been placed inside a building inadvertently they are moved and located with the defined distance outside the building or
if points have been imported from external sources
Point Source
Area Source vertical
House
Receiver
Initial situation: House with a point source, a vertical area

source and a receiver point. These objects shall be
dragged in front of the facade with a distance of 0,05 m.
Manual
9.3.3

SnapePoint Facade.cna

In the shown example objects are located near a building. The receiver
point and the vertical area source shall be dragged to the building facade
with a distance of 0,05 m
click with the RIGHT mouse key on a free area in your graphics
choose from the Context Menu|Modify Objects|Action: Snap

Point to Facade
mark the vertical area source and the receiver point as shown in the
following picture and confirm with OK.
The receiver point and the vertical area source are snapped to the
building facade.
Manual

9.3.3 3
With activated option Copy ID/Name of building the contents of these

fields is copied into the corresponding fields of the snaped objects.
Point Source
Area Source vertical
House
Receiver
Manual
9.3.3

Manual

Generate a Building
9.3.4
9.3.4 1
Generate a Building
To insert a building whose roof and four facades radiate sound, use the
convenient Generate Building command on the context menu (see Chapter 5.7).
First, insert a general area source in the shape of the horizontal projection of the building (see Chapter 8.5)
Switch to the edit mode and double-click the area source. This opens
the edit dialog.
Activate the Sound Reduction option, and enter an indoor level, either directly or with reference to a spectrum. Enter all further parameters for this source, and click OK to close the dialog.
Then click the area source with the RIGHT mouse button and select
Generate Building from the context menu.
In the Generate Building dialog, you can enter the parameters for the
height of the building and, if required, the height of the terrain at the base
of the building, and an absorption coefficient - either a single-number value or a reference to a spectrum (see chapter 16.2 The local and global Libraries).
Manual
9.3.4

Generate a Building
When all boxes are completed and the dialog has been closed by clicking
OK, CadnaA generates
1.
a building with a specified height 10 m in this example,
2.
the appropriate number of vertical area sources (see Chapter 5.7)

whose parameters are adopted from the first area source, at a distance
of 0.05 m in front of the building walls, and a horizontal area source
at 0.05 m above the roof (if necessary, adjust the parameters via
Tables|Sources|Vert. Area Sources);
3.
a surrounding contour line (see Chapter 10.5) with the absolute

height as entered.
Horizontal projection
3D-View
Manual

9.3.5
9.3.5 1
According to the requirements of RLS 90 /9/ and using the map symbols
defined in this guideline, there is a fairly simple way of demonstrating for
a building close to a traffic route whether the predefined and maximum
permissible rate levels on the basis of designated land use have been exceeded. It is also possible to ascertain which storeys this is true for and
which values are to be expected at the most exposed position of the facade
during the day and night.
Procedure:
We activate - for better understanding and not because it is necessary

- the option No calculation of Building Noise Map in the menu
Options|Building Noise Map (see Chapter 9.3.6).
Insert the object Building Evaluation with the corresponding icon

from the toolbox. For that, click inside the building plan for that building for which an evaluation is supposed to be made.
After placing the first symbol we should adjust the size if necessary
(see Chapter 5.4.3 "Change Dimensions"). All further inserted symbols then have the same size.
If several or even all buildings or only buildings with a certain condition of a project shall be evaluated we can use the command from the
context menu Modify Object|Action: Generate Building Evaluation to insert the Building Evaluation symbols all at once (see
Chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects").
In this case CadnaA automatically places these symbols in the
selected buildings. The name of the building, entered in the identically named edit box in the edit dialog, will be automatically transfered into the corresponding box of the Building Evaluation.
Manual
Industry.cna
9
9.3.5
Building Evaluation
with Condition

If you want enforce a building evaluation only for buildings e.g. with
a certain height and/or base area you can define a corresponding condition for that.
To insert an expression for a condition activate the pertinent checkbox and either enter the abbreviations (see Chapter 2.5) via keyboard
or select them from the list which opens by clicking the button with
the double-arrows.
9
With the above example would be generated symbols for all buildings which have a relative height heigher than 3 m and a base area
bigger than 50 m. In this case both conditions must be true.
We adjust the symbol sizes via the table Building Evaluation
(Tables|Other Objects) with the context menu command Change
Column (see Chapter 15.2.5) and define the pertinent Land Uses.
But also you can first insert one symbol from the toolbox and make
all settings you wish. CadnaA accept the settings of the last symbol
in the table for the following building evaluation symbols generated.
Manual

Initial situation for a building evaluation. The icon has been placed
on the top left building. The calculation has not yet been performed.
When a building is evaluated, levels computed by CadnaA for all storeys

and in front of all facades are compared to the pertinent limit values or
standard values. The latter can be defined in two ways.
Double-clicking on the building evaluation icon opens the corresponding dialog. Activate the appropriate option for the standard values
If the option Determine from Designated Land Use is deactivated,
you can select the type of area by clicking the card-index icon next to
the Land Use box, and the type of noise can be selected in the Use
Standard Values for list box.
Although this building evaluation was originally aimed at traffic noise,

this flexible concept can also be applied to other types of noise like, e. g.,
industrial noise.
Manual
9.3.5 3
9.3.5

Evaluation of a building in a General Residential Area

with respect to road traffic noise
The second way is to click the Designated Land Use icon and assign a type
of land use to an area by drawing a closed line around it. Then activate Determine from Designated Land Use. The standard values to be compared
should then be known.
When all buildings have been provided with a building evaluation symbol,
and the calculation is triggered by clicking the icon Calculator on the icon
bar, the progress bar window will first display the calculation for the specified receiver points and then the progress of the building evaluation.
In this building evaluation, calculations are performed and evaluated one
after the other
for all buildings bearing this symbol

for all storeys which result from the ratio of building height to storey
height (storey heights may be edited under Options in the edit dialog
Building Evaluation.)
for all outer facades.
Manual

Upon completion of the calculation, the top semicircle of the icon indicates the range of storeys where excess levels occur. If it remains blank, no
excess levels occur, or no area of designated land use has been assigned.
The bottom quarters display the highest levels determined for the day and
for night.
I-VII
7060
I-II
6858
I-III
6757
I-II
6959
I-III
6858
I-II
6959
I-II
7161
I-II
7161
I-II
7261
I-II
6252
Labelling of the building after calculation
Manual
I-II
6959
9.3.5 5
9.3.5
Excluding
Facades

9.3.5
In the edit dialog Building Evaluation if you click on the button Option|Exclude Facade another dialog opens in which you can mark facades
not to be taken into account for a calculation.
The exclusion of irrelevant facades for a calculation of a noise map of

buildings can save a lot of calculation time.
To exclude a facade, click on the identifier of the facade, in the upper part
of the dialog, e.g., F01. Marked identifiers exclude the corresponding facades from a calculation. In the graphic represantation, in the lower part of
the dialog, the currently marked facade is marked by a thick black line. If
the black dot of a facade is faded it indicates the deactivation of this facade. If you click again on the identifier of a facade it will again be included
in the calculation. In this case the black dot is visible.
Manual

9.3.6
9.3.6 1
With the symbol for Building Evaluation (see Chapter 9.3.5) already given in CadnaA, which shows the maximum sound levels and, if necessary,
the storeys with exceeded levels, you are also able to produce a coloured
noise map of a building with each storey possessing its own sound level.
This corresponds to the 16. BImSchV /10/ for establishing passive noise
protection measures for buildings on streets.
In interplay with variants (see Chapter 18.3) - calculation of different

scenarios - we can also quickly generate level-difference-maps of
buildings (see Chapter 9.3.8) and represent them comfortably in a
simply way.
9
Procedure
Insert the symbol Building Evaluation with a mouse click on the

building plan.
In the edit mod,e double-click the Building Evaluation symbol and

define a standard value by selecting the pertinent option.
Manual
9.3.6

If you want to execute a correct building evaluation according to the

16. BImSchV, please do not forget to deactivate all noise sources that
are not to be evaluated (see Chapter 18.2 Groups)
The representational parameters of the building noise map can be reached

via the menu Options|Building Noise Map (see Chapter 9.3.6).
If necessary deactivate the checkbox No Calculation of Building

Noise Map and set the further desired parameters by input or selection.
Start the calculation with the Pocket Calculater from the symbol bar
or with Calculation|Calc
Parameter in the
edit dialog Noise Map of
Building
9.3.6
Edit Dialog Noise Map / Evaluation of Buildings in the Option menu
Manual
9.3.6 3

CadnaA subdivides the facade on the basis of the entered length and in-
serts a level symbol into each section.
Parameter
Calculation for minimum/
maximum Length of
Facade
9.3.6
You can choose the calculation method for the characteristic noise level of
the building from the noise level of the facades (arithmetic or energetic average value, minimum or maximum value)
Averaging Method
By activating this option no noise map is calculated and displayed for the
building but the building evaluation is still executed. If you want to save
calculation time then deactivate the corresponding symbols.
No Calculation of Noise
Map for
Buildings
Choose the facade points/levels you want to display in the noise map for
buildings from the listbox.
Appearence of
Building
Noise Map
Show Facade
Points:
9.3.6
9.3.6
You can also display the identifiers of these generated receiver points in
the Result Table with the <Textvariablen> STW (see Chapter 15.3.3).
Enter a corresponding value - the unit (m) will ajust the size of the symbol
according to the change of scale, (mm) will not do this. If you wish you
can choose different sizes for symbols which contain either exceeding or
non-exceeding noise levels.
Size of (non) Exceeding

Symbol:
9.3.6
Activation of this option will color the level symbols according to the colour palette in the menu Grid|Appearance.
Color Symbols according

to Level:
9.3.6
Activation of this option will show either the level value - in addition to
colouring, if necessary - within the level symbol or as alternativ the number of the program internal numbering of the facade symbols.
Print in
Symbols:
9.3.6
Apply
9.3.6
These levels can also be shown in the Result Table (see Chapter 15.3) by
activating the corresponding option in the field Receiver from Building
Noise Map. Also the number of the facade symbols can be displayed in
the Result Table with the <Textvariablen> FASSNR .
By clicking the Apply button we can look at the settings before closing the
dialog box - a possible change of the facade length only has an effect after
Manual
9.3.6

a new calculation. By clicking the Cancel button the altered setting will
not be accept.
3D-Special
View
9.3.6
Arithmetic
9.3.6
The buildings facades are also colorfully displayed in the 3D-special

view according to the chosen color-level key after a calculation.
With the Arithmetic field you are able to calculate different formula for or
with the noise map of buildings, e.g. level-difference-map for building
noise (see Chapter 9.3.8)
In case a horizontal receiver grid has already been calculated you can allocate interpolated grid values to facade points. A separate calculation of a
noise map for buildings is unnecessary which would save calculation time.
Independent from the number of defined evaluation parameters (see Chapter 12.4.6) the calculation results of the horizontal receiver grid provides a
bases for the building evaluation.
Procedure:
9.3.6
Precondition for the allocation is the existing Building Evaluation

symbol within the relevant buildings and the facade points, which
can be generated by a dummy calculation with only one point
source.
1.
calculate desired receiver grid
2.
generate face points with calculation of one single noise source (e.g.
point source - all other noise sources deactivated with Modify
Objects|Activation|Deactivate|All - except buildings and building
evaluation symbols)
3.
calc the dummy noise map of buildings with the pocket calculater
from the symbol bar
4.
in Option|Building Noise Map|Arithmetic enter the expression r0

and click on the button Perform Calculation
Manual

9.3.6 5
With the expression r0 the interpolated calculation results of the horizontal

grid will be allocated to the corresponding evaluation parameters of the facade points. Subsequently if you choose one of the defined evaluation parameters from the list in the symbol bar the allocated relevant result is
displayed in the facade points.
For allocation to the facade points of interpolated results of the horizontal
receiver grid, coordinates or the ground height the following expressions
can be additionally used for general formula:
Manual
9.3.6
9
Example

Input
Result
r0
allocation of the results from the horizontal grid to all the

corresponding evaluation parameters
r01 bis r04
allocation to the corresponding evaluation parameter

LP1 - LP4
(r01 allocates the result to LP1, r02 to LP2 etc. special application)
x|y|z
evaluates the corresponding x-, y- or z-coordinate of the

facade point
(z allocate the z-coordinate to the facade point special application)
evaluates the ground height at the facade

iff(STW==1;r0;LP)
(if it is the first floor, then allocate the interpolated result from the grid
otherwise not - kept the existing value)
Manual

9.3.7
9.3.7 1
With the generator of the new result table you can define a table showing
the results in a desired form.
Immission Point
Land
Name
ID Storey
IP 01
IP 02
IP 03
Building 01
Building 01
Building 01
Building 02
Building 03
Building 05
Building 06
Building 07
Building 08
Building 08
Building 13
Building 19
Building 19
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
1.OG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
1.OG
1.OG
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
Limiting Value
Day
Night
dB(A)
dB(A)
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
64
54
rel. Axis
Station Distance Height
m
m
m
22
21.51
0.50
0
53.58
1.50
51
35.94
1.50
123
9.19
2.50
126
8.80
2.50
133
12.08
2.50
107
9.70
2.50
91
8.83
2.50
61
12.24
5.30
43
11.82
2.50
26
11.71
2.50
165
9.57
2.50
162
9.67
2.50
81
8.59
2.50
141
12.78
5.30
138
12.81
5.30
Lr w/ Noise Control
dL req.
Day
Night
Day Night
dB(A)
dB(A) dB(A) dB(A)
59.6
49.3
53.2
43.0
51.2
41.0
68.3
58.1
4.3
4.1
68.7
58.5
4.7
4.5
65.1
54.9
1.1
0.9
68.1
57.9
4.1
3.9
68.6
58.4
4.6
4.4
66.7
56.5
2.7
2.5
66.9
56.7
2.9
2.7
66.8
56.6
2.8
2.6
64.5
54.2
0.5
0.2
64.5
54.2
0.5
0.2
65.7
55.4
1.7
1.4
66.4
56.2
2.4
2.2
66.4
56.2
2.4
2.2
Result table with receiver points taken from the noise map for buildings
If you want to look at the results for the receiver points taken from the
noise map of the building in addition to the standard receiver points, please
activate the option Immpoints from Building Noise Map in the result tables edit box and choose the desired levels/storeys from the listbox.
Manual
9.3.7

Edit Dialog Result Table
To show also the column Storey, insert a new line in the edit boxs result
table if necessary.
A double-click on the line will open the edit boxs table column.
Manual

9.3.7 3
9
Column-Edit dialog of the Result Table
Enter the parameters shown above and close the dialog box by clicking
OK. The String variable STW represents the corresponding storey.
The (String variable) STW shows the pertinent storey identifier.
Manual
Storeys
(Textvariable)
STW
9.3.7
9.3.7
String variable for
BNM
9.3.7

Following String variables can be used in the Result Table to view more
information about the facade points of a Building Noise Map:
STW
Floor Identifier
FASSNR
Numbered the level icons of the building

noise map continuously starting with the
first polygon point of the building. These
so-called facade numbering can be displayed in the result tabel, too.Example:On
the basis of the facade partitioning (Options|Building Noise Map) 12 level icons are
generated together for all sides of the building. Consequently they will be covered
intern with the facade numbering from 1, 2,
3 etc. till 12. If each level icon has even 5
storeys so each storey will be assigned to
the corresponding facade number.
DIR
Degree No. 0-360 with 0 symbolized

North direction
HIRI
Direction with one letter (N-North, O-East,

S-South, W-West)
HIRI2
Direction with two letters if necessary (e.g.

NW-North-West, SO-South-East)
Manual

9.3.8
9.3.8 1
With the Noise-Map for Buildings and activated variants we can quickly
calculate the differences in levels at buildings in various project scenarios
and can represent them easily.
Therefore, at first we calculate the noise maps for buildings for all variants
with Calculation|Calc|All Variants. If we switch through the variants by
selecting the variant name at the symbol bar the pertinent result is displayed on the screen.
To better recognize the levels, displayed in the symbols, deactivate the option Color Symbols according to Level, if necessary, or choose a different color palette with Open Palette in the menu Grid|Appearence|
Option (see Chapter 11.5.2).
9
We calculate the level differences by subtracting the results of the variants.
For that, open the dialog Options|Building Noise Map and enter the pertinent formula in the box Arithmetic/actual Variant.
Calculate Level
Differences
We calculate the first variante V01 with the actual situation and the second
variant V02 with the actual situation plus noise protection measures, e.g. a
noise protection wall. What level differences does the noise protection
wall gain at the facades?
Example: Noise Map in

Levels differences for
Buildings
After calculating all variants (Calculation|Calc|All Variants), we create

another variant, e.g., V03 - differences - and activate this by selecting its
name from the list box in the symbol bar.
In the dialog Options|Building Noise Map|Arithmetic/actual Variant
we enter the following:
LPT1 - LPT2
Click the button Perform Calculation. The button Apply displays the result immediately without closing the dialog. Otherwise close the dialog by
clicking the OK button.
Manual
9.3.8

We can enter LPT01 or just LPT1.
In this example the variant V03 will be overwritten if we calculate all

variants again. The calculation of the level differences must be
refreshed. The map of level differences for buildings is always displayed in the activated variant and therefore overwrites the existing
result.
The functions, which you can use in the Arithmetic box, are identical with
those from the Result Table.
Function and Operators see Chapter 2.6
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
The Cylinder
9.4
9.4 1
The Cylinder
A Cylinder can - like a building - shield and/or reflect. It is defined with

two points.
The first point defines the central point and

the second point the radius through its distance to the first point.
The height is entered, as customary, in the edit dialog under Geometry

(see Chapter 10.4).
Line source
9
Source
Immission
point
Reflecting cylilnder
Rays reflected by the cylinder
Lines of equal sound levels
Sources inside the cylinder are shielded because the walls are considered
barriers. This standard effect can be switch off by activating the option
Sources in Buildings/Cylinder do not shield (see Chapter 12.4.9).
Manual
9.4
Chapter 9 Obstacles
The Cylinder
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
The Barriers
9.5
9.5 1
The Barriers
Reflections at the outer surfaces of a barrier are taken into account according to the mirror sound source method if
1.
a reflection > 0 is selected (see Chapter 12.4.8) and
2.
a barrier is defined as reflecting by entering a Reflection Loss or,

alternatively, an Absorption Coefficient Alpha in the edit dialog.
The standard setting of a barrier is No Reflection. But we can define a Reflection Loss or an Absorption Coefficient Alpha for the left and/or right
side of a barrier. Left and right refer to the view from the inital point to the
final point of a barriers polygon points.
Strict provisions are made by RLS-90 /9/ concerning the neglecting of lateral diffraction and of ground attenuation in the calculation of the shielding effect. For all other sources you may define on the tab
Calculation|Configuration|Industry (see Chapter 12.4.9) to what extent
lateral diffraction shall be taken into account and, if necessary, you may
modify the barrier coefficients.
See also
the following chapter 9.5.1 The floating Barrier and
chapter 9.7.1 Automatically Optimize Noise Barriers
Manual
9.5
Chapter 9 Obstacles
The Barriers
Manual
Chapter 9.5 The Barriers

9.5.1
9.5.1 1
The Cadna object Barrier was modified to also include barriers on bridges.
The Floating Barrier option is available in the edit dialog Barrier. If this
option is activated, the height of the barrier from its bottom to top edges
can be entered in the z dimension box, in addition to the height specified in
the Geometry dialog. If the height of the barrier (i. e., the relative height
of its top edge) is, e. g., 10 m, and 3 m have been entered as its
z dimension, the bottom edge is 7 m above the ground.
Such a barrier whose bottom edge does not rest on the ground has the following properties:
1.
The shielding effect is calculated as customary for each ray hitting

the actual barrier surface, considering all three propagation paths
(over, under and laterally around the barrier), if necessary.
2.
Rays passing underneath the barriers edge are not attenuated. This
effect is therefore calculated correctly.
3.
Diffraction around the bottom edge is currently not taken into

account.
4.
Reflections of rays hitting the barriers surface are calculated according to the principle of mirror image source, if necessary. This allows
you tocalculate the increase in level caused by, e. g., large indicator
boards and similar items.
If a barrier is installed on a bridge (see below), the height of the barrier section on the bridge must be entered as either
-
Manual
the height of the top edge above the base plate of the bridge, and
the Building Height button in the Geometry dialog must be
activated - that means 3 m in our example - and the same value
must be entered for the z dimension after Floating Barrier has
been activated, or
9.5.1

the height of the top edge as an absolute value thus 13 m in

our example. The z dimension remains the same (3 m).
In both cases, further polygon points must be inserted (see Chapter

5.4.1) for the barrier where it intersects contour lines.
The barrier is calculated correctly in both cases.
10-m
contour line
Bridge
2 additional polygon points
Interpolate height of contour li

first point 10 m, last point 0 m
First point
Barrier on bridge
0-m contour line
9
Inserting a barrier on a bridge
Bridge.cna
In the two dialogs below enter the height of a reflecting barrier as 3 m

above bridge level .
3-m-high barrier on a bridge in the 3-D front view
Manual

Activate Floating Barrier in the edit dialog
Specify the barrier height above the

bridge by selecting the building roof
option.
If the cross-section view of the noise map is calculated, the level distribution is as illustrated below. The distortion of the lines of an equal sound
level in the top right hemisphere - which is due to the reflection at the barrier - and the shielding effect of the 3-m-high barrier on the left side of the
bridge - can be clearly seen.
Sound level distribution in a vertical plane for a road on a bridge with a barrier
Manual
9.5.1 3
9.5.1

Manual

9.5.2
9.5.2 1
Also barriers with cantilevers can be constructed and calculated in

CadnaA. In this case we activate the option Cantilever and insert a corresponding value for the cantilever horizontal and vertical.
The barrier height in the dialog Geometry is, as with the upright barriers,
the height of the defracting upper edge.
If the barriers height is specified as 3 m in the dialog Geometry and the

cantilever horizontal and vertical as 1 m, each a barrier is constructed as
displayed in the following image.
By selecting left or right the cantilever points to the corresponding side
according to the first polygon point entered when looking toward the final
polygon point. The cantilever is displayed graphically as a dotted line.
Manual
9.5.2

Barrier with cantilever displayed in 3D front view
Barrier with cantilever in 3D special view
Manual

9.5.2 3
The slope area of the cantilever is supposed to be completely

absorbed in each case.
Manual
9.5.2

Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
The Bridge
9.6
9.6 1
The Bridge
The object type "Bridge" considerably extends the modelling capacities,

particularly with respect to road-traffic and railway noise.
CADNA A's 3-D view of a bridge
The CadnaA bridge is a horizontal slab with a closed polygon as its

borderline. All sound rays not hitting the bridge remain unaffected
by it.
If a source lies above the bridge level and a direct sound ray intersects the slab, the shielding by the slab (edges) will be calculated for
receiver points not directly under the bridge-slab.
For sound rays from sources lying below the bridge, which, on their
path to receiver points above the bridge, intersect the slab, the shielding effect is also calculated considering the top edge of the bridge as
the diffracting edge.
Manual
9.6
Chapter 9 Obstacles
The Bridge
Diffraction to the space below the bridge is not considered results

under the bridge are irrelevant!
For the time being, the bridge-slab is always a plane and parallel to
the reference plane, regardless of the contour of the terrain.
The height is always that of the first point (accessible via the Geometry dialog, or directly via Tables|Obstacles|Bridge). Heights
entered for the other corner points in the Geometry dialog are irrelevant. (The currently used standard dialog for the entry of polygon
lines will be adapted for bridges at a later point in time.)
When objects on the bridge-slab are to be allocated a height, the

slab is regarded as a building roof which means that you can
directly enter the height above the level of the bridge-slab in the Geometry dialog after activating the Building Roof option.
In the sectional view, the bridge-slab is not represented (for the time
being).
This means that road constructions of this kind can be correctly considered acoustically. The sound at ground level resulting from a road or a railway on a bridge nearby are calculated correctly and directly by
considering diffraction around the edges of the bridge.
Rays passing below the bridge, which, for a bridged gap in an

embankment, result in sound sources on one side of the embankment
and cause a sound on the other side, are considered automatically
(see example "Bridged Gap in an Embankment").
Thanks to an extension of the definition of barriers, even barriers on a

bridge can be calculated correctly (see Chapter 9.5.1 "The floating Barrier").
See also self-screening of Roads chapter 8.9.
Manual
Chapter 9.6 The Bridge

Entering a Bridge
9.6.1
9.6.1 1
Entering a Bridge
We recommend you enter all coordinates from the keyboard to be able to

follow this example best.
Click the pertinent toolbox icon and enter the x and y coordinates in pairs
on the dialog serving to enter a point. This dialog opens as soon as you
have typed the first number. Close the dialog by clicking OK, then type
the necessary numbers.
To be able to view your entries, set the scale to 1:1,000, and drag the right
scroll box downwards, and the bottom scroll box to the left, as required.
Save this practice file, if you wish to work through the following examples.
Click the bridge icon on the toolbox.
Enter the co-ordinates 50/50, 250/50, 250/70 and 50/70. The bridge is
drawn as a rectangular closed polygon.
Open the edit dialog by double-clicking its borderline, and enter a

height of 10 m relative in the Geometry dialog.
Edit dialog for a bridge object
Manual
9.6.1

Entering a Bridge
Geometry dialog
Furthermore, enter a point source at 150/30/1 with a sound power

level of 100 dB, and a
calculation area with the co-ordinates 35/15, 280/15, 280/150, and

35/150.
Under Grid|Specifications, enter an receiver point spacing of 2 m

and a height of 5 m.
Calculate the grid.
The model entered in the 3-D frontal view. (Options

menu)
The point source lies below the bridge.
Manual

Entering a Bridge
After the calculation, the representation of lines with same sound levels in
steps of 1 dB should be similar to the following illustration.
9.6.1 3
Bridge1.cna
Calculation area
Bridge
Source
The lines of equal sound level demonstrate the passing of rays below the bridge.
As the source and receiver point grids lie below the bridge-slab, the resulting graphics are those typical of free sound propagation.
Now change the height of the source to 15 m so it lies above the

bridge level.
The model entered in the 3-D frontal view. (Options

menu) The point source lies above the bridge.
After the calculation, the level distribution should show the shielding effect of the bridge slab as in the following illustration.
Manual
Bridge2.cna
9.6.1

Entering a Bridge
Calculation area
Bridge
Source
Level distribution on the ground when the point source lies above the bridge level
Below you will find some important notes on the proper handling of this
object.
In practice, ramps and other passages should be defined by contour

lines on both sides of the bridge, and point 1 of the bridge-slab
should "rest" on ground level (relative height = 0). The road section
on the bridge is then specified so as to have two additional points not
lying on the bridge slab and at a relative height of 0 at the contour
line level. Remember: CadnaA always interpolates heights between
points.
Manual

Example of a Street bridge elevated by two embankments
9.6.2
Example of a Street bridge elevated

by two embankments
Now we model a gap in an embankment below an existing bridge. If necessary, edit the limits (Options menu) for the following example (bottom
left corner x = -100). Switch off the representation of the grid (Grid|Appearance|No Grid).
Use the contour line icon to draw a rectangle lying at a height of 10 m

around the first section of the bridge. If right angles are desired, use
the SHIFT key. Start by drawing the longer side of the rectangle.
Upon completion, copy this rectangular contour line and move it to

the end of the bridge.
10-m
contour line
Bridge
10-m contour lines around the beginning and end of a bridge.
Enter two more contour lines adjoining the edges of the rectangular
contour lines, and activate Interpolate Height From First and Last
Points, first point at 10 m, last point at 0 m. (Use the Copy feature in
combination with the CTRL key!)
Interpolate height of contour line
first point 10 m, last point 0 m
10-m
contour line
Bridge
Contour lines adjoining rectangular contour lines
Manual
9.6.2 1
First point
Bridge2.cna
9.6.2

To finalise the gap in the embankment, you need one more 0-m contour line to describe the base of the embankment. Enter this as illustrated below.
Interpolate height of contour line
first point10 m, last point 0 m
10-m
contour line
Bridge
First point
0-m contour line

Point Source
Example of a bridged gap in an embankment
In the 3-D frontal view, the model should look similar to the illustration
below.
3-D frontal view
Manual

3-D isometric view
Now draw a road over the bridge. Its relative height should be 0 m.
Enter a standard cross section, such as b2.
If the road over the bridge only has a first and last point, it will
remain at a height of 0 m which means it does not lie on the bridge.
You can easily check this on the 3-D frontal view. Although undesired, this interpolation by CadnaA is correct, because interpolations
of heights can only be performed between the existing points. In this
case, there are two points (first and last points) at a height of 0 m.
Consequently, it is necessary to enter more points for the road.
Specify two more points at each end of the road. At each end, place
one point inside the 10-m rectangular contour lines and one just outside between the two parallel contour lines with their first points at a
height of 10 m. To this end, select the road in the edit mode, hold the
CTRL key down (the mouse pointer drags along a plus sign) and click
the road at the desired location.
Manual
9.6.2 3
9.6.2
Bridge.cna

The road now correctly bridges the gap in the embankment, as illustrated
below (see also chapter 10.3 Fit Objects to DTM or DTM to Objects).
Two more points for the road were entered on each side of
the bridge, one inside the rectangular contour-line, and
one just outside.
Finally, please note that the bridge object was developed to allow the
correct and guideline-compliant calculation of road-traffic and railway noise taking into account the passing of rays below the bridge
and the shielding of the noise from above. As no complete threedimensional barrier calculation is performed, the object should be
used for this purpose only and should not be combined with arbitrary
other objects.
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Embankment
9.7
9.7 1
Embankment
An embankment with crest of a specified width has a shielding effect due

to diffraction around its two top edges. For the calculation of the insertion
loss DE, these two edges are considered as one non-reflecting double barrier. In the sectional view (see Chapter 13.12), the embankment is therefore
represented by these two barriers.
Display of the embankments cross section
There are two ways to insert an embankment:

1. Manual insertion using the toolbox icon, or
2. using the Parallel Object command from the context menu (see Chapter 5.7.13).
Using the toolbox icon:
Click the toolbox icon,
enter the line for the base of the embankment.
In the edit mode, double-click the base line to open the edit dialog.
Manual
9.7
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Embankment
Enter the appropriate parameters.
Upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, the embankment is shown with
its slope.
9
Crest
Slope
2-D view of the embankment

relative height
The relative height in the dialog Embankment describes the upper edge
of the embankment and the height in the Geometry dialog the height of
the base.
Manual
9.7 3
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Embankment
If the slope is positive, the sloped side will be drawn to the right, as seen
along the base line in the direction of insertion, otherwise to its left.
Slope
The Parallel Object command from the context menu allows you to insert
an embankment running parallel to a road by specifying the distance.
(see also chapter 9.7.1 Automatically Optimize Noise Barriers)
Manual
9.7
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Embankment
Manual
Chapter 9.7 Embankment

9.7.1
9.7.1 1
CadnaA is able to determine autonomously the required height of a noise
protection wall/barrier which is needed to obey given maximum levels by

means of iterative calculation.
Because of the objects structure, for such an optimization we have to

use the object Embankment and n o t the object Barrier.
The following simple example shows the course of events:
Road with a Noise Barrier and a Receiver Point
The represented road exceeds the permitted value at the receiver point.
Therefore a noise barrier shall be constructed in the given position in such
a way that the permitted value is not exceeded.
To perform an optimizing calculation it is absolutely necessary to

assign the relevant maximum value as Standard Level (dBA) to the
receiver points. It is of no significance if you enter the maximum
value directly or have it determined out of the type of land use. (In
that case, do not forget to insert an area of Designated Land Use, see
Chapter 11.4)
Manual
9.7.1

To perform an optimizing calculation the relevant

maximum value must be assigned to the receiver
points
The object Embankment must be given
a slope of 1:0 and

a top width of 0
Do not enter a value for height - this is what CadnaA is supposed to
determine.
To opitmize the height of the Noise Barrier automatically

in the edit dialog Embankment all values have to be
zero.
Manual

9.7.1 3
In the next step we subdivide the noise barrier with the Break into Pieces
command from the context menu of the Embankment. In the example 10
sections of identical size have been formed. Now select an appropriate
view in the menu Options|3-D-View, e.g., isometric.
Options|3-D-View|Isometric
In the symbol bar of this dialog you can find the symbol Optimize Barrier.
After clicking, the parameter dialog will open and we can define our strategy of optimization.
Settings A
Settings B
Both dialogs show examples for possible settings.
Manual
9.7.1

In the upper text box a pattern similar to the group definition can be entered by which only the walls with identical ID codes will be integrated
into the optimizing calculation. On the left hand side only the activated
Embankments are integrated, on the right hand side only the Embankments with the string Barrier plus two additional characters.
With every step of the calculation a barrier section is raised by the value
given in element height. The longer the calculation takes the shorter the
subdivided elements are and the lower the value of the elements height is.
The result of multiplying Element height by Maximum number of elements is the upper limit for the height of the barrier.
In the following combo box you can select the name area or enter any
other name, e.g., the product name of a noise barrier. In the first case the
value 1, in the four subsequent boxes, will remain unchanged and optimization is executed in a way that the entire surface of the noise protection
wall is minimized. With the setting A the further sample calculation is executed.
The setting B in the right figure takes into consideration the fact that the
costs per square-meter can depend on the height of the noise barrier because costs for a foundation have to be apportioned and because, with the
increasing height of the wall, greater wind pressures will have to be withstood. Optimizing is then executed in a way that will minimize the total
cost.
Please note that the combo box cost/m must not be left without an entry.
The cost schedule of a noise barrier can be saved/deleted with the corresponding buttons. A saved cost schedule, valid for all projects, will be at
your disposal in the combo box.
After the setting A has been confirmed, the optimizing calculation will begin.
Manual

Subdivision of the noise barrier into sections of 10m

each - Calculation with the setting B
An element width of 3m leads to the following representation:
Subdivision of the noise barrier into sections of 3m

each - Calculation with setting A
CadnaA first checks if the maximum value (Standard Level (dBA)) has
been exceeded at the maximum height of all wall elements - in this case a
Manual
9.7.1 5
9.7.1

message box will pop up. After the corresponding modification of the configuration the calculation will be restarted.

OptimizeBarrierGap.cna
Please note that with optimizing barriers all settings of the program
will be considered. This is valid for projection, reflexion and consideration of all activated elements. Owing to the large number of steps
of calculation it is always advisable to deactivate all objects that have
no effect on the result. Another alternative is to cut the relevant part
out of the entire project - the optimized wall will then be imported
into the project.
In the following example a noise barrier will be positioned in the given location in front of a gap in a way that a maximum value, given for the receiver point behind the gap, can be maintained.
Initial Situation
In this case the wall is subdivided into 42 elements with a width of 1 m.

This leads to a contour of the upper edge of the wall as shown in the graphic below. Calculation was executed strictly according to RLS90 with
buildings considered as non-reflecting.
Optimizing a barrier with calculation strictly according to RLS90
Manual

9.7.1 7
Now calculation is repeated with builidings considered as reflecting, and

integration of reflexions up to the 5th order are included. Inclination will
also be considered in deviation from the regulations of RLS90. This is appropriate because the represented situation can only be dealt with insufficiently by following the RLS90. As the result shows, a much higher wall
would be necessary to meet this non-trivial situation.
Optimizing a barrier with a 5th order reflexion
With the optimization of barriers CadnaA is able to perform an efficient

positioning of noise protection facilities.
Manual
9.7.1

Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
9.8
9.8 1
Areas with Specified Ground

Absorption
By default, CadnaA calculates point, line, and area sources on the basis of
the frequency-independent excess attenuation due to the effects of the
ground and meteorological effects as specified in the guideline VDI 2714 /
16/, sub-clause 6.3. It is to the disadvantage of this method that special
sound propagation conditions such as the considerably enhanced sound
propagation over, e. g., reflecting water surfaces or concrete-sealed industrial courts is not taken into account.
In such cases, it is possible to apply the calculation method described in
VDI 2714, Annex D, or in ISO 96132 /21/.
This method is frequency-dependent. The levels in the individual frequency bands are affected to different extents. For the application of this method, CadnaA therefore requires:
frequency spectra to be entered for the emissions of sound sources

instead of the mere A-weighted sound power levels.
frequency-dependent calculation must to be selected in the edit dialog of the source.
the option Calculation|Configuration|Industry|Ground

Attenuation Spectral must to be activated.
Running CadnaA and inserting a point source near the left border of
the screen; entering as its sound power level PWL, a value of
100 dB(A). Then
inserting an receiver point near the right border of the screen.
Calculating the level by clicking the calculator icon; recording the

noise level displayed on the edit dialog receiver point. (In our
example, this level was 44.1 dB(A)).
Manual
Frequency-dependent
Calculation
9.8
Chapter 9 Obstacles
9
Calculation configuration for ground attenuation in frequency bands and ground absorption 0
Under Calculation|Configuration|Industry activate Ground Attenuation in Frequency Bands. The default value of 1 for the ground
absorption G is not edited.
When the dialog is closed, a new calculation must be given the same
level as the first one. This is not remarkable because only an Aweighted level of sound power has been entered for the source so far,
meaning its spectrum is not known.
Now double-click the point source to open its edit dialog and select
Spectrum in the Type box. Even if nothing is entered, CadnaA now
assumes the specified form of the spectrum and thus identical levels
for each band of A-weighted spectrum. For the calculation, the spectrum is normalised to the sound power level entered before, i. e.,
100 dB(A).
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
9.8 3
A new calculation is now performed on the basis of the data entered with
frequency-dependent ground attenuation. Compare the values before and
after.
Now enter in the Calculation|Configuration|Industry a ground

attenuation of G=0 for sound-reflecting ground - the calculation
results in a level higher than the first level.
Beside this global specification of the ground absorption, which refers to

the entire project, individual areas may be assigned specific absorption coefficients. Upon clicking the Ground Absorption icon on the toolbox, enter the borderlines of the area. The ground absorption is specified in the
edit dialog (opened by double-clicking on the borderline of the area). For
areas to which no such area has been assigned, the global settings as defined under Calculation|Configuration will apply.
Try, for example, to enter sound propagation conditions for a reflecting
water surface within a lawn area by entering G = 1 for the global calculation configuration, and G = 0 for the area of the water surface. With an appropriate calculation area, the grid calculation will yield the level
distribution as illustrated below.
Manual
9.8
Chapter 9 Obstacles
9
Level distribution calculated with frequency-dependent
ground attenuation. The source is located close to an area
covered by water.
If overlapping areas are entered, the one entered last (so-to-say the one on
top) will always be taken to apply in the overlapping area. Under Options|Appearance, such areas with specified ground absorption can be assigned any colour, such as an opaque blue for the lake in our example.
A list of these entered areas can be found under Tables|Obstacles|
Ground Absorption.
Manual
9.9 1
Chapter 9 Obstacles
9.9
A built-up area is defined by the closed polygon forming its borderline. It

is taken into account in the calculation according to VDI. If only traffic
noise is to be calculated strictly according to RLS-90 or strictly according
to Schall03 /8/, this entry has no effect on the calculation.
Built-Up Areas
9.9
A foliage area is defined by the closed polygon forming its borderline. It is

taken into account in the calculation according to VDI and Schall03. If
only road-traffic noise is to be calculated in accordance with RLS-90, this
entry has no effect on the calculation.
Manual
Foliage
9.9
9.9
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Manual
9.10 1
Chapter 9 Obstacles
3D-Reflector
9.10
3D-Reflector
The object 3D-Reflector models a plane reflector freely orientated in

space. The 3D-reflector is a screening surface where the shortest deviation
path between source-receiver governs the screening effect. Lateral screening and 1st order reflections are considered. In addition, individual edges
of the 3D-reflector can be excluded from the calculation of lateral screening (see paragraph Exclude Edges). This option allows to restrict the
screening at an edge e.g. at adjoining buildings.
3D-Reflector
The reflector's surface has to be plane. When polygon points not forming a
plane have been entered a quadratic averaging is used to generate a plane
surface. However, in these cases the reflector will be still displayed as entered.
If reflections are entered reflections at boundary surfaces of barriers will
be taken into account according to the mirror sound source method. Strict
provisions are made by RLS-90 concerning the neglecting of lateral diffraction and of ground attenuation in the calculation of the shielding effect.
For all other sources it may be defined under Calculation|Configuration|Industry to what extent lateral diffraction shall be taken into account, and the
barrier coefficients may be modified/specified.
When clicking on button "Exclude Edges" on dialog 3D-Reflector a dialog
box opens allowing to mark reflector edges not to be taken into account for
the calculation of diffraction.
To exclude an edge, click once on the name of the edge in the upper part of
the dialog, e.g., E01. Marked identifiers exclude the corresponding edge
from a calculation of diffraction. In the graphic representation, in the lower part of the dialog, the currently marked edge is marked by a thick
black line. If the black dot of a edge is faded it indicates the deactivation of
this edge. If you click again on the name of an edge it will again be included in the calculation. In this case the black dot is visible again.
The function is restricted to max. 32 edges. If a 3D-reflector has more then
32 edges further edges cannot be excluded.
Manual
Exclude Edges
9.10.0
9.10
Chapter 9 Obstacles
3D-Reflector
see also Technical-Notes:

TN02012004_Special_Objects.pdf
3D_reflector_e.pdf
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 10 Topography
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
10
Manual
Contents
10.1 1
10.1 Contents
10.2
General Information for Working with

Uneven Terrain in CadnaA
10.3
Fit Objects to DTM or

DTM to Objects
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
Point-like Objects
The Line-like Objects
Two-Dimensional Objects
Three-dimensional Objects
10.4
The Objects Geometry
10.5
Contour Lines
10.6
Fault Lines
10.7
Height Points
10.7.1
Generate Contour Lines from Height Points
10.8
Display Ground Height
Manual
10
10.1
Contents
10
Manual
General Information for Working with Uneven Terrain in CadnaA
10.2
10.2 1
General Information for Working with

Uneven Terrain in CadnaA
The contour of the terrain has two major effects on the calculation of
sound propagation.
1.
It determines the heights of sources, shielding objects, and receiver

points, if the heights of these have been entered as relative values.
For short distances, this, in turn, may affect the length of the sound
path, thus the propagation loss, the path length difference around the
barrier, and, consequently, the insertion loss.
2.
The average height of the sound ray, thus the ground attenuation, is
determined from the contour of the terrain.
Any program calculating immission must approximately calculate the

heights of the terrain from the input information available. Modelling the
terrain completely - using, e. g., an overall system of contour lines in fine
steps - is often ruled out because data is missing and would lead to a considerable increase in calculation times.
Therefore, the most effective method with regard to data input is to use
only as much detail in the height information as is needed, from the acoustic point of view, taking into account the two above-mentioned effects.
This is particularly true where data collection and input require time and,
consequently, expenses. It does not apply where existing data can be imported. In this case, it may become necessary to reduce the amount of data
by Simplifying the Geometry (see Chapter 5.7.11).
Being somewhat familiar with the program-internal procedures will help
you to determine the degree of detail needed and reasonable. Therefore,
we will give you a brief description of how contour-line information is
processed by CadnaA.
For each contour line and fault of line, the program internally generates a
barrier with this line as its top edge and which is perpendicular to the reference plane with an absolute height of 0.
Manual
10
10.2
General Information for Working with Uneven Terrain in CadnaA
Where the height of an object has been given as a relative value, i. e., as
height above the ground, the program calculates, prior to the actual calculation of propagation , the absolute height of the terrain at the object base or the height of the terrain above the reference plane - for the polygon
points determining the object height. This is achieved by evaluating the information on the nearest contour lines.
This evaluation is done for
10
the first point (corner entered first) of closed polygon lines defining
buildings
each point entered for open polygon lines defining roads, and for general line sources, barriers, and similar objects
each point entered for closed polygon lines defining parking lots, general area sources, and similar objects.
In the calculation of propagation, the sound ray from the source point to
the receiver point intersects the horizontal projections of all contour lines
and fault lines and any path length difference. Thus the shielding effect of
the elevated terrain is determined. Furthermore, the height of the sound
ray above the contour lines and fault lines at all intersections along with
the path lengths between these points serve to determine, by numerical integration, the average height of the sound ray, and from this value, the
ground attenuation. The heights of the terrain at source and receiver point,
determined, if necessary, from the contour lines near these points, are taken into account.
The procedures and program strategies described above lead to the following conclusions regarding correct data input.
Manual
Fit Objects to DTM or DTM to Objects
10.3
10.3 1
Fit Objects to DTM1 or

DTM to Objects
CadnaA calculates the heights of objects and of the terrain at the pertinent
polygon points of the objects. For the area in-between, a linear interpolation is performed.
Therefore, the user may have to enter additional points where contour lines
and objects intersect to allow the change in slope of the terrain at such
points to be taken into account.
To evaluate the heights between contour lines with only a few polygon
points you can also insert additional polygon points for the contour lines
automatically in CadnaA. For that, you have two possibilities when executing the command: either directly at the objects context menu, this would
affect only that object or its sourrounding terrain, or with the Modify Object command and the corresponding Action which would affect the desired objects which you have selected in the dialog (see Chapter 5.8):
1.
Fit Objects to DTM. This command uses contour lines and edges of
triangulation to fit the object to the surface of the digital terrain
model.
2.
Fit DTM to Object. This command changes the whole terrain model
by cutting existing contour lines and inserting new ones.
1.
Digital Terrain Model
Manual
10
10.3
An example with the object Road:

The existing DTM in the cross-section view
and in the top view:
10
Exampel:
Fit Objekt to DTM
A road on a DTM with only an initial and a final point. Therefore the
object is unable to adjust to the ground..
Top View
3D-Special View
Manual
10.3 3
The road after executing the command in the Context menu|Fit Object to
DTM. Additional polygon points are inserted for the road at the intersection of the contour lines. Therefore, the object adjusts itself to the ground.
Top View
3D-Special View
After executing the command Fit DTM to Object the following dialog
appears in which you can set the parameters for the adjustment of the objects.
Example:
Fit DTM to Object
In this box define the additional width for the ground around the object
which shall be located at the same height. CadnaA than inserted parallel
contour lines in the defined distance and deleted them between road and
parallel contour lines.
Width/Additional Width
Because the margin of the Road simbolizes the middle axeses of the outermost lanes you have to insert an additional width for the real width of the
road which is taken into account with the half width for each side.
Manual
10
10.3
With open objects like Roads, Railways, Line sources etc., the parallel contour lines are placed at the distance of the half value of the
defined additional width; with closed objects like Buildings, Area
sources etc., contour lines are placed around the objects with the
defined value.
10
Top View: 1 Width/Additional Width, 2 Sampling Distance, 3 Distance from Curb
Sampling Distance
For the best adaptation on the DTM you can define a distance (box Sampling Distance) in the cross-section of the object in which a base-point
should be placed for the new contour line.
Manual
10.3 5
Top View
3D-Special View
The Situation after the command Fit DTM to Object has been executed
with the Sampling Distance of 20 m. The parallel contour lines are clearly
visible.
When inputting a slope the resulting angle adjusts the DTM in this area by
inserting new base-points of contour lines.
Manual
Slope 1:
10
10.3
Cross-Section
Top View
Situation after executing the command Fit DTM to Objects with a

Slope 1: 1.50.
10
3D-Special View
Manual
Chapter 10.3 Fit Objects to DTM or DTM to Objects

Point-like Objects
10.3.1 1
10.3.1 Point-like Objects

Point-like objects such as point sources, receiver points and tennis points
of service have three co-ordinates - x to the right, y upwards, and z for the
height - which describe their position. These values are listed in the columns of the pertinent object tables.
The z coordinate can be entered as a relative height, an absolute height, or
the height above the building roof. If a relative height is given, the absolute height z results from the height of the terrain at the position given by
the x and y coordinates of the point plus the relative height entered. If, for
a point, a definite height is to be achieved, it is convenient to enter an absolute height.
10
Manual
10.3.1

Point-like Objects
10
Manual

10.3.2 1
10.3.2 The Line-like Objects

The line-like objects such as line sources, roads, and railways, are defined
by an open polygon line or by a series of points.
The first and last points of the polygon line may have the same, or different, heights (relative, absolute, or above the building roof, see Chapter
10.4). The heights of the points inbetween are determined automatically
by linear interpolation. Another alternative is to enter each point of the
polygon line with a different absolute height.
10
Manual
10.3.2

10
Manual

10.3.3 1
10.3.3 Two-Dimensional Objects

Two-dimensional objects, such as area sources and parking lots, are described by a closed polygon line or by a series of points.
Two-dimensional
Objects (Excluding
Vertical Ones)
10.3.3
By entering the height of the first point, all points can be assigned the
same height (relative, absolute, or above the building roof). Another alternative is to enter each point of the polygon line with a different absolute
height.
Two-dimensional vertical objects such as vertical area sources and barriers
are defined by an open polygon line or by a series of points describing
their top edge plus a z dimension describing their bottom edge. The top
and bottom edges are always parallel and have identical horizontal projections. Refer to "Line-like Objects" above for the entering of the height, or
z coordinate, of the points of the polygon line defining the top edge.
Two-dimensional
Vertical Objects 10.3.3
10
Manual
10.3.3

10
Manual
10.3.4 1

10.3.4 Three-dimensional Objects

Buildings are defined by a closed polygon line or by a series of points defining their top edge. They always extend from the ground to the top edge
thus defined. Refer to "Two-dimensional Objects (Excluding Vertical
Ones)" above for the entering of the height, or z coordinate, of the points
on the polygon line defining the top edge.
Buildings
If the height of the building has been given as a relative value, the absolute
height of the top edge results from the height of the terrain at the first point
(corner entered first) plus the relative height of the building.
Cylinders are defined by the position of their centres in the horizontal projections, and also by their radii and heights (relative, absolute, or above the
building roof).
If the height is entered as a relative value, the absolute height of the cylinders top edge is the sum of the height of the terrain at the centre and the
relative height.
Manual
Cylinders
10
10.3.4

10
Manual
10.4 1
10.4
Any line-like, two-dimensional or three-dimensional object, except cylinders, can be forced to be rectangular while entering the defining polygon
line by positioning the points using the mouse with the SHIFT key pushed
down. If rectangles are to be generated, it is convenient to enter the longer
side first. When clicking the third point to define the shorter side, the
mouse pointer is positioned on the first point, and when clicking again, the
third, longer side is automatically drawn with the correct length. A final
click with the right mouse button suffices to close the rectangle. This procedure is particularly advisable when inserting buildings having right angles in their horizontal projection.
Horizontal Projections
With Right Angles 10.4
The geometry dialog shows the coordinates of an object. It is accessible

via the Geometry button in the edit dialog. The edit dialog can vary from
the displayed dialog of a building depending on the selected object..
Geometrie
Dialog
10.4
10
Example of geometry dialog
The table of coordinates in the edit dialog can be edited. For that, doubleclick on the corresponding row.
Manual
Coordinates
Polygon point
10.4
10.4
x-y-z-Coordinates
Ground height
10.4
Cross section/Distance/
Slope of Roads
10.4
Depending on the selected options from the list under the table of coordinates you can either edit only the x-y-coordinates and/or the z-height and/
or the ground height.
Also in the road dialog Geometry you can enter the Standard Cross Section (SCS)/Distance of the central axis from both outer lanes and/or the
slope of the road for each polygon point.
If the distance of a lane and/or a slope is entered, CadnaA adjusts the value for all further polygon points until a new input ensues.
The corresponding fields of the table remain empty. A new value is entered only if a value changes. Consequently for the calculation the next
above entered value will be considered for an empty table field in the columns Distance and Slope.
Depending on the selcted option from the list, the following parameters in
the coordinate table are possible:
More Options
10
Interpolate from
First/Last Point
10.4
Only the x- and y-coordinates are editable in the table of coordinates.
Enter the heights, or z co-ordinates of the first and, if necessary, last

point. For that mark the identically named option.
After a calculation - if an initial and final height, for the First and Last
point, was entered - the interpolated heights on each point are displayed in the table of coordinates.
If the height is equal for each point of an object then the checkbox of
the Last Point should be deactivated. The initial height of the First
Point will be assigned to the whole object (standard setting).
relative Height
10.4
With the following options determine the kind of height by activating

its check box.
Height, in metres (m), above ground. The absolute height of the ground
can be different for different locations due to contour lines, fault lines, and
the default height specified under Calculation Configuration.
Manual
10.4 3
The absolute Height is the height above a reference plane, usually mean
see level (M.S.L.)
absolute Height
10.4
This option allows you to directly enter the height above the roof of a
building in order to facilitate the specification of the height for external
sound sources on the roof of the building. If the source lies within the horizontal projection of the building, its height will be calculated as the sum
of the height of the building and the height above the roof specified here.
Roof
10.4
If different heights for polygon points are assigned to a building, the height
for that object will be calculated with the first height point of the building.
An area source, e.g., placed within the horizontal projection of a building
and whose height is assigned to the option "Roof" will have a uniform
height even if the heights of the polygon points are different. You may
have to input the height on each point directly by using the option "absolute height at every point".
In CadnaA buildings are modelled like "open boxes" without a roof.
Therefore K0 will be calculated according to the height above the digital
terrain modell for point-, line- and area sources placed within the horizontal projection of the building.
K0
10.4.0
This option may also be activated for Floating barriers (see Chapter
9.5.1) on bridges. The height of the top edge of a barrier then results from
the bridge height plus the specified height above the buildings roof.
If this option is activated, the z co-ordinate can be specified individually
for every point. The given value of z is the absolute height of the object in
this case.
To this end, double-click on the relevant row in the coordinate table of the
edit dialog. The edit dialog polygon point appears. When the desired z coordinate has been entered, by clicking the arrow buttons, or pressing
ALT+SHIFT+> or ALT+SHIFT+<, you will be taken to the next or previous
set of coordinates, respectively, without leaving this window.
Manual
Enter Absolute Height

at Every Point
10.4
10
10.4
The advantage of using the hotkeys is that the cell currently selected will
remain selected while switching, and that the corresponding entry will be
overwritten when you enter a new value. This procedure allows you to easily enter all heights for a polygon line one after the other.
unknown Heights
10.4
Usually, to correctly model the course of a polygon, you will also have to
enter polygon points whose heights are unknown and which would have to
be interpolated. This task can be performed by CadnaA as well.
If the absolute height of some points is unknown, the value of the height is
deleted for these points. The default height is 0 m. Just press the DEL key
to delete it (the box is now empty). When the dialog is closed, CadnaA updates the value by interpolation. You can check the interpolated values by
opening the dialog again.
Absolute Height/Ground
at every point
10.4
10
With the option absolute Height/Ground at every Point we can enter the
ground height for each point additionally.
All other possibilities are the same as described above for Enter Absolute
Height at Every Point.
See also Chapter 5.7 paragraph "Example: change height from absolute to
relative and vice- versa"
Reference Point
10.4.0
CadnaA has an internal list of reference points which is helpful to transmit
coordinates automatically, e.g. for transformation of objects or for calibration of bitmaps. Particular if you have big coordinates you could produce
mistakes while entering values via the keyboard yourself. With the list of
reference points you can easily transmit coordinate into the corresponding
fields automatically.
Example:
Calibrate a bitmap using reference points without entering a single coordinate.
Demo2.cna
Therefore open the file Demo2.cna on your CD-Rom in the directory

SAMPLES. This is a copy of the file Demo1.cna in which originally
a bitmap is contained. But you will calibrate a bitmap yourself now.
Manual
10.4 5
To calibrate the bitmap as accurate as possible you should choose four reference points in your opened file. Therefore
double-click an object which coordinates shall be the first reference

point. Open its Geometry dialog and double-click the corresponding
data record of the coordinates.
In this example you must remember the buildings corner because
subsequently you have to click on the corresponding corner in the
bitmap for the first reference point if you calibrate the bitmap.
10
Click on the buttom RefPoint - the following dialog opens.
Manual
10.4
As you can see the coordinates of your reference point is entered

automatically in the corresponding fields New Reference Point. If
you now want to use it - like in our example - as first reference point
you have to activate the pertinent option Reference Point 1:.
10
Proceed with the other three reference points analogously. You only
have to activate the pertinent option for the respective coordinates.
Therefore for the next reference point the option Reference Point 2:
etc.
If you have defined all four reference points
Demo1.bmp
insert an arbitrary frame of a bitmap anywhere in your file and open

its edit dialog.
Click on the card-index icon beside the field File and choose the
bitmap file Demo1.bmp on your CD-Rom in the directory SAMPLES. The path and the file name has to be displayed in the field File.
Afterwards click the button Calibrate Bitmap and activate all four
reference points by clicking the corresponding options. As you can
see all coordinates are entered in the pertinent fields automatically.
Manual
10.4 7
Now if you confirm with OK you will be asked for the individual reference points by CadnaA which you have to click in the bitmap point by
point.
After clicking the fourth reference point and confirming with OK your bitmap should now be placed correctly in your file.
For further information see Chapter 14 Pictures.
Manual
10
10.4
10
Manual
Contour Lines
10.5
10.5 1
Contour Lines
Contour lines and fault lines serve to create a model of the topographical
conditions or of the contour of the terrain. They are entered with absolute
heights.
A contour line allocates to the terrain along these lines a defined height
above the reference plane. The height at any point of the line is specified
as generally described for line-like objects.
The contour of the terrain between the contour lines is interpolated for the
calculation, depending on the settings specified on the Calculation|Configuration|DMT tab.
The topographical conditions or uneven terrain may cause shielding effects and affect ground attenuation in the propagation calculation. Furthermore, the absolute height of objects whose height has been given as a
relative value is determined by taking into account the height of the terrain
at the base of the object as resulting from contour lines and fault lines.
For the calculation of the shielding effects of elevated terrain, contour
lines are treated like the top edges of barriers. Elevations generated by interpolation between the contour lines are not taken into account in this calculation.
The table Contour Lines (Tables menu) only lists the first and last points.
The listed heights are absolute values (see above).
The geometry data of the contour lines can be exported or printed by refering to the key word #(Table, Hline_GEO) .
Manual
10
10.5
Contour Lines
10
Manual
Fault Lines
10.6
10.6 1
Fault Lines
Contour lines and fault lines serve to create a model of topographical conditions or of the contour of a terrain.
A fault line is interpreted as a discontinuity in the terrain surface between
the heights of the terrain defined by the adjacent contour lines or the
heights applying directly to the terrain on both sides.
10
A fault line is defined by a line in the x-and-y plane. The fault lines table
(Tables menu) lists these lines with their automatically generated serial
numbers.
The geometry data of fault lines can be printed or exported using the key
word #(Table, Bruch_GEO) (see Chapter 17.4).
The height of the terrain near fault lines is interpolated arithmetically if the
option Determine Height from Contour Lines is active and is not easily
predictable in the individual case.
Manual
10.6
Fault Lines
If a specific discontinuity is to be forced, it is always advisable to activate

the option Enter Height at Every Point and to directly assign the z values
to the left and right of the fault line by editing the coordinates table (see
Chapter 10.4).
For the calculation of the shielding effects caused by elevated terrain, fault
linesfault lines are treated like the top edges of barriers, with their heights
as determined by the contour line model.
Elevations generated by interpolation between contour lines and fault lines
are not taken into account in the calculation of the shielding effect.
fault lines are entered as line-like objects. Once the line has been inserted
and double-clicked, the edit line-of-fault dialog opens. You can then enter
the co-ordinates like for any line-like object. (Giving the height is optional).
see also Calculation Configuration|DTM tab
10
Manual
Height Points
10.7
10.7 1
Height Points
The topography, i.e., the geographical structure of the ground surface, can
be constructed with Contour Lines, Height Points and Fault lines. Note
that only lines, that means contour lines and fault lines, are considered
screening objects. Although the ground surface constructed with height
points is used to determine the height of objects with relative heights, it
does not influence the average height of a ray above ground (ground attenuation!) and is not taken into account as diffracting, except when the option Triangulation is activated. In this case the height points are
connected by additional lines and these are used in the screening calculation and for ground attenuation (see Chapter 12.4.7 "DTM Digital Terrain
Model Tab").
With the height points a defined height will be assigned to the ground
above the reference plane at the relevant location. This height will be defined generally as it was for Point Objects .
10
The shape of the ground between the height points will be interpolated in
the calculation according to the Calculation|Configuration.
The uneven surface of ground defined exclusively by height points is not
affected by screening. The absolute height of objects, for which a relative
height has been defined, is calculated according to the ground height resulting from the height point model at the base point of the object.
If Triangulation is not activated, no screening effect will be taken into account for uneven ground defined only by height points.
After inputting and double-clicking on the Height Point, the dialog opens,
containing edit boxes for the input of coordinates as is usual with point objects.
Many height points will occupy many memory and therefore your project
file would be very big because height points can also have an ID or a name which has to be managed.
Manual
Use Contour line

as Cluster of
Height Points
10.7.0
10.7
Height Points
To save memory you can convert (Modify Object|Convert to|Contour lines) the height points into contour lines which produces a cluster of height
points. A cluster exists of about 1,000 height points which are linked to a
contour line. The contour lines can be converted back again to height
points.
HP.cna
Open the file HP.cna on your CD-Rom (Samples|Topography). The file

contains about 4,000 height points.
From the context menu execute the command Modify Object|Convert to|Contour lines.
Afterwards open Tables|Obstacles|Contour Lines.
You can see now that in this example only five contour lines exist. If you
click on a datarecord the corresponding contour line will be highlighted.
10
Delete Height Points 10.7
If the height point information for the digital terrain model is too detailed
you can delete them with the command Delete Height Points in Tables|Miscellaneous. After executing the command and entering a height,
the height points are deleted which deviate from each other less then the
defined height. By that, the height point model will be reduced accordingly.
(see Chapter 10.7.1 Generate Contour Lines from Height points.)
Import Ascii-File as
Height Points
10.7
If you get an Ascii-file with x-y-z-coordinates which symbolize Height

Points you could either import this file via ODBC interface (see Chapter
6.5) or with the function File|Import|Import format:ASCII-POLY. The
following describes the import via File|Import.
In both cases the Ascii-file should have three columns with column headers e.g. x, y and z and the columns should be separated by TAB.
Manual
Height Points
10.7 3
Ascii-file separated with TAB
If you import this file with File|Import|Import Format: ASCII-POLY

you get all points joined to a line, as Aux. Polygon, with different heights
for each base point.
Click with the RIGHT mouse button on this line and choose Convert
to|Contour Line from the context menu. Now you have one Contour
Line in your file. Again with the RIGHT mouse button convert this Contour Line into individual Height Points.
If you now want to create from the Height Points different Contour Lines then see Chapter 10.7.1 "Generate Contour Lines from Height Points"
Manual
10
10.7
Height Points
10
Manual
Chapter 10.7 Height Points

10.7.1 1
10.7.1 Generate Contour Lines from Height Points

In contrast to contour lines height points usually have the disadvantage
that ground attenuation and shielding will not be taken into account in the
calculation of sound propagation (except if you have activated the DTM
Triangulation see Chapter 12.4.7).
To avoid this you can generate contour lines from the height points.
1.
First define a grid in the menu Grid|Specification in which the

heights are to be calculated.
2.
Click on the icon Show Ground Height.
3.
Execute a grid calculation (Grid|Calc. Grid).
For definition and representation of the lines of equal height the dialog boxes of the receiver points grid are used analogously. For the
representation of the lines of equal height use also the dialog of the
receiver points grid (Grid|Appearance). The lines of equal sound
power level are now lines of equal height. You can also use colour
settings in the menu Options.
In the menu Level Range (upper limit, lower limit, class width) you can
define - from which height (lower limit) to which height (upper limit) and
with which height differences (class width) - these lines shall be represented. If you quit the dialog with OK, you can see which contour lines will be
generated in the next step. Now press ALT+F12 - the represented lines of
equal height are now converted into the object type Contour Line.
Manual
10
10.7.1
Chapter 10.7 Height Points

10
Manual
10.8
10.8 1
At the individual points of a calculated grid (beside the sound level for the
evaluation parameters) the ground height is also calculated and saved as a
separate value from the contour lines, height points and fault lines as taken
into account from the standard height defined in Calculation|Configuration if necessary.
After the grid calculation beside the coordinates (x/y) and the sound level
(L), the ground height (G) will also be displayed in the status bar at the position of the mouse cursor.
You do not need a sound source if you only calculate the ground
height.
If you choose Ground from the evaluation parameter list in the symbol bar
not the sound level is shown longer, but the value of the ground height
will be activated and displayed on the screen equivalent to the settings
made in Grid|Appearence. The Lower and Upper Limit should now be
entered, and it should include all current ground height values.
If you activate Line of Equal Sound Level, the contour lines calculated
with interpolation will be displayed.
Hints for professionals: If you want to generate proper contour lines

in your project just press ALT+F12.
see Chapter 10.7.1 "Generate Contour Lines from Height Points" and 10.7
Height Points: Use Contour line as Cluster of Height Points
Manual
10.8.0
10
10.8
10
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 11 Immissions
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
11
Manual
Contents
11.1 1
11.1 Contents
11.2
Receiver Points
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
11.2.5
11.2.6
Utilization - Standard Level - Infringement

Calculation and Presentation of Results for Receiver Points on the Display
Check Consistency
Sound Pressure Level
Partial Levels
Floors
11.3
Designation of Land Use
11.4
Land Use
11.5
Grid of Receiver Points
11.5.1
11.5.2
11.5.3
11.5.4
11.5.5
11.5.6
Grid Specification
Appearance of Grid
Vertical Receiver Grid
Calculating a Grid
Grid Arithmetic
Creating a Grid of Receiver Points
from Iso-dB-lines
Manual
11
11.1
Contents
11.6
CadnaA Option XL
11.6.1
Noise Maps and their Evaluation

with CadnaA
Conflict Maps
Evaluation
Population Density
Closing Buildings
Object-Scan
Monetary Evaluation of Noise according
to BUWAL
11.6.2
11.6.3
11.6.4
11.6.5
11.6.6
11.6.7
11
Manual
11.2 1
Receiver Points
11.2
Receiver Points
A calculation of sound immission can be performed for a grid of points

(see Chapter 11.5) or for points specified individually after clicking the
Pocket Calculator in the icon bar. The icon shown above serves to insert
single receiver points at the desired position in the project.
As opposed to receiver points in a grid you can save all intermediate values for the individually placed receiver points (see chapter 12.6 Calculation Protocol).
You also can display the sound rays of the corresponding order of reflection (see Chapter 12.3). Therefore activate the option Generate Rays in
the edit dialog of the receiver point. The rays are deleted if you calculate
again with deactivated option Generate Rays.
Generate
Rays
To allocate a receiver point with the same distance to a building, you can
activate the Object Snap in the menu Options. The receiver points will
then be placed in front of the building at the defined distance from the facade. The default distance is 0,05 m. Therefore no receiver point disappears accidently inside the building.
Allocating a receiver
point to a building 11.2.0
To open the edit dialog Receiver Point click either with the RIGHT mouse
click (insertion mode) on the border of the receiver point or make a double-click (in the edit mode).
Manual
11.2.0
11
11.2
Receiver Points
Receiver Point Edit Dialog
The presentation and number of calculated values depend on the defined

evaluation parameters (see Chapter 12.4.6).
As default if the results at a receiver point exeeded the defined limiting values its symbol changed red. Alternative you can choose a different color
via a formula (see Chapter 13.6).
11
Object Geometry see Chapter 10.4

11.2.0
Manual
Chapter 11.2 Receiver Points

11.2.1 1
11.2.1 Utilization - Standard Level - Infringement

If standard levels are allocated to receiver points after a calculation you
can easily notice in the graphic if the standard level has been exceeded or
not. In the case of infringement the receiver point has been colored red on
default or in a color defined via a formula (see Chapter 13.6 "Object Appearance").
The standard level can be entered either directly in the pertinent edit field
or can be defined by the kind of utilization (land use) and their allocated
standard levels. Choose one kind of land use from the combo box, which
has been previously entered in the menu Options|Land Use (see Chapter
11.4).
If the checkbox Determine from Areas of Land Use is activated, the
standard level will be determined through a calculation from the kind of
land use inside of whose area the receiver point lies. The standard level is
displayed after the calculation in the corresponding field.
11
Manual
11.2.1

11
Manual

11.2.2 1
11.2.2 Calculation and Presentation of Results for

Receiver Points on the Display
In CadnaA since release 3.5 for single receiver points can be calculated simultaneously up to four evaluation parameters (see Chapter 12.4.6).
Start the calculation of the evaluation parameters for the individual receiver points either in the menu Calculation|Calc or via the icon in the icon
bar.
If you have defined different evaluation parameters after a calculation, the
colors for receiver points may change when a limiting value has been exeeded (see Chapter 13.6 "Object Appearance").
To see the results of the calculated evaluation parameters select its identifier from the symbol bar. Also in Tables|Partial Level you will see the result of the choosen evaluation parameter.
see also chapter 11.2 paragraph: Allocating a Receiver Point to a building.
11
Manual
11.2.2

11
Manual

Check Consistency
11.2.3 1
11.2.3 Check Consistency

If receiver points or point sources lie within a building, CadnaA will draw
your attention to this by opening the dialogue Check for Consistency as
soon as you trigger a calculation.
If required, this allows for modifications before the calculation.

Click a line on this window to select the pertinent object in the graphic. If
the object in question lies outside the area visible on the screen, click the
line again while holding sown the SHIFT key. This brings the object on the
screen.
Double-clicking a line opens the pertinent edit dialog.
Click the Cancel button to stop the calculation, or click Continue to proceed.
Manual
11
11.2.3

Check Consistency
11
Manual

11.2.4 1
11.2.4 Sound Pressure Level

If a frequency-dependent calculation has been performed, levels will be
displayed for each frequency band. If, for a noise source, only one band is
missing, no spectra will be displayed.
Level Spectra
11.2.4
The calculated levels of the evaluation parameters are displayed in the

Level (dBA) box. As time-averaging has already been performed, this will
usually be a rating level (if other corrections needed for the calculation of
the rating level have been taken into account when entering the emission
data.).
11
Results in frequency bands for Day (Ld) and Night (Ln)
The value of infrigiment is displayed in the box Excess Level if the standard level has been exceeded for this receiver point.
Manual
Infringement
11.2.4
11.2.4

11
Manual

Partial Levels
11.2.5 1
11.2.5 Partial Levels

The sound level at a receiver point resulting from a specific sound source
is called a partial level.
Clicking the Partial Levels button on the edit dialog opens the list of partial levels.
11
List of partial levels at a receiver point with all noise

sources and calculated evaluation parameters
The list of partial levels displays, for the specified receiver point, the partial levels of the calculated evaluation parameters - in frequency bands, if
necessary - of all sound sources accounted for in the calculation. The list
of partial levels determines, e. g., the ranking of priorities for effective
noise control measures.
Select the Sort Column (see Chapter 15.2.4) command from the context
menu to have the columns sorted by, e. g., partial levels in ascending order.
Double-clicking the cell of the receiver point opens the edit dialog of the
source that causes this partial level.
Manual
11.2.5

Partial Levels
Selecting the menu Tables|Partial Levels opens an overall list of the partial levels at all receiver points caused by all sources accounted for in the
calculation.
11
Manual
11.2.6 1

Floors
11.2.6 Floors
This context menu command allows you to generate at a receiver point a
row of further receiver points for the floors above or below.
Insert a receiver point in front of a building. (Be sure the object snap is activated.)
Example
A building in CadnaA with a receiver point at a distance

of 5 cm (object snap) from the facade.
Click the receiver point using the RIGHT mouse button. From the context menu (see Chapter 5.7) select Generate Floors.
Select/enter the values as on the dialog Floor above, and click OK to

close the dialog. CadnaA then creates three more receiver points in a
vertical row above the first one. They have the same name as the first
Manual
11
11.2.6

Floors
one, plus the storey number.
Afterwards open the Table|Receiver Points.
When all heights have been entered, and the storey numbers have been appended, the table of receiver points should look similar to the above illustration.
11
If necessary, use the 3-D view (see Chapter 13.13) to check if the storeys
were entered correctly.
3D-Wire model View Cabinet
Manual
11.3
11.3 1
Areas of different land use allow for the description of the designated land
use in accordance with the Land Use Ordinance. Points within such areas
can thus be assigned the standard levels for the different types of noise
(Options|Land Use). This feature allows you to adopt the types of designated land use for the entire CadnaA project directly from development
plans, and to calculate sensitivity maps. This leads to conflicting maps
where the differences between the rating levels calculated for each type of
noise and the standard levels, as per the designated land use, are calculated
(Prerequisite: XL module).
CadnaA can also automatically assign the pertinent standard levels to all
receiver points lying within a defined area of Land Use. The prerequisites
are
1.
that the checkbox Determine from Areas of Land Use is activated

in the edit dialog of the receiver point and
2.
an area of designated land use is inserted in which the receiver points

are included.
Enter the borderlines of the areas of designated land use after clicking the
icon on tool box.
In the edit mode double-click the borderline of the inserted area and select
the type of land use from the list box.
Manual
11
11.3
Population /
km
11.3.0
Monetary Data
11.3.0
(Prerequisite: XL module) - The menu command Grid|Population Density allows CadnaA to approximate the population density from the buildings, and to assign it to the areas of designated land use (see Chapter
11.6.4).
(Prerequisite: XL module) - A technique to evaluate the noise is described
in the study /55/. This method has been integrated into CadnaA (see Chapter 11.6.7).
11
Manual
Land Use
11.4
11.4 1
Land Use
Via the menu Options|Land Use, the standard levels for the defined evaluation parameters (see Chapter 12.3.6) applying to the different types of
noise and the appearance - filling pattern and colour - are assigned to the
different types of land use. These different kinds of land use can be selected in the edit dialog of the object Area of Designated Land Use (see
Chapter 11.3).
11
In this dialog you can define new kinds of areas. Therefore
select a blank line in the Land Use table. (Just click the white area.)
Then enter a name and the pertinent standard levels in the boxes.
Colours, line style, and filling pattern for representation of the area can
then be selected as customary after clicking the colour button.
In practical work it will be useful to switch off the filling pattern of areas
with a certain land use for the clarity of the colored noise maps.
User-defined types of land use are saved with the project. They are not
available for other projects.
Manual
11.4
Land Use
11
Manual
11.5 1
11.5
In the menu Grid you can specify a grid of points on which the immission
level is calculated for all defined evaluation parameters (max. four grids,
additionally to the ground) and the result displayed as colored noise map
with lines or areas of equal sound levels. The calculation of the sound level for this grid of points is started with the command Grid|Calc Grid (see
Chapter 11.5.4).
Calc Grid
11.5.0
Save Grid as
11.5.0
Open Grid
11.5.0
Keep Current
Grid
11.5.0
If you want to display a calculated specific grid choose its identifier from
the list in the symbol bar.
With the command Grid|Save as only the calculated grids will be saved,
not the project file with the objects.
The following formats can be saved: CadnaA, ASCII, LIMA.
With the command Grid|Open you can load calculated grids (noise map)
only when it has been saved before either as a grid with the command
Grid|Save or from a CadnaA file which included a calculated grid. For
that, select the corresponding file in the dialog. With multiple selections
you are able to load several grids simultaneously into the current file. A
grid cannot be opend via the menu File|Import!
In case a grid file contains several grids of different evaluation parameters
they will only be displayed if the same evaluation parameters also exist in
the current file.
Following grid formats can be opend: CadnaA, ASCII, LIMA, SoundPlan.
If the Option Keep Current Grid is activated you can load grids in the
current file without deleting the existing ones. The first existing calculated
grid in the current file sets the mash of the grid. By different widths the
loaded grids will be adjusted to the first grid by interpolation.
Manual
11
11.5
This function enables the calculation of a big file with divided calculation
areas on different computers sharing the file by calculating only one of the
calculation areas one after the other. Afterwards all the grids will be loaded together into the original file with Grid|Load and activated Option
Keep Current Grid (see Chapter 18.6 "PCSP - Program Controlled Segmented Processing").
Delete Grid
11.5.0
A calculated grid can be deleted with the command Grid|Delete. The

command cannot be undone.
11
Manual
Chapter 11.5 Grid of Receiver Points

Grid Specification
11.5.1 1
11.5.1 Grid Specification

Enter the distance between receiver points for the x and y directions and
the receiver point height, in meters. By default, the receiver point height is
relative, with regard to the ground.
If you wish to calculate an absolute grid height, activate the pertinent option. In this case, the grid does not follow the topography. Receiver points
lying in the ground are omitted.
A finer grid results in a higher density of receiver points. This enhances
contrast in the graphic representation of the areas or lines of equal sound
level, but it will also require more time for calculation.
11
Determine the limits of the grid under Options.

If the option Define Grid over entire Limit is activated the grid covers
the entire defined limits (Options|Limits) of the project file.
If the option is deactivated you can restrict the calculation area by input of
the x- and y-coordinates for the upper and lower edges of the receiver
Manual
Define Grid over

entire Limit
11.5.1
11.5.1

Grid Specification
point grid. Another alternative is to draw a Calculation Area with the icon
from the toolbox (see Chapter 12.5 "Selecting Data for the Calculation").
Exclude Sound Sources/
Buildings
11.5.1
This default setting means that, as far as possible, no receiver points are
placed, and thus calculated, within the horizontal projections of sound
sources and buildings.
Use Height
of Buildings
When Use Height of Buildings and Exclude Buildings are activated at

the same time, the horizontal projection of a building is excluded from the
grid where the building height exceeds the height of the immission point
grid.
Example:
11.5.1
11
Building 1 = 3 metres high

Building 2 = 5 metres high
Immission point height 3. 5 metres
Under Grid specification, Exclude Buildings and Account for Building Height are activated.
Under Options|Appearance|Buildings, the setting is "transparent.
On the tab Calculation|Configuration|General, the option Extrapolate Grid under Buildings is deactivated.
A grid calculation with an appropriate sound source at an appropriate

height would, for example, result in the following graphic.
Manual

Grid Specification
Graphic representation after calculation of a receiver

point grid at a height of 3.5 m with the option Use Height
of Building active
To see this effect make sure that the buildings colour is not opaque!
(see Options|Appearance)
Manual
11.5.1 3
11
11.5.1
Delete
Grid Points

Grid Specification
11.5.1
The command Delete Grid Points from the context menu of a calculation
area is useful to cut out calculated noise maps either to replace that portion after a new calculation or to use only a section of a big noise map. The
PC-memory used for the deleted section of the grid will be deallocated..
The whole Noise Map
Calculation area (horse ;-) with deleted

grid points inside the polygone
11
New calculated grid for a portion

of the noise map
the small noise map imported with

Grid|Open| Keep current Grid
Insert an abitrarily shaped calculation area over a calculated noise map,

highlight the polygon and select Delete Grid Points from the context menu. Choose either inside or outside the polygon.
The settings of the current grid will be assigned to the imported grid.
Manual

Appearance of Grid
11.5.2 1
11.5.2 Appearance of Grid

Grid|Appearance determines the layout of the graphics after a grid calculation.
If this item Lines of equal Sound Levels is activated, lines with the same
value of the calculated sound level are displayed. The width of the level interval is defined under Class Width.
Lines of equal Sound

Levels
(Iso-dB-Lines)
11.5.2
11
When displaying Iso dB lines, make sure, before the calculation, that the
option Extrapolate Grid Under Buildings on the Calculation|Configuration|General tab has been deactivated.
Otherwise, lines could be drawn under buildings if, as a result of the grid
specification, some grid points were to lie within buildings.
The Boundaries of the areas are interpolated geometrically.
If the option Exclude Sound Sources/Buildings (see Chapter 11.5.1
"Grid Specification") has been activated, there may be uncolored areas
close to buildings or area sources as a result of the specified receiver point
grid.
In order to avoid this, you may, under Calculation|Configuration, activate the option Extrapolate Grid under Buildings (see Chapter 12.4.3
"General Tab") before carrying out the calculation. The colored areas will
Manual
Area of equal Sound

Levels
11.5.2
11.5.2

Appearance of Grid
then reach up to the contours of the objects in question as closely as possible.

Grid
11.5.2
Areas where the calculated sound level lies within pre-defined intervals
are given the same color in the representation. You determine the intervals
under Options, either by loading an appropriate palette or by editing the
allocation of colors to level intervals.
Oversampling
11.5.2
With the default setting oversampling value 1 the representation occurs

with a resolution resulting from the settings made in the choosen grid.
If the value is > 1 more intermediate points will be generated on which the
sound level is determined by interpolation of the already existing points.
The option Class Width does not affect the display.
11
No Grid
11.5.2
No noise map is displayed if this option has been activated. However, you
will always see the coloured map in the 3D-special view. To avoid this,
switch to the mode Display Ground Height before you change to the 3Dspecial view.
Level Range
11.5.2
The range over which Iso dB lines or areas of equal sound level are represented starts at the value given as lower limit and ends at that defined as
upper limit.
Class Width
The value given in this box will only have an effect if one of the options
Lines of Equal Sound Level or Areas of Equal Sound Level is activated.
The width of a class defines the steps between subsequent Iso dB lines.
Lower and upper limits define the level range.
Grid Points
Show Dots
or Values
After a calculation, executed with the command Grid|Calc Grid, you can
either display the receiver grid points or the sound levels calculated at these points. For that in Grid|Appearance option Grid Points select either
Dots or Values.
If you have activated the view Display Ground Height (see Chapter 10.8)
the values of the ground height in meters will be displayed instead the
sound levels or if you have executed an Object-Scan (see Chapter 11.6.6)
the values of the corresponding attribute.
11.5.2
Manual

Appearance of Grid
11.5.2 3
Activating this option results in continuous transitions being generated between one color and the next. The appearance of the printout will depend
on the selected printer.
Progressive
Colors
In this part of the dialog, individual colors can be assigned to each respective range of noise level.
Apperance of Grid
Options
11.5.2
Clicking a color button opens either the "Line Style" dialog (if the option
Iso dB Lines is selected) or the selection box Colours (if the option Areas
of Equal Sound Level is selected).
Assign Colors
11.5.2
Iso-dB-Line
Intervals
11.5.2
11.5.2
It is possible to integrate this palette with its allocation to the classes of

noise levels either directly in the graphical display with the object icon
Symbol (see Chapter 13.11.3) or as a key in the default printout of the
graphic or in the user-defined printout.
You can emphasise Iso dB lines at specified intervals. In order to draw
thicker lines for the multiples of, e. g., 10 dB, click the arrow button to the
right of the list box and select ??0.0". (The question marks serve as wildcards for any other figure). If the lines for multiples of 5 dB are also supposed to show, then select ??5.0" from the second list box. Now all that
remains to be done is defining the line widths by specifying the desired
widths in tenths of millimetres in the second box on the right. When the
window is closed by clicking OK, you can check the settings on the
screen.
Manual
11
11.5.2

Appearance of Grid
11
Manual

11.5.3 1
11.5.3 Vertical Receiver Grid

Grid calculations can be performed for arbitrary vertical sections, and the
results can be displayed as lines of equal sound level or as coloured noise
maps. This representation may be printed, copied or saved or displayed in
the 3D-special view.
vertical noise map in 3D-special View
The following example illustrates an initial situation that is easily generated. On both sides of a road are two buildings.
Click the pertinent icon Vertical Grid and draw a line with only two polygon points to determine the position of the desired vertical grid. You may
enter an arbitrarily number of vertical grids. Open the edit dialog and under Geometry, assign a height to the vertical grid polygon up to which a
grid calculation is to be performed. In our example we have set 50 m.
Manual
11
11.5.3

11
The vertical grids dialog
Calculate automatical
Trigger the calculation of the grid by clicking the button Calculate. The
edit dialog remains open. If the option autom. right to the button Calculate is activated the grid would be calculated together with the horizontal
grid. In that case the dialog would be closed.
Global
In the edit dialog of the Vertical Grid the settings of the grid can be specified directly if the option global right to the button Specification is deactivated . The settings can be different to the horizontal grid. In the other case
the specifications of the horizontal grid will be used.
Save as
Save the grid as usual as *.CNR file. If you do so the grid will be kept and
displayed again if you open the edit dialog after closing otherwise not.
Manual
11.5.3 3

The pertinent noise level is displayed at the particular position of the

mouse pointer in the cover bar of the dialog.
Via the button Copy you can copy the graphics into the clipboard and you
can inserted it again with STRG+V in a third-party program.
Copy
11
Scenario in 3D-Special view - the path on the road
If you have inserted several vertical grid sections you can see them all in
the 3D-special view if you use e.g. an Aux. Polygon as path.
For printing the vertical grids can be referred to in the plot-designer as
3D-speical view or as cross-section view from the edit dialog.
Manual
11.5.3

11
Manual

Calculating a Grid
11.5.4 1
11.5.4 Calculating a Grid

The command Calculate Grid in the menu Grid starts the calculation for
the specified receiver point grid.
If no particular calculation area has been defined - either using the toolbox
icon (see Chapter 12.5 "Selecting Data for the Calculation") or via the
menu Grid Specification - the calculation is performed for the entire limits (see Options|Wrap-around). Otherwise, only the specified area will
be calculated.
The grid calculation takes into account all objects and sound sources, even
if they lie outside the specified calculation area.
see also Check Consistency chapter 11.2.3.
With the activated option Update during Grid Calculation the calculated
grid is built up by colored areas while the calculation is still in progress.
Update during
Grid Calculation 11.5.4
A grid calculation may be stopped, or interrupted to be resumed later on, at

exactly the point where it was stopped.
Stop Grid
Calculation
To stop the calculation, click the Stop button.

Some time may elapse before CadnaA reacts to your input and stops the
calculation.
Manual
11.5.4
11
11.5.4
Press Shift key to continue

Calculating a Grid
If you wish to resume the calculation where you stopped it, save the
project file. CadnaA "memorises" the progress made in the calculation. To
continue the calculation, hold down the SHIFT key while clicking
Grid|Calculate Grid.
11
Manual
Grid Arithmetic
11.5.5 1
11.5.5 Grid Arithmetic

In the field Expression for New Grid you may enter a formula from
which a new noise map is generated using the grid currently displayed on
the screen, r0, and the grid files specified under R1 through R6.
The expression r0 for the current grid referes to the grids of all defined
evaluation parameters (max. four). Therefore a grid arithmetics will be executed for all grids of evaluation parameters.
For clarification a simple example is shown in the following screen shot:
11
If you enter in the first field Expression for New Grid r0+1 and if the
checkboxes of the other evaluation parameters are deactivated the grids of
all evaluation parameters will be taken into account automatically. (the
same effect would be if you activate the corresponding checkboxes and
enter in each field starting with the first one: r01+1 - second field r02+1
and so on).
Manual
11.5.5
Grid Arithmetic
The checkboxes of the single evaluation parameters have to be activated

only for special cases.
In the further example given here, the levels of the grid RK_STR.CNA are
numerically subtracted from the energetic sum of the levels of the current
grid (r0) and those of the grids saved as R_B.CNA and RK_G.CNA. Also
in this examaple all grids of evaluation parameters are taken into account.
11
As a test problem calculate the grid for a point source in front of a reflecting barrier and save it and refer to it in field R1. Now deactivate reflection
and calculate the energetic difference between r0 and the saved grid using
the command sequence r1-- r0. The ISO-dB lines in the graphics illustrate
the sound field of the mirrors sound source.
The referencing of the itemization grids of evaluation parameters field Expression for New Grid 1 till 4: r01 for the grid of the first evaluation parameter; r02 for the second grid etc. till r04.
see Chapter 11.5.5 "Grid Arithmetic"
see Chapter 11.5.6 "Creating a Grid of Receiver Points from Iso-dB-lines"
Manual

Creating a Grid of Receiver Points from Iso-dB-lines
11.5.6 1
11.5.6 Creating a Grid of Receiver Points

from Iso-dB-lines
You can also generate a grid of receiver points in CadnaA from Iso-dBlines of an external file. In some cases you will only get certain Iso-dBlines, e.g., aircraft noise areas. If you now wish to add this information to
your already existing grid you will also need a grid of receiver points (see
Chapter 11.5.5 "Grid Arithmetic").
Try out this function by, e.g., first exporting the Iso-dB-lines to DXF (with
activated option Height is Level and deactivated option No Grid points)
and then using this file to generate a grid of receiver points from these IsodB-lines. For that use a separate new CadnaA file to avoid to calculate the
maybe existing grids of evaluation parameters again.
1.
File|Import|Format: DXF
In the Options dialog import the Iso-dB-lines as Contour Lines! Layername *. Deactivate the auxiliary polygons.
But of course this way only works if the values of sound levels are
integrated as height in the file of importation.
2.
Subsequently calculate ground grid (its calculated automatically with

Grid|Calc Grid - if necessary, enter class width as well as upper
and lower limit (When calculating only the ground grid, no source is
needed - but first specify the desired spacing of the receiver point
grid in Grid|Specification).
3.
Raster|Arithmetik - Expression for new grid: r0g
That's it. This has turned the ground grid to a grid which you can save for
further use but make sure that an evaluation parameter from the symbol
bar is choosen - not Ground, then Grid|Save. Now this grid file can be
used for grid arithmetik. Open it in one of the fields R1 to R6 and refer to
it in your expression.
If necessary do not forget to delete the contour lines.
Manual
IsodB.dxf
11
11.5.6

But what is happened, if the value of sound level is only integrated as textual information, e.g., like an entry in the ID box after the file has been imported as contour line?
Sound level values as textual information in the ID box the values are not yet assigned as height.
A resolution also exists here - keyword Modify Attribute.
11
Go on as described above with point 1 and 2 but integrate the following

steps
Raster_IsodB.cna
Step 2 a
Change the entry in the ID box with the function Change Column
(see Chapter 15.2.5) so that only the entry of the sound level value
exist. In the example in the above figure leads the following entry to
the desired result.
Manual
11.5.6 3

Expression for the command Replace String
The results are the sound level values only
Now you have to swap the sound level values from the ID box into the
field Geometry|Height (First Point). Therefore
Click with the RIGHT mouse key on a free space in your project file
and select Modify Object|Action|Modify Attribute|Object type
Contour Line from the context menu and confirm with OK.
In the dialog Modify Attribute select HA as Attribute (for the

height of the first point) and the option Arithmetric|New Value= ID
(you can choose this attribute from the list if you click on the doublearrow button)
Manual
Step 2 b
11
Double-arrow key
11.5.6

Settings to insert the sound level value from the ID box into the height field
Close the dialog with OK and confirm also the following dialog with
button ALL. The sound level value from the ID box is then inserted
into the height field as z-coordinate.
11
Now go on again as described with point 3. In this example we have specified a grid spacing of 5 x 5 m.
Manual

11.5.6 5
Iso-dB lines imported as Contour lines and
11
converted into a grid (apperance with ares of equal sound levels)
Manual
11.5.6

11
Manual
CadnaA Option XL
11.6
*
11.6 1
CadnaA Option XL
The Option XL (formaly SIP) is an additional modul for CadnaA

and only runs with the basic version. The following menu functions
are accessible only if the option XL has been purchased:
Calc Map of Conflicts, see Chapter 11.6.2,
Evaluation, see Chapter 11.6.3
Population Density, see Chapter 11.6.4, and
Object-Scan, see Chapter 11.6.6
Monetary Evaluation of Noise according to BUWAL,
see Chapter 11.6.7
The CadnaA option XL is an extremly flexible tool for creating noise

maps. If all the data exists for a given scenario and a corresponding project
file has also be created, the final process is easily done with the XL-option
of CadnaA.
We will not discuss the accumulation of data any further here, but we
would like to point out that the difficulty, for the production of noise maps,
considerably depends on whether a part of or all the essential data can be
optained in a digital format and if the program can import them.
Manual
11
11.6
CadnaA Option XL
11
Manual
Chapter 11.6 CadnaA Option XL

11.6.1 1
11.6.1 Noise Maps and their Evaluation

with CadnaA
The following picture is an excellent example of this situation. A heavily
traveled road with a mean daily traffic density of about 15.000 vehicles per
24 hours leads through a built-up area.
Initial Situation
11
A built-up area with 13.000 inhabitants for which a noise

map and a noise reduction plan is to be produced.
Manual
11.6.1
Noise Maps

11.6.1
The complete data of the project - this is valid for our built-up area as well
as for a big city - is contained in a single file which can be opened with a
double-click on its file name. Anyone who has already suffered under other programs with its numberless run files, command files and the modules
which have to be loaded one after the other will very much appreciate this.
On the basis of the mighty group concept of CadnaA it is easily possible
to calculate noise maps consecutively for road traffic and/or railways, for
industry and trade plants, for sport and leisures facilities, for aircraft noise
and for any other source of noise. For that, it is only necessary that each
source is allocated a noise type with at least one character in its ID code.
If, for example, the ID codes of all roads contain the characters S30 as
first digits, then all roads will be deactivated for a calculation with the following entry in the edit dialog Group.
Test this with the

example file
XL_01.cna
11
Edit dialog Group
If all noise sources are deactivated - except those which have to be calculated - you can start the calculation (Grid|Calc Grid) with the desired settings made in Calculation|Configuration.
In our example for the built-up area with the through-road it has been calculated in a 10 m grid. Switch on the option Raster, Oversampling 1 in
Grid|Appearance.
The noise exposure for each city or built-up area can be easily discovered
with such a colored noise map with the corresponding legend .
see Chapter 11.5 "Grid of Receiver Points"
Manual

In CadnaA the areas of diverse land use can be allocated different permitted or standard values for the individual noise types. Therefore you have to
draw a closed polygon (with the icon Area of Designated Land use from
the toolbox) around a region which you can allocate a certain usage. After
double-click on this polygon you can enter the pertinent ranking of land
use.
The hatched area is in our example a pure residential area

(PR) with standard values for the individual noise types
Edit dialog Land Use in which the classification of land

use can be allocated.
Manual
11.6.1 3
Noise Maps Maximum

Values
11.6.1
11
11.6.1

In the edit dialog Land Use the density of inhabitants (population/km)

can also be entered. This value is required if, e.g., an evaluation is to be
carried out according to a noise impact value. The population density can
determined, also automatically, by counting the buildings in this area with
CadnaA.
Digital Zoning Plan/
Land Utilisation
Plan
11.6.1
The mentioned land uses result from the zoning plan, urban land use planning or the legally binding land use plan or by consideration of the actual
present usage. We pracitally have a digital zoning plan if all areas are allocated such land use.
see Chapter 11.3 "Designation of Land Use" and chapter 11.4 "Land Use".
11
Manual

Conflict Maps
11.6.2 1
11.6.2 Conflict Maps

A conflict occurs where the relevant maximum receiver value has been exceeded. In the same way as the actual noise impact is illustrated as a level
in the noise map, the conflict maps can depict the degree of excess and deviation from the relevant standard receiver value in a coloured map.
Prior to the calculation of the conflict map the file with the noise map
should be saved (File|Save As).
After the areas of designated land use (see Chapter 11.3) have been specified, the conflict maps can be calculated because CadnaA then knows the
relevant maximum sound levels at the receiver points for each type of
noise.
To this end, select from the list the type of noise which was used to
calculate the current noise map on the dialog opening. In our example
we only have calculated the traffic noise.
XL_01.cna
11
In the calculation, the standard receiver values specified for this type of
noise will be considered for any type of land use. (They are specified under Options|Land Use - see Chapter 11.4.)
As a rule, the coloured representation of the map disappears upon completion of the calculation, because the palette was not matched to the differences in level occurring in the conflict map. It is therefore convenient to
generate a specific palette for maps of conflicts under Grid|Appearance|Options, and to save it as conflict.pal. A negative value for the lower
limit of the representation range should also be selected here.
Manual
conflikt.pal
11.6.2

Conflict Maps
With such created conflict maps it becomes immediately clear which residential buildings lie in red areas or by which buildings the standard or permitted level has been exceeded.
11
Manual

Evaluation
11.6.3 1
11.6.3 Evaluation
Although the conflict maps (see Chapter 11.6.2) neatly illustrate problem
areas, this information is still far too detailed for an evaluation of different
planning alternatives. An unambiguous scaling in terms of a singlenumber rating is required here.
There are numerous ways for such a single-number rating. Presently, however, there is no generally accepted and standardised algorithm. As the
purpose is to quantify the noise impact on a complete area, all these concepts agree in raising the noise impact quantity with an increasing number
of persons concerned and with increasing sound level or increasing excess
level. The number of persons concerned, N, is generally considered as a
linear influence. The influence of the sound level, however, is a matter of
controversy. An exponential term is certainly appropriate since the effect
of an increase in level by x dB is the more detrimental the higher the original level, or the excess level, is.
In order to accommodate different concepts and to remain open to future
developments the evaluation formula may be specified arbitrarily by the
user. The following example illustrates the simplest possible concept, i. e.,
adding the excess levels per inhabitant for the entire area.
LB = N i i
with
LB
Noise impact value
Ni
Number of persons subject to excess level i
Excess level in dB
Manual
11
11.6.3

Evaluation
Such an evaluation can only be carried out for an area, if
the calculated noise map is available in CadnaA and
all areas to be considered in the evaluation are assigned a designated

land use, and thereby a standard receiver value.
Then, under Grid|Evaluation, open the dialog and - as a simple test - enter the characters fl in the field Expression. This entry fl causes the
addition of all grid surfaces which results in the total area.
11
Since fl shows the area in m of each grid point when scanning them all,
and consequently, adding up these areas, clicking Calculate will yield the
total area covered by the grid. For a noise map the entry shown in the following dialog may appear as an example. The total area here is approximately 2.3 km .
If you click on the double arrow button on the right hand side of the field
expression a list with predefined expressions and formulas opens - e.g. you
also could mark the identifier Area of grid rectangle of the expression fl
instead of entering it via keyboard. The expression will be inserted automatically.
Manual

Evaluation
11.6.3 3
The following variables are available for an evaluation formula:

Variable
Meaning
fl
area of a grid element in m2
r0
current level on this grid element
na
limiting value
naein
population density in inhabitants/km2
nages
limiting value of noise caused at the receiver point

from all noise types together
naind

from industry
nastr

from road traffic
nasch

from railway
naflg

from air traffic
Manual
11
11.6.3

Evaluation
naog
grid point in area of land us, yes/
nagfz
Floor Space Ratio FSR
namiete
Rent/m/a
namind
Abatement of rent (in monetary unit, by increase of

the noise level by 1 dB), e.g. 1% percent abatement
of rent per 1 dB (according to BUWAL)
All the usual operators (see Chapter 2.6) like +,-,*,/,<,> can be used. The
sign ++ allows an energetic summing and the sign -- an energetic subtraction. The command iif(criterion, expression1, expression2) results in the
criterion being checked and the value resulting from expression1 being returned if the criterion has been fulfilled; the one resulting from
expression2 being returned if the criterion has not been fulfilled.
11
Manual

Evaluation
11.6.3 5
Example with
functions
Function
Result after Calculation
number of raster elements
fl
total raster area
naein*fl/1e6
number of inhabitants in all areas of

designated land use
iif(r0>=65,naein*fl/1e6,0)
number of inhabitants subject to levels

of more than 65 dB
iif(r0>=nastr,naein*fl/
1e6,0)
number of inhabitants subject to excess

road noise
max(naein*fl/1e6*r0,0)
the above-mentioned value of noise impact, if applied to the conflict maps
iif((r0<Lo)*(r0>Lu),fl,0)
qm-area of a certain level

(Lo = upper level, Lu = lower level)
With this, subtly differentiated analyses can be created quickly an simply.

After an expression has been specified, it is convenient to enter an identification in the field Name for the quantity to be calculated. This identification appears in the list box Evaluation as soon as another line in this box
is clicked. Now you may enter a further expression for a single-number
evaluation. For a noise map, e. g., with the evaluation dialog below, the
noise impact results in a value of 1430 (inh.*dB) for the night-time.
Manual
11.6.3
11
11.6.3

Evaluation
Clicking the line "Inhab with exceeding" results in the following display:
11
Thus 190 inhabitants are subject to excess night-time levels. The average
excess level is:
mittel = 1430 / 190 = 7,5 dB
You can find a list with pre-defined expressions if you click on the arrowbutton. To insert a pre-defined expression just click on its identifier. You
can change and save the expression with a new name in the user-defined
list Evaluation.
Manual

Population Density
11.6.4 1
11.6.4 Population Density

The density of inhabitants for a certain area or the numbers of residents
per building will be required if an evaluation like the noise impact value is
to be performed.
Either we have these numbers and enter them via keyboard and import or
we evaluate and enter them. This estimation can, however, be a laborious
job. CadnaA can settle this automatically in an effective way.
The following is required to calculate the density of inhabitants/km:
areas of designated land use (see Chapter 11.3) have to be inserted

in these areas buildings (see Chapter 9.3.2) are included and
a formula (see Chapter 2.6) has to be entered for the calculation of
inhabitants.
We do not need areas of designated land uses if we calculate only the
residents of buildings.
With Grid|Population Density we open a dialog for entering a formula

with the variables indicated in the dialog for the calculation of the inhabitants.
In the above figure we have presupposed that in each case, on average,

40 m of floor space can be allocated to one person and that the floor
height is on average 3 m.
Manual
11
11
11.6.4

Population Density
Calc Residents per

Building
11.6.4
After confirming the dialog with OK all buildings which are marked as
residential buildings will be allocated a population according to the entered formula and the number of inhabitants will be entered in the dialog
Building. The population is also displayed in the table Building
(Tables|Obstacles).
Calculate Population
Densiy in areas of
Land Use
11.6.4
After confirming the dialog Calculate Population Density with OK all

individual areas with designated land uses - and here again all buildings will be run through to determine the population with the entered formula.
The calculated number of inhabitants will be entered in the field Population/km in the dialog Area of Designated Land Use. In each case this results in the population per km in each area of designated land use.
Normalise to actual
number of
Inhabitants and
Number of
Inhabitants in Entire
Area
11.6.4
The number of inhabitants determined while considering the buildings

may deviate from the actual number of inhabitants. If the latter is known, it
may be entered in the edit dialog Number of Inhabitants in Entire Area:
when Normalise to Actual Number of Inhabitants has been activated.
CadnaA then converts the population densities determined for the individual areas of designated land use using an appropriate factor to match the
total number of inhabitants in all areas of designated land use to the total
number specified.
Afterwards, when the edit dialog for an area of designated land use is
opened, the calculated population density is displayed. In the menu Tables|Other Objects|Areas of Designated Land Use all values are listed
in the table.
Manual
Kapitel 11.6 CadnaA Option XL

Closing Buildings
11.6.5 1
11.6.5 Closing Buildings
This command is only available if you have purchased the option XL

(see chapter 11.6)
With the command in the menu Tables|Miscellanous|Close Buildings

you are able to connect individual polygon lines to a closed polygon and to
represent them as the object Building. This is helpful if you have to import
buildings in CadnaA with files from a third-party program (like AutoCad
DXF file), buildings which are drawn with individual lines instead of with
closed polygons.
11
Initial situation: An imported DXF file where buildings

are drawn with individual lines. Those have to be imported first as the object Auxiliary Polygon. Then the lines
have to be connected to a closed polygon and are automatically converted to buildings afterwards.
Handbuch
11.6.5

Closing Buildings
First import (see chapter 6.2) the third-party file with the corresponding
file format into CadnaA. Make sure that the open buildings are imported
as object type Auxiliary Polygon. After importing them, delete elements
which you do not need or use the group function (see chapter 18.2) to
deactivate elements. If you execute the command Close Buildings, all
existing and activated Auxiliary Polygons are connected to the corresponding settings and converted to the object Building automatically.
11
The imported DXF file after transaction of the command

Close Buildings. The buildings are now closed polygons.
In the provided picture the open buildings have the layer name building. This identifier appears in the ID field in the edit dialog of the object
after being imported into CadnaA. Therefore you can create groups very
easily.
Handbuch

Closing Buildings
11.6.5 3
Group definition in CadnaA
The first group for the buildings is activated and the second group with the
asterix * in the field Expression is deactivated for all remaining objects.
Therefore only the lines are closed and automatically converted in the object Building with the identifier building in their field ID.
After clicking the command Table|Miscellanous|Close Buildings the following dialog appears with self-explanatory settings.
11
With the activated option Combine Buildings terraces are combined to a

single Building with barriers lying inside, replacing the indoor walls.
Handbuch
11.6.5

Closing Buildings
With the command Close Building the option Combine Buildings has
been activated for the buildings in the right-hand picture. For those buildings all indoor walls are replaced with barriers and the buildings are combined in a single building as a closed polygon. The objects in the upper
left-hand picture are eight individual buildings. The option Combine Buildings was not activated.
11
After combining the lines to create a closed polygon and converting them
to buildings, the original identifier in the ID is overwriten with an identifier containing the character L and a number, e.g., L1, L2, L3 etc. This
identifier indicates what has happend while connecting and combining auxiliary polygons into buildings or barriers.
Handbuch

Closing Buildings
L1
a detached building or barrier
L2
building inside a building or barrier inside a building
L3
building inside a building inside a building or barrier inside a

building inside a building etc.
So just create groups to check if the connection and converting has been
successful in all cases.
Handbuch
11.6.5 5
11
11.6.5

Closing Buildings
11
Handbuch
11.6.6 1

Object-Scan
11.6.6 Object-Scan
The Object-Scan in the menue Grid is a powerful tool. With the selected
object type you can add an arbitrary attribute value or a calculated attribute
value of a user-defined link for all objects of the choosen type.
Object Type
11.6.6
The adding and displaying of the final value can occur in the following
ways:
Action / Sum
into:
11.6.6
1.
As a target in Action / Sum into you choose Single Values. The evaluation then takes place for the entire project file and the result value
is displayed in a message dialog.
Single Values
11.6.6
2.
As a target in Action / Sum into you choose Specified Aereas /

Polygons. Then you can choose a Target Object Type whose
objects are closed polygons. Furthermore you have to choose an
Attribute which belongs to the selected Target Object Type in
which the, inside the closed polygon, added values are assigned to.
Specified Areas/
Polygons
11.6.6
As a target in Action / Sum into you choose Grid and as Window

Size define the length of a side of a square inside of which a result
should be determined in a grid. This square is arranged so that its
pivot is a grid point. The entire grid is run through in that way, by
shifting the window step by step to the next grid point.
Grid and
Window Size
11.6.6
4.
As a target in Action / Sum into you choose Table. The evaluation

then takes place in a table either with user-defined intervals (min max) of an arbitrary attribut or by predefined formulars (button Predefined).
Table
11.6.6
The procedure using the mentioned methods are described with one
example each at the end of this chapter.
3.
Manual
11
11.6.6
Pay Attention!

Object-Scan
Due to the fact that now can be calculated up to four evaluation parameters (chapter 12.4.6) simultaneously the name of the fields Day
and Night (Formula for summation and formula for total) are not
anymore topical. Analyses are not only made for day and night but
for abitrary evaluation parameters. Anyhow we have deceided to
keep these names Day (field 1) and Night (field 2) for the time being
so that files calculated with an older release of CadnaA still can be
analysed. But de facto with the appropriate expression in field 1 (day)
or/and field 2 (night) you can refer to the corresponding evaluation
parameter, e.g. GW1 till GW4 (limiting value of evaluation parameter 1 - 4) to analyse the desired inquiry.
Open the dialog Object-Scan in Grid|Object-Scan.
11
The Dialog Objekt-Scan

Target Object Type
Expression for ID
Attribute D/N
11.6.6
You can only choose a Target Object Type if Specified Areas /Polygons
are selected in the field Action /Sum into.
Manual

Object-Scan
11.6.6 3
The result is then written in the selected Attribute (e.g., Name for the corresponding field in the edit dialog of the object)
Dont use the same attribute for Day (field1) and Night (field2). The
results will be overwritten then.
In the field Window Size (m) you can define the side length of an invisible quadrate within which a result in a grid is calculated. This quadrate is
arranged so that a grid point its central point is. The whole grid will be calculated by shifting iteratively the window to the next grid point.
Window Size (m) 11.6.6
11
The window only has an effect if the option Grid (Action/Sum into) is
selected.
For Day (field 1) and Night (field 2) we can enter or choose from the variable list a term determining which value should be added up for each located object.
Manual
Formula for
Summation
11.6.6
11.6.6
Variable list

Object-Scan
We open the variable list by clicking the double-arrows button beside the
corresponding field. Only the pertinent variables of the chosen object type
are displayed. For inserting a desired variable just click on it. To overwrite
an existing variable in the field, double-click the variable before you open
the variable list.
11
Variable list in the Dialog Object-Scan

Variable
The variable list is separated with a horizontal line. The variables below
this line are object specific. You will find an explanation for these abbreviations in chapter 2.5.
Above this line are all special variables listed which we can use for the object-scan.
prop
Part of the object which is inside the window. With extended objects it is the proportion of the area; with line objects
the proportion of the length..
area_p
Total area of an object (by closed polygons).
area_i
Area of an object which lies inside the window.
area_w
Area of the window
Manual

Object-Scan
prop_l
The proportion of the length of open or closed lines which

are lying inside the window (well in distinction to prop
with areas determined by the protortion of the perimeter )
len_p
The total length of an open or closed line (therefore also the

perimeter line of an area)
len_i
The length of the part, of an open or closed line, which is

lying inside the window
int_lo
lower limit of an interval
int_hi
upper limit of an interval
To determine the total kilometers of roads in a project, choose the following
11.6.6 5
Example of formulas
object type Road Action/Sum in Single Values

and enter the following term into the box
Formula for Summation len_p
(Add the total length of the line objects)
To determine the total residents of buildings in a project, choose the

following
object type Building Action/Sum in Single Values
Formula for Summation iif(WG_NUM, EINW,0)
(If it is a residential building, add the residents, otherwise add zero)
Manual
11
11.6.6

Object-Scan
To determine the total floor area of the building, enter the following
object type Building Action/Sum in Single Values
Formula for Summation
iif(WG_NUM, area_p,0)*PO_HREL_P1/3
(If it is a residential building, add the ground area of the buildings,
otherwise do not and multiply the total area with the relative height
of the first building point for each building and divide this with 3 m
floor height)
Calculation
After completing the inputs for all desired fields and closing the dialog by
confirming OK the results are automatically written in a local Textblock.
Textblock
The name of the local textblock created automatically for the results is for
Day #(Text, OBJSCANT) and for
Night #(Text, OBJSCANN).
11
The Textblocks are located in Tables|Libraries (local). You can use them
as usual, e.g,. for reports, legend or for export files.
If you want to determine different object attributes you should rename the
Textblocks because a new result overwrites the previous result.
In case you have determined the road kilometers of a project then rename
the textblock, e.g., in RdKm. CadnaA creates a new textblock OBJSCAN
if you repeat the Object-Scan.
But we can also display the result in a Textbox in the graphics by refering
the Textblock in the Textbox, e.g., as follows:
Roadtraffic = #(Text, OBJSCANT) km
Formula
for Total
11.6.6
Grid
11.6.6
An entered expression determines which value is calculated with the value

saved in the variable sum from the above Formula for Summation.
By choosing Grid, in the field Action/Sum into, the result is assigned to
the grid point in the pivot of the Window.
Manual

Object-Scan
11.6.6 7
We can use the variable sum for both fields - Day or Night - instead sumt
or sumn. The saved result for Day or Night will be recognized and used
from CadnaA by entering sum in the corresponding field.
A total evaluation for the entire calculation area can also be determined.
For this choose Single Values in field Action/Sum into. With the variable
sum is the term, defined in the field Formula for Summation, evaluated
for all objects in the whole calculation area and displayed in a message dialog. With the following example results the number of all residents in the
existing area.
Single values
11
Dialog Object-Scan and the corresponding terms
Result Dialog
Manual
11.6.6

Object-Scan
A common way of using the Object-Scan is the calculation and representation of Noise Impact of Residents (NIR).
Example of the three mentioned methods:
SmallCity01.cna
The basis is the example file SmallCity01.cna (If you want to see the english or German textboxes you can switch to variant V01 or V02 in the
symbol bar).
11
Manual

Object-Scan
The total length of all roads in the project shall be determined .
11.6.6 9
Example
Single Values
11
Selected is the Object Type Road and Single Values in Action/Sum into.
In the field Formula for Summation the term len_p is entered for the
Attribute or via the list selected.
len_p shows generally the polygon length of the object representation.
The alternative is to select the object-specific parameter PO_LEN from the
variable list.
After confirming with OK the result dialog appears with the following
message
Manual
10
11.6.6

Object-Scan
The road net has consequently a total lenght of 3226 m.

In the same manner the number of buildings can be evaluated or the whole
sound level of all point sources, or each other computable or deducible value from the attribute parameters of the choosen object type.
Example:
Areas
In the Name box of each area of Land Use, in the above displayed
example, the number of buildings shall be displayed.
Object Type: Building, Action / Sum into: Areas, Target Object:
Land Uses.
11
With these settings and with the list box Attribute D/N you have access to
all attributes of the Object Type Land Use. The summed final value, for
the selected attribute, is assigned to each existing area of Land Use. With
selection of Name as attribute this value is written in the Name box of the
Land Uses.
Just counting the formula 1 for the summation could be used. But then
buildings also placed on the border of the areas are completely counted the sum of the entered buildings is bigger than the real number of buildings in the whole project.
If this final balance is to be correct a building on an area border must be
counted as only a part < 1, which correspond to the area part of the building inside the area of land use. This is happen with an entry of prop as
Formula for Summation via the variable list.
After confirming OK the numer of buildings are entered in the Name box
in the edit dialog of the Land Uses.
Manual
11.6.6 11

Object-Scan
In the following example each building, with a symbol of Building Evaluation, is assigned to a representative sound power level..
Example:
Grid
11
Furthermore for each building is the population known.

The amount of the noise impact shall now be evaluated for each building.
This is dependent on the number of residents n and the sound level L of the
buildings.
LEG Haus = n 2 0.1(L L0 )

wereas L0 is the valid maximum value.
This impact measure shall be added for the whole area and a coloured map
shall be generated, which displays the impact measure corresponding to
1000 m in each case.
Manual
12
11.6.6

Object-Scan
The Object-Scan achieves this with the following dialog:
11
The Formula for Summantion correspond to the above term.

SmallCity02.cna
In this example the population is assigned to the individual buildings.

On a coloured map the buildings could be coloured equivalent to the population but cannot be optically distinguished when they are displayed in a
big scale. For that reason the population density shall be averaged over a
larger area of 100 m x 100 m and displayed as a coloured map with population/100 m.
Manual

Object-Scan
11.6.6 13
Open the dialog Grid|Object-Scan as shown in the following:
Select in the first box for Object Type Building because the evaluation
shall refer to the population in buildings
The variable prop supplies for each building inside the Window the value 1 and for buildings on the border of the Window a value from 0 to 1
which specifies the part of the building area located inside the Window.
With the product prop*einw therefore the population which has been alloted to the specified square is added. The result is saved in the variables
sumt for the day and sumn for the night (the bulding attribute population is for day and night equal).
In the example the area of the specified Window and therefore 100 m x
100 m = 10000 m, is divided by the area_w and multiplied by 100. The
division leads to the population per m and the multiplication to the population per 100 m.
Manual
11
14
11.6.6
Example Table

Object-Scan
We want to determine the number of buildings with heights predefined

within the intervals in a table. Therefore choose the settings shown in the
following picture:
11
int_lo < = HA
- the building height is smaller equal the defined lower limit of the interval.
int_hi < HA
- the building height is smaller then the defined upper limit
You have to enter the desired height intervals in a table. Therefore click on
the button Table, insert as many lines (Ins-key) as necessary and enter the
corresponding limits in the columns min and max .
Manual

Object-Scan
11.6.6 15
If you close the table and the dialog Object-Scan with OK the evaluation
will be executed and the result is shown in the table.
If you choose a predefined entry via the button Predefined both a corresponding formula is entered in the field Formula for Summation and an
appropriate table is created automatically.
Predefined
11
Manual
16
11.6.6

Object-Scan
11
Manual

Monetary Evaluation of Noise according to BUWAL
11.6.7 1
11.6.7 Monetary Evaluation of Noise according

to BUWAL
The CadnaA Option XL is required for the evaluation!
A technique to evaluate the noise is described in the study /55/. This method has been integrated into CadnaA.
The method
This method takes into account the reduction in value of rented flats that
results from high noise levels. This is done by converting the noise load of
residential areas into amounts of money. If the value of a noise reduction
measure is to be evaluated, then this is done by calculating the noise distribution with and without this measure. The difference in the two amounts
of money is represented by the reduced value according to the noise expressed in value of the measure.
The philosophy behind this technique shall not be discussed in detail here.
It shall only be mentioned that this method of evaluating and assessing the
noise is conservative and tends to underestimate the negative aspects of
noise. The use of the influence of the noise on the rent prices of residential
areas doesn't take into consideration many other negative consequences,
like the long term health of the population and the development of a city.
But nevertheless this technique is a pragmatic and transparent way of assessing cost-benefit relations when noise is evaluated. And this is always
positive.
Manual
11
11.6.7
Application with areas
of designated land use
(Example 1)
11.6.7

The evaluation method is applied to areas of designated land use. The following diagram shows a simple and easily understandable example.
area of designated land use
calculation area
road
Area of designated land use with road
11
and the edit dialog of this object (example 1)
Manual

The edit dialog of the RA-residential area shows (see chapter 11.3) that
when "Monetary Data" is activated three further values can be entered
11.6.7 3
Monetary Data
(local)
Floor/Ground Ratio (NAGFZ)

Rental/m/a (NAMIETE)
Rental abatement (NAMIND)
The bracketed abbreviations are the names of variables needed later to perform necessary operations.
In the edit fields for rental abatement in the dialog Area of designated
Land Use the two variables
LP sound pressure level

NA_STR maximum value for noise from road traffic (defined in Options|Land Use|Limiting Value)
are used to express the loss in value for all areas with sound levels within
5 dB under the maximum value.
The floor/ground ratio is a factor that that, when multiplied by the
ground area, gives the maximal residential area of buildings permitted on
this area. Rental/m/a: can be entered in any currency unit. The calculated
results are then related to this currency.
The factor in the equation of input line Rental Abatement - 0.01 in the
first example - is the loss of rent due to a level increase of 1 dB. 0.01, meaning rentals are reduced by 1% if the level raises 1 dB.
Further variables needed in the expressions of evaluation :
Area of a grid element in m (FL)

Logical value (0-false, 1-true) as a definition if a grid element is inside
an area of designated land-use or not (NAOK)
Manual
11
11.6.7

Calc Grid
In the first step, to come to a monetary evaluation of the noise, the noise
level is calculated on a grid for the whole area.
Evaluate Grid
With the second step the evaluation, with the defined formula in
Grid|Evaluation, is calculated for all grid points and the result is added
up.
The following results are obtained when using the expressions on the right
side. The accuracy depends on the size of the grid elements because a grid
element is taken to be in an area if the grid point is located in it. It is therefore recommended you use grid spacings as small as possible.
FL
Calculation area in m
FL*NAOK
Area of designated land use in m
FL*NAOK*NAGFZ
Total residential area in an area of

designated land use
FL*NAOK*NAGFZ*NAMIETE Rental for all areas of

designated land use
11
FL*NAOK*NAGFZ*NAMIETE*NAMIND
Reduction in rent caused by noise
With example 1:
the calculation area (FL) is 10080 m.

The size of the area of designated land use is 8000 m.
The floor/ground ratio is 0.8.
So the maximal residential area on this estate is 0.8 x 8000 m = 6400 m.

The rental with 100 per year and m is therefore 640.000 .
Manual

11.6.7 5
The three above mentioned values floor/ground ratio, rental/m/a and

rental abatement have been entered in the edit dialog of this area - the values are therefore only valid for this individual area (local). It is also possible to enter these values in Options|Land use for each type of general
land use (global) - in this case they are valid for all areas of this type. If the
values have been entered globally and locally, the local values for an area
dominate. Globally defined values are used for all areas of this type where
no local ones exists.
Evaluation example 1-loss in value based on

residential areas 11.6.7
The calculation of levels for example 1 with a grid spacing of 1m x 1m and

a receiver height of 4m (see chapter 11.5.1) leads to the result shown in the
following diagram.
Step 1 Calculation of sound

pressure
levels
11.6.7
60
area of designated land use
calculation area
65
70
Manual
road
Result of the grid calculation with a grid spacing of

1m and a receiver height
of 4m
11
11.6.7
Step 2 Evaluation
Monetary1.cna

11.6.7
After noise levels have been calculated on the specified grid, the evaluation in the form of a reduction in value is carried out in Grid|Evaluation.
The example file Monetary1.cna just includes the correct expressions.
The expression for calculating the annual reduction in rent resulting from
noise is
FL*NAOK*NAGFZ*NAMIETE*NAMIND
11
After a click on Calculate the reduction in rent of 60416 caused by the

noise is shown.
Changing the number of cars (MDTD) to 10000 cars/24h, recalculating
and evaluating with the described steps shows a reduction in this noise induced loss to 40789 . With the same technique all possible measures like
screens and barriers or reorganisation of traffic flows can easily be evaluated and ranked.
Manual
11.6.7 7

Evaluation example 2a - loss in value based on residential premises as single digit value
With example 1 the residential area was calculated from the whole area
and the floor/ground ratio was the basis for the evaluation. This meant that
the probability of people living at any certain position in this area was regarded to be the same for all positions.
It is also possible to use the exact position of all buildings and their geometric location - this gives a result that is more accurate because the screened and therefore quieter facades reduce the buildings noise level and
lead to a better result for well designed buildings and residential areas.
Example 2 uses this technique. With example 2a the noise induced loss of
value for all buildings is calculated as a single number value. This is the
best procedure if different strategies for noise reduction are to be ranked.
The following diagram shows example 2, a scenario with roads, buildings
and areas of designated land-use. The above mentioned values are defined
globally (Options|Land use).
Monetary2.cna
Building evaluation and calculation of a buildings noise map

for all residential premises
Step 1
In Options|Building noise map select energetic for the Averaging Method (see chapter 9.3.6).
Manual
11.6.7
11
11.6.7

55
51
54
59
45
44
Noise induced reduction in value: 513038.35
49
52
49
5244
49
56
50
52
I-IV
5950
59
49
52
55
52
45 43
37
45
35
48
55
55
39
49
I-IV
60 52
39
4343
46
5142
47
60
51
42
47
46
50
60
55
50
5042 47
45
49
56
48
48
49
58
58 49
47
49 41
49
39
47
49
48
58
38
47
49 49
48
58
5041
49
46
48
49504948 49
38
47
50 42
54
55
50
60
54
55
48
48
48
51
57
5950
53
47
49
52
56
54
I-IV
6151
61
5244
51
51
44
60
52
61
55
51
XIV-XXXII
6051
60
47
56
60
59
58
49
58
55
48
46
49 50
47 48
I-IV
6455
50
V
5546
53
55
54
50
48
49
47
5042 47
47
48
50
44
46
49
47
46 38
50
49
46
44
47
5143
47
47
48
46
49
4948 49
66
62
63
49
47
55
60
56
58
58
51
55
56
45
I-IV
59 49
56
48
52
51
53
59
I-IV
6757
67
63
62
59
62
55
63
63
64
68
58
63
64
64
69
65
57
68
69
I-IV
6960
56
65
69
65
65
68
55
63
64
55
54
I-V
6959
56
58
58
65
72
51
58
60
60
55
52 50
I-IV
6153
58
5457
60
52
52
57
59 59
59
56 58
57
58
61 59
57
56
67
66
56
55
I-IV
6962
67
69
707170
55
54
66
69
65
68
68
54
54
54
54
51
I-IV
6962
69
51
63
65
68
68
69
48
I-IV
6962
65
69
69
64
65
69
69
69
I-IV
69 58
52
53
51
53
I-IV
6053
58
71
69
64
63
54
52
51
59
62
I-IV
7264
59
68
71
65
54
61
54
60
71
69
64
67
68
71
69
64
53
52
53
52
50
59
63
63
51
53
46
I-III
5952
56
I-IV
7162
69
69
I-IV
69 59
54
56
53
53
64
65
70
69
65
64
56
69
64
69
I-IV
6959
64
5959
III-IV
5446
53
54
59
I-IV
6959
69
64
58
50
54
I-IV
6858
65
67
66
47
51
55
I-IV
6858
63
58
61
61
55
63
64
67
68
65
59
66
66
58
59
I-IV
6355
60
55
I-IV
6757
67
55
56
50
50
59
61
55
67
73
I-IV
7366
57
59
59
59 60
50
I-IV
5649
54
59
59
64
73
69
67
54
47
I-IV
6052
57
63
69
68
52
51
47
53
53
74
I-IV
7567
62
I-IV
61 52
60 59
55
59
63
72
70
50
50
4952 51
48
51
51
50
50
49
56
51
62
63
51
55
55 54
52
49
51
50
59
60
5661
60
51
I-IV
59 49
56
53
59
54
62
52
48
55
46
55
53
67
75
73
52
5244
48
50
50
I-III
5548
51
53
52
52
59
68
64
46
48
53
47
52
I-IV
6050
56
53
47
48
51
50
48
53 45
48
56
57
63
68
50
50
51
60
I-V
7466 69
52
47
73
I-IV
6757
48
5143
50
52
48
49
5345
53
49
67
47
50
52
52
49
63
49
47
46
51
50
48
74
47
49
50
52
52 44
49
47
5244
51
50
I-V
60 50
59
57 585756
47
5143
50
51
49
46
49
48
62
56
I-IV
7466
50
51
45
51
52
53
53
54 56
65
74
48
50
50
51
45
IV
5445
47
I-IV
7365 69
48
50
51
50
51
50
47
54
57
47
47
56
55
60
69
49
47
52
55
48 50
51
46
46
47
46
46
46
48 47
51
IV-V
5646
57
59
44
47
52
53
50
55
55
57
50
44
43
49
50 42
50
50
50
57
49
53
50
I-IV
5747
57
50
48
46
47
47
54
54
51
55
44
5042
50
48
46
44
46
49 40
47
48 48 46
46
58
43
44
50
48
5042
44
50
49
47
45
46
50
50
54
55
58
57
69
64
68
64
53
65
64
68
I-V 64
6858 63
53
54
68
64
68
I-V
6858
54
56
72
I-IV
7261
68
64
57
58
71
57
67
72
70
64
62
I-IV
7060
57
11
48
46
49
46
46
49
I-IV
5849
58
52
I-IV
6253
58
57
74
48
46
49
47
48
46
48
51
56
57
52
57
58
I-V
6658
64
69
48
47
49
50
49
50
52
5444
52
64
45
43
48
49
44
50
49
51
64
37
5041
47
44
50
50
62
65
37
46
47
49
47
5042
48
49
54
57
66
65
74
49
5042
49
48
49
4749
47
47
58
60
I-IV
6658
50
49
50
50
50
59
59
54
48 47
49
49
49
50
52
54
34
34
45
47
50
47
51
5445
54
34
49
50
51 44
48
45
51
51
56
49
51
49
47
57
57
5950
51
50
50
48
59
59
47
48
48
4941
55
55
55
59
47
48
58
48
49
46
54
57
45
47
48
49
49
50
47
5748
56
50
49
49
49
50
49
50
55
57
I-IV
6252 62
50
47
5345
50
50
55
49
48
49 49
53
52
54
5143
51
47
59
49
59 50
48
5143
47
49
50
59
54
59
57
51
58
59
55
59
60
47
44
49
56
56
59
56
56
48
45
44
60
55
6050
55
33
49 41
4949
51
48
47
47
47
47
45 45
35
43
44
46
48
47
47
45
49
49
50
50
49
44
51
48
47
51
40
37
44
50 41
50
49
60
57
47
49
48
48
51 43
47
47
4941
49
37
37
46
45
43
47
49
47
46
47
48
47
48
4949
49
52
4941
47
49
47
46
48
51
48
48
46
46
50
51
56
51
48
5143
47
47
51
50
50
54
42
51
48
52
59
61
54
49
42
45
50
I-IV
6151
35
35
47
48
50
42
42
42
38
47
48
48
55
53
45
47
50
55
58
68
66
64
67
71
I-IV
7262
58
68
67
59
Scenario with buildings, roads and areas of designated land use

(and symbols for building evaluation)
The building evaluation symbols have been attached to all buildings automatically using the Modify Object command. Then the calculation for defined receiver points is started (this includes calculation of faade levels
and building evaluation.
Step 2
11.6.7
Evaluation as single digit result using Object-Scan

Evaluation is carried out using the command Grid|Object-Scan (see
chapter 11.6.6). The parameters and expressions that should be used for
this type of evaluation are shown in the following window. Leaving this
window with OK, the single digit result is calculated taking into account
the faade levels of all 97 buildings.
Manual

11.6.7 9
Edit Dialog Objekt-Scan
The following parameters are used:

PO_AREA
ground surface covered by the building

(area of polygon)
PO_HREL_P1
relative height of the building at point 1
The other parameters are explained above.

After confirmation with OK the noise induced reduction in value for all
buildings is shown. In this case: 513038,35 .
Manual
11
10
11.6.7

Evaluation example 2b - loss in value based on individual residential premises for all areas of designated land-use
The same scenario shown in example 2a is used again, but now the result
is to be evaluated for all areas separately.
Monetary2.cna
Step 1
Load example2.cna and open Tables|Other Objects|Areas of designated

Land use. You see that the column Name is empty.
11.6.7
Building evaluation and calculation of a buildings noise map

for all residential areas
This calculation has just been done - if not look to step 1 in the last chapter.
Step 2
11
11.6.7
Evaluation for each separate area using Object-Scan

The reduction of value due to noise shall be calculated separately with regard to the buildings in in each area. This resulting value shall be written
into the attribute Bez (that means that the result is written in the field
Name in the edit dialog - any other attribute can be chosen).
Open the dialog Object-Scan with Grid|Object-Scan and in Action /
Sum into: select Specified Areas / Polygons as shown in the following figure.
Manual

11.6.7 11
The parameters in the dialog Object-Scan to write the

results in the field Name of each area
Target object type is Area of Designated Use. With Bez as attribute the
result is written in the field Name of each area. After doing this evaluation
you find the result value in column Name of Tables|Other Objects|Area
of Designated Use as shown in the following table.
Results in column Name after evaluation
Manual
11
12
11.6.7

The value 0.00 (zero) in the field Name indicates that either the assessment level is more then 5 dB below the maximum sound level (and therefore no rent reduction occurs) or that non building is placed in that area.
Evaluation Example 2c - Evaluation of average loss

in value in a gliding window and presentation
as a coloured map
Only to be complete, this further method shall be mentioned. Calculation
of facade levels and building evaluation is the same as in the examples before.
To present the result as a coloured map a grid must be calculated. This is
necessary because the grid points must already exist before you can allocate a value to a grid point calculated for a window with Object-Scan.
11
To save calculation time, this is best done with all roads switched off. Calculate the grid, e.g., with a spacing of 5 m. For evaluation use Grid|Object-Scan with the parameters and adjustments as shown:
Manual

11.6.7 13
Parameter settings to calculate the reduction in rent
The reduction in value for all buildings is added up in a window of 100m x

100m, normalised to 100 m and attached with the grid point in the center.
Then the window is moved one grid spacing and the same is repeated. At
the end all parameters in Grid|Appearance must be chosen so that all values can be presented in the map (colours, the lower and upper limit etc).
Manual
11
14
11.6.7

11
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 12 Configuration of Calculation
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 12 Configuration ofCalculation
12
Manual

Contents
12.1 1
12.1 Contents
12.2
Sound Rays and Reflection
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.4
12.2.5
12.2.6
Sound Rays from Point Sources

Sound Rays from extended Sources
such as Line and Area Sources
The Projection Method for
extended Sound Sources
Reflection
Reflection of the 1st Order
Reflections of Higher Order
12.3
Displaying Sound Rays
12.4
Configuration
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.4.4
12.4.5
12.4.6
12.4.7
12.4.8
12.4.9
12.4.10
12.4.11
12.4.12
Country Tab
Implemented Calculation Methods
General Tab
Partition Tab
Reference Time Tab
Evaluation Parameter Tab
DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab
Reflection Tab
Industry Tab
Road Tab
Railroad Tab
AzB Tab
12.2.3
Manual
12
12.1

Contents
12.4.13 Optimisable Source Tab
12.5
Selecting Data for the Calculation
12.6
Calculation Protocol
12.7
Compact Protocol
12
Manual

12.2
12.2 1
CadnaA enables the calculation of sound propagation according to stand-
ardized procedures (calculation according to standards like CRN, CRTN,

ISO 9613 etc.) and with settings that are defined by the user.
This chapter deals with the second task and its possibilities with CadnaA
and is therefore more concerned with the pysical aspects of sound propagation. This is very important for us because CadnaA is used increasingly
for expert work, in scientific work at universities and in lectures. Although
the professional usage requires a strict application of the pre-determined
guidelines and standards it can be very helpful in correctly processing special problem-orientated cases which are not covered by the regulations.
This especially concerns the treatment of reflections of a higher order.
With the above regulations a reflection of the first order is only dealt with
according to the mirror image method and therefore the reflection of a ray
at one acoustically even surface.
The contribution of more orders of reflections to the total result, e.g., at the
building facades on both sides of a closed built-up road, will be taken into
account by calculating analytically a correction for multiple reflections
from the geometrical and acoustic parameters.
This strategy fails if the geometries of the road built-up at both sides is
completely different and varies from building to building. The same problem exists with the noise level in backyards - it must be calculated taking
into account high order reflections.
CadnaA is able to calculate reflections completely up to higher order. It is
clear that this increases calculation times, because the number of rays
grow exponentially with this reflection order. With the possibility to show
all these calculated rays at the screen, CadnaA is a very helpful tool in
learning and teching about sound propagation.
Chapter 12.3 explains how paths of rays can be displayed. Because of the
selective display possibilities for the different orders (by using groups), the
handling might look a bit complicated, but it is an excellent tool for clari-
Manual
12
12.2

fying the executed calculation and therefore can be helpful in a technical

report in many cases. We recommend that the detailed examples be understood step by step. Once you have taken this initial hurdle the inclusion of
ray representations in drawings and text documents is easily possible.
12.2.0
12
Manual
Chapter 12.2 Sound Rays and Reflection

12.2.1 1
12.2.1 Sound Rays from Point Sources

In a physical sense a wave field goes out from a source Q which transports
the sound power in all directions via the movement of the air particles. Because the surface of the spheres hull expands with increasing distance,
and the sound power is distributed over the hull over a certain period of
time, the sound intensity decreases and therefore the sound pressure level,
too. With increasing distance source - receiver it becomes quieter.
Sound propagation from Source Q to Reciver Point RP physical (left) and numerical (right)
If CadnaA calculates, the distance between source Q and receiver RP will

be determined and, with the sound power level of the source, the sound
pressure level at the receiver point will be calculated with analytical formulas which have been derived from the physical model. The wave field is
in a certain way replaced by one ray from source to receiver.
Manual
12
12.2.1

If there are many sources there are also many sound rays which have to be
considered in the calculation. For all receivers affecting sound rays the calculated proportion of the level will be added energetically.
IP1
IP1
Q6
Q6
Q1
Q1
IP2
Q2
IP2
Q2
Q3
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q4
Q5
IP3
5 Sources and 3 Receiver (IP)
12
IP3
The Sound Rays
12.2.1
Manual
12.2.2 1

Sound Rays from extended Sources such as Line and Area Sources
12.2.2 Sound Rays from extended Sources

such as Line and Area Sources
Even in the case of calculating the noise level from an extended source as
the area source shown in fig. A, a distance has to be found that can be used
in the equation of propagation. This may be wrong if the pivot of the extended source is used as starting point of the ray. Since, actually, each arbitrary portion of the area source emits sound, the same value of a level
must result if the total stripe according to figure B is to be subdivided and
the sound pressure level at the receiver point is calculated as the sum of the
levels of the 5 contributions from the partial sources FQ1 till FQ5.
IP
FQ
IP
FQ1 FQ2
FQ3 FQ4
FQ5
12
A: Area source with sound ray
B: Partitioning of the area sources
However, the partial sources, according to figure B, result in different partial levels because of the different distances. On the basis of the energetic
addition a higher sound pressure level results from fig. B than from taking
into account only one ray emitted from the pivot as shown in fig. A.
This error has been avoided in CadnaA by partitioning each extended line
or area source in sufficiently small parts for automatic calculation.
But these partial areas do not have the same size as shown in figure B.
They become even smaller the closer the corresponding section of the extended source is to the receiver.
Manual
12.2.2

This dynamic division, which must newly be calculated for each receiver,
leads to a considerably faster calculation in comparison to the equal division. The following figure shows the sound rays, which CadnaA takes into
account, with the irregularly shaped area source provided below.
IP
The sound rays for the area source which CadnaAis taking into account for the calculation.
12
Manual

12.2.2 3
The same applies to line sources. By the road shown in the following figure the borders of the stripe are the axis of the outer lanes which are each
considered as line sources and taken into account in the calculation of level .
IP
The sound rays for the roads which CadnaA is taking into
account for the calculation.
12.2.2
12
Manual
12.2.2

12
Manual
12.2.3 1

The Projection Method for extended Sound Sources
12.2.3 The Projection Method for

extended Sound Sources
The automatic division of an extended sound source into smaller partial areas depending on the distance of the receiver (see Chapter 12.2.2 "Sound
Rays from extended Sources such as Line and Area Sources") is not sufficient to avoid errors in the calculation of sound pressure levels.
IP
Figure 1: Calculation of the area source soccer field with two sound rays
Let us take the example of a soccer field as in the upper figure. For a noise
calculation at the remote receiver point IP CadnaA would split the soccer
field into two partial areas and would therefore take into account two
sound rays. This is correct for the shown situation.
Manual
12
12.2.3

Now a shielding club house with a height of 8 m is located in the position

shown in the following figure.
IP
Clubhaus
Figure 2: Soccer field with partially shielding club house
In the calculation of both displayed sound rays, screening and therefore a

lower sound pressure level occurs in each case. But, in fact, not all partial
areas, which are included in the calculation with the paths of the two rays,
are shielded by the building. The resulting sound pressure level would be
too low in the present example.
CadnaA avoids this error by using a projection method.
12
With that, in the first step the area sources will be divided into shielded
and non-shielded areas and in the second step subdivided according to the
relation of area size to receiver distance. In this way, in the present example, 12 partial areas are created: altogether, nevertheless, because of the
large distance from the receiver (340 m), 8 areas are not shielded and 4 areas are shielded.
Manual

12.2.3 3
IP
Clubhaus
Figure 3a: Two step division according to shielding

objects in the path of rays and the distance of the receiver
In the present example the calculation results in 44 dB(A) of free sound

propagation according to figure 1, 39 dB(A) in the calculation of the situation with the club house without using the projection method according to
figure 2 and 42 dB(A) with correct division resulting from the use of the
projection method according to the figure 3a.
Figure 3b shows the projection method with a road
Figure 3b Projection method for a road
Both axis of the outer road lanes - that is the margin of the road stripe in
the CadnaA presentation - are first divided according to the shielding ob-
Manual
12
12.2.3

jects between receiver and road. Then a subdivision occurs according to

the distance criteria.
Figure 3 c: Projection method for reflecting sound parts
Much more complicated are the relations in the projection of the reflecting
sound parts dealt with in the next chapter. Figure 3 c shows the construction of both sections for the axis of the outer road lanes which are necessary because of the reflecting building. The same method - graphically
hardly to explain - will also be applied by CadnaA for the multiple reflections dealt with futher on.
12
Although the projection method naturally extends the calculation considerably it should always be switched on for a detailed calculation like
acoustical zoom. After all, even in the simple situation figure 3a, 12
paths of rays instead of 2 must be calculated.
Manual

Reflection
12.2.4 1
12.2.4 Reflection
Additional sound rays appear in the sector of the path of sound propagation from reflective objects which affect the receiver and could increase
the sound level.
The mirror-source method will be applied regularly by the calculation of
reflection and it is therefore assumed that the reflective areas are acoustically even. In the experience of engineering the numerical calculation of
diffuse reflection has only been achieved over the statistical approach for
the density of scattering objects (see e.g. /32/). A numerically correct resolution for point-precise calculation with diffuse reflection is dealt with in /
33/. But this is still a lavish resolution for the professional practice.
On the other hand the mirror-source method has been proved excellent for
the propagation of sound, also in cases strictly without even areas. The
propagation of sound including reflection up to an extremly high order has
been described precisely (see to this /34/ and /12/) for industry halls in
which the surfaces areas are anything but even (through extensions such as
pipelines and so on).
12
Manual
12.2.4

Reflection
12
Manual

12.2.5 1
12.2.5 Reflection of the 1st Order

You are required to calculate the reflection of the first order if such a reflection contributes to the sound level at the receiver according to the
guidelines RLS90 /9/, Schall03 /8/ and ISO 9613-2 /21/.
The calculation occurs in three steps which have to be carried out for each
reflective area according to each Q-IP pair.
1. Step:
Constructing the position of the mirror sources
2. Step:
Sectioning the connecting line of the reflected source - receiver

point with an area and determining the breakhrough-point.
3. Step:
Calculating the part of the sound level according to the longer

path of the ray over the reflecting area including the absorption
coefficient of this area.
In the example shown below two parts of sound level are taken into account at the receiver (IP) which are calculated from the displayed paths of
rays.
12
Figure A: The paths of rays with the reflection of the first order
Manual
12.2.5

Important for the correct calculation of reflection, according to the mentioned guidelines, is that all reflections of the first order be checked and, if
necessary, be included in the calculation. That is not obvious - software
programs exist which check, starting at the receiver, a ray only till the first
reflector crosses the path of the ray in the plan, even if this reflector is not
affecting anything because of the low height and the area lying behind
which reflects the ray. The calculation of reflection must, as in the example of picture A, also find a level-raising contribution if, as in picture B, a
low obstacle at the base seems to block the rays path.
H=8m
IP
H=1m
12
Q
Figure B: The paths of rays for the reflection of the first
order with obstacles in the path of the ray.
A typical example of this case is shown in figure C. The program only investigates up to the first reflector which is found, then at the house on the
left side of the road the amount of reflection which is caused by the high
building is not taken into account only because a 1 m high wall is located
between this high building and the four lane road. This calculation is not in
accordance with RLS90 in this case.
Besites this, CadnaA takes into account reflections if screening objects
obstruct the path of the reflected sound ray. The part of the sound level
which was caused by the reflecting sound at the receiver point is then re-
Manual

12.2.5 3
duced by the value which results from the screening calculation for the
path: mirror-source - receiver.
12
Figure C: For the calculation of the sound level at the left residential building, according to
RLS90, the reflection of the traffic noise on the high right building has to be calculated despite the low wall between the road and the building.
CadnaA also calculates the reflection for extended sources such as line or
area sources, but these objects will be split into sufficiently small partial
sources. Figure D shows the already familiar soccer field with three buildings located in the neighbourhood and the paths of rays taken into account.
Manual
12.2.5

Figure D: The paths of rays taken into account in a calculation of sound levels on a soccer field
12
Manual

12.2.6 1
12.2.6 Reflections of Higher Order

In calculating reflections of second order all valid mirror-sources have to
be reflected again on all reflecting areas to prove the validity of each reflection and to calculate the corresponding path of the ray.
The number of rays with a further order of reflection results from the product of the number of reflections from the last order multiplied by the
number of valid reflectors. The specification of this numeric method is
found in /33/.
It is obvious that the number of possible reflections explodes with an increasing number of orders. Calculations up to higher orders are only completely possible for very restricted arrangements. On the other hand, a
reflection has to be calculated first before its contribution can be evaluated
as irrelevant.
CadnaA enables the calculation of reflections of high orders for all type of
sources. The paths of ray can be displayed and the sound level contributions of the reflections are separately identified. According to the specifications of the standards for the source type Road and Railway with
activating these standards only reflection of first order are calculated using
mirror-image method - reflections of higher order are taken into account
with a penalty for multiple reflections.
An example for the complete calculation of reflection up to the 10. order is
shown with the backyard in figure A. A point source located in front of
the opening beams into the backyard, and the sound level shall be calculated at the represented receiver IP.
Manual
12
12.2.6

Figure A: Radiation in a backyard
12
Manual

12.2.6 3
12
Manual
12.2.6

Figure B: All paths of rays for each individual order of reflections in the backyard
12
Figure C: All possible paths of rays in a calculation up to the 10. order
By the way - CadnaA needs only a fraction of a second with a Pentium

computer for a complete calculation up to the 10. order as in this example.
Abitrary arrangements of objects can be taken into account for a calculation of reflections. With this technique it is possible to perform the calculation of the sound level corresponding to the reality in cases not
corresponding to the valid guidelines.
Manual

12.3
12.3 1
If Generate Rays is activated in the edit dialog of a receiver point all calculated rays with this target point are inserted as auxiliary plygon lines.
With double-click on such a ray its contribution to the sound level at the
receiver is indicated. This sound contribution is shown in the field ID with
its proportionate level, e.g., RAY_419_00 which signifies that the direct
sound ray (_00) contributes 41.9 dB.
The rays are shown on screen as if they cross screening objects straightly nevertheless screening is calculated taking into account vertical and lateral
diffraction. In this case an s will be attached in their identifier. A shielded
ray of the eighth order for which a calculation of diffraction has been enforced may have an identifier RAY_419_08s.
On this base, rays with a certain order of reflection can be displayed or
switched off easily in CadnaA with the efficient group function
(Tables|Groups see Chapter 18.2 "Groups"). If the rays are displayed, all
diffracted sound rays can be switched off in the representation by deactivating the group with the expression *_??s.
With corresponding settings for all deactivated objects in Options|Apperance (see Chapter 13.6 "Object Appearance") you can enforce the diffracted and non-contributed, mostly
irrelevant rays to disappear
completely.
But the best is learning by doing - trace step by step the following example.
Start CadnaA
In Options|Limits enter the values for the limit as shown in the following dialog.
Manual
12
12.3

Insert the following objects
12
Point source with PWL 100 dB, Name Q1 - coordinates 20/5/5
2 buildings with a height of 25 m and Reflection loss of 0 dB

- building 1 (80/60 , 85/60 , 85/100 , 80/100)
- building 2 (0/130 , 5/130 , 5/160 , 0/160)
Click in the toolbox on the icon and enter the value 80 via the
keyboard - hereby an edit dialog opens to enter a polygon point
- press the TAB-key and enter the value 60 - confirm with OK
and enter the next value for the second pair of coordinates.
After inserting the coordinates of the first building, quit the
insertion mode by clicking with the RIGHT mouse key.
Again with the RIGHT mouse key, click once on the line of the
building plan - the edit dialog opens.
Click on the button Geometry and enter a building with a relativ height of 25 m.
Repeat this for the second building. The building height is
adjusted automatically.
Manual

12.3 3
2 Receiver points
-
I2 (35/110/5) and
I3 (35/170/5)
Click on the corresponding icon in the toolbox

Enter the coordinate via keyboard and close the edit dialog

polygon point by clicking OK

Open the edit dialog by clicking with the Right mouse key on
the margin of the receiver point.
Confirm with OK.
In Calculation|Configuration|Reflection adjust a max. reflection

order of 2 or more
The rays for the receiver I3 shall be displayed.
In the edit mode, open the edit dialog for receiver I3 by double-clicking on its border and activating the option Generate Rays.
12
Now start the calculation with a click on the Pocket Calculator in
Manual
12.3

the icon bar.

The following representation occurs after the calculation. CadnaA has calculated the direct ray, a reflection of the first order and a reflection of the
second order. (CadnaA calculates reflections completely up to the specified order - shall we bet that there are no more possible paths?)
H o us e 2
I3
I2
12
H o us e 2
H o us e 1
S our c e
The scenario
I3
I2
Ho us e 1
S o ur c e
after calculation and display of rays
After double-clicking a ray - or by Tables|Other Objects|Aux.Polygon you can identify the rays on the basis of its ID, e.g., RAY_419_00 which
means that the level contribution of this ray is 41.9 dB and the last two
digits indicate the order of reflection. Double zero is the direct ray without
reflection, 01 is a reflection of the first order, 02 of the second order and so
on.
Manual

12.3 5
Now pay attention to the possibility of CadnaA in the tables - if you

click on a data record, e.g., of the table Other Objects|Aux. Polygon
the corresponding ray in the diagram will be marked and can easily
be identified.
Now only rays of the second order shall be displayed . This is in our example simplified by directly switching off the non-desired ray in the corresponding edit dialog on its ID field. But the deactivation of rays described
in the following way is, however, with complex layouts the only realistic
alternative.
Insert in Tables|Group a new table row (press the INS-key), doubleclick it and enter the expression *_02 in the same-named field and
confirm with OK.
12
Insert a second line after the first one and enter the expression R*
and
Manual
12.3

)

DisplayRays.cna
deactivate this group (just enter a minus character - in the column

Marking). After confirming with OK you will only see the desired
group with rays of the second order.
If the deactivated rays are displayed as bright grey dashes, let them disappear completely - this representation would still cover all activated rays in
more complex situations. For this, use Options|Appearance| (deactivate) see Chapter 13.6 "Object Appearance".
To get to know the deleting of rays and the handling with shielded rays we
recommend you do the following exercise.
Activate all groups again in Tables|Group
Click on the House 1 and copy it in a position with a left offset so that
only a ray of the second order is intersected (see following figure)
House 2
I3
12
I2
House 1
Source
Manual
12.3 7

You do not need to delete the rays! If you start the calculation again,
the rays are updated.
Now start a new calculation - click on the Pocket Calculater in the icon
bar. The ID of the ray which intersects the new building now contains the
identifier RAY_220_02S. To eliminate only the shielded rays from the
representation
DisplayRays2.cna
insert a new row in Tables|Group, enter *s in the field expression

and deactivate this group. The shielded ray disappears.
Maybe you should save this file as a default file for some tests on your
own and open this file if you want to create such situations. You can delete
all existing objects before. The correct groups then exist and you only need
to change the order of reflection in the middle row to display all orders of
reflections, one after the other.
12
Manual
12.3

12
Manual

Configuration
12.4
12.4 1
Configuration
In developing CadnaA, it was, and continues to be, our goal to give the
professional user the desired freedom of choice and control while relieving
those only interested in overall results from having to master all the available options. This complexity and flexibility of CadnaA is particularly evident when large stocks of data have been entered which are then to be
processed under the Calculation|Configuration menu.
To meet the requirements for the calculation according to EC-directive on
environmental noise CadnaA since release 3.5 possesses a brand-new concept for defining and calculating evaluation parameters (see Chapter
12.4.6). In this concept you have beside a multitude of pre-defined noise
levels (for single or combined time intervals) also different evaluation parameters (like uncertainty sigma). Furthermore you can define evaluation
parameters by formulas.
In CadnaA since release 3.5 can be calculated simultaneously up to four
evaluation parameters either for single receiver points or in a receiver grid
(additionally to the ground).
The Calculation Configuration dialog serves to specify all settings required for the calculation, and, quite conveniently, to save these settings
with the calculated project file.
There are various tabs for groups of options within this dialog. Click the
tab for the desired group to specify and select the options.
By way of example, the tabs are described here for application of the German guidelines. They apply accordingly to those of other countries.
also see chapters
11.2.2 Calculation and Presentation of Results for Receiver Points on the
Display
11.5.4 Calculating a Grid
18.7 Batch Operation
18.6 PCSP - Program Controlled Segmented Processing
Manual
12
12.4

Configuration
12
Manual
12.4.1 1
Chapter 12.4 Configuration

Country Tab
12.4.1 Country Tab
In the field Country we choose from a list the name of a country or group
according to whose guidelines and standards we want to calculate our
project. Thereby the fields Industry, Road, Railway, and Air-traffic display the corresponding guidelines/standards used to calculate these noise
types.
If you select User-defined, you can choose among the calculation procedures implemented or purchased for the different types of noise.
For example, to calculate according to the TA-Lrm enforced since Nov.
1, 1998, select Germany(TALrm) as the country setting. The tabs and
the available options may differ depending on your selection.
The button Configuration allows you to save your calculation configuration and load it again if required (see also chapter 18.8 Prototype File).
Manual
Country
12.4.1
12
12.4.1

Country Tab
12
Manual
12.4.2 1

12.4.2 Implemented Calculation Methods

Germany:
12.4.2
VDI 2714 " Outdoor sound propagation", January 1988, Beuth-Verlag,

Berlin, Kln
VDI 2714
12.4.2
VDI 2720 Sheet 1, " Noise control by barriers outdoors", March 1997,
Beuth-Verlag, Berlin, Kln
VDI 2720-1
12.4.2
DIN 18005-1 : 1987-05

Noise abatement in town planning; calculation methods, Beuth Verlag
Berlin
DIN 18005-1
12.4.2
RLS90 Guidelines for Noise Control at Roads (RLS-90) Published by the

German Federal Ministry of Transport, Dept. for Road Construction, Ed.
1990, Traffic Gazette 44 (1990)
RLS90
12.4.2
Schall03 Guidelines for the Calculation of Sound Immission from

Railways Schall 03, Akustik 03, Ed. 1990, DB (German Railways), Central Administration, Munich
Schall03
12.4.2
Current Information of BZA Munich - Akustik - BZA Mnchen

103.10313, 962/6302, Sheet 1, 021 from 17.8.1991, DB (German
Railways), Central Administration, Munich
Schall03 - Aerodynamic
Influences
12.4.2
TA-Lrm: Sixth general administrative regulation concerning the Federal

Immission Control Act (Technical instruction for noise protection TALrm) dated 1998-08-26, published in Gemeinsames Ministerialblatt dated
1998-08-28, enforced since 1.11.1998
TA-Lrm
12.4.2
Zur Bestimmung der meteorologischen Dmpfung - Eine Anleitung mit

Beispielen - Landesumweltamt NRW, Postfach 102363, D-45023 Essen
TAL98
12.4.2
18th regulation for the execution of the Federal Immission Protection Act
(Regulation concerning the protection from noise from sports facilities 18. BImSchV) dated 1991-07-18, Bundesgesetzblatt, annual set 1991, part
1, p. 1588
18.BImSchV
12.4.2
Manual
12
12
12.4.2

ISO 9613
12.4.2
ISO 9613
Acoustics - Attenuation of sound during propagation outdoors Part 1: Calculation of the absorption of sound by the atmosphere, 1993
Part 2: General method of calculation (ISO 9613-2:1996)
ISO International Organization for Standardization, Switzerland
Meteorology:
12.4.2
according to ISO 9613 and CONCAWE - selectable on the Tab Industry
VDI 3770
12.4.2
VDI 3770 Characteristic noise emission values of technical sound sources;

Sports and recreational facilities; First working draft as of February 1996
AzB
12.4.2
AzB Guideline for the calculation of noise areas in the vicinity of civilian
and military airports according to the law for the protection of aircraft
noise ed. 30.3.1971 (BGBI I, S. 282)
MLus92
12.4.2
Merkblatt ber Luftverunreinigungen an Straen - Teil: Straen ohne oder

mit lockerer Randbebauung, Ausgabe 1991, Genderte Fassung 1996, Forschungsgesellschaft fr Straen- und Verkehrswesen e.V., Kln, Arbeitsgruppe Verkehrsfhrung und Verkehrssicherheit.
European
Standards:
12.4.2
Directive
2002/49/EC
12.4.2
ECAC.CEAC
Doc. 29
12.4.2
Harmonoise
Directive 2002/49/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of

25th June 2002 relating to the assessment and management of environmental noise, Official Journal of the European Communities, L189/12,
EN, 18.7.2002
ECAC.CEAC Doc. 29 "Report on Standard Method of Computing Noise
Contours around Civil Airports", 1997. Of the different approaches to the
modelling of flight paths, the segmentation technique referred to in section
7.5 of ECAC.CEAC Doc. 29 will be used.
Harmonised Accurate and Reliable Methods for the EU Directive on the
Assessment and Management of Environmental Noise: WP3: Engineering
Models. Programming The Point-To-Point Propagation Model. Type of
Document: Technical report; Document reference: HAR34TR-041124CSTB01; Level of confidentiality: Public, Date: 24/11/2004; Author: Dir
Van Maercke
Manual
12.4.2 3

Schallabstrahlung und Schallausbreitung AL Nr. 28, Dezember 1987,

sterreichischer Arbeitsring fr Lrmbekmpfung, A-1200 Wien, Wexstr.19-23
Austria:
12.4.2
AL 28
12.4.2
NORM
S5011
12.4.2
RVS 3.02
Lrmschutz
12.4.2
Switzerland:
12.4.2
STL-86
12.4.2
SEMIBEL
12.4.2
(AL Guideline #28, Sound Radiation and Sound Propagation, December

1987, Austrian Association for Noise Abatement)
Berechnung der Schallimmission durch Schienenverkehr, Zugverkehr,
Verschub- und Umschlagbetrieb, 1. Dezember 1994, sterreichisches
Normungsinstitut (N), Heinestr. 38, Postfach 130, A-1021 Wien
(NORM S 5011 : 1995-04 Determination of noise immission caused by
rail traffic - Railway traffic, shunting and cargo handling operations)
Richtlinie der sterreichischen Forschungsgemeinschaft Strae und
Verkehr (FSV) - Arbeitsgruppe Verkehr und Umwelt" - Arbeitsausschu
Immissionsschutz Lrm", RVS 3.02 Lrmschutz, Stand Dez.1997
(RVS 3.02 Protection from Noise, December 1997, Austrian Research Association for Road and Traffic, Echenbachgasse 9, A-1010 Wien, Austria)
Schweizer Schriftenreihe Umweltschutz Nr. 57 - Anleitung zur Ermittlung
und Beurteilung von Lrmimmissionen an Straen, Herausgegeben vom
Bundesamt fr Umweltschutz Bern, Januar 1987
(Swiss Report Environmental Protection No. 57 - Instruction for investigation and evaluation of Noise Immission from Roads, published by Federal
Office for Environmental Protection, Bern, January 1987)
Schweizerisches Emissions- und Immissionsmodell fr die Berechnung
von Eisenbahnlrm, Herausgegeben vom Bundesamt fr Umwelt, Wald
und Landschaft, Bern, Mrz 1990
(Swiss Method for the calculation of railway noise, published by Federal
Office for Environmental, Forest and Conservation, Bern, March 1990)
Manual
12
12
12.4.2

Nordic
Guidelines
12.4.2
Industry
12.4.2
Environmental noise from industrial plants - General prediction method.

Danish Acoustical Laboratory, The Danish Academy of Technical Sciences, Report no. 32, 1982
Railway
12.4.2
Railway Traffic Noise - The Nordic Prediction Method, TemaNord

1996:524, Nordic Council of Ministers, Store Strandstraede 18, DK-1255
Copenhagen K, ISBN 92 9120837 X, ISSN 0908-6692
Road
12.4.2
Road Traffic Noise - Nordic Prediction Method, TemaNord 1996:525,

Nordic Council of Ministers, Store Strandstraede 18, DK-1255 Copenhagen K, ISBN 92 91208361, ISSN 0908-6692
United
Kingdom:
12.4.2
CRTN
12.4.2
Calculation of Road Traffic Noise, Department of the Environment Welsh

Office, London: Her Majestys Stationery office, 1988
CRN
12.4.2
Calculation of Railway Noise - 1995 - Deparment of Transport, HMSO,

London
BS 5228
12.4.2
Noise immission by construction sites: British Standard BS 5228
Frankreich:
12.4.2
NMPB Routes 96
12.4.2
Mthode de calcul incluant les effets mtorologiques, version exprimentale, Bruit des infrastructures routires, Janvier 1997 - Centre dtudes sur
les rseaux, les transports, lurbanisme et les constructions publiques
Service dtudes techniques des routes et autoroutes - Laboratoire central
des ponts et chausses - Centre scientifique et technique du btiment
Netherland
12.4.2
SRM II
12.4.2
Railway Noise: The Netherlands national computation method "Standaard-Rekenmethode II" published in "Reken- en Meetvoorschrift Railverkeerslawaai '96, Ministerie Volkshuisvesting, Ruimtelijke Ordening en
Milieubeheer, 20. November 1996".
Concawe
12.4.2
Concawe - the oil companies international study group for conservation of

clean air and water - europe (established in 1963), report no. 4/81, the
Manual
12.4.2 5

propagation of noise from petroleum and petrochemical complexes to

neighbouring communities, Prepared by C.J. Manning, M.Sc., M.I.O.A.
Acoustic Technology Limited (Ref.AT 931), CONCAWE, Den Haag May
1981
Swedish guideline for air turbine noise selectable for industry - Ljud fran
vindkraftverk
Kozak, J., Liberko, M.: Updated Method for Calculation of Road Traffic
Noise (in Czech), Annex of the Newsletter of the Ministry of the Environment of the Czech Republic. 1996, No. 3, p.1-16
Sweden
12.4.2
Czech Republic
12.4.2
Liberko
USA
Still in process: FHWA Federal Highway Administration Model (http://

www.trafficnoisemodel.org) TNM Version 2.5, McTrans Center University of Florida, 2088 Northeast Waldo Road, Gainesville, Fl 32609, http://
mctrans.ce.ufl.edu
Air Pollution Standard (only include in APL additional option of CadnaA):
12.4.2
Germany:
Bundesministerium fr Umwelt, Naturschutz und Reaktorsicherheit: Erste

Allgemeine Verwaltungsvorschrift zum BundesImmissionsschutzgesetz
(Technische Anleitung zur Reinhaltung der Luft TA Luft) vom 24. Juli
2002, Gemeinsames Ministerialblatt vom 30. Juli 2002 (GMBl. 2002, Heft
25 29, S. 511 605) Carl Heymanns Verlag KG, Luxemburger Strae
449, 50939 Kln (Tel.: 0221/943730)
TALuft 2002
Calulation method AUSTAL2000 (propagation method Air Pollution, see

http://www.austal2000.de
AUSTAL2000
22.Verordnung zur Durchfhrung des Bundes-Immissionsschutzgesetzes

(Verordnung ber Immissionswerte fr Schadstoffe in der Luft - 22.
BImSchV) vom 11.9.2002 (BGBl. I S. 1819, gendert durch VO v.
27.5.1994, BGBl. I S. 1095) BGBl. III/FNA 2129-8-22
22. BImSchV
Manual
12.4.2
TNM
12.4.2
12
12.4.2
Europe
EC-Standard
1999/30/EG

12.4.2
COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 1999/30/EC of 22 April 1999 relating to limit

values for sulphur dioxide, nitrogen dioxide and oxides of nitrogen, particulate matter and lead in ambient air
12
Manual

General Tab
12.4.3 1
12.4.3 General Tab
Sound sources, whose contribution to the sound immission at the receiver

point is negligible, will be disregarded in the calculation if the overall error
induced by this simplification is not larger than the defined value. Therefore, the larger the maximum permissible error in the final result, the
shorter the time required for the calculation.
max. Error
(dB)
12.4.3
The search radius defines a circle around the receiver point. Only sound
sources within this circle will be considered in the calculation. This is
helpful with very large projects - 2000 m maybe a good choice in those
cases.
max. Search
Radius (m)
12.4.3
The Minimum Distance Source to Receiver Point serves to avoid calculations near the area around a sound source.
Min. Dist. Source to

Imm. Point
12.4.3
For expertise work and not very large projects the setting 0 should be chosen. If noise maps of cities are calculated a value of 0.5 or 1 should be a
good compromise.
Manual
12
12.4.3
Uncertainty
Propagation
Coefficient
Uncertainty

General Tab
12.4.3
In CadnaA you also have the possibility to evaluate the accuracy of noise
prediction. This accuracy depends on the accuracy of the emission values
used and the accuracy resulting from the calculation of propagation.
In addition to the uncertainty of the emission levels you also can take into
account the uncertainty of the propagation calculation (meteorology etc.).
For that enter the corresponding value in the box Propagation Coeff.
Uncertainty.
For the time being a standard deviation D for the attenuation D which depends on the distance is taken into account by CadnaA with the following
formula
d
d0
D = k lg
where k can be defined by the user, d is the distance source receiver and
d0 is a reference distance of 10 m. Based on experience a value of K = 3
maybe used.
12
Standard
Deviation
An entered sigma or a coefficient of propagation does not change the

assessment levels.
To take the uncertainty into account you have to enter a Standard Deviation sigma in dB in the Memo Window (see Chapter 5.5.3) of all noise
sources. If the sound power level of the source has been measured, this is
Manual
12.4.3 3

General Tab
the standard deviation of reproducibility according to grade 1, 2 or 3 (see

ISO 3740 series)
The MemoWindow in the Edit Dialog of a Source
Make sure that you have chosen at least one of the evaluation parameter
SIGMA (for day | evening | night) in the Evaluation Parameter Tab.
Sigma
After confirming the dialog with OK and executing the calculation with
Grid|Calc Grid (see Chapter 11.5) you get the distribution of uncertainty
in a grid.
12
The calculation of sigma for single receiver points (see Chapter 11.5) is
executed with the command Calculation|Calc or by clicking on the calculater icon in the icon bar.
You can display the sigma for the receiver points either in the Result Table (see Chapter 15.3) choosing the expression e.g. Level SigmaD (for
sima day-time) from the column list in the dialog of the Result Table or in
a Label (see Chapter 5.7.4) directly at the receiver point.
In /52/ is showed how the uncertainty of calculated assessment levels and
the uncertainty of calculated noise propagation can be determined. The
application of the system realized in CadnaA is demonstrated in this publication with an explicit example.
Manual

950_22_Uncertainty.pdf
12.4.3

General Tab
Extrapolate Grid Under

Buildings
12.4.3
Selecting this option will generate "seamless" transitions from the horizontal projection of an object to coloured areas and lines of equal sound
levels regardless of the calculation grid selected. This is achieved by interpolation of the levels calculated for the grid points (see also chapter 11.5.2
Appearance of Grid).
We recommend, however, that you deactivate this option before the calculation if lines of equal sound level are to be displayed with the option Exclude Grid under Buildings active (see Chapter 11.5.1 paragraph
"Exclude Sound Sources/ Buildings").
Grid
interpolation
12.4.3
If this option with the settings n*n is selected, then a calculation is made at
each of these (n+1) points of the specified grid points (Grid|Specification), in the first step only and at the pivot of every rectangle, limited by
4 points.
If one of the following conditions is not fulfilled for one of the 4 edge
points and the center point of a n*n arrangement of grid points then this
rectangle is subdivided into 4 equal quadrangles and, for each quadrangle,
the same test is again performed. If one of these conditions is still exceeded, then a further subdivision recursively occurs until the conditions are
fulfilled or all points, in accordance with the grid specification, are taken
into account in the calculation.
12
Conditions:
The conditions are:

1.
The mean level calculated from the levels at the 4 edge points should
not differ from the level at the center point more than the specified
maximum deviation (default setting 0.1 dB). This must be fulfilled
for both diagonal lines.
2.
The difference between the largest and the smallest calculated level
at the 4 corner points of the rectangle is, at most, equal to the specified maximum value (default setting 10 dB).
If these conditions are fulfilled, then the interpolated values match the real
values inside the rectangle sufficiently and the levels at the remaining
Manual
12.4.3 5

General Tab
points inside the rectangle are interpolated from the levels calculated at the
4 corner points.
You can use this approximation method to accelerate advantageously the
time consuming calculation of diffraction for road and railway traffic with
many buildings.
fast
Screeing (exp.)
12.4.3
In the calculation of diffraction you only take into account objects which
protrude into a predefined gradiation of a parabolic ray - low buildings
will not be checked in this way at all.
If this option is activated obstacles which are not cutted by the ray are not
displayed in the cross-section (see Chapter 13.12) either.
This method should not be used for the calculation of point, line and
area sources according to VDI 2714 /16/ or DIN ISO 9613-2 /21/.
Selection of calculation method: Ray Tracing (RT) and Angle Scanning (AS)
12.4.3
Basically two methods or calculation strategies are used by noise prediction software - the Ray-Tracing or the Angle Scanning model. CadnaA is
the only software program which both models offers to use. The Ray-Tracing model is used by default.
The ray paths between sources and receivers are constructed deterministically. Extended sources are subdivided dynamically using the projection
method. The parts covered by a single calculation ray are smaller in small
distances and larger in large distances. Screening objects and all gaps between them produce one ray minimum.
With deactivated option Angle Scan Method the Ray-Tracing model is
used.
Manual
12
Ray Tracing (RT)
12.4.3

General Tab
Ray-Tracing-model - with projection - extended sources

subdivided dynamically
12
Angle Scanning (AS)
With activated checkbox Angle Scan Method the following described

method is taken into account.
It was additionally implemented to be compatible with Mithra a french
software program (CSTB).
Calculation of the level at a receiver point is done by rays starting from the
receiver and spaced in equal angle steps. Only objects crossed by the ray
are taken into account in the calculation. Point sources in the angle cone
are virtually moved to lay on the calculation ray.
Manual

General Tab
12.4.3 7
Angle Scan Method - Rays starting from the receiver and

spaced in equal angle steps
If MITHRA Compatibility is activated, all the approximations used in

Mithra are also used in CadnaA - this is the mode that should be used if
existing MITHRA projects are loaded and the results in CadnaA should be
the same.
The checkbox is only available if the option CadnaA-Mithra is

purchased.
Manual
12
Mithra Compatibility
12.4.3

General Tab
12
Manual
12.4.4 1

Partition Tab
12.4.4 Partition Tab
For line sources and area sources the largest dimension of a section, generated by splitting, equals the product of the grid factor and the distance of
the centre of the section from the receiver point.
Raster Factor
You may specify the maximum and minimum section lengths to be generated by automatic splitting. The min. section length may also be given as
percentage of the total length.
Length of
Section
Method 1 is the so-called "precise" method according to /31/, which yields

the longest possible sections.
Partition Acc. to RBLrm 92, Method

1
12.4.4
When this option is activated, the calculation will be executed by projecting the obstacles and applying the propagation rules. Otherwise, only
propagation rules will be considered in the calculation.
Projection
of:
Extended sources such as line or area sources will be - according to the

normative requirements - divided into such small elements that their big-
Manual
12.4.4
12
12.4.4
12.4.4
12.4.4

Partition Tab
gest expansion is smaller then the distance of source-receiver points when

multiplied by the Raster Factor.
If the option projection is activated, also a pre-partitioning of shielded and
non-shielded elements takes place before the partition according to criteria
of distance (pre-partitioning of all rays of sound from the immission point
to both outermost points of each shielding object).
For noise maps of cities it is recommended to deactivate this option to accelerate the calculation.
See also chapter 12.2.3 The Projection Method for extended Sound Sources
Projection at
Terrain Model
12.4.4
With this option also elevated areas defined by Contour Lines, are also
taken into account in the pre-partitioning of line- and area sound sources.
Maximum
Distance SourceReceiver:
12.4.4
If the receiver point is further away from the source than the entered distance then no projection is taken into account.
Search Radius
Source:
12.4.4
For the partitioning of sources according to the projection requirements

the only obstacles which are taken into account are those within the entered distance from the source.
Search Radius
Receiver:
12.4.4
For the partitioning of sources according to the projection requirements

the only obstacles which are taken into account are those not as far from
the receiver point as the entered distance.
12
Manual

Reference Time Tab
12.4.5 1
12.4.5 Reference Time Tab
The average level of sound pressure over a period of time ist to be computed, taking into account the actual duration of the sound impact from a
source in accordance with the basic requirements for the evaluation.
To calculate the noise indicators at single receiver points with CadnaA according to the requirements of a guideline the configurations of the calculation have to be preset (menu Calculation|Configuration). On the tab
Reference Time the required settings for the reference times and the assignment of each hour of the day with respect to the intervals day/evening/
night can be selected.
The calculation of the noise indicators Lde , Ln and Lden is possible

with the standard version of CadnaA. However, the evaluation and
the assessment of the number of people living in dwellings with a
certain noise level applies with the method "Object Scan". Prerequisite is the CadnaA option XL.
Manual
Reference
Time:
12.4.5
12
12.4.5

Reference Time Tab
The reference time is applied for all noise types and concerns primarily the
combined evaluation parameters like Lden, Lde, Ldn and Len (see Chapter
12.4.6). For the single evaluation parameters like Ld, Le and Ln no time
correction is taken into account except by industry sources if the Operating Time is activated and an operating time is entered in the industry dialog.
Allocating Hours/Time
Periods
12.4.5
In the 24 input boxes in the dialog each hour is assigned to the three time
intervals day/ evening/ night. As variables the letters D (daytime), E
(evening), and N (nighttime) can be applied. Enter the corresponding letters respecting the requirements of the relevant guideline. From the assigned time intervals it follows for which relative parts of the day the
corresponding penalties have to be considered.
It is not mandatory to fill all fields with letters you can let them empty and
you can write either with capital letters or lower cases. Therefore if you
like to calculate the loudest hour at night-time according to TA-Lrm it is
sufficient if if you enter only one N (and of course in the industry dialog
you have to activate the checkbox Operating Time and you have to enter
the operating time in minutes during this loudest hour in the field Night).
12
Penalties
12.4.5
Penalties are only taken into account for combined evaluation parameters
like e.g. Lde, Ldn etc. Enter the desired penalty according to your requirements, e.g. according to the definition of Lden enter penalties for Evening/
Recr. Time Penalty 5 (dB) and for the Night 10 (dB).
With all these setting both total levels for single receiver points and for
grids will be calculated.
Special Reference Time

for Industry
12.4.5
On the lower part of the tab Reference Time special reference times for
industrial sources can be entered (in minutes).
This option is interesting if standards or guidelines require not the whole
hour but e.g. a half hour (30 minutes).
This option has also an historical meaning - it assured the compatibility
with projects calculated with older CadnaA releases. If an older project is
Manual
12.4.5 3

Reference Time Tab
opened this option and the option Compatibility Mode for Industry from
the evaluation parameter tab are activated.
With the option Special Reference Time for Industry activated the
allocation of hours (see further above) is ignored and the entered time
intervals are considered.
The default value is 960 minutes (16 hours) for the daytime (the evening is
considered being a part of the daytime), 480 minutes (8 hours) for the
night-time - these times have been the default settings in older releases of
CadnaA.
Therefore if e.g. the loudest hour of the night is to be calculated as required by TA-Lrm you can either enter the reference time here for night
60 minutes or alternative above in the dialog Allocation Hours with only
one N for one hour. The operating time in the source dialog must then, of
course, be the operating time of the source during this loudest hour in both
cases.

You will find further information about the EU directive and CadnaA in
the threee files RefTime_Eval_1/2/3.PDF on your CD-Rom in SAMPLES|DATAKUSTIK_INFO.
RefTime_Eval.PDF
If this option is activated, you can select the areas for which to calculate
recreation time penalties. This is only possible if
Recreation Time Penalty

only for:
12.4.5
areas of designated land use have been specified using the Designated
Land Useicon on the Toolbox
or immission points have been assigned a Land Use on the pertinent

edit dialog.
In accordance with the requirements of the TA-Lrm, this option allows

you to apply the recreation time penalty only to "general" and "purely" residential areas while excluding mixed and industrial areas.
Manual
12
12.4.5

Reference Time Tab
12
Manual

12.4.6 1
12.4.6 Evaluation Parameter Tab

To meet the requirements for the calculation according to EC-directive on
environmental noise CadnaA since release 3.5 possesses a brand-new concept for defining and calculating evaluation parameters. In this concept
you have beside a multitude of pre-defined noise levels (for single or combined time intervals like Lden, Lde, Ld etc.) also different evaluation parameters (like uncertainty sigma). Furthermore you can define evaluation
parameters by formulas. The following evaluation parameters can be chosen or entered:
Noise levels for single time intervals: Ld (day), Le (evening), Ln

(night)
Noise levels for combined time intervals: Lden, Lde, Len, Ldn
Uncertaintiy for time intervals: SigmaD (day), SigmaE (evening), SigmaN (night)
Formulas (total noise levels or noise type specific, day|evening|night,
singular value or spectral values, total level or levels in octave, linear/
A-/B-/C- or D-weighted)
12
Evaluation Parameter Tab in Calculation|Configuration
Manual
12.4.6

If no formula is entered (which would exclude noise types for calculation)

all defined evaluation parameters will be calculated for all existing noise
types.
In CadnaA since release 3.5 can be calculated simultaneously up to four
evaluation parameters either for single receiver points or in a receiver grid
(additionally to the ground).
Listbox Type
In the listbox Type choose the evaluation parameter you like to calculate.
In the corresponding dialogs, like e.g. receiver point edit-dialog, up to four
evaluation parameters are displayes depending on how many you have defined.
The evaluation parameters according to e.g. TA-Lrm are Lde (noise level
for day- and evening-time) and Ln (level night-time) or one parameter according to EC-directive e.g. Lden (for the day-evening-night index).
The evaluation parameters are internal serially numbered with alias LP1,
LP2, LP3 and LP4 starting with the inital field. With these alias you can
refer to in formula or expression.
12
Field Name
In the listbox Name you may enter an user-defined expression (alias) for
the selected evaluation parameter, e.g. Day. You have to activate the
checkbox on the left hand side of the field before you can enter an alias..
Field Type with selected noise index Lde and activated

field Name with an entered user-defined alias Day.
With the checkbox Name activated the alias of the evaluation parameter
will be displayed in the corresponding dialogs instead.
Manual

12.4.6 3
Receiver points dialog with three defined and calculated

evaluation parameters - the first parameter with an alias.
Additionally in the field Unit you may enter an identifying item (e.g.
dB(A) or sigma) wich will also be displayed if the checkbox is activated.
Unit Field
If you have chosen the type formula (=f(x)) from the listbox Type you can
either enter an user-defined formula and/or you can define one with predefined expression by clicking on the double arrow on the right-hand side
of the expression field..
Formula Field
With the example formula the noise level index Ld will be

calculated only for industry sources spectral and linear
weighted.
Manual
12
12.4.6

If you click on the double arrows you open sub-lists with

pre-defined formulas.
With these pre-defined expressions and corresponding operators you can

define your own formulas.

RefTime_Eval.PDF
12
Compatibility mode
for Industry
12.4.6
You will find advanced information about reference time and evaluation
parameters with CadnaA in the three files RefTime_Eval_1/2/3.PDF on
your CD-ROM in directory SAMPLES|DATAKUSTIK_INFO.
This option is implemented to be compatible with files calculated with older releases of CadnaA.
This option is active automatically (together with option Special Reference Time for Industry on Reference Time tab) if these files are opened because the time interval day (Ld) includes the evening and the
penalties accordingly. Therefore this option can only be used with single
evaluation parameters like Ld but not with combined evaluation values
like Lde. In the last case an error message would occur with the possibility
to change the evaluation parameter.
Manual
12.4.7 1

12.4.7 DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab
The ground height defined by this option is used in the calculation if no

other information, given by contour lines or height points, is available in
an area. To each source, receiver point and object, an absolute ground
height is assigned which results from its position within the system of contour lines .
Standard
Height
12.4.7
Triangulation meshes existing height points and contour lines to form triangular planes. This speeds up the calculation. In this case you must not
calculate a grid to be able to look at the terrain model in 3D (Special) (see
Chapter 13.14).
Terrain
Models
12.4.7
Manual
12
12.4.7

DTM: Triangulation
The edges of the triangle is taken into account
for shielding
12
Explicit
Edges Only
12.4.7
DTM: Search Contour Lines

This DTM shows the ground height which is taken into
account when positioning objects with relative heights.
In addition, if you activate the option Explicit Edges Only, only the entered contour lines will have a screening effect and not the edges of the
formed triangular planes. The activation of this option does not effect the
3D (Special) view.
Objects with Ground at

every Point influence
DTM
12.4.7
If this option is activated, the height of the base point of the objects, whose
heights have been entered in the Geometry dialog with the option absolute Height/Ground at every Point, determines the terrain height at their
position.
Search Contour Lines

(Average)
12.4.7
Search Contour Lines (Average) - (Average of a contour line information according to squared-distance).
Local Inclined
Plane
Search Contour Lines (Local Inclined Plane) (approximation of plane

surfaces by using the defined contour lines).
12.4.7
Normally the triangulation method should give the best results because it
also takes into account - according to the physical reality - the convex sur-
Manual

12.4.7 3
face planes between the contour lines and the height points, which are
formed by the newly set edges during screening.
When applying triangulation you should always keep in mind,

though, that the contour lines should be formed by a dense succession
of points because these represent the corners of the created triangles.
A surface modelled by contour lines with only two end points will
form a very coarse and extended plane.
You can show triangulation lines in CadnaA. The setting is "invisible" by

default. Select a corresponding line type in Options|Appearance (see
Chapter 13.6)..
Representation of
Triangulation
Lines:
12.4.7
12
DTM: Triangulation (rough)

plan presentation
Manual
DTM: Triangulation (fine) plan presentation after using the command Spline
12.4.7

DtM: Triangulation (rough)

3D-Special view
12
DTM: Triangulation (fine)

3D-Special view
Search Radius for

Contour Lines (m) 12.4.7
In order to determine the height of the terrain at a point, all contour lines
within the radius specified here are considered. The greater the search radius, the longer the calculation time.
Lift Sources under

Ground to Ground
Niveau
12.4.7
If objects lie underneath the terrain height, e.g., this may happen after importing digital data from different data sources, it will be assumed, that the
relativ height is zero during the calculation. The terrain model is not changed.
Manual

Reflection Tab
12.4.8 1
12.4.8 Reflection Tab

If we calculate reflections we have to pay attention to two things
1.
that you enter in Calculation|Configuration Reflection Tab the

maximum order of reflection you want to take into account and
2.
that the objects settings (buildings, barriers, cylinders), which have

to be included into a calculation with reflection, are adjusted for
reflection.
Although CadnaA calculates reflection with an extremly fast algorithm,

the number of essential steps of calculation explodes with an expanding
number of order and with the amount of reflecting surfaces. A calculation
with an order of reflection higher than 1 should therefore always be applied to well defined scenarios with few objects. For such special investigations a corresponding small part from the total scenario of the project
file should be separated (see Chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects").
12
Reflection Tab in Calculation|Configuration - input of the

max. order of reflection and search radius (m) for reflectors.
Manual
12.4.8
max. Order of
Reflection

Reflection Tab
12.4.8
The maximum order of reflections, which are taken into account as mirror
image sources, strongly influences the calculation time. In most cases, taking into account first-order reflections is sufficient. Considering the calculation times, it is recommended you use higher orders of reflection only for
limited scenarios containing few objects.
For calculations of road traffic noise according to RLS 90 /9/ and railway
noise according to Schall03 /8/, first-order reflections shall be considered
exclusively. Therefore, if values 1 are entered, the user input is ignored,
provided that the options Strictly according to RLS-90 (see Chapter
12.4.10) or Strictly according to Schall03 (see Chapter 12.4.11 have been
activated
At present, CadnaA calculates reflections up to a maximum order of

20.
It is possible to view the sound rays contributing to the level at a
receiver point (see Chapter 12.3 "Displaying Sound Rays").
12
Search Radius for

Reflecting Objects
Around Source/
Receiver Point
12.4.8
Criteria for the Calculation of Reflections

If the field is empty or the value 0 is entered, no reflecting areas will be
checked in principle.
If a value other than 0 is entered, this is interpreted as the distance, in metres, from the source point, or receiver point, within which all reflecting
objects are taken into account.
Max. Distance Source

to Receiver Point 12.4.8
If the receiver point lies outside the distance here specified, no reflections
are calculated.
Manual

Reflection Tab
If the distance entered here is smaller than the one mentioned above, the
proportion of reflected sound is continuously reduced between these two
distances to avoid discontinuities in the representation of the Iso-dB lines.
Settings: max. distance Source-Receiver: 100 m, interpolate from: 100 m and reflection of 1st order. The Iso-dBLines show leaps because of reflections.
Manual
12.4.8 3
Interpolate from:
12
12.4.8

Reflection Tab
For interpolate from: Leaps will be avoided for Iso-dBLines with a value which is smaller (in the example 30 m)
than the distance source-receiver
12
Min. Distance Immission

Point to Reflecting
Object
12.4.8
If, for the calculation of the sound level in front of a window, a receiver
point is placed in front of the building wall, the reflection from the building itself must not be taken into account in the determination of the characteristic immission level.
It is therefore recommended you enter approximately 0.5 m or 1 m. In accordance with the guidelines, no reflections are then calculated for those
immission points which have been assigned to the building by means of
the Object Snap (see Chapter 13.5).
Interpolate
up to:
12.4.8
If the distance entered here is larger than the one mentioned before, there
is a continuous transition from "no reflection at all" to "maximum" reflection.
Manual

Reflection Tab
You should enter approximately 0.5 m if the increase in radiation in the

half- or quarter-space due to the sources of reflections from the building is
accounted for by assigning a global directivity index K0. This reduces calculation time without preventing the calculation of reflections for other
sources (see chapter 8.6.8 Ko without Ground).
12.4.8 5
Min. Distance Source to
Reflecting Object 12.4.8
12
Manual
12.4.8

Reflection Tab
12
Manual

Industry Tab
12.4.9 1
12.4.9 Industry Tab
The settings made on the Industry tab have an effect on the following
sources:
12
the general point, line, and area sources, vertical and horizontal (see
chapter 8.3, 8.4, 8.5)
optimisable area source (see chapter 8.15)
parking lot according to VDI (see chapter 8.13))
tennis point of service (see chapter 8.8)
Three options for lateral diffraction are available for selection:
non-lateral diffraction
only one object - lateral diffraction is not calculated if more than one
object intersects the line connecting the source to the immission point.
some objects - the two shortest possible convex rays around the
arrangement are determined and taken as a basis for the calculation.
Manual
Lateral
Diffraction
12.4.9
12.4.9

Industry Tab
Under Only up to Distance (m), enter the distance between source and receiver point for which lateral diffraction is to be taken into account.
12
Noneg.pathdifference12.4.9
With activated option by ISO 9613-2 no barrier attenuation is calculated if

the ray from the source to the receiver is above the upper edge of the barrier.
Ground
Attenuation
For taking into account the ground attenuation you may choose the following options:
12.4.9
Exclude Ground Attenuation over Barrier 12.4.9
No ground attenuation will be taken into account for shielded sound rays
according to VDI 2720 equation (5) De = Dz - DBM,0 0 dB or ISO
9613-2 equation (12).
Include Ground Attenuation over Barrier 12.4.9
The ground attenuation is calculated for a sound ray diffracted over an object, taking into account the change in the average height above the ground
of the sound ray passing over the barrier according to VDI 2720, equation
(2) De = Dz - D0 + Dm 0 dB
10m-Criterion
12.4.9
If a source is more than 10 m above ground and at least one edge of the
barrier is more than 10 m above the ground then it is calculated according
to VDI 2720 equation (6) De = Dz or ISO 9613-2, annotation 15 equation
(13) will be taken into account.
No sub. of neg.
Ground Att.
12.4.9
With this option activated, negative ground attenuation is not subtracted

from screening attenuation (according to ISO 9613-2 equation (12)). So
the effect of reflecting ground is not distroyed by barriers.
Manual

Industry Tab
The calculation method according ISO 9613-2 offers two alternatives to

calculate the ground attenuation Agr:
1.
method in frequency bands according to section 7.3.1 with the

ground absorption G as parameter,
2.
method for a-weighted levels according to section 7.3.2 not applying

the ground absorption G.
12.4.9 3
Ground
Attenuation
spectral
12.4.9
As in project files the sound emission of sources can either be given in

spectral form or as A-weighted levels, several possibilities exist to calculate the ground attenuation. In CadnaA four calculation options are offered
Designation
Procedure
none
no ground attenuation at all
not spectral
method 7.3.2 is used in all cases
spectral, spectral sources

only
The method 7.3.1 is used for all spectral

sources, in all other cases the method
7.3.2 is used. (This is the same as in CadnaA, version 3.3, with "Ground Att. spectral" being checked.)
spectral, all sources
12
method 7.3.1 is used in all cases, for nonspectral sources the corresponding octave
band is used
12.4.9
When calculating the ground absorption in frequency bands the global

ground absorption for areas not covered by the object "Ground Absorption" can be defined here (0 <= G <= 1). By default, a value of G=1 is assumed (porous soil).
Ground
absorption G:
12.4.9
We recommend to activate the option Use Map of Ground Absorption if

a lot of areas of ground absorption are inserted in your project file. This
would accelerate your calculation because a program internal map of
ground absorption will be preestimated and be used for the final calculation.
Use Map of
Ground Absorption
12.4.9
Manual
12.4.9

Industry Tab
AL
Hint for the calculation according to AL: The ground absorption is

always calculated by the selected country setting Austria regardless
whether this option is activated or not.
see also chapter 9.8 "Areas with Specified Ground Absorption"

Insertion
Loss
For the insertion loss you may choose the following options:
12.4.9
Dz without limit
Dz with limit
De,o with limit
According to ISO 9613-2 and VDI 2720 the insertion loss caused by barriers and screens is, at most, 20 dB if a single - and 25 dB if more than one screening edge is crossed by the ray (the latter is also the case with one
thick barrier). With the option Abar /Dz without limit activated in menu
Calculation|Configuration|Tab Industry the barrier equations of this
guideline are used for any height without this limitation.
The insertion loss De,o with a limit is a former option in CadnaA (in order
to prevent alterations with older projects).
12
Obstacles within
Area Source do not
Shield
12.4.9
When this option is active, any obstacle, such as buildings, foliage, barriers etc., lying within area sources, including parking lots and optimisable
area sources, are ignored.
Example: Area source "Industry South" with obstacles
Manual

Industry Tab
12.4.9 5
When the option is active, the levels at the immission point are calculated
as if the obstacles did not exist.
Source
Partial Level
WG 1
Name
ID
Industry South
Daytime
Night-time
74.5
54.5
Level resulting from the area source - option active in which obstacles do not shield the area source.
For any other source, the obstacles will act as shielding objects even if this
option is activated.
Source
Partial Level
WG 1
Name
Industry South
ID
Daytime
Night-time
71.4
51.4
Level resulting from the area source - option inactive in which obstacles shield the area source.
Buildings and cylinders are included in a calculation of sound propagation

as if the walls where screens or barriers with the defined height and without a closed roof or ceiling.
Buildings/Cylinders
do not shield
12.4.9
12
Buildings: This option activated allows to model complex industrial facilities with pipes, motors, gears and pums as building. the sources are located correctly inside but sound from soruces outside is screened. If this
technical block is partially transparent for noise from sources outside,
this can be taken into account with the parameter Transparency in the edit
dialog of the object Building (see Chapter 9.3.1).
Chimneys/stacks: This option is important if the radiation from the upper
chimney opening is modelled by locating a point-, line- or area source. In
this case the cylinder, which may be necessary to reflect and shield noise
from sources outside, does not falsify the chimneys directivity by additional screening. In this case the point source should be positioned at a
height a little bit lower than the chimney height (otherwise the cylinder reacts again as a screening object). With the same option it is possible to
Manual
950_21_Chimney.pdf
12.4.9

Industry Tab
simulate the emission of a thick tube, which shall be taken into account as
a screening object for sources and immission points at opposite sides, by a
line source positioned in it's axis /57/.
Cylinder 3D-View with a vertical line source inside
see also chapter 9.3.1 "Acoustic Transparency (%)"
12
Barrier
Coefficient
12.4.9
The barrier coefficients C1, C2 and C3 according to VDI 2720 /13/ and
ISO 9613-2 /21/ can be edited. This allows you to adapt the barrier equation to special applications. The default setting is correct for ISO 9613-2.
C3=0 means that the different values recommended for single and multiple
screens in ISO 9613-2 or VDI 2720 /13/ are used automatically.
If a value of 0 is given to C3, this value will be considered according to the
cases distinguished in VDI 2720 (single or double barrier).
Downwind
Conditions
(VDI only)
(Select Country Tab|Industry: VDI)

12.4.9
If this option is activated, the downwind conditions according to

VDI 2714 /16/ is taken into account in the calculation.
If this option is deactivated, a correction for the long-term noise impact,
DLang, according to VDI 2714, Equation (18) is taken into account.
Manual

Industry Tab
12.4.9 7
Temperature and rel. Humidity are used as a basis for the calculation of
the attenuation by the atmosphere in accordance with the selected guideline. The temperature also serves as the ambient temperature when calculating the exhaust stacks directivity.
Temperature / Rel.
Humidity
12.4.9
From the listbox Meteorology you can select the methode which will take
into account the meteorology if you have chosen the corresponding guideline for Industry in the dialog Configuration|Calculation|Country.
Meteorology
This option is available when calculating sound propagation according to

ISO 9613-2 /21/.
Correction for Meteorological Effects C0

(dB)
12.4.9
12.4.9
If the option is deactivated, the equivalent level of continuous sound pressure in octave bands, under downwind conditions, is calculated according
to ISO 9613-2, Clause 6, Equation (3).
If the option is activated and a value is entered, the A-weighted long-term
level of equivalent continuous sound pressure is calculated according to
Clause 6, Equation (6) of this standard. To determine the correction for
meteorological effects, Cmet, which is additionally considered here, the
factor C0 is required according to Clause 8, Equations (21) and (22). According to Clause 8, this factor is estimated after fundamental analysis of
the local meteorological statistics, or (this is another useful hint) is specified by the local authorities.
12
See chapter Calculation of the Meteorological Correction Cmet
Calculation of C0
from the
Wind statistic
12.4.9
According ISO 9613-2 it is possible to take into account the influence of

meteorology according CONCAWE /51/. Therefore choose ISO 9613 for
Industry in Country and CONCAWE for Meteorology. In that case
Cmet is replaced by K4 in the ISO-calculation.
CONCAWE
Manual
12.4.9
12.4.9

Industry Tab
12
Manual

Road Tab
12.4.10 1
12.4.10 Road Tab

The following is based on the RLS90 /9/ Standard but most of the explanation about input, modification and calculation are the same for all standards implemented in CadnaA. Ask for special information in case of other
standards.
12
If the Strictly according to RLS-90 check box is activated, CadnaA will

calculate, for roads,
only the first-order reflections, irrespective of the value specified on

the Reflection tab.
the two outermost lanes separately as line sources with a height of
0.5 m above road , and
neither lateral diffraction
nor attenuation due to foliage and built-up areas
nor meteorology.
Manual
Strictly according to
RLS-90
12.4.10
12.4.10
Example
12.4.10

Road Tab
Note: All other settings made on the Reflection tab under "Criteria
for the Calculation of Reflections:", such as the search radius for
reflecting objects, will apply even if the Strictly according to RLS90 option is activated.
Deactivate all options on the Road tab by clicking them (no check
marks)
Enter a road with the pertinent values. For illustration purposes,

select, e. g., a broad road with the standard cross section a6ms.
12
Edit road dialog
Manual

Road Tab
12.4.10 3
Define a line across the road using the auxiliary polygon.
Road with auxiliary polygon
Enter a height of 30 m for the auxiliary polygon in its edit dialog

Geometry.
Activate the context menu by clicking the auxiliary polygon with the
right mouse button, and select Section.
Under Specification, select a grid of, e. g., 1/1/1.
Then click Calculate.
As you see, CadnaA has calculated the road as if the source were positioned at its centreline, because the option Calculate Outermost Lanes
Separately was deactivated on the Road tab.
Grid calculation in the road area, not "strictly according to RLS-90"
Select again Calculation|Configuration |Road tab.
Activate the option Strictly According to RLS-90 by clicking it

(check mark), and close the dialog.
Manual
12
12.4.10

Road Tab
From the context menu of the polygon, select Section again.
Restore the grid specification 1/1/1, and calculate again.
The result clearly demonstrates that CadnaA has calculated the lanes separately this time, as required by the guidelines.
Grid calculation in the road area, "strictly according to RLS-90"
You may repeat this calculation with other variants.
Insert, e. g., reflecting buildings along the road.
Enter a reflection order of 0 and, first, calculate not Strictly According to

RLS-90. Then repeat this procedure, but this time Strictly According to
RLS-90 etc.
12
Note STL86
(Switzerland)
12.4.10
When calculating the road noise according to STL86 you can choose the
calculation of propagation according to STL. Therefore, deactivate the option Calc Propagation acc. to RLS90 in the tab ROAD.
Manual

Railroad Tab
12.4.11 1
12.4.11 Railroad Tab

The following is based on the Schall03 /8/ Standard but most of the explanation about input, modification and calculation are the same for all standards implemented in CadnaA. Ask for special information in case of other
standards.
12
If the Strictly according to Schall03 check box is activated, CadnaA will

calculate, for railways,
only the first-order reflections, irrespective of the value specified on

the Reflection tab.
the railway bonus of 5 dB (the calculated levels are 5 dB lower than
they would be measured) , and
neither lateral diffraction
nor attenuation due to built-up areas
nor meteorology.
Manual
12.4.11
Deactivating the selfscreening of buildings
12.4.11

Railroad Tab
For calculations according to the German railway guideline Schall 03 the

self-screening of buildings with backside receiver points can be alternatively considered or not.
To do so, a memo-variable SCREEN_TEST_ID=1 has to be defined for
the respective building. With the variable being set it will be checked
whether the ID of each receiver point corresponds to the building-ID. With
corresponding IDs the respective building is screening, otherwise not.
Use Non-Standard Reference

Time
12.4.11
Country Setting
Austria
12.4.11
If Use Non-Standard Reference Time=(12/4/8) ist activated the time intervals on the Reference Time tab is taken into account for the calculation.
The values (12/4/8) in this example will be updated to the defined time intervals (hours day/evening/night).
If Austria is chosen in menu Calculation|Configuration|Tab Country
(Selection box Country) the standard NORM S 5011 /25/ is used as the
default for the calculation of noise from railroads.
12
Manual

Railroad Tab
With this option activated, the height of the ground at the position of the
source, which is used to calculate the attenuation by absorption of the
ground, is assumed to be 0.5 m less than the z-coordinate of the source.
This is a requirement of the standard NORM S 5011.
12.4.11 3
Source Height 0,5 m (for
Ground Attenuation)
If it is not activated, the height of the ground is derived from the topografic
model defined by contour lines, but a minimal distance of 0.5 m between
source and ground is assumed. With this last condition the noise from a
railway in a cut can be calculated correctly without the necessity to designing the bottom of the cut with contour lines. In this case the outer diffracting edges of the cut are modelled by two contour lines and the zcoordinate of the railway track is defined with the correct lower value. The
bottom of the cut is then assumed to be 0.5 m below the source.
12
Manual
12.4.11

Railroad Tab
12
Manual

Aircraft Tab
12.4.12 1
12.4.12 Aircraft Tab

This tab is only relevant, if you have purchased the option FLG (formerly
AzB). See the CadnaA manual on air-traffic noise.
12
Manual
12.4.12

Aircraft Tab
12
Manual

Optimisable Source Tab
12.4.13 1
12.4.13 Optimisable Source Tab
This command is only available if you have purchased the CadnaA

BPL option (Commercial Areas).
12
With the optional feature BPL of Cadna the object optimal source can be
used. This is an area source with an adjustable sound power level per m.
With one or more of these radiating areas and immission points with defined maximum values for the noise levels in the vicinity, the emission of
these sources can be adjusted automatically by an iterative process. This
option is used to find the maximum noise emission of planned industrial
areas that is possible without an inadmissible noise load for residential areas nearby.
This calculation of the maximum permissable emissions can be carried out
with different strategies (according to the governmental requirements in
different countries). The relevant options can be selected in menu Calculation|Configuration|Tab Opt.Src. These options for the Calculation of
Optimisable Sources are
Manual
12.4.13
like IndustrySources
12.4.13
Freefield
(4*pi*r)
12.4.13
Freefield
(2*pi*r)
12.4.13

Optimisable Source Tab
like Industry-Sources: all calculations with optimisable sources use the

settings as they are defined in the menu Calculation|Configuration|Tab
Industry
Freefield (4*pi*r): sound propagation is calculated with only geometrical divergence in a free-field being taken into account. No other damping
effects like air absorption and diffraction are inserted in the calculation
L= Lw - 11 - 20 lg(r).
Freefield (2*pi*r): sound propagation is calculated with only geometrical divergence in a semi-free-field being taken into account. No other
damping effects like air absorption and diffraction are inserted in the calculation
L= Lw - 8 - 20 lg(r).
12
Manual

12.5
12.5 1
For a partial calculation, deactivate existing objects. Various tools, which

may be combined, are available for this purpose. These tools are described
below.
We either include or exclude objects for the calculation
individual objects via the ID in the edit dialog of the object (see Chapter 5.5.3) or
with groups (see Chapter 18.2) or
with variants (see Chapter 18.3)
Exclude Objects
for the
calculation
12.5.0
Deactivated objects are displayed by default with dashed lines. You can
change this in Options|Apperance (see Chapter 13.6).
After clicking this toolbox icon, you insert a closed polygon around the
area for which you want to calculate the level distribution over a grid of receiver points (see Chapter 11.5). You can insert several calculation areas.
With the option Exclude Area in the edit dialog Calculation Area it is
possible to exclude for a calculation another area inside the existing calculation area. Inside this area the receiver point grid is not calculated.
The inserted calculation areas are also registered simultaneously in Tables|Other Objects|Calculation Areas. The order of the records also determine the order of calculation.
For these calculation areas, CadnaA will take into account all objects,
even outside the calculation area, unless they are deactivated.
You may specify several calculation areas. The total area of all defined
calculation areas essentially determines the time required for the calculation. It is therefore advisable, for the first test, to specify a large spacing
between the receiver points under Grid|Properties, in order to watch the
progress of the calculation once it has been started and, if required, to
abort the calculation and restart it with a different spacing between the receiver points.
Manual
Calculation Area
calculating
defined Areas
12.5.0
12
12.5

The level distribution was calculated for this calculation

area with all objects within the limits.
12
The calculation for a calculation area is started via the menu Grid|Calculate Grid (see Chapter 11.5.4). If several calculation areas exist, these are
calculated one after the other.
see also Check Consistency Chapter 11.2.3.
Manual
12.6 1

12.6
The command Calculation|Protocol allows you to save all intermediate

results from the calculation for individual receiver points (not for a grid of
receiver points). You may then generate a formatted printout of this protocol file, or import it, as ASCII format, to another application, such as a
spreadsheet program, for further processing.
But be careful - even with normal projects this tables will be enormously
large. You should deactivate all sources and activate only those that shall
be analysed. (For that: after a calculation in Tables|Partial Level sort your
partial levels ascending to see which noise sources are the loudest.)
12
To this end, activate the check box Write Protocol in the Calculation
Protocol dialog. The default log file is cadnaa.log. If a different file name
shall be used, click the Select button to enter a file name or select an existing file. Activate one of the options Overwrite File or Append to File.
Close the dialog by clicking OK.
Write Protocol
12.6
Compress
Spectra
12.6
Dont forget to deactivate the option Write Protocol afterwards.

If this option is activated, not the entire calculation will be entered for all
frequency bands. An A-level calculation with the accordingly weighted
levels will then be issued for the attenuation values dependent on frequency (e.g. De).
Manual
12.6

see also 12.7 Compact Protocol)

Protocol
12.6.0
When the calculation for defined immission points - no grid point calculation - has been performed via the calculator icon on the icon bar, the specified file will list all intermediate results for each ray from sound source to
immission point.
To view the log file, either click
Edit or
Print on the Calculation Log dialog.
In the first case, the text editor opens the log file as ASCII text. If an error
message appears, the text editor cannot open the file because it is too big.
In this case, run a different word processor, such as MSWord, and open the
file as customary.
If you click the Print button, the Print Protocol dialog opens where you
select the printer to be used and the paper size and enter the desired printing range option. Then click Preview. The formatted protocol appears in
the print preview window.
12
The Preview window displays the individual formatted tables. Depending

on the size of the project, completing the print preview on the screen may
take several minutes, because also for each partial level, all intermediate
results are shown. Therefore, if necessary, specify one immission point as
printing range in the print dialog. The completion of the print preview
cannot be aborted.
The legend of the protocol can also be printed. The file PROT_END.TXT
is copied to the program directory during the installation of CadnaA. This
file generates the key at the end of the protocol. If you prefer having the
legend at the beginning, rename the file to PROT_BEG.TXT.
You can also edit the file to suit your needs. To this end, open it using an
editor (see Chapter 17.2.1 "Template Files").
Manual
Chapter 12.6 Calculation Protocol

Compact Protocol
12.7
*
12.7 1
Compact Protocol
The Compact Protocol works only for industry sources and if it is

calculated according to ISO9613.
Use the Compact Protocol to produce a value for the effective screening
coefficient and the proportion of reflected sound, referred to the overall
source, line by line for each source, even extended sources such as area or
line sources. .
Name
ID
Freq
LxT
LxN
LrT
LrN
Refl
Abar,eff
When calculating, e. g., an area source with screening, the values with and
without a screen are calculated automatically, and the effective screening
coefficient is indicated as the difference Abar,eff.
For the compact protocol, generate a protocol using the function Calculation|Protocol (see Chapter 12.6). Then compress it using File|Export|Export format: Compact protocol and specify a filename. CadnaA does
not automatically add the extension TXT to the filename. Click OK to
confirm and CadnaA will create a tabulated ASCII file allowing further
editing as required.
Manual
12
12.7
Chapter 12.6 Calculation Protocol

Compact Protocol
12
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 13 Graphics
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 13 Graphic
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Contents
13.1 1
Chapter 13 Graphics
13.1 Contents
13.2
The Limits
13.3
Scale
13.4
Coordinate Grid
13.5
Object Snap
13.6
Object Appearance
13.7
Layer
13.8
Fix Objects
13.9
Auxiliary Polygon
13.10 The Section

13.11 Settings for Objects with Frames
13.11.1
13.11.2
13.11.3
13.11.4
Manual
Text Box
Level Box
Symbol
Station Mark
13
13.1
Chapter 13 Graphics
Contents
13.12 The Cross Section

13.13 3D-Wire Model
13.14 3D-Special View
13.15 Paths of 3D Special View
13.16 Video Recording
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Limits
13.2
13.2 1
The Limits
The diagram in the CadnaA main window displays all objects that have
been entered so far, irrespective of whether they were entered via the
mouse, from the keyboard, by digitizing or importing. The graphic representation can be displayed in different scales by zooming (see Chapter
13.3), copying (see Chapter 5.4.5) and printing out (see Chapter 17.2.3).
The graphic objects are synchronized with the corresponding data record
in the object tables. The current data recorded in the table automatically
marks the corresponding graphic object so that you can always see which
object or which polygon point you are working on (see Chapter 15.2).
The limit is a rectangular area to which the graphic representation on the
screen and thus the accessibility of objects is restricted.
It is specified in Options|Limits. You can enter the coordinates of the bottom left and top right corners in the dialog which then opens.
The limits may be edited at any time.
13
The Edit Dialog Limits
Manual
13.2
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Limits
Background of the
Limits
13.2.0
The background of the limits is the area outside the specified limits. The
default color is grey. You can change the background color in Options|Miscellaneous in the usual way by clicking on the color button.
Scroll bars
Calculations can be restricted to shielding objects only (buildings and barriers) within the limits. If, for the currently selected scale, the limits extend
beyond the area represented on the screen, scroll bars will be shown at the
bottom and/or right sides of the window. These serve to position the visible area within the limits. If the limits do not extend beyond the area visible on the screen, the scroll bars will be hidden.
13
13.2.0
Manual
13.2 3
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Limits
Instead of adjusting the sector of the graphic with the scroll bars you can
also drag the graphic representation, with the mouse key depressed, like a
sheet of paper, freely to all sides. With the mouse key depressed on a free
area in the graphic the mouse cursor changes to a mouse pointer looking
like a hand. In this mode you can move the representation accordingly.
Drag Graphic
13.2.0
With the activated option Options|Miscellaneous|Update during Drag

the graphic is either built up continously while moving the representation
or after letting go the mouse key.
Update during
Drag
13.2.0
The coordinates of a point can be seen in the status bar at the bottom right
of the CadnaA main window when the mouse pointer is positioned on that
point. After a grid calculation, the status bar will also display the levels (L)
and the ground height (G) at the point where the mouse pointer is positioned.
Information
in the Status Bar 13.2.0
Sources lying outside the limits are also considered in the calculation. Obstacles that lie outside the limits, however, are not automatically considered. In this case, a warning message will appear.
Objects outside the

limits
13.2.0
Manual
13
13.2
Calc
Limits
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Limits
13.2.0
Ignore
causes the objects outside the limits to be disregarded

in the calculation.
Repeat
results in the limits being modified so as to comprise

all objects.
Cancel
aborts the calculation.
As a further tool for correcting the limits when objects lie outside, you can
select the menu command Options|Limits and click the Calculate button
in the dialog. The limits will then be modified so as to comprise all objects. The dialog will then display the x and y co-ordinates of the updated
limits.
13
Manual
13.3 1
Chapter 13 Graphics
Scale
13.3
Scale
Use the zoom tools to modify the scale of the diagram, either via the editable list box Scale 1: on the icon bar, or via the three global tools in the
toolbox
Zoom +
Zoom -
Zoom to Limits
By clicking the arrow to the right of the box Scale 1: on the icon bar, a list
of predefined scales drops down. You may click the desired scale on that
list. The graphic on the CadnaA main window will be modified accordingly
Combo box
You may also enter an arbitrary scale. Click the edit box and enter the desired value. Then press RETURN.
Manual
Combo Box
"Scale 1:
13.3
13
13.3
Zoom +
Chapter 13 Graphics
Scale
13.3
The "Zoom +" icon on the toolbox allows you to enlarge the graphic representation of a specific area. After clicking this icon, the mouse pointer
drags along a little magnifier icon with a "+" sign.
There are two comfortable ways of enlarging a selected area:
1.
Clicking an object with the LEFT mouse button enlarges the graphic
by a factor of two with each click. The position of the mouse pointer
becomes the new centre of the displayed area.
2.
If you hold the LEFT mouse button down, you can draw a rectangle
around the objects you wish to enlarge. Upon releasing the mouse
button, the area within the rectangle will be enlarged so as to fill the
screen.
The enlarging is undone in reverse order by clicking with the RIGHT

mouse button.
Zoom -
13
13.3
The "Zoom -" icon on the toolbox allows you to reduce the graphic representation of a specific area. After clicking this icon, the mouse pointer
drags along a little magnifier icon with a "-" sign.
Clicking an object with the LEFT mouse button reduces its size by a factor
of two. You may repeat this several times.
The reducing is undone in reverse order by clicking with the RIGHT mouse
button.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Scale
All objects lying outside the visible area will immediately be shown on the
CadnaA window when you click this icon. The scale of the representation
is automatically selected according to the dimensions of the limits and the
size of the CadnaA window.
13.3 3
Zoom to Limits
13.3
If you hold the SHIFT key depressed while clicking the "Zoom to Limits"
icon, CadnaA will recalculate the limits and will also show all objects in
the window. However, the new limits are only temporary (analogous to
the command Options|Limits|Calc), which means the limits specified by
the user are not overwritten.
This feature is convenient where the specified limits cover a wide area
containing relatively few objects, or if the objects all lie within a small
proportion of the limits.
13
Manual
13.3
Chapter 13 Graphics
Scale
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Coordinate Grid
13.4
13.4 1
Coordinate Grid
By selecting the command Coordinate Grid in Options, you can have a

user-defined grid displayed on the screen, serving, e. g., as an aid for positioning and/or reading of coordinates. If this grid is shown on the screen,
it will also be copied and printed.
The grid spacing and the appearance are defined in the dialog Coordinate
Grid.
Activate the option Show Coordinate Grid by clicking the check box.
The grid spacing is given in metres, and the grid size is given as a percentage. With a grid size of 100 % the grid lines are solid.
Example
13
Grid spacing 10 m, Grid size 20 %
Grid spacing 10 m, Grid size 100 %
You can select line style and colour via the Line Style button to match
your preferences. Click this button and select appropriate values.
Manual
13.4
Chapter 13 Graphics
Coordinate Grid
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Snap
13.5
13.5 1
Object Snap
Open the Object Snap dialog via the menu command Options|Object
Snap.
If a line is supposed to connect to an existing line, the new first point will
be positioned precisely on the last point of the existing line, if the distance
of the two points is less than the specified object snap.
Likewise, points sources and receiver points located within that distance in
front of a building side are assigned to that building side. They will then be
positioned at a userdefined distance in front of it. The default distance is
5 cm. The object snap also allows the seamless joining of partial areas to
give one combined area, for example, for the purpose of determining noise
quota for area sources in the process of noise allotment.
13
If the object snap is given in pixels, the snap radius on the screen will be
independent of the selected scale. If it is given in metres, the scale must be
considered. In both cases, checking is facilitated by the effective snap radius being displayed on the monitor box.
Manual
13.5
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Snap
13
Manual
13.6 1
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Appearance
13.6
Object Appearance
Use the menu command Options|Appearance to specify the line widths,

colors and hatchings, if any, of the object types in the graphic representation on the screen. This is valid for all objects of the same type. Only the
auxiliary polygone can be defined directly in its edit dialog in a different
way additionally .
Clicking this command opens the dialog Appearance.
13
The settings refer to the selected object type. Upon clicking the Apply button, the modifications are applied to the objects on the main window while
the dialog remains open. Clicking Cancel results in the dialog being
closed and the modifications being undone. Clicking OK also closes the
dialog, but the modifications are adopted.
Apply
13.6.0
If the Transparent option is active (box is checked), objects of the selected type appear transparent. If this option is inactive (box is not checked),
the objects appear opaque. This is useful when, e. g., a background bitmap
is used in a project. With the Transparent option activated, the bitmap is
still visible through the CadnaA objects on top of it.
Transparent
13.6.0
Manual
13.6
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Appearance
If, despite the Transparent option being active, an object does not appear
transparent, this is not an error in Cadna, but in your graphics driver. (Request a new driver from the manufacturer, if necessary.) You can see
whether the current driver supports the Transparent feature by checking
the Monitor box which gives a preview of the effects of the specified settings.
Via the Color button you can either choose a color directly by activating
the option Direct Input of Color and clicking the colored button or you
enter the color with a formula. In this case activate the option Use Formula for Color.
Color
13
Direct Input
of Color
13.6.0
After clicking the colored button choose the desired color by clicking on it
and confirm with OK.
Define
Color
13.6.0
With the button Define Color you can mix your own color and add it to
the color palette with the corresponding button.
Use Formula
for Color
13.6.0
If you activate the option Use Formula for Color you can display an object colored depended on a certain value of an attribute. The following figure shows area sources colored depended on their area related sound
level (LWST).
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Appearance
13.6 3
You can either enter the usable attribute abbreviations (see Chapter 2.5) directly or select them from the popup list after clicking the arrow button.
13
Popup list to select the attributes
Manual
13.6
Color Palette
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Appearance
13.6.0
In the box Color Palette you can either choose the color palette of the current grid (Grid|Apperance|Option) by selecting the option (current
grid) or you can define a color by entering the value of the color. Therefore select the option (direct, w/o palette). This function is usefull if you
want to emphasize a certain value with a color.
In the following figure the road sections are colored green if their mean
daily traffic density (MDTD) is < 10,000 and red if their MDTD 10,000.
For that mark the Road in Options|Apperance and enter the formula as
shown in the following figure.
13
13.6.0
When clicking the color palette button a Windows-color can be selected.

The RGB-value is written into the input box of the formula.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Appearance
13.6 5
With this possibility you also can display an object transparent (value -1)
or opaque (RGB) depended on a value of an object attribute. This is valid
for all objects which are filled out and/or are bordered with a continuous
line.
If you want display, e.g., a noise map with Iso-dB-Lines and the Iso-dBLines shall only run over buildings which hights are lower as the calculated receiver point grid otherwise not, then mark the object building and
enter the following formula:
In the following figure is one height of a building 4,5 m and the other 6 m.
The receiver point grid is calculated with a height of 5 m. With the above
Manual
13
13.6
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Appearance
entered formula and with the option Grid|Properties|Option|Use Height

of Buildings activated you would get the following presentation.
Iso-dB-Lines drawn over buildings depending on the building height
13
Color.cna
Color Attributes for

aux. Polygons
With the functions Modify Objects or Import via ODBC interface you
can allocate colors to aux. polygons.
Open also the file Color.cna on your program CD (Samples|Graphic)

and have a look on the examples (Options|Appearance Road and
Building). Also deactivate all roads and recalculate the file. You will
see that the building changes its color depending wether the defined
standard value is exceeded or not.
The meaning of the attribute ?_COLOR is:

L_COLOR defines the color of the line and
F_COLOR defines the color of the filling.
?_COLORR is r, the red component (in[0,255])
?_COLORG is g, the green component (in[0,255])
?_COLORB is b, the blue component (in[0,255])
?_COLOR and ?_COLORX is the sum r+256*g+256*256*b. ?_COLOR
is a dezimal value and ?_COLORX a hexadecimal.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Appearance
Deactivated objects, which are invisible displayed (Appearance/Line

resp.Fill) in the graphic, cannot be highlighted anymore. This prevents the objects to be highlighted by mistake.
13.6 7
deactivated objects
13
Manual
13.6
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Appearance
13
Manual
13.7 1
Chapter 13 Graphics
Layer
13.7
Layer
In Options|Layer you can determine the order in which objects are drawn.
With that you can manipulate the object type which will be covered by another one. Therefore, click onto the corresponding object type and drag
this, with the mouse key held down, to the desired order. The object on the
top of the layer list is drawn first and the object on the bottom of the layer
list last.
If you click the button Apply, then all alterations will be applied without
closing the dialog.
Manual
Apply
13
13.7
Chapter 13 Graphics
Layer
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Fix Objects
13.8
13.8 1
Fix Objects
You can protect all objects from inadvertently shifting with the icon Fix
Object in the icon bar. If you click on it, all objects are then frozen. Editing is still possible. Another click on the icon removes the fixing.
Fix Objects
13
Manual
13.8
Chapter 13 Graphics
Fix Objects
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Auxiliary Polygon
13.9
13.9 1
Auxiliary Polygon
The auxiliary polygon is an object without any acoustical meaning. It allows you to generate open or closed polygon lines to enhance the graphical
representation or to do other things. Check or un-check the box Closed
Polygon in the edit dialog as required.
Auxiliary Polygon
You can change the appearance of the polygon either globally

(Options|Appearance) or directly in its edit dialog. Each polygon can
have a different color, line width or line type. For that deactivate the check
box Use global Properties.
Auxiliary polygons are not be adjusted to the digital terrain model. If

this is desired you can convert them to line sources. Switch to the
Options|3D-View so that CadnaA can determine the heights and
convert them back again.
13
Manual
13.9
Chapter 13 Graphics
Auxiliary Polygon
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Section
13.10 The Section
13.10 1
Section
This object has no acoustical meaning. You can use a section
to copy objects inside a section to the clipboard (see Chapter 5.4.5

"Copying Objects" ). For that, the section has to be marked.
to print objects inside a section. For that you have to give it a name (see
Chapter 17.2.3 "Print Graphics").
to modify objects (see Chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects").
to import objects only inside an existing section (see Chapter 6.3.2
"Importing in Section only").
to calculatate in the PCSP mode (see Chapter 18.6 "PCSP - Program
Controlled Segmented Processing").
The margin of the section is neither printed nor copied. You can insert a
text in the field description which can be printed via the Plot-Designer. For
that use the keyword #(Range, Parm1, Parm2) either in a textbox directly
in the file or in a textcell in the Plot-Designer (keyword see Chapter
17.4.25).
13
You can insert sections arbitrarily. These are clearly registered with their
names and coordinates in Tables|Other Objects|Section.
Insert section see Chapter 5.3.1 "Inserting Objects Using the Mouse".
Manual
13.10
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Section
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Settings for Objects with Frames
13.11 1
13.11 Settings for Objects with Frames

With respect to their appearance in the graphics, objects with a frame
around them are edited individually via their edit dialog. Only the object
Symbol is exempted. The following toolbox icons appear in a box:
Text Box
Level Box
Symbol
Station Mark
They are used for explanatory information or to refine the graphic representation and are acoustically irrelevant.
We will use the text box as an example to explain all settings which apply
analogously to all such objects. Special settings are explained in the pertinent sections.
The chapter Inserting Objects (see Chapter 5.3.1 "Inserting Objects Using the Mouse") describes how to insert the individual objects.
Adjust the size and all other settings immediately after inputing the
first object. All further objects of the same type adopt the settings. In
this case insert the following objects only by clicking once on the
desired position.
Any inserted box is listed on the pertinent object table under Tables|Other Objects. You may use this table to change settings for all existing boxes
at once without clicking each individual box. Select the Change Column
command (see Chapter 15.2.5) and define the desired settings.
Manual
13
13.11
Chapter 13 Graphics
Settings for Objects with Frames
13
Manual
Chapter 13.11 Settings for Objects with Frames

Text Box
13.11.1 Text Box
13.11.1 1
Text Box
This tool allows you to insert up to 30,000 characters of text in your graphics.
Open the dialog of the text box to enter text in the corresponding field.
13
The edit dialog of the text box.
Manual
13.11.1
Font
13.11.1

Text Box
As soon as the box is closed, the text you entered appears. The fonts size
and style are specified via the Font button. In the example below, this is
Arial, 10 pt, italic at a scale of 1 : 1,000.
Inthis text boxyoucanenter

upto30,000characters.
For anewlinepressthereturnkey.
Thefont type, its sizeandcolor canalsobe entered.
A text box with frame in CadnaA

Frame
13
13.11.1
If the Frame option is active, the box will hide objects lying under it, as is
the case in the figure above. If this option is inactive, no frame is drawn
around the text, and objects that were hidden before will become visible.
Manual

Text Box
13.11.1 3
Inthis text boxyoucanenter

upto30,000characters.
For anewlinepressthereturnkey.
Thefont type, its sizeandcolor canalsobe entered.
Text box with option frame inactive
If you select the Scale Dimensions option on the edit dialog, the box and
the text are scaled in accordance with the current scale.
If this option is active, it is convenient to switch to the intended printout scale before you enter the text for the first text box. Then specify
the font size you consider appropriate for the scale you chose. You
may then return to the scale which is appropriate for the work on the
screen. The selected setting is adopted, although re-scaled, for all further text boxes, until you edit it again. This makes sure that all text
boxes have the same font size.
Manual
Scale
Dimension
13.11.1
13
13.11.1

Text Box
Otherwise:
Pkt 1 M1
= Pkt 2
M2
Pkt1
= Size of the font in the box at scale M1
M1
= Scale under which the font size was selected
Pkt2
= Font size under different scale M2 of the graphic

representation
M2
= New scale chosen after inserting the text box.
13
If you wish to globally edit the frame sizes, font sizes or fonts of all
boxes after having inserted them, you can do so via the tables by
selecting the Change Column command (see Chapter 15.2.5
"Change Column Content"). It is then not necessary to edit each individual box.
Enter the centre coordinates to precisely position each box.
Frame
coordinates
13.11.1
Frame size
13.11.1
The size of the boxes/frames can be given to millimetre precision by entering width and height.
Manual
13.11.1 5

Text Box
Enter an angle to continuously rotate the box.
13.11.1
Alignment
Text
13.11.1
d.
re
r
te
te
y. en
en
n s. ke e
ca cter urn o b
t ls
u
yo ra re a
x ha he an
bo 0 c s t r c
xt 0 s l o
te 0,0 pre co
is 3
d
th to line an
In up w ze
ne si
s
r a , it
Fo pe
ty
nt
fo
e
Th
Angle
Rotated text box with angle -45
The options on the Alignment dialog serve to align the text in the box.
13
Manual
13.11.1

Text Box
13
Manual

Level Box
13.11.2 Level Box
13.11.2 1
Level Box
After performing a grid calculation, this tool allows you to display the calculated value at any point within the calculated grid (see Chapter 11.5) also the height of the ground at that point.
By default, the calculated value displayed in the box is updated automatically. This corresponds to the Update Automatically option. It means that
each time a calculation is performed or a other evaluation parameter is
choosen from the listbox on the symbol bar, the actual result calculated for
that point is displayed in the level box in the graphics.
Update
automatically/
Hold Value
13.11.2
If Hold Value is activated, the level box will not display the new value after a calculation, but the "old" value is retained. Iso-dB lines and areas of
equal sound level, however, will always be updated.
This is an interesting option when, e. g., calculation variants with and
without noise-control measures are to be represented. In that case, however, the Update Level option would have to be activated for the second level box inserted at that point.
The other options are explained in chapter 13.11.1 Text Box.
13
Manual
13.11.2

Level Box
13
Manual

Symbol
13.11.3 1
13.11.3 Symbol
This tool allows you to insert various symbols in your graphic. You may
specify an angle to position them accordingly.
Symbol
13.11.3
If the check box Maintain Aspect Ratio is active, the symbol will always
be displayed with the original aspect ratio, which means it will not be distorted when the size of the box is edited.
Maintain
Aspect Ratio
13.11.3
For the symbol Caption:Grid you can choose any suffix you like, the default suffix is dB. For that enter the variable SUFFIX and its value into the
INFO-window of the Symbol dialog (e.g. suffix=dB(A)).
Suffix for Symbol Caption:

Grid
13.11.3
If you insert something from the MS-Windows clipboard in a CadnaA

graphics - e.g. a table or image - CadnaA automatically creates a Symbol
object. You can change its settings with regard to its Symbol options.
After clicking the Symbol tool and with a further click in the CadnaA
main window, a dotted frame appears (default setting is "no frame"). Double-clicking on this frame opens the edit dialog where you click the arrow
of the list box and select the appropriate symbol. A preview of the selected
symbol is shown on the monitor.
Symbols inserted in the graphics will simultaneously be registered in the

symbols table on the Tables|Other Objects menu.
Manual
13
13.11.3

Symbol
Symbol dialog
The symbols list also contains, as symbols, the outlines of tennis courts
and soccer fields. You can thus easily label these types of sports facilities
in CadnaA. (A typical soccer field is 110 x 70 m, a tennis court is 24 x
11 m)
13
But you can also create your own symbols. They are stored in the local
symbol library in menu Tables and will be displayed also in the listbox in
the edit dialog of the Symbols for selecting (see Chapter 16.5).
Make your settings for the appearance of the symbols in Options|Appearance (see Chapter 13.6).
see also chapter 5.4.6 Inserting from the Clipboard.
Manual

Station Mark
13.11.4 1
13.11.4 Station Mark

Generate Station see Chapter 5.7.3.
The reference point indicates the coordinates of the station.
Reference point 13.11.4
With the activated option (default) the station marks are automatically and
perpendicularly directed torward the line or the polygon point.
Angle automatic
update
13.11.4
Deactivate this option in the dialog of a station mark to enter a different

angle for the alignment. This angle is kept if the stations would be updated
(Tables|Miscelleanous|Update Station).
Manual
13
13.11.4

Station Mark
13
Manual
13.12 1
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Cross Section
13.12 The Cross Section

If you define a line on the map on the screen by entering its first and last
points, you can view a section along this line in an additional window.
This section shows the height of the terrain as well as the cross sections
through any three-dimensional objects encountered, e. g., buildings and
barriers.
The sources can also be displayed in the cross Section
To insert a line on the map, activate any toolbox icon for a line-like object,
such as an auxiliary polygon, and enter the first and last points. Then
switch to the Edit Mode and click the line with the RIGHT mouse button.
This opens the context menu (see Chapter 5.7) where you select the Cross
Section command.
13
In the cross section all sources cut by the section line are also displayed if
the checkbox Source is activated.
Source
13.12
The path of a ray from the initial to the end point - how it is considered in
the calculation by the program - can be displayed by activating the corresponding option.
Ray
13.12
The z-coordinates in the sectional view are multiplied by the value of the
Z-factor to enlarge arbitrarily and, therefore, to clarify the difference in the
height.
Z-Factor
13.12
Manual
13.12
Copy/Print
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Cross Section
13.12
With the Copy button you can copy the sectional view in the clipboard and
with the Print button you can print it out.
In the cross section you can also calculate a vertical grid (see Chapter
11.5.3 "Vertical Receiver Grid").
Hint to insert a image of a cross section from the clipboard into

CadnaA with the right scale:
The sectional drawing includes in its width a margin of 3 mm for
each side. In case this picture shall again be inserted, according to
scale, in CadnaA via the clipboard, the total 6 mm margin has to be
taken into account in the length of the object Symbol.
Remember: The contents of the clipboard are again inserted in
CadnaA as Symbol (see Chapter 13.11.3 "Symbol").
In the edit dialog of the Symbol take into account the 6 mm margin
as follows:
13
Activate the option Maintain Aspect Ratio
Enter the corresponding length plus the margin in meters
6mm
------------ Scale = Meter
1000
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Wire Model
13.13 1
13.13 3D-Wire Model

The diagram on the screen is a projection of the entire model on the horizontal reference plane, x/y. Points and lines are thus the shadows of all object outlines, assuming that the model is illuminated by a very distant light
source located vertically above it.
Like any individual view, this top view has the disadvantage that objects
which lie one behind the other, as viewed along the direction of projection,
cannot be distinguished. The height of an object, its dimension in the z direction, cannot be seen from the horizontal projection.
In the following representation in CadnaA, the diagram will not enable
you to judge whether the immission point on a building is a single point or
a group of several points.
There are further viewing options under OPTIONS|3-D View which are
helpful here. For the example shown here, the Front View is as follows:
This representation immediately clarifies that there are two points, one
above the other. Position the mouse pointer on one of the points to read its
Manual
13
13.13
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Wire Model
z co-ordinate on the status bar. (Of course, it would also be possible to find
that value on the pertinent table, but this would be too inconvenient if you
were to check the co-ordinates of many receiver points.)
A side view of the same situation would look like this:
Checking the height is most conveniently done using the front view (looking along the y direction towards higher values of the co-ordinates, which
means upwards with respect to the screen) and the side view (looking
along the x direction towards smaller values of the co-ordinate, which
means to the left with respect to the screen).
13
Side View
Front View
The views Isometric, Cavalier and Cabinet are projections at pre-set angles - just check them out.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Wire Model
13.13 3
Under the general Parallel Projection, you may specify arbitrary angles
under which to look at the model. Phi is therefore the angle relative to the
positive x-axis whereas positive means counterclockwise. Theta is, in line
of sight, the elevation angle towards the horizontal plain.
You can change the angles by inputing a value via the keyboard or with the
arrow keys via the numerical key block: the angle Phi with the keys 4 and
6 and Theta with 3 and 9. Just test it.
13
see also chapter 9.7.1 Automatically Optimize Noise Barriers.
Manual
13.13
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Wire Model
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Special View
13.14 1
13.14 3D-Special View

The 3-D special view is a graphic representation with hidden lines, taking
into account the visibility of the individual surfaces. You can move
through this 3D-Scenario on specified ways or move freely by using the
numerical keyblock (see Chapter 13.15).
All acoustically relevant objects are displayed, if they are not deactivated.
Auxiliary polygons are never displayed in the 3-D-special view.
You can also edit objects in this view. Just double-click on the relevant object to open the edit dialog. Changes that will have an effect on the 3DView are updated at once.
13
Model with a road on a bridge and an embankment created with contour lines. The DTM is calculated with triangulation.
Manual
13.14
Ground Model
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Special View
13.14.0
Display Ground height
Also the digital model of terrain (DTM) is displayed automatically without

enforcing a grid calculation by the user if the option Triangulation (see
Chapter 12.4.7 "DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab") is activated. Otherwise
you have to calculate a grid. You do not need a sound source if you only
want to calculate the terrain model.
If a receiver points grid had been calculated the coloured areas of equal
sound levels are shown in the 3-D-special-View for day as well as night. If
this is not desired, just switch to the Ground Height View before you
open the 3-D-special-View.
You can move into the 3D-special view by pressing the RIGHT mouse key
on an object which opens the context menu. Click here on the command
3D-special-View. To do so you have to be in the edit mode before
(CTRL+E). How you move through the 3D-special-View is described in
detail in the chapter 13.15 Paths of 3D Special View.
In the dialog Properties in 3D (Special) the following possible settings
are given:
13
Manual
13.14 3
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Special View
Camera offset: with
Camera offset:
vertical: you can modify the height of your view

horizontal: lateral transfer,
positive value = to the right, negative value = to the left
The entered value will adapt the speed accordingly. However, the real
speed depends on the project size and on the hardware.
Speed (km/h)
With this value you can determine the angle of the visible area to the left
and to the right. There are limitations, however. A default angle of 45
should be appropriate.
Field of
view ()
13.14.0
This setting has been integrated for a possible adjustment to your graphic
card. It defines the visible area of your model from the front (near plane)
to the back (far plane - horizon). Some graphic cards cannot handle the default settings. If this should be the case, adjust the values accordingly. In
both text boxes a value > 0 must be entered.
Distance
Range
13.14.0
Select Resolution factor in the dialog Properties. This factor determines

the resolution of the representation of your 3D-model as metafile for the
transfer to another program or for the printout.
Copy to
clipboard:
13.14.0
13
Attention: The actual resolution of your bitmap depends on the resolution settings of your monitor. If you already have a high resolution
on your monitor and then select the factor 10, copying will take long
time. So start your approach very cautiously.
Copying is executed by clicking on the menu Copy or by pressing the

shortcut ALT+K. However, CadnaA accepts your representation only up
to a maximum resolution of 1024 pixels. In the other case you will see
only a frame with an X. If this should occur, transfer the copy to another
graphics program first and save it in a bitmap format. With CadnaA Option BMP you can open your graphics as usual.
You can record your 3D animation. This maybe useful if the animation is
very slow because you are working on a big project or your computer does
Manual
Video
Frame Rate:
13.14.0
13.14
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Special View
not have a good performance or you just want to give the Wave-file to
your customer to give him an impression of his project. In that case enter a
value for the number of pictures which should be recorded in a second.
The default setting is 15 frames.
Record
Video
13.14.0
Then click to the menu Video after confirming the dialog Properties with
OK . You will be asked for a file name in which the video is saved as AVIfile. After clicking the Save button an option dialog appears for compressing the video. Make your corresponding settings dependent on which video drive (codec compressor and decompressor) you use. After confirming,
the video is recorded.
We recommend that you record the video over night if it takes a long time.
The playback of the video can be made, e.g., with WINDOW MEDIA
PLAYER or a comparable one.
See also see Chapter 13.16
13
Settings in menu Properties in the 3D-special view
Manual
13.14 5
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Special View
You can adjust the brightness and/or the color of the 3D-special view:
Lights
Camera Point: is light from the position of your head.
Camera Point
Camera Parallel: parallel light (as if the sun were shining from behind
you).
Camera Parallel
Sun Parallel: sun shines perpendicular (high noon).
Sun Parallel
Ambient: defuse light
Ambient
13.14.0
13
Manual
13.14
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Special View
13
Manual
13.15 1
Chapter 13 Graphics
Paths of 3D Special View
13.15 Paths of 3D Special View

How do we move through our virtual 3D model?
Initial Situation:
You have a complete CadnaA project with DTM, buildings, roads, streets
and miscellaneous sources.
Function for control

of your model
You would like to check your model in the Special-3D-View. You want to
have a closer look at different sections of your model. These are:
a certain section of a road
several sections of a road
a certain area without roads and, of course,
also the entire project model in the survey, seen from all directions.
For this example we are going to use the file demo1.cna, which you already know and which is on your CD-Rom.
Open the file Demo1.cna (File|Open).
If there is a coloured grid activated in the file, deactivate it in the

menu Grid|Appearance|No grid. A calculated receiver point grid is
also represented in the Special-3D-View - from CadnaA version 3.0
upward - regardless whether this view is activated in the normal
view.
In Calculation|Configuration (see Chapter 12.4.7) we have activated

DTM|Search Contour Lines (Average). You can also activate the option
Triangulation . There is no terrain model in this example, therefore this aspect is insignificant.
Nevertheless we would like to describe some features related to the alternative terrain models in 3D (Special):
You do not have to calculate a grid to see the terrain model in 3D (Special) when Triangulation is activated.
Manual
Demo1.cna
Example
13
13.15
Chapter 13 Graphics
The terrain model will build up faster with Triangulation than with
the option Search Contour Lines.
The coloured representation of the receiver points grid is more coarse

in 3D (Special). You can modify this a little if you select a value >1 in
Grid|Appearance|Raster, Oversampling.
Just try it: Enter the value 5. After that you can activate the option No
grid again. This has no effect on the 3D (Special) view, as you already
know.
Maximize
In our example we click on the Sandrachweg - the street running

straight from the lower left-hand corner to the upper right-hand corner - with the right mouse key at an optional point on the middle axis
and select in the context menu 3D (Special). The 3D (Special) dialog
opens.
The dialog is usually located in the upper left-hand corner by default.

Extend the dialog by dragging or clicking on the symbol Maximize
in the upper right-hand corner (the symbol in the middle!) of the 3D
(Special) dialog.
13
3D-special view, the view from the object road called Sandrachweg
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Press ENTER/RETURN - you are now moving at a speed of 100 km/h

and with a camera position at a height of 1 m from the beginning of
the road until you reach the end or until you press Esc and therefore
stop your move.
Click on the menu Properties in the 3D (Special) dialog.
Enter the value 5 in the textbox Vertical in Camera Offset. Confirm

with OK and press Enter. You are now moving at a height of 5 m
above the street. (Try out different heights.)
Stop the movement with Esc and click on a railway in your project without closing the 3D (Special) dialog - with the right mouse key and select 3D (Special) again. Minimize the 3D(Special) window so
that you are able simultaneously to look at your project in the normal
view. As soon as you click with the right mouse key on another
object and select 3D (Special) while the 3D (Special) dialog is still
open, the dialog will show the view from the current object.
Also try out different speeds in the dialog Properties.
13.15 3
Automatic drive by
pressing the Return-key
Different sights
Enter Speed
If you press Enter or click on the menu Animation, the move will start at
the first point of the relevant object and will end at the last point.
Also have a look at your model from the top of a building. To do this press
RETURN. You will then move "around the roof" at the given speed.
Stop your movement with Esc. If you have stopped the movement, you
can easily continue it with the numeric keys on your keyboard. With
Keys 8 and 2 move forward or backward
Keys 4 and 6 turn left or right
Ctrl + key 4 or 6 sideways left or right
Keys 9 and 3 move upward or downward (maintaining the view on the
object)
Key 5 return to initial position
Key 7 move vertically upward
Key 1 move vertically downward
Manual
13
Numeric keyblock
or arrow keys
13.15
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-dialog must be active
During this process the 3D (Special) dialog must be activated - just click
on it, if necessary. The entered speed in the dialog Properties has no effect
on the key movements. These depend on the performance of your hardware!
Summary
With the numeric keys on your keyboard you can move freely in your virtual model, starting from the initial point. Any object can be your starting
point. You can also move around this object by pressing ENTER. The settings in the dialog Properties are valid then.
Another little exercise -
enter an auxiliary polygon with the following coordinates into your

file Demo1.cna:
Point x 55, y 96, z 100 relative
Point x 122 y 147 z 50 relative
(Remember: activate the icon in the toolbox and just enter the value the polygon point dialog opens!)
After you have entered the auxiliary polygon
)
13
click on it with the RIGHT mouse key and select 3D (Special).

You now look on the demo example from 100 m (first point) down to
50 m (second point). You are looking again from the first to the last
point. If you press Return, you will move along this line.
Play a little with the length of the polygon - shorten or extend it and have a
look at the effect. Select initial and final height or shift the polygon. Leave
the 3D (Special) window open.
Road Sections
In practice it will happen that a road consists of several sections, due to

changing data (not as smooth as in our demo example). So what can you
do to move along this partitioned road (by pressing RETURN) in your virtual model without interruption?
You can insert a continuous auxiliary polygon along the road you want to
move on. If you did this with your mouse, you would probably be stopped
by the virtual police for an alcohol check.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
13.15 5
You better duplicate the road, join the duplicates to form a continuous road
(Connect Lines ) and convert it into an auxiliary polygon afterwards. Just
try it.
Auxiliary polygons are not visible in the Special 3D-View.
If this leads to sharp bends, straighten them out by selecting Spline in the
context menu (right mouse key) and, if necessary, correct the design of the
lines. You would move along this center line anyway - even if you had not
executed Spline - in case the automatic movement around the bend was
impossible at the given speed.
You have now learned that you either can use an arbitrary CadnaA object
from your project to start and to move along in the 3D-special view or you
additionally insert a polygon with a initial and/or final height. Undoubtedly the second possibility has the advantage that you have a defined 3Dpath, which you can re-open again without recovering the view you had
before. Afterall you have still another possibility.
If you move through your project within the 3D-special view and you find
a position which suit you, then you can press the C key on your keyboard
to fix this camera position. CadnaA inserts then a auxiliary polygon automatically and writes in its ID box the expression 3D-CAMERA. This view
can also be displayed in your printout with the Plot-Designer (see Chapter
17.2.4) in a 3D-cell.
Manual
3D-Camera
13.15.0
13
13.15
3D-Camera with a fixed
Viewpoint
13.15.0
Chapter 13 Graphics
By a 3D-drive above a road or by a virtuell flight along a air route

with the command 3D-special from the context menu the point of view is
always equal to the moving direction.
In a lot of cases you may wish to keep an object as your center on which
you are looking during bypassing. You can manage it - insert a short auxiliary polygon with the center as starting point. The auxiliary polygons
first point is decisive. This point is always the point of view from each arbitrary object or polygon if you write in its ID box the expression
3D-CENTER
(pay attention to the capital letters!). During each movement of the automatical animation - caused by pression the RETURN key - is now the initial
point of the auxiliary polygon the focus.
Racingcourse.cna
For an example open the file Racingcourse.cna. The red circle symbolized
the air route. Click on it with the right mouse key and select 3D-special.
The 3D window opens and if you press the return key you will fly along
this circle but always with the focus on the first polygon point of the small
auxiliary polygon 3D-CENTER. This must not be so long as in our example because only the first inserted point is relevant.
see also:
13
Duplicate (see Chapter 5.7.1)

Connect Lines (see Chapter 5.7.8)
Spline (see Chapter 5.7.12)
Quick Start: another example of 3D-Special (see Chapter 4.14.1)
Manual
13.16 1
Chapter 13 Graphics
Video Recording
13.16 Video Recording

The simulation of a Pass-By Level (see Chapter 8.14) and the movement
in the 3D-Special view (see Chapter 13.14) can be recorded in a video.
Such a file, like an AVI-format, can be replayed with a corresponding
Windows Media Player independent of CadnaA.
A powerful tool for presentational purposes.
In order to use the video function, you need on your system the corresponding video driver which is able to decode and encode pictures.
Annotation: For the time being we are using the DivXCodec5. You can
download this decoder for free (http://www.divx.com). Please understand
that we are not responsible for this software and that we cannot support it
either.
For the video recording of a pass-by a lot of receiver point grids are calculated. The number of calculated grids depents on the number of pictures
which are recorded per second (Framerate (fps)).
Recording
a Pass-By as
Video
If you enter, e.g., the value 15 in the field Framerate, for the replay, 15
grids per second are calculated and recorded while the entered speed is
taken into account for the object which is passing by.
13
So, before you select the command Pass-By Level from the context menu
make all your desired settings for a grid calculation in menu Grid and
maybe also in the menu Calculation|Configuration.
Afterwards choose the command Pass-By Level from the context menu of
the corresponding line object and enter the desired setting
Open the example file, which already has been calculated and recorded,
and look at the settings. Also pay attention to the menu Calculation|Configuration.
Manual

Pass-ByVideo.cna
13.16
Chapter 13 Graphics
Video Recording
The Dialog Pass-By Level

Pass-ByVideo.avi
13
Open the corresponding video AVI file with a double-click. Should this
file not open, then the appropriate Windows Media Player is missing. If
this is so then you have to install it from the CD-Rom of your Windows
operating system.
Section
If you choose a section, then this one is the calculation area for the receiver point grid.
follow source
By activating the option follow source the section of the graphics is

moved with the source.
Scale
By activating this option the entered scale is used, in other cases, the current scale in the project.
Manual
13.16 3
Chapter 13 Graphics
Video Recording
By activating this option and entering a value this resolution is used, in the
other case, the settings of your computer screen are used. The bigger the
value, the finer the resolution and the bigger the file.
Resolution (dpi)
After clicking the button Video, the dialog Save as opens. Enter the name
of the file in which the video is saved.
Video
After confirming with Save a further dialog opens in which you can select
the desired video driver.
In the example of the Pass-By the grid calculation and the recording of
the video starts. This created AVI-file can be run with the corresponding
Windows Media Player.
In the 3D-Special View the recording of the video starts after clicking on
the menu Video and entering a file name as described in the preceding paragraph on the pre-defined path.
Video recording in the

3D-Special View
Individual movements made by the user with the arrow keys are not recorded.
See also see Chapter 13.14
13
Manual
13.16
Chapter 13 Graphics
Video Recording
13
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 14 Pictures
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 14 Pictures
14
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Contents
14.1 1
Chapter 14 Pictures
*
The Option BMP is an additional modul for CadnaA and only runs with the basic version.
The following described functions are accessible only if the option BMP has been purchased
14.1 Contents
14.2
Insert Bitmaps
14.2.1
Bitmap Size and Position
14.3
Import Bitmap
14.3.1
Delete Bitmap
14.4
Web-Bitmaps
14
Manual
14.1
Chapter 14 Pictures
Contents
14
Manual
14.2 1
Chapter 14 Pictures
Insert Bitmaps
14.2
*
Insert Bitmaps
The option BMP is only available if you have purchased it.
There are two types of computer graphics: Bitmaps and Vektor graphics. In
CadnaA we can open or import (see Chapter 14.3 "Import Bitmap") dif-
ferent formats of Bitmaps.

Bitmaps use a color grid (pixel) for the display of images. Each pixel is assigned a certain position and a color value. With bit-mapped images pixels
are worked on, not objects or figures.
Bitmaps
14.2
Vector graphics
14.2
Bitmaps are the current electronic medium for half tone images as, e.g.,
photos or digital drawings because the shades and colors can be reproduced in fine gradations. Bitmaps are resolution dependent, that means
they have a solid number of pixels. Scaling on the screen or during print
out with a resolution which is too low can therefore result in the losing of
details or in irregularities in appearance.
Vector graphics contain lines and curves which are defined by mathematical objects - so-called vectors. Vectors describe images on the basis of
their geometric properties. This type of graphics is not used in CadnaA.
The bitmap option is frequently used to insert scanned maps such as surveyors plan, land register or catastral plan. They serve as a background
pattern for inputing noise sources, receiver points and other objects with
acoustical meaning. But also photos, e.g., digital pictures of machines,
buildings or others which have the JPEG format. The number of pictures
you can insert depends, of course, on your hardware, on the memory capacity of your equipment and on the resolution (DPI) of your image files.
CadnaA does not save the bitmaps in the cna-file but refers to the bitmap
files with their file name and pathes. If you now shift your project cna-file
and the bitmap into a different folder on your hard drive, CadnaA will find
the bitmap if the cna-file and the bitmaps file are in the same folder.
We have several different possibilities for inserting bitmaps in our project

file:
Manual
14
14.2
Chapter 14 Pictures
Insert Bitmaps
via the table (Tables|Other Objects|Bitmap)

with the toolbox icon and
by importation via File|Import (see Chapter 14.3 "Import Bitmap") or
ODBC interface (see Chapter 6.5). This procedure is advantageous if a
lot of bitmaps shall be included in one CadnaA-file and if a list exist
(e.g. MS-Excel file) which contains all file name of the bitmaps and
their corner coordinates. In that case all bitmaps will be imported and
placed in the CadnaA graphics automatically.
Pull up an arbitrary sized frame with the icon from the toolbox . If no bitmap has been inserted yet, a frame with a bitmap sign appears.
An empty bitmap frame - a bitmap file has not been selected yet.
If you have already defined a bitmap and if you insert another frame, the
new frame will also contain the last selected bitmap file.
14
If you click with the RIGHT mouse key on the margin of the frame the edit
dialog will open in which you can select the desired bitmap file.
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Insert Bitmaps
14.2 3
After clicking the folder icon on the right side of the File box, select the
bitmap file in the usual manner.
As an alternative you can also insert a bitmap file via Table|Other Objects|Bitmap. In this tabel all inserted bitmaps are clearly registered.
In the box Name enter a more meaningful name than the file name if necessary. This name is displayed in the first column of the table.
14
Manual
14.2
Chapter 14 Pictures
Insert Bitmaps
14
Manual
14.2.1 1
Chapter 14.2 Insert Bitmaps

14.2.1 Bitmap Size and Position

To avoid a distorted representation of the background image on the
CadnaA main window, you must specify its dimensions and its intended
position within the main window or the limits.
You may do so by entering
1.
the co-ordinates of the bottom left and top right corners, or
2.
the resolution of the map in dots per inch (DPI) and the scale, or
3.
reference points, the coordinates of which are known (calibration).
Coordinates
14.2.1
If the Resolution option is activated, you must know the resolution in DPI
(e. g. 150, 200, 400 etc.) used when the map was scanned and the scale of
the map. This method is particularly convenient if only the relative positions of objects matter, and their absolute coordinates are irrelevant.
Resolution
14.2.1
The Calibrate Bitmap button opens a dialog which allows you to enter up
to four points with known coordinates on the map. As soon as you have
entered these points and confirmed by clicking OK, CadnaA will load the
bitmap and prompt you to click the reference points on the bitmap which is
displayed on the screen. CadnaA will then determine the correct coordinates for the representation. Under this mode, you may use the zoom magnifiers to enlarge the reference point to be clicked.
Calibrate
Bitmap
14.2.1
You should always select this method when more than one bitmap file is to
be inserted because in this case the absolute position of the bitmaps is decisive for a correct representation. In practice bitmaps will overlap, particularly near the edges because the scanning causes discontinuities not
present in the original map.
When all reference points have been identified, you can save this calibrated bitmap under a different name. You need not do so, however. It is con-
Manual
14
14.2.1

venient, when the calibrated bitmap is large, up to several Megabytes, and,

moreover, has been rotated because of the calibration. CadnaA calculates
the position of the bitmap, which may take several minutes. Saving the bitmap in the right position means not having to re-calculate it when the file
is opened again.
Save the entered coordinates under a name so you can reload them by just
selecting that name.
14
Bitmap file as background information for input of acoustically relevant objects.
Manual

14.2.1 3
Insert the objects on the map which is now displayed on the main window.
The background information of the scanned maps allows

you to quickly insert and calculate the acoustically relevant objects in CADNAA. A representative diagram of the
calculation results can be printed.
Manual
14
14.2.1

Bitmap fix
14.2.1
As long as the option in the dialog Bitmap|Fix Bitmap is activated, size

and position of the bitmap cannot be modified.
Show Bitmap
14.2.1
The bitmap icon on the icon bar allows you to show or hide bitmaps by
activating or deactivating the Show Bitmap check box.
see also chapter 10.4 The Objects Geometry, Reference Points
14
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Import Bitmap
14.3
*
14.3 1
Import Bitmap
The import of bitmaps only works properly if the Option Bitmap

has been purchased.
The bitmap format used for File|Import enables you to automatically

place bitmap files (e.g., tif files) in bitmap frames, provided that the corner
coordinates of the bitmap are saved in the equally named additional file
with the extension TFW and both files are in the same directory (e.g., bitmap file named 34139ca2.tif and coordinate information file named
34139ca2.tfw).
You can select the files to be imported by multiple choice . It is of no significance whether you mark the TFW file or not - CadnaA will find the
corresponding information and will automatically load all files one after
another.
You can also import other bitmap files with the same method. In this case
you do not have to create a bitmap frame from the toolbox. CadnaA will
automatically create this frame in the lower left corner of your limits, giving it a size of 10 x 10 m. You can adjust this frame accordingly in the edit
dialog as usual.
Following Bitmap formats can be imported for the time being (modifications subject to change at any time):
CALS Raster, DCX, GEM Image (IMG), GIFF, IOCA (ICA), JFIF,
JPEG, JTIF, LEAD CMP, Macintosh Pict (PCT Macintosh QuickDraw),
MacPaint (MAC), Microsoft Paint (MSP), MPT (Multipage TIFF), OS/2
Bitmap, PCD (Kodak PhotoCD Files), PCX, Photoshop 3.0 (PSD), PNG
(Portable Network Graphics), PostScript Raster (Encapsulated PostScript),
SUN Raster (RAS), TIFF, TIFF CCITT (also Group 3 and 4), TIFF
(LZW), Truevision TGA (TARGA), Windows Bitmap (BMP), Windows
Metafile (WMF), WinFax Group 3, WinFax Group 4, WordPerfect (WPG
WordPerfect raster files) and some others. Just check formats of your own.
Manual
14
14.3
Chapter 14 Pictures
Import Bitmap
14
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Delete Bitmap
14.3.1 1
14.3.1 Delete Bitmap

Like any other object, you can delete a bitmap using the DEL key. This will
only remove the bitmap from the display of your project on the screen, and
the reference to the file from the objects table, but it will not delete the file
from your disk. The Edit|Undo command allows you to restore the display.
14
Manual
14.3.1
Chapter 14 Pictures
Delete Bitmap
14
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Web-Bitmaps
14.4
14.4 1
Web-Bitmaps
With the export format Web-Bitmaps in File|Export you can export your
CadnaA project file as internet-suitable Bitmap(s). This means that these
files can be saved with different scales and with a definable resolution for
quick loading via the internet.
This pre-work makes it possible to place, e.g., your projects on your
Homepage to provide your customers or market with information about
your work. The interested person can then have a look at representations of
your project with different resolution by zooming in or out.
14
Bitmaps saved with different scales.
Before you execute the export command draw a Section (see Chapter
13.10) over the area in your project file which you want to save as WebBitmap and enter a name for this section.
Manual
14.4
File Name
Chapter 14 Pictures
Web-Bitmaps
14.4.0
After executing the export command, enter a file name as base name to be
saved under and the corresponding options by clicking the button Option.
CadnaA then saves the necessary number of bitmaps, dependent on the
chosen options, automatically with the equivalent extensions in alphabetical order. For the following example three files with different scales have
been saved.
Webtest_demo1_a.bmp is the file with the largest scale (whereas
Webtest_demo1 was the original file name and a is the extension),
Webtest_demo1_b.bmp is the file name for the scale with the magnification step 2 and Webtest_demo1_c.bmp is the file name for the magnification step 3 etc.
14
Export Options for Web-Bitmaps
Section
14.4.0
Select the desired section by clicking on the section name in the list.
Largest
Scale
14.4.0
Enter the largest scale you want to display (if you are not sure, check in
CadnaA which scale could be useful).
Manual
14.4 3
Chapter 14 Pictures
Web-Bitmaps
Enter the number of desired magnification steps. If you enter the value 3
then two further diagrams are created magnified by the factor 2 with the
start value entered in the field Largest Scale (in the above example diagrams with 1:5000, 1:2500 and 1:1250).
Magnification
Steps
14.4.0
Enter the desired resolution in dpi. But remember - the higher the resolution the longer the loading time of the bitmaps. 100 dpi are normaly sufficient. The bitmaps are created with the resolution of the computer screen if
you dont enter a resolution on your own. This resolution is normaly sufficient, also.
Resolution
14.4.0
You can divide your project file if it is too big. In that case activate the option Generate Tiles. CadnaA then divides the file automatically in the defined size (Width and Hight of Tiles) and generates for each section or
tiles the corresponding number of bitmaps with the settings entered under
Option. Sections without any objects are not created if the check box Suppress empty Tiles is activated.
Generate
Tiles
14.4.0
CadnaA cannot supply the program for the handling of the bitmaps in the
internet but each Web-Programer can process the bitmaps. If you are interested in this you can also get in touch with us of course. You will find an
example with http://www.noiseRus.com.
14
Manual
14.4
Chapter 14 Pictures
Web-Bitmaps
14
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 15 Tables
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 15 Tables
15
Manual
Chapter 15 The Tables

Contents
15.1 1
15.1 Contents
15.2
The Tables
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
15.2.4
15.2.5
15.2.6
15.2.7
The Tables Button Bar

Inserting a Row
Editing Table Cells
Sorting Columns
Change Column Content
Adjusting the Column Width
15.3
The Result Table
15.3.1
15.3.2
15.3.3
15.3.4
Edit Result Table

Column Headings
Column Contents
Display Column Content
15
Manual
15.1

Contents
15
Manual

The Tables
15.2
15.2 1
The Tables
All objects inserted via the graphics will automatically be adopted as data
records in the pertinent table of objects and vice versa. An object entered
by giving its data in the table of objects will appear as a graphic object in
the CadnaA main window. The tables of objects are all compiled under the
pertinent category term on the Tables menu.
A check mark in front of an item on the Tables menu indicates that data
records of that type are available.
As you know, the tool icons (see Chapter 4.8) from the toolbox can be activated via shortcuts. The edit mode, e.g., with CTRL+E, the street icon
with CTRL+S (see also online help keyword Shortcut).
You can also open the corresponding table of objects with the same character keys, but without the CTRL key and you can close it again with the
ESC key. You press, e.g., the key s that opens the road table, key b for the
railway table and so on. By doing so the first data record is activated automatically.
Manual
Open Tables with

Shortcuts
15
15.2
Synchronisation

The Tables
15.2
Data records may be inserted, edited, copied in and deleted from the tables. When a data record is deleted from a table, the corresponding graphical object on the main window is deleted as well.
Editing
Data records
Delete
Data record
The tables and the graphics are synchronised. When a record in a table is
selected, the corresponding graphic object on the main window is as well.
Even an individual polygon point, edited on a Geometry dialog, will be
flashing so you always know what you are working on.
15.2.0
For deleting a data record from the table you can use either the DEL-key or
the command Delete from the context menu.
You can bring back a deleted data record with the command Edit|Undo.
15
Manual
15.2.1 1
Chapter 15.2 The Tables

15.2.1 The Tables Button Bar

The button bar shown in the figure below appears on all object tables accessed via the Table menu.
Click this button to close the dialog and to adopt any selected value or data
record or to apply changes.
Close
15.2.1
A selected data record, at the same time, selects the corresponding graphic
object. If the graphic object is outside the area visible on the screen, clicking this button will make it visible.
Synchronize
Graphics
15.2.1
Pressing the button Copy copies the entire table to the clipboard (alternatively, press CTRL+C). The table can then be pasted in other Windows applications or you can paste one individual data record in a table of the
same object type in CadnaA (see Chapter 15.2.7).
Copy
15.2.1
As usual the tables can be printed directly by clicking the button Print.
The keywords for user-defined printout or export of the object tables can
be found in the online help with the keyword or in chapter 15.2 The Tables of this manual.
Print
15.2.1
This button allows you to select the font and the character size for screen
presentation and printout as usual.
Font
Manual
15
15.2.1

15
Manual

Inserting a Row
15.2.2 1
15.2.2 Inserting a Row

If no object has been inserted then you can only see the table head without
any rows. To create a new data record you have to insert a new line either
via the context menu or (see Chapter 5.7)

by pressing the INS key
To insert a row via the table context menu, just press the RIGHT mouse key
on the row where you want to insert a line before or after the current one.
If the table is empty, just click on the RIGHT mouse key below the table
head and the context menu opens.
15
Then select the appropriate command Insert before/after by clicking it

with the LEFT mouse button. A new, blank row is now available for the input of data.
Another alternative is to just press the INS key and the new row will then
be inserted before the current one.
Manual
15.2.2

Inserting a Row
15
Manual
15.2.3 1

Editing Table Cells
15.2.3 Editing Table Cells

The table cell can be edited. If its value depends on that of another cell, it
will immediately be updated when a parameter in the other cell is edited.
You can also modify the MDTD in the roads table. This results in an immediate updating of the Lme for day-time, and, if necessary, for night-time.
Example
If you enter the Lme directly, the data used before to calculate it will not be
shown in the table any more.
Hints regarding Editing:
Clicking a table row will not result in the entire row, but only an individual cell being selected (highlighted). This becomes the active cell
which you can edit. The corresponding graphical object will also be
selected.
The up and down arrow keys ( ) serve to navigate from one row to
the next, and the left and right arrow keys ( ) do the same for the
cells of a row.
You can edit the selected cell by entering the desired value or text. A
vertical-bar cursor (|) will appear in that cell. Any existing value will
be overwritten (overwriting mode). Please also note how to enter decimals (see Chapter 5.5.4).
There are two editing modes: Overwrite (default) and Insert. Under
the overwriting mode, any existing text is overwritten (deleted completely). Under the insertion mode you can modify the text, add to it, or
delete it using the BACKSPACE and DEL keys.
If you wish to add to the existing text, or correct it, press the F2 key
(insertion mode). Any text in the cell will be retained. You can move
the vertical-bar cursor backwards and forwards across the text using
the left and right arrow keys ( ).
Manual
15
15.2.3

Editing Table Cells
To terminate editing, in the overwriting mode, either

-
press the left or right arrow key ( ): The cursor moves on to

the next cell belonging to the same data record , or
press the up or down arrow key ( ), or RETURN: The cursor
moves on to the next row but stays in the same column.
Under the insertion mode, just press RETURN to stop editing. This will
also result in the cursor moving on to the next row following the one
just edited it will remain in the same table column.
ESC exits the edit mode and restores the previous value.
Pressing RETURN when not in the edit mode results in the Tables dialog
being closed (just like clicking OK).
Double-clicking a table cell opens the pertinent edit dialog of the

object, as customary.
15
Manual

Sorting Columns
15.2.4 1
15.2.4 Sorting Columns

By default, CadnaA lists all inserted objects in the sequence in which they
were entered. When the Sort command on the context menu is clicked, the
selected table column is sorted in numerical or alphabetical order, either
ascending or descending, depending on which option buttons were activated in the dialog:
Click the column to be sorted with the RIGHT mouse button, select the
Sort command from the context menu, and activate the appropriate options in the dialog.
The tables will then be sorted as specified and will also be printed in that
order. Also the graphic objects will be drawn according to their order in
the table.
You also can shift individual rows within the table. For that, hold down the
mouse pointer on that row you want to shift and move the mouse pointer to
the desired position and release the mouse key.
Manual
Shift Rows
15.2.4
15
15.2.4

Sorting Columns
15
Manual
15.2.5 1

15.2.5 Change Column Content

CadnaA offers a comfortable tool for the editing of specified ranges of tables on the basis of the current value.
This can be either a conversion of numerical values (arithmetics) or a

modification (substitution) of character strings.
For the examples below, you should open a table for example the table of
point sources of a CadnaA project, or just enter a few points and open
the pertinent table of object.
Click the column to be edited using the RIGHT mouse button. On the context menu, select Change Column.
In the dialog which then opens, you may restrict the modification to a
Range of rows up to or starting from a row which you specify by clicking
it. In the default setting, all elements of the selected column will be modified.
Range of
Rows
15.2.5
Arithmetic
15.2.5
If the column contains numerical values, both arithmetic and string conversion are possible. In all other cases, only string conversion is possible.
The current numerical value may be replaced by a different constant value,
or by one that is computed from the current value.
+, -, /, * are operators used as customary. x stands for the current value.
++ and -- stand for level addition and subtraction.
15
see Chapter 2.6 Examples of Formulas and Operators

This operation may be required if a data record, e. g., the CadnaA project
for an enterprise, is to be embedded in larger limits, requiring modification
of the ID code.
Replace
String
Specify a search string in the box Search For: only strings matching this
string will be converted.
Search for
Manual
15.2.5
15.2.5

The characters * (asterix: arbitrary number of arbitrary characters) and ?

(questionsmark: one arbitrary character) act as wildcards used as customary. If sections of a string are to be re-used in the conversion, these are enclosed in brackets.
Replace with
In the box Replace with: you may combine arbitrary character strings
with the string sections marked by brackets in the search string. \1 . . . \n is
used as a symbol for these marked string sections (see Chapter 2.8).
This flexible logic allows you to perform practically any operation required to convert strings.
Automatic Numbering
in Tables
15.2.5
With the rhombus # you can number automatically the column in your tables. One rhombus # results in a one digit value from 1 to 9, two rhombuses ## result in a two digit value from 01 to 99, three rhombuses result in a
three digit value from 001 to 999 and so on. After the value 9 CadnaA
starts with 0 again.
Enter the rhombus in the field replace with.
Example
How can you find out how many buildings, barriers, point sources, etc. are
in the project without having to count them individually?
Here is the answer:
Demo1.cna
Open a file, and take a look at the pertinent table of object (e.g., have
a look at the building table in the file DEMO1.CNA).
15
Manual

15.2.5 3
Existing tabel with building - initial situation
Position the mouse pointer on the column Name.
Click it using the RIGHT mouse button and select Change Column
on the context menu.
Specify the settings as shown in the figure below.

15
Manual
15.2.5

Automatic numbering with the function Change Column
The figure shows automatic numbering using two digits and the character
string \1 means that the current value is to be retained.
15
Result of the automatic numbering
Manual

15.2.5 5
This command thus allows us to quickly determine the number of objects.

(How many buildings are there in Demo1.cna? - Find out.)
If you wish to remove the numbering, use Change Column again, and enter what is shown below.
How to remove the automatic numbering from the above example
With this command only the numbering at the beginning of the line is deleted (see also chapter 2.8 Strings and Operators).
15
Manual
15.2.5

15
Manual

15.2.6 1
15.2.6 Adjusting the Column Width

The column widths of all tables can be adjusted
1.
To this end, position the mouse pointer on the table header of the line
separating the columns which you want to adjust. The mouse pointer
turns into a two-headed arrow. Hold the LEFT mouse button down
and move the mouse in the desired direction. Then release the mouse
button.
individually
2.
Just double-click on the separating line of the table header. The

columns will be adjusted so, that all characters of each column are
visible.
automatically to the
longest columns
15.2.6
3.
For that, hold the SHIFT key down while double-clicking on the dividing line of the table header. CadnaA tries to fit all columns into the
tables window. You can undo this with another double-click without
pressing the Shift key.
automatically to fit table

into window
15.2.6
15.2.6
When closing the table, the table columns will have their default width
again.
15
Manual
15.2.6

15
Manual

15.2.7 1
15.2.7 Copying and Pasting Data Records

A data record may be copied to the clipboard so as to be pasted in an objects table of the same type.
To do so
first, click any cell of the record to be copied,
then click the Copy button on the Tables dialog (or press CTRL+C),
insert a new row in the table (context menu Insert before/after), and
finally, press CTRL+V to paste the data record that was saved to the
clipboard.
The copied data record can only be pasted in a table of the same object
type. Therefore, the data record of, e. g., an area source, cannot be pasted
in a point sources table.
15
Manual
15.2.7

15
Manual

The Result Table
15.3
15.3 1
The Result Table
CadnaA contains an efficient generator of tables which can represent all

results for defined receiver points in any desired way. If you want to represent the evaluation of projects in the customary form of a table, you have
to generate a template for this table. Afterwards this template will only
have to be referred to in order to represent calculation results in a standardized way.
Therefore, save the default table with a different name and adjust it as desired. In each project in which you open this template table the results will
be displayed in the created shape. The template table has the extension
CNT.
The Result tables can be printed out directly with the button Print or the
layout can be seen in the print preview.
Editing Result table see Chapter 15.3.1
The tables button bar see Chapter 15.2.1
15
Manual
15.3

The Result Table
15
Manual
15.3.1 1
Chapter 15.3 The Result Table

Edit Result Table
15.3.1 Edit Result Table

(Menu Tables|Result Table|Button Edit)
You may individually create column headers, numbers of columns and
contents. Instead of defining several result tables, define only one with all
columns you may require and switch them off with one mouse click if you
don't need them.
Also, in invisible columns you may save interim results for further calculations and finally display the results in another visible column.
Edit Dialog Result Table
15
The options in the dialog of the result table are some sort of filters where
you can determine which receiver points or parameters are to be displayed.
Enter a string corresponding to the ID (see Chapter 5.5.3) of a line-shaped
source (e.g., road or railway track) if you want to issue, e.g., station, distance or height of a receiver point in relation to this source in the result table. This presupposes that you have defined corresponding columns for
Manual
Axis for
Station
15.3.1
15.3.1

Edit Result Table
these values in the result table and that you have entered the corresponding
predefined name (e.g. axis: station) as Column Content.
Receiver from
Building Noise
Maps
15.3.1
Select, by clicking in the corresponding list box, the class of receiver

points of the calculated noise map of a building which you want to have
represented in the table (e.g., All, maximum Level, 1.Floor etc.).
Noise map of buildings see Chapter 9.3.6.
Only exceeding BNMImmpoints

15.3.1
With this option activated, only those receiver points exceeding maximum
values are represented.
Inserting a
Column
Create a new column by choosing either the Insert before/after command

from the context menu or by pressing the INS key.
15.3.1
For editing, double-click the corresponding row or choose the edit command from the context menu. With that, the Table Column dialog opens
to define headings and contents of the columns.
15
Manual
15.3.2 1

Column Headings
15.3.2 Column Headings

You may define three headings at most for each column in the result table.
If you want a header to jump-over other columns you have to connect
them with the expression PREV.
Tables|Result Table|Edit
Let us say you have created two columns in the result table to identify a receiver point. The first column should display the name of the receiver
point with the heading "Name". The second column should display the ID
with the heading "ID". But over both columns together should be displayed the heading "Receiver Point".
Example
In the Table Column dialog for the first column insert in Line 1 of the
box: "Receiver Point", in Line 2: "Name". Turn to the next column by
clicking the right arrow button and enter in Line1 of the second column: :
PREV and in Line 2: "ID"..
15
In the above example is the heading Receiver point written over both columns with the expression PREV
Manual
15.3.2

Column Headings
Description
15.3.2
Description is for internal information and only shown on the screen in

the dailog Result Table in the status bar on the lower left-hand side if the
cursor is positioned in the corresponding column.
Field Column
15.3.2
see Chapter 15.3.3 "Column Contents"
Precision
15.3.2
Enter the number of digits after the decimal sign. By value 1 levels are
shown, e.g., 49,5 dB and by 2, e.g., 49,51 dB.
Enter the value by which the last digit shall be rounded up.
Rounding up
by the
last digit
15.3.2
If you enter, e.g., 0.1, the value 49.1 will be rounded up to 50.0, the value
49.11 will be rounded up to 49.20 a.s.o.
Alignment
15.3.2
The alignment of the text within the frame or the table column can be selected by clicking the respective option. The preview thumbnail will show
the selected alignment.
Display
(the content of the
columns)
15.3.2
see Chapter 15.3.4 "Display Column Content"
15
Manual

Column Contents
15.3.3 1
15.3.3 Column Contents

You define the column content in the list box Column. You may do so by
choosing the desired value from the list box with pre-defined variables or
by editing an expression. In the last case you have to choose (user defined) from the list box. With that, the box expression will be activated and
you may enter your own expression consisting of strings and operators.
Selecting (user defined) the following strings can be used::
Expression
LP1 to LP4
(user defined)
15.3.3
Information
at the receiver point calculated evaluation parameter 1 to 4
LP1 to LP4 refer to the current variant
LP1V<n> to
LP4V<n>
at the receiver point calculated evaluation parameter 1 to 4 for variant no

<n> refers to the variant corresponding to the
number (LP1V03 means the level of the variant
03 for the evaluation parameter 1)
LP1_<n> bis
LP4_<n>
Manual
Just as above with regard to a corresponding band

of a spectrum with the number after the underscore
example:
15
15.3.3

Column Contents
LP1V03_02
The calculated frequency level at 125 Hz of the

evaluation parameter 1 for the variant 03 at the
receiver point.
The numbering of the frequency starts at 00 for
31.5 Hz and is continously counted for each duplication of Hz-frequency: 00 = 31.3 / 01 = 63 / 02
= 125 / 03 = 250 / 04 = 500 etc. (see result table
template Imm_Spek.cnt on your CD-Rom as example)
15
Examples for
Expressions and
Formulas
GW1 bis GW4
Maximum Value: defined for evaluation parameter 1 to 4

(could be the maximum value of land use or the
standard level at the receiver point depending on
which parameter is used)
SP<n>
Column of the result table

<n> consecutive number of the column, e.g.,
SP4 (is the 4. column). To count the column number use either the dialog Edit Result Column or
the dialog Table column and not the Result table itself because the invisible columns are counted as well.
SIGMAD,
SIGMAE,
SIGMAN
The resulting uncertainty sigma dB (see Chapter

12.4.3) of calculated sound pressure levels can be
displayed for the receiver points for Day/Evening/Night.
LP1V01-GW1
This expression subtracts from the calculated evaluation parameter 1 of
the variant01 the maximum value. The result is displayed in the column.
You can also enter complex Boolean Formulas, like, e.g.,
Manual
15.3.3 3

Column Contents
(SP15>GW1)*(SP19>0.05)*((SP19>2.05)+(SP15>69.05))
With this formula you can define conditions, which - if they are fulfilled indicate, e.g., a right to noise protection measures in the result table. If the
result is 0, the condition is not fulfilled, if the result is >0, the condition is
fulfilled (Yes=1; No=0)
For the condition to be true in the given example, the first two brackets
must fulfill the condition, but only one of the last two brackets must fulfill
the condition.
You may display information from the info-box in the edit dialog of the receiver point. Enter the same string in the expression-box as you did in the
info-box. But first you must choose String variable from the column listbox.
String
Variable
15.3.3
Example:
15.3.3
In the Memo-box of the receiver point you may write an arbitrary string
followed by an equals sign. All information written after the equals sign is
reported in the result table.
The Info-box of the receiver point contains the string: FLRNR=1234/8
15
In the dialog of the Result Table choose (String variable) from the listbox and enter FLRNR in the expression/variable box.
1234/8 will be displayed as the result.
Manual
15.3.3
DefaultString variable

Column Contents
Default String variable only for the Result Table - capital letters are
mandatory:
STW
Displays the floors of the Building Noise Map
FASSNR
Facade numbering - in the Building Noise Map the

level icons are internally numbered continously, starting with the first polygon point of the buildings side
according to the direction in which the building was
inserted. These so-called facade numbers can also be
displayed in the Result Table.
Example: Because of the facade partitioning (Options|Building noise map) 12 level icons for all building
facades come out side by side. Therefore, the icons
are numbered internally with the facade numbers 1, 2,
3 etc. up to 12. If each level icon has 5 floors, then it
will be these floors which are assigned to the corresponding facade number.
DIR
Degree No. 0-360 with 0 symbolized North direction
HIRI
Direction with one letter (N-North, O-East, S-South,

W-West)
HIRI2
Direction with two letters if necessary (e.g. NWNorth-West, SO-South-East)
15
Manual
15.3.4 1

15.3.4 Display Column Content

After you have defined the column content you may also affect the display
of the results by using one of the options Display.
Options
always without precondition - the column content is displayed as defined

in any case.
always
never - column is invisible - neither the column nor the column content is
visible but the value is available. You may calculate with it further on by
refering to the column number in order to display the final result in another
column.
never (Column is
invisible)
15.3.4
You can refer to a column with SP<n>. If you want to refer, e.g., to the
fourth column of the table then you have to write SP4 (Kapitel 15.3.3
Column Contents).
only if: The display is tied on a precondition (only if - then - else)
only if
only if:
x>0
Example:
then:
15.3.4
The result is only visible if the value is bigger than zero, if not, a dash is
shown. Instead you may also enter:
only if:
x>0
then (activate):
yes
else:
no
In this case if the value is bigger then zero the column content would be
"yes" otherwise "no".
Manual
15
15.3.4

15
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 16 Libraries
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
16
Manual
Contents
16.1 1
16.1 Contents
16.2
The local and global Libraries
16.3
Spectra
16.3.1
16.3.2
16.3.3
16.3.4
16.3.5
16.3.6
Entering and Editing Frequency Spectra

Generation of frequency spectra for sound power and indoor levels
Sound Level Spectra
Spectra of Sound Reduction Index
Absorption Coefficient Spectra
Output of Spectra
16.4
Libraries Manager
16.5
Symbol Library
16.6
Text Blocks
16
Manual
16.1
Contents
16
Manual
16.2
16.2 1
Global libraries are available for all project files, whereas local libraries
apply only to the project in process. They are accessable via the Tables
menu.
You can insert user-defined spectra in all libraries via the keyboard or by
importation. The importation can happen via the library manager (see
Chapter 16.4) provided that these are CadnaA files. Spectra from thirdparty files can be imported in the local library via the ODBC database interface (see Chapter 6.5).
In the globale library you will find data records for
Spectra (see Chapter 16.3)

sound levels (see Chapter 16.3.3)
sound reduction indices (see Chapter 16.3.4)
absorption coefficients (see Chapter 16.3.5)
SET-S (see Chapter 8.16)
Parking lot events (see Chapter 8.13)
Railway Groups (see Chapter 8.12.2)
Text blocks (see Chapter 16.6)
and in the local library
Spectra
sound levels
sound reduction indices
absorption coefficients
SET-S
SET-T
Directivity (see Chapter 8.7.3)
Number of Trains (see Chapter 8.12.2)
Symbol Library (see Chapter 16.5)
Text blocks
Manual
16
16.2
User-defined
Entry for global Library
in CADNA.DAT
16.2
The user-defined spectra in the global libraries are contained in the file
CADNA.DAT in your CadnaA program directory. This file will not be
overwritten by an update. You should save this file regularily to prevent
data loss.
Global Library
on a Server
If you want to define a different folder as the program folder for the CADNA.DAT , then you have to make an entry in the CADNAA.INI in the paragraph [MAIN] as follows:
16.2
LibFile=DRV:\Path\Cadna.dat
For DRV enter your drive and path of the folder where the CADNA.DAT
is saved.
With that you have the posibility to lay your data in the global library onto
a server where all your colleagues have access to it.
But pay attention: CadnaA reads only the INI-file if at least one global Text Block exists (Tables|Library (global), see Chapter 16.6). If
you actual dont use Text Blocks create a Dummy text block on
your computer and afterwards copy this Cadna.dat file to your server.
16
Manual
Spectra
16.3
16.3 1
Spectra
The Sound Level Spectra table already lists a number of spectra. These
are the typical indoor level spectra for commercial enterprises as listed in
the Guideline VDI 2571 /15/.
This chapter deals with the spectra. We assume that you are already familiar with the edit dialog of the objects for general sources
point, (see Chapter 8.3)

line (see Chapter 8.4) and
area sources (see Chapter 8.5): horizontal and vertical,
The Sound Level Spectra library stores sound pressure levels and sound
power levels independent of their weighting. You can supplement this library according to your needs.
Spectra are made with reference to their ID.
If you require a spectrum from the global library for a project file, it will
be copied to the local library by either:
copying all required spectra in advance by pressing the Local

Library button,
or
copying the required spectra while working on the project. By

making reference to a spectrum via the edit dialog of an object, it will
be automatically copied to the local library.
Remember: From the edit dialog, you access the global library by
clicking the card index icon of the PWL box with the SHIFT key held
down.
Manual
16
16.3
Spectra
16
Manual
16.3.1 1
Chapter 16.3 Spectra

16.3.1 Entering and Editing Frequency Spectra

The procedure laid out below applies to both global and local libraries. We
assume that you are familiar with the editing of tables and the inserting of
new rows (see chapter 15.2.3 Editing Table Cells). Spectra, too, may be
entered either directly in the table, or via the spectrum edit dialog (opened
by double-clicking the table row).
Under Name, enter some explanatory information on the spectrum. The

entry may be as long as you wish, but it is convenient to limit it to the column width.
Name
16.3.1
16
Manual
16.3.1
Spectrum ID

16.3.1
The ID serves to make reference to a spectrum in the edit dialog of an object..
It may be up to 15 characters long,

must start with a letter,
must not contain blanks,
must not contain operators (+;-;/;* etc.) - (see if necessary chapter 2.6
Operators and Functions), and
no special characters (see if necessary chapter 2.8 Strings and Operators).
We suggest the following:

Use the first letter to denote the type of sound level, for example
- L = sound pressure
- P = sound power
- R = sound reduction
- A = absorption
Append a serial number, for example L001, L002, P001, P002. In this context please read chapter 15.2.5 Change Column Content.
Source
16.3.1
Enter information on the origin of the spectrum here.
Spectrum and
Weighting
16.3.1
A spectrum may A-, B-, C-, D-, or Lin-weighted. The spectrum list box
serves to assign a weighting to a spectrum by entering the appropriate letter, or by selection from the list.
*
16
Select the weighting before you enter the spectrum.
The Weighting column of the table lists the corresponding letter codes. A
blank entry means the spectrum is Lin-weighted.
Follow the explanations and examples below to get a better understanding.
Manual

16.3.2 1
16.3.2 Generation of frequency spectra for sound

power and indoor levels
In order to understand the following, we presuppose that your are familiar
with dealing with frequency spectra, their generation, storage and transfer,
as well as the use of the global and local libraries.
It is also possible to calculate the frequency spectra of the sound power
level, e.g., from measured sound level spectra.
These features are reached when generating a new spectrum in the local or
in the global library.
Example: Insert a new line in the local library and open the dialog by double-clicking this line.
16
With the expressions available in the list box Type you have five possible
choices to determine a frequency of a spectrum.
Manual
Spectrum
Type
16.3.2
16.3.2

Li
Li indicates that the entered, or in some other way generated, spectrum is

an indoor sound pressure level - e.g. for the calculation of the radiation
from a building . This can be useful for documentation.
Li from interior
sources
With this option the level of an indoor sound spectrum can be calculated
from the level of a spectrum of sound power from sound sources like machines etc.
In principle this calculation requires a statistical theory. For each frequency band the following formula applies:
Li = LW 10 lg( A) + 6
(1)
For
Li
Indoor level in a room with the frequency band in dB
LW
Sound power level of all sources with the frequency band i in dB
equivalent absorption area with the frequency band in m
The equivalent absorption area is calculated with the following formula:
A= S
(2)
with
16
Practical
procedure
16.3.2
the average absorption coefficient of the rooms surface areas
the area in m of the rooms surface
The spectra of the sound power level of the single sources in a room have
to be saved so that they can be referenced with their identifier (ID).
After selection of the option Li from interiour sources from the list Type
new lines can be inserted in the list of Interiour Sources in the usual way.
Manual

16.3.2 3
After double-clicking on the inserted new line, single spectra can be referenced by typing their ID or you can choose the desired spectrum directly
from the library by clicking the index card symbol.
In the box Absorption displayed in the dialog Spectrum you can either
enter a single value of the average characteristic coefficient of absorption
or the ID-Code of a coefficient-spectrum of absorption from the local library. By clicking the index card symbol the spectrum can be chosen directly from the local or - with SHIFT key - global library.
When the surface of the room in m is specified, the resulting indoor level
of a spectrum is displayed as well in the monitor as in the corresponding
line in the table after closing the dialog with OK (plastic-box-production
in the following figure).
Manual
16
16.3.2

The spectrum of an interior level Li04 for the Plastic-box-production is

therefore the result if 3 moulding machines, 5 presses and 6 circular saw
bands are running in a room with a surface area of 1020 m and an average
spectrum of absorption, spectrum Am from the local library.
The additional parameter (c) with the type-name Li(c) shows that this
spectrum has been calculated from other spectra. Its values cannot be
changed by editing.
16.3.2
Lw indicates that the entered, or in some other way generated, spectrum is

a sound-power-level - e.g., to define the radiation of an outdoor source.
This can be useful for documentation.
Lw calculated from Lp
+ area + near-fieldcorrection
16.3.2
With this option the determination of the sound power level from the radiation from openings is supported. The averaged sound pressure level spectrum is determined by measurement in the opening cross-section.
Lw
An example is the spectrum LOE1 in the following figure:

16
Manual

16.3.2 5
This spectrum shall be determined in a 2 m large cross-section of an outlet

of an exhauster. After double-clicking this line the corresponding edit dialog opens. In the field TYP the option Lw calculated from Lp + area +
nearfield-correction is selected.
In addition to the size of the exit area a short distance-correction can be entered which will then be added arithmetically to the frequency-band level.
With this correction it can be taken into account that the rays don't cross
the exit area vertically - only in this case, apply the following conversion
formula
LW = Lp + 10 lg( S )
(3)
with
exit area in m2
(Hint: If sound penetrates the area S from all directions, a correction

of -3 dB may be useful. This is the case, e.g., if sound radiated from
machines in a room penetrates the environment through an open
door. In the exit-cross-section of an absorbent duct there are no crossmodes and the near-field correction is 0. In a duct without any
absorption a value between 0 and -3 may be correct depending on the
Manual
16
16.3.2

propagation conditions between source and exit along with the diameter of the opening).
After closing the dialog the calculated spectrum is inserted in the library
and its Type expression is supplemented with a (c) indicating that this
spectrum has been calculated. Its values cannot be edited.
Lw calculated from Lp
+ distance + sphere
partition
16.3.2
The sound power level of a source can be measured with the enveloping
surface method in accordance with one of the standards ISO 3744 /3/ or
3746 /41/. In many cases it is appropriate to measure the sound emission
of a source at a distance that is large in comparison to source dimensions
and to use only one or a few measuring points if the source radiation is
unidirectional. If the radiation has a direction, the measurements are undertaken at more points oriented in different directions and a mean spectrum is calculated in the first step by energetic averaging. If the source
doesn't radiate in all directions, but only into a portion n% of the sphere,
then the sound power level Lw is calculated from the measured level Lp
with
n%
LW = Lp + 10 lg( 4r 2 ) + 10 lg
100%
(4)
It is presupposed that the data record Mot03 in the local database corresponds with, e.g., the spectrum of sound levels of an operating electro-motor standing on a reflecting floor at a distance of 5 m.
16
Manual

16.3.2 7
After double-clicking this line you will see the settings made in the edit dialog. You have to enter the Distance as 5 m and because of the hemispherical sound propagation a Sphere Part with 50 %.
After closing this dialog with OK the calculated spectrum is inserted in the
library and its expression in the box Type is supplemented with (c) indicating that this spectrum is being calculated. Its values cannot be edited.
16
Manual
16.3.2

16
Manual

Sound Level Spectra
16.3.3 1
16.3.3 Sound Level Spectra

A level-over-frequency spectrum is a sequence of values, with each value
signifying a level in a specific octave band. Entering zero as a value, not
entering anything, or a blank, are interpreted in different ways. 0 means
that the level is 0 dB. A blank, or no entry, mean that this frequency band
has no valid entry.
Level Frequency
Spectra
16.3.3
Weighting
16.3.3
If spectra are available, the calculation, evaluation, and representation of

the rating level at the immission point will be based on the spectral information. If, however, there is no value in a frequency band of the spectrum
for a source being taken into account in the calculation, no rating level will
be displayed for this band.
A level-over-frequency spectrum is only unambiguous if the underlying
frequency weighting Lin, A, B, C, or D is known. To ensure unambiguity, the relevant standards always require Lin-weighted spectra. In practical noise control, however, using the A-weighted levels has proven
convenient, too, because it allows you to determine the relative contribution of each frequency band level at the A-weighted sound level the value of ultimate interest by just looking at the values. This facilitates a
quick selection of those frequency ranges which need to be considered
first in the constructing of noise-control measures. There is a risk, however, that spectra with different weightings are mixed in an inadmissible way.
CadnaA makes use of a concept which avoids this risk while still allowing
a quick visual evaluation by means of weighted frequency spectra.
Spectra may be entered with any of the Lin-, A-, B-, C-, or D-weightings, the user being responsible for supplying correct information on
the weighting. (Only this information allows for the correct calculation
of the unweighted spectrum.)
If you mistakenly entered the wrong weighting, you may modify this at
any time by assigning a different weighting.
Any of the weightings mentioned above can be selected for output on
Manual
16
16.3.3

Sound Level Spectra
the screen, or on the printer, either globally for all spectra of one table,
or individually for each one of them.
An example of how to enter a spectrum is given below.
Open the appropriate, currently blank, table of the local library via
Tables|Libraries [local]|Sound Level.
Insert a row, and open the edit dialog (by double-clicking the inserted
row).
This standard spectrum with a level of 0 dB in each frequency band is valid for the entire frequency range from 31.5 Hz to 8,000 Hz. Nine valid frequency bands with a level of 0 dB each result in a total Lin-weighted level,
indicated as Total Lin: of
(0 + 10 x lg(9)) dB = 9.5 dB
16
The A-weighted level is 7.0 dB(A).
Change the weighting from Linear to, e. g., A by either

-
entering A in the Spectrum box, or

by selecting a weighting from the list which drops down when
you click the arrow to the right of the Spectrum box.
You will then see the weighted spectral levels.
Manual

Sound Level Spectra
Repeat this with different weightings, and watch the total weighted
level displayed on the dialog in each case.
Switching to another weighting in the edit dialog Spectrum does not

change the underlying frequency spectrum.
Therefore, at first, switch to the appropriate weighting before you
enter a frequency spectrum.
16.3.3 3
But even if you selected the wrong weighting and confirmed the values
you entered, you do not need to delete them in order to just enter them
again. The second important dialog, Modify Spectrum, is one tool to help
you here.
First, switch back to Linear on the edit dialog Spectrum which

results in 0 being again displayed for each frequency band.
Click the calculator icon to the right of the Spectrum box.
In the default setting, Apply Weighting is activated, with the A-weighting

being selected.
If you click OK now, the A-weighting will be applied to the values, but the
Linear weighting will still be assigned to the spectrum in the edit dialog.
Selecting a specific weighting in the Modify Spectrum dialog means

converting and thus manipulating the values. This implies an actual
modification of the spectrum saved in the library.
Manual
16
16.3.3

Sound Level Spectra
The edit dialog should now look similar to the following illustration:
Now the A-weighting corrections are displayed as levels. Your procedure

tells the program to interpret and process this spectrum as Lin-weighted.
Again, switching to other weightings on the edit dialog will not affect the
spectrum saved in the library.
This is very convenient if you have entered the correct values but the
wrong weighting. Suppose you enter the above sequence of values directly
as a Lin-weighted spectrum. Afterwards, you find out that during the
measurement of these values, the instrument had been set to measure Aweighted levels.
16
Since you have selected Lin-weighting, you wish to generate linear levels
from the measured A-weighted levels, thus applying a kind of an inverse
A-weighting. Therefore,
click the calculator icon, then the arrow, and select -A from the list
which opens.
Manual

Sound Level Spectra
16.3.3 5
By clicking OK, the original spectrum is restored to the edit dialog.
Instead of selecting a different weighting via the dialog Modify

Spectrum and in order to leave the values unchanged, you may also
switch to a different weighting directly on the Spectrum dialog.
When doing so, hold the SHIFT key down.
16
Manual
16.3.3
Modify
Spectrum

Sound Level Spectra
16.3.3
The three other options on the Modify Spectrum dialog similarly lead to a
manipulation of the values.
Fill Spectrum with Constant K

-
Add Constant K to Bands

-
enters an arbitrary value K for each band.
arithmetically adds the value of K to the current value.
Normalise Spectrum to Total Level K

-
adds the same correction to each frequency band value so that

the resulting total level, weighted as specified on the edit dialog,
equals the value of K.
This gives you extreme flexibility in handling spectra while maintaining

consistency in the data. We recommend you try out the combinations described above as well as the many other possible ones.
16
Manual

16.3.4 1
16.3.4 Spectra of Sound Reduction Index

The input dialog for sound reduction indices in octave bands is accessed
via Libraries [local]|Sound Reduction Indices.
Insert a new row and open the edit dialog.
Unlike the edit dialog for the level spectrum, this one does not assign any
weighting to the values. This would not make any sense with sound reduction indices.
Instead it will be indicated the weighted sound reduction index Rw - determined from these values in accordance with DIN EN ISO 717-1 /26/ - and
the spectrum adaptation terms C and Ctr which also depend on the spectrum. All tools for the manipulation of spectra, as described above, are accessible via the calculator icon and effective here.
Applying a weighting here, however, is to be understood as a purely arithmetic operation without any relation to noise effects which are implied in
sound level spectra. By activating, e. g., Fill Spectrum with Constant K,
where K=50, and with the subsequent selection of A on the Apply
Weighting box, you generate an approximately realistic sound reduction
index spectrum with a weighted sound reduction index of 49 dB. If you
then select Normalise Spectrum to Total Level K, you generate a sound
Manual
16
16.3.4

reduction index for the spectrum with an arbitrary weighted sound reduction index K (for example 53 dB as in the figure above).
(Such manipulations are only useful for practice and for studying the effects of modifications on parameters. For other projects, you should enter
values in the edit dialog which have been measured.)
16
Manual

16.3.5 1
16.3.5 Absorption Coefficient Spectra

The input dialog for absorption coefficients in octave bands is accessed via
Libraries [local]|Absorption Coefficients.
Insert a new row and open the edit dialog.
Unlike the edit dialog for the spectrum of sound level, this one does not assign any weighting to the values. This would not make any sense with absorption coefficients.
Instead, the reflection loss DLA,a,Str - determined from these values by the
method given in ZTV-Lsw 88 /56/, and the weighted absorption aw which
also depends on the spectrum - are given. All tools for the manipulation of
spectra, as described above and accessible via the calculator icon, are effective here, too.
However, it does not make sense to apply a weighting here, because reasonable sound absorption coefficients lie between 0 and 1.
(Such manipulations are only useful for practise, and to study the effects of
modifications to parameters. For other projects, you should enter values in
the edit dialog which have been measured ).
Manual
16
16.3.5

16
Manual

Output of Spectra
16.3.6 1
16.3.6 Output of Spectra

Just like any other table, spectra tables can be copied to the clipboard using the Copy button, or CTRL+C, and they may be printed out (see Chapter 17.4) or exported (see Chapter 17.3.2) by using their keywords. Only
local libraries can be printed and exported.
Keywords for Spectra Tables
#(Table,LibL)
Table of sound levels
#(Table,LibR)
Table of sound reduction indices
#(Table,LibA)
Table of absorption coefficients
16
Manual
16.3.6

Output of Spectra
16
Manual
Libraries Manager
16.4
16.4 1
Libraries Manager
With the Library-Manager in menu Tables|Library-Manager all spectra

in CadnaA-files can be copied or deleted comfortably.
You can
copy data inside of CadnaA from the local to the global library and
vice-versa
save spectra in separate library files (*.dat) and
delete all, or selected, spectra
With these features your are able to maintain your libraries.

In the listbox Library choose the desired library and mark the corresponding option for the type of library.
16
The Dialog Library Manager
Manual
16.4
Libraries Manager
With the option Type you can determine which spectra or libraries you
want to use. Default refers to the library which is installed with the program and with File you have access to a CadnaA library file (*.dat) in
which the desired spectra are contained.
Library-Type
16.4
Select
Spectra
16.4
Action
16.4
With the option Action you determine what you want to do with the selcted spectra - to Copy/Save or Delete them.
Destination
16.4
With the action Copy to you can define which library - either global or local - you want to copy the selcted spectra to. For that, mark the corresponding option. Having marked the option File, you can choose the path
and the name of the file. The extension DAT is attached automatically.
With the option Selection you can either select ALL spectra from the corresponding library or you can select spectra which only match the expression you have entered with the expression in the ID box (see Chapter
5.5.3) of the spectra. For that, mark the corresponding option.
The Destination is deactivated if you choose Delete. In this case all selected spectra are deleted.
Name
Collisions
16
16.4
Importing Spectra from

external Databases16.4.0
You must also define how you want to handle the original spectrum if a
collision of identical names occurs. Do this by clicking the desired options.
You can import spectra from external databases into the local library via
the ODBC interface (File|Database see Chapter 6.5). This is convenient,
e.g., if you have measured spectra on an Excel sheet.
Manual
16.5 1
Symbol Library
16.5
Symbol Library
With Table|Libraries (local)|Symbol Library you may import your own

created symbols and use them with the tool from the toolbox. This is an
advantageous procedure to get the full resolution of an image with each
scale. You may also determine the color, the angle of alignment and adjustment by changing the scale factor.
Open a new CadnaA file and create the desired picture by using the auxiliary polygon from the toolbox. Another option is to import a drawing in
DXF format by using the layer of object type Aux. Polygon in the option
dialog. For that CadnaA file, adjust the limits so that the picture occupies
it completely (Options|Limits|Calc). Save this file with a pertinent name
und close it.
Object Symbol
16.5
Creating user-defined
Symbols
Aux.Polygon
16.5
16
DXF CAD graphics imported as Aux.Polygon in CadnaA. The smallest Limits has been calculated with
Options|Limits|Calc. This file has been saved then as
CadnaA file (e.g. Flieger.cna).
Manual
16.5
Symbol Library
Open a new file and insert (INS key) a new line in Tables|Libraries (local)|Symbol Library. A double-click on the new line opens the dialog Library Symbol. Enter a name for the new Symbol in the corresponding
field. This name can be again found in the listbox in the dialog of the Symbol.
Importation
By clicking the button Import you can select the CadnaA file in which
your image is saved. Close the dialog by confirming OK. Now you can
place your Flieger-Symbol in your file and if necessary you can enlarge,
reduce or turn it.
With the tool Symbol from the toolbox draw a pertinent frame in your
project file where you want to place this new Symbol.
16
In the dialog of this Symbol frame you can now choose your symbol by
clicking the corresponding name - in our example Flieger. The image is
displayed in the preview monitor.
Manual
Symbol Library
16.5 3
After the input of all desired settings close the dialog by clicking OK.
With that, the Symbol is placed in your project file.
16
The inserted Symbol rotated 90.
Manual
16.5
Colour and line width of
the symbols
Symbol Library
You have three possibilities to assign the colour and line width to these
user created symbols.
The first possibility is to define the appearance in the original CadnaA file
which contains the image. Either in File|Appearance|Aux. Polygon as a
global setting or directly in the dialog of the Aux. Polygon. If the option
Use Global Properties is deactivated in the dialog of the Aux. Polygon
with which the image is drawn then you can only change its appearance in
this object dialog.
These settings are then allocated to this image and cannot be changed anymore in another project file in which this image is inserted as Symbol object.
If, in the original file, the option Use Global Properties is activated then
the image is adopted to the colour and line width of the project file in
which it is inserted, provided that this option has been activated in the dialog Library Symbol, too. Otherwise you can still adjust the settings individually in this dialog.
The Symbol library is a local library and is therefore only available in the
project file you are working on. If you want to have the library always
available then install a Prototype file with the corresponding settings (see
Chapter 18.8).
See also chapter 5.4.6 Inserting from the Clipboard.
16
Manual
Text Blocks
16.6
16.6 1
Text Blocks
Use text blocks (Table|Libraries local and global) to save global or individual (local) text blocks which can be printed along with a report or exported from CadnaA by simply naming them in the template file. The key
word for the template file for this purpose is #(Text,Identifier) where the
identifier is the name of the text block.
Edit Dialog Textblock
This allows you to include, e. g., your company address, the identification
of the project or your customer's address in the report without having to
edit the template file over and over again.
There are local and global text blocks and also automatically generated
textblocks which are created if the Project-Info (see Chapter 18.10) has
been filled out. The global text blocks are available for every CadnaA file,
whereas the local ones are saved together with the specific project, thus
being available for this project only. Local and global text blocks may
share the same identifier. CadnaA will search through all text blocks. If
two text blocks having the same identifier are found, the local one will be
used.
Frequently used phrases like "If you have any questions concerning the
calculation please contact #(Text, Person)" may be quoted once in a template file. The local text block with the identifier "Person" then supple-
Manual
16
16.6
Text Blocks
ments the above phrase by appending the text saved in the corresponding
local text block.
The template file will remain valid even with a different person in charge
when the specific person's name is saved in a local text block
How to enter a Text

block
16.6.0
Select the command Tables|Libraries local or global|Textblocks. This

opens the table of Text Blocks. The table will be empty when you first
open this menu.
16
Table of existing text blocks. With a double-click on a

data record the text block dialog opens.
Manual
16.6 3
Text Blocks
To insert a row in the table just press the INS key or hold down the right
mouse button and click either Insert Before or Insert After. This results
in a blank row being inserted. Double-clicking this row with the left mouse
button will open its edit dialog. Enter a characteristic name for the intended text block in the text box Name. Then proceed to the next box using the
TAB key, and enter the desired text. Clicking the New button lets you enter
another text block. The arrow keys serve to switch from one text block to
the next, and OK closes the edit dialog. Click OK again to close the text
blocks table.
If you click the button New, a new line is inserted for another text block.
With the ARROW keys you can scroll through the existing text blocks,
while clicking OK closes this dialog.
You can also use a prefix with text blocks. The prefix is only written if a
text is contained in the text block otherwise not. The expression
#(Text, PI_AUTHOR,,"Processor: ")
results in e.g.
Processor: Bernd Huber
The prefix Processor: is only written if the text block contains text, e.g.
the name of the processor. If the text block is empty the prefix is not written.
If you want a carrige return between the prefix and the text you have to enter \n in quotation mark (\n) as last parameter with the key word.
#(Text, PI_AUTHOR,, BearbeiterIn: \n)
results in a line break
Processor:
Bernd Huber
With that you can also force a text cell in the Plot-Designer (see Chapter
17.2.4) not to be displayed if the texblock is empty and if the size of the
text cell is set on automatically.
Manual
Linebreak \n
16
16.6
Text Blocks
16
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 17 Output
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Chapter 17 Output
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
Contents
17.1 1
Chapter 17 Output
17.1 Contents
17.2
Creating Reports and Graphics
17.2.1
17.2.2
17.2.3
17.2.4
17.2.5
17.2.6
17.2.7
17.2.8
17.2.9
Template Files
Printing Reports
Print Graphics
The Plot-Designer
The Edit Legend Dialog Box
The Cell Types
The Cells Properties
Example: Template File for Graphics of a User-defined Printout
Print Preview
17.3
Export
17.3.1
17.3.2
17.3.3
17.3.4
Export Formats
Text Files TXT / RTF
AutoCad DXF
ArcView
17.4
Keywords
17.4.1
17.4.2
17.4.3
17.4.4
17.4.5
17.4.6
17.4.7
Bitmap
Datum
Einzug
File
FileDatum
FileExpIn
FileExpOut
Manual
17
17
17.1
17.4.8
17.4.9
17.4.10
17.4.11
17.4.12
17.4.13
17.4.14
17.4.15
17.4.16
17.4.17
17.4.18
17.4.19
17.4.20
17.4.21
17.4.22
17.4.23
17.4.24
17.4.25
17.4.26
17.4.27
17.4.28
17.4.29
17.4.30
17.4.31
17.4.32
17.4.33
17.4.34
17.4.35
17.4.36
17.4.37
17.4.38
17.4.39
Chapter 17 Output
Contents
FilePrint
FileZeit
Font
If, Tag
Legende
LegendeNutz
LegendeObj
LineAbs
LineRel
Metafile
MoveAbs
MoveRel
NeueSeite
Plan
PlanAttr
PosPop
PosPush
Range
RasterBewertung
RectAbs
RectRel
Scale
Seite
Tab
Table
Tabs
Text
Variants
VarianteM
Version
Zabst
Zeit
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
Contents
17.5
17.1 3
The Connection CadnaA with

BASTIAN
17
Manual
17.1
Chapter 17 Output
Contents
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
17.2
17.2 1
CadnaA allows you to export all calculation results and intermediate re-
sults, as well as object descriptions in ASCII or RTF format, and to export

graphics in the DXF format , or to have everything printed out using standardised printing commands. Examples are:
Calculation results and object descriptions in formatted tables via

File|Print Report, either standard or user-defined (see Chapter 17.2.2)
intermediate results of receiver point calculations via Calculation|Log|Print (see Chapter 12.6)
graphic representations via File|Print Graphics, either standard or

user-defined (see Chapter 17.2.3) and
the export of tables and diagrams via the Windows clipboard (see
Chapter 5.4.5)
User-defined output can be realised in CadnaA by using template files

(see Chapter 17.2.1) for exporting and printing.
With the corresponding print drivers - like, e.g., PDF-Writer by ADOBE you can also save your files for archive purposes or transfer these PDF
files to your customers via email.
17
Manual
17.2
Chapter 17 Output
17
Manual
Chapter 17.2 Creating Reports and Graphics

Template Files
17.2.1 1
17.2.1 Template Files

Template files contain commands controlling the printing or exporting of
calculation results or diagrams.
Key words (see Chapter 17.4) are essential components of the commands.
Write these commands and any individual text into a file using either a text
editor or a word processor, and save this file in TXT (ASCII) format or
RTF (Rich Text Format). Then select these as template files for user-defined output.
If you want, e.g., to print out the current receiver point table in a user-defined report then you would enter the command #(Table,Imm). The result is the current table of receiver points in your CadnaA file.
Name
M.
ID
Pegel Lr
Day
Night
Limit. Value
Day
Land Use
Height
Night Type Auto Noise Type
(dBA) (dBA) (dBA) (dBA)
Coordinates
X
(m)
(m)
(m)
(m)
Astr.1 EG
i1_astr1_eg
67.0
56.5
55.0
40.0
1.80 r
66.21
21.28
1.80
Astr.3 EG
i2_astr3_eg
67.0
56.6
55.0
40.0
1.80 r
59.80
36.98
1.80
Astr.5 EG
i3_astr5_eg
66.9
56.4
55.0
40.0
1.80 r
53.06
53.70
1.80
Astr.13 EG
i4_astr13_eg
68.5
58.3
55.0
40.0
1.80 r
33.61
112.13
1.80
Key words must appear in brackets, preceded by a # before the left bracket. The parameters of a key word come next to the key word itself, enclosed in the same brackets and separated by commas.
Another example of a command in a printing template file:
#(Font, Times Roman, 14, f)Cadna/A
has the effect that the word Cadna/A will be printed using the Times
Roman font, 14 pt size, and bold faced.
Manual
17
17.2.1

Template Files
Example of a printing template file for printing a report directly from CadnaA
17
If no parameters are entered, the default value is used. If, in the above example, Times Roman had not been entered, thus
#(Font,,14,f)Cadna/A
the (default) Arial font would have been used for printing the text.
Manual

Template Files
17.2.1 3
You may also enter an ordinary text without using a key word. This text
will be printed or exported, too. This allows you to prepare standard reports or logs containing the current calculation results.
The following types of template files are presently distributed and can be
either used as they are or modified (edited):
Print.TXT = Template file for direct printout from CadnaA
Export.TXT= Template file for exporting. The output file to which the
results are exported is also an ASCII file which can be imported by any
program capable of processing ASCII files (including, e. g., Excel).
Export.RTF = Template file for exporting. The output file to which

the results are exported is also a Rich Text Format file which can be
recognised and imported by almost any word processor. Tables, e. g.,
will remain tables with frames when imported to the word processor (e.
g., Word). Characters, paragraphs, and tab stops can be formatted
directly in the word processor.
Print_Gr. TXT = Template file for printing out diagrams. This template file contains commands regarding, among other items, size and
caption of the diagram, whether a frame shall be drawn, or whether coordinates or scale shall be printed etc.
The template files, such as Print.TXT, which controls the standard printout
of reports from CadnaA can be structured by labelling ##printing ranges.
These will appear for selection in the Print dialog. Printing ranges may be
selected individually, which allows you to print out just one printing range.
Labelling of Printing
Ranges
17.2.1
Where a printing range starts in the template file, enter a text - preferably
one word, no blanks - identifying this range. Before this text, without
blanks in between, insert two ##.
General syntax
Example:
##PrintingRangeLabel
##LineSources
"LineSources" now appears as a selectable printing range in the print dialog. Anything appearing in the template file after "LineSources", but before the next printing range label, is printed. The label itself is not printed.
Manual
17
17.2.1

Template Files
The label for the printing range from the template file
appears in the print dialog. This gives you the chance to
restrict the print out only to a certain range by marking the
label. Multiple choice is possible.
17
Manual

Printing Reports
17.2.2 1
17.2.2 Printing Reports

The command Print Report from the menu File opens the Print dialog
offering options for printing out calculation results and object descriptions
as formatted tables.
The name of the template file, which CadnaA will use for printing the report, appears in the dialog Template (see Chapter 17.2.1 "Template
Files"). A Print.TXT file is supplied with CadnaA. You may edit this template file and save it with a different name.
Selecting a
Template File
17.2.2
Editing a
Template File
17.2.2
This version of PRINT.TXT will be overwritten when CadnaA is reinstalled or updated. It is therefore strongly recommended that you
save the template file PRINT.TXT with a different name if any
changes are made!
The Choose button allows you to select a template file for printing. Template file names have the extension TXT. Since, among others, the names
of the template files for exporting have the same extension, it may be advisable to save template files for exporting and for printing in different directories on your disk because some key words (see Chapter 17.4) are
permissible for exporting only, but not for printing.
When you click the Edit button, the editor is started up and opens the selected template file.
17
Manual
17.2.2

Printing Reports
Printing Range
17.2.2
All
17.2.2
Selected
Paragraphs
17.2.2
If All is activated (black dot) as the printing range, all paragraphs which
are determined by the selected printing template file are printed, regardless of any selection made under Selected Paragraphs.
If Selected Paragraphs is activated (black dot) you must mark one or
more items in the paragraphs list. Only those paragraphs which are
marked are printed. (See also Multiple Selections.)
The total length of all labels (see above: labeling of printing range) on this
list (sum of the lengths of the individual labels) must not exceed
255 characters. Otherwise, you will have to break up the printing template
file in two or more files.
Print to
File
17.2.2
If Print to File is activated, the printout is redirected to a file. You will be

prompted to enter the name of the output file.
Copies
17.2.2
Enter the number of copies you desire.
Page Margins
17.2.2
Distance in millimetres from the edges of the sheet of paper.
Header/
Footer
17.2.2
These lines let you enter additional text for headers and footers. The first
line specifies the header, the second the footer.
You can also insert bitmap files (such as company logos) using the key
word #(Bitmap), see Chapter 17.4.1.
Example of header and footer
17
In this example, the text entered on the menu Table|Library|Text Blocks

(see Chapter 16.6) under the text block name "Project" would be printed at
the top of each page. At the bottom, at the TAB position 15 cm from the
left page margin, the word "page" would appear, followed by the respective page number.
Manual
17.2.3 1

Print Graphics
17.2.3 Print Graphics

When all desired objects have been entered, you may print the graphic
with or without the background image (see Chapter 14.2).
If your diagram contains a bitmap that is not to be printed out, use the bitmap icon on the icon bar to deactivate the bitmap prior to printing.
For the printout, either click the printer icon on the icon bar or select the
menu command File|Print Graphics. The dialog Print Graphics opens.
.
Dialog Print Graphic
On the left hand side of the dialog at first you select all settings for the
printer, like printer type, print-out paper size and format and the print-out
paper margins. The print-out paper margin is the distance from the paper
edges. The minimal page margin depends on the selected printer.
Printer and
Print Magrins
On the right hand size of the dialog you can choose the print quality and
number of copies. Furthermore you can decide if the plot shall be printed
directly to the printer or written into a file.
Other
17
Manual
17.2.3

Print Graphics
Default Print Range
Select the standard printing range by clicking one of the three options:
Limits prints the limits of the project file, as defined under

Options|Limits (see Chapter 13.2 "The Limits").
Window prints the area visible on the screen. You may modify this
area by changing the window size.
Section prints an identifiable section that has been defined using the
Section tool (see Chapter 13.10). Select its name from the list box.
With one of the options in the mittle of the print dialog you can design the
layout of your plots with a legend either with the Plot-Designer or with a
Template File.
Print
A CadnaA legend is an area that surrounds a plot when it is printed. The

legend displays information about the plot, such as descriptive text, a graphical scale, and a north arrow. The legend may also include a border
around the plot.
Standard
(Designer)
CadnaA ledgends are based upon a concept of cells. Cells are rectangular
17.2.3
areas of the paper that can contain text, graphical features such as scales
and north arrows, and other cells. In addition, there is a cell that contains
the plot itself. Each cell has a variety of properties, such as a background
color, a margin, and a border. With the option Standard (Designer) activated a predefinied ledgend is used for the printout.
How to design a user-defined ledgend with the Pot-Designer is described
in the following chapter 17.2.4.
17
Manual

Print Graphics
You need a template file (see Chapter 17.2.1) when this option is activated.
To select and edit one, click the pertinent buttons.
17.2.3 3
User-defined
Template File
17.2.3
Saving
Print Options
17.2.3
Specify the printing range in the template file by using the key word
#(Plan), see Chapter 17.4.21, or use the standard printing range in the dialog Print Graphic. When the template file contains a definition of a printing range, CadnaA will use it.
An example for a graphics print with a template file is described in chapter
17.2.8.
The settings in the print dialog including the page margins and the selected
printer are saved with the CadnaA file. They are available again with the
next opening of the file. If the chosen printer is not available then the default printer is selected automatically.
17
Manual
17.2.3

Print Graphics
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The Plot-Designer
17.2.4 1
17.2.4 The Plot-Designer

When printing a CadnaA plot - the graphics - you can add a legend that
displays information about the plot.
You have full control over the appearance and content of the legend. The
legend can have multiple fonts, colors, and borders. Text can be segregated
into outlined rectangular areas, much like an architectural blueprint legend. A graphical scale and north arrow or other symbols are supported.
CadnaA users, who purchased the Option BMP (see Chapter 14 Pictures)
are also enabled to insert images with the corresponding bitmap formats.
CadnaA ledgends are based upon a concept of cells. Cells are rectangular
areas of the paper that can contain text, graphical features such as scales
and north arrows, and other cells. In addition, there is a cell that contains
the plot itself. Each cell has a variety of properties, such as a background
color, a margin, and a border.
The printable area of the paper (i.e., the paper minus any margins) is the
outermost cell. You build a legend by adding cells to this outermost cell,
and setting their properties. Recall that cells can contains other cells. The
legend consists of a hierarchy of cells, with the outermost cell as the root
cell which cannot be deleted.
17
Manual
17.2.5
Chapter 17 Output
17.2.5 The Edit Legend Dialog Box

Use the Edit Legend dialog box to inspect and edit an CadnaA legend.
The printers dialog opens first if you either click the printer icon in the
icon bar or the menu command File|Print Graphic (see chapter 17.2.3).
You open the Plot-Designer by clicking the pertinent button in the print
dialog.
17
The Legend Dialog
The left side of the Edit Legend dialog box displays a preview of what the
current legend will look like when printed. This is known as the legend
preview.
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
17.2.5 3
The right side of the Edit Legend dialog box displays a hierarchical list of
the cells in the legend. This is known as the cell list.
At any given time, one cell is selcted. This selected cell is the one that you
are currently working with. The selected cell is highlighted in both the legend preview and the cell list.
On top of the Edit Legend dialog box is the Plot-Designers icon bar with
the following icons which are explained in the following.
Edit Cells Properties
Delete button
Move buttons
x-Container
y-Container
z-Container
Plan and 3DCell
Text Cell
Symbol Cell
Bitmap Cell
Legend Cell
Macro Cell
Placeholder Cell
Add Legend
Open Legend
Save Legend
Click once with the RIGHT mouse button on the desired point to magnify
the legend preview for close study. Click once again to reduce the magnification level.
Click on a cell in the legend preview to select it and then click on the Edit
Cells Properties button - or alternatively double-click on a cell - to display the cells Edit Legend Cell dialog box, which allows you to inspect
and change the cells properties.
Manual
Working with the

Legend Preview 17.2.5
17
Properties
17.2.5
Chapter 17 Output
Working with the Cell

List
17.2.5
The cell list displays a hierarchical list of the cells (Father, Child) in the legend being edited. The selected cell is always highlighted. To change the
selected cell, either use the arrow keys on your keyboard, or click on the
cell to be selected.
The Cell List - the Container Table04 is highlighted
In front of the container icon is either placed a plus (+) or a minus (-) character. The (+) indicates that the container contains further elements eiter
further container and / or other cells. Click on the (+) to open the container,
the (+) exchanges to a (-). Analogously click on the (-) to close the container. A container without any sign in front of is empty.
A container placed left above other cells is the father of the subordinated
elements placed right underneath known as child. Only a container can
be a father. Children can adopt the cell properties of their father.
Cell Properties
17
Adding
Cells
17.2.5
To inspect and edit the properties of a highlighted cell click either on the
icon Properties or double-click the cell name in the cell list. In both cases
the Edit Cell dialog is displayed (see chapter 17.2.7).
For adding a cell highlight the cell after which you like to add a new cell
and click on the desired cell type in the icon bar.
Is the highlighted cell not a container so is the cell added underneath the
highlighted cell on the same level. Is a container highlighted so is the cell
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
17.2.5 5
added into the container as Child one level lower independet if the element is a normal cell or a container.
You can shift the active cell to an other hierarchy level with the Move buttons in the icon bar.
Move buttons
Move selected cell up in the cell list.

Move selected cell down in the cell list.
Move selected cell in one level towards the root of the cell list.
Move selected cell out one level away from the root of the cell list.
Delete the selcted cell by either pressing the Delete button, or by pressing
the DEL key.
Deleting cells
17.2.5
But pay attention: If you delete a container in which other elements

are included, thus children existing, they will be deleted as well.
Creating a legend from scratch involves a significant amount of work.

Therefore, CadnaA Plot-Designer gives you the ability to save and load
legends to and from files. The intent is that you will create a small number
of legends, and then reuse them as needed.
Editing
Importing
and Saving
Legends
17.2.5
Press the Save button to write the current legend to a file. Press the Load
button to read a previously saved legend. Press the Import button to add a
legend to the current legend. In all three cases, you will be asked for the
files name.
CadnaA Plot-Designer is distributed with several ready-to-use legends.
These legends are stored in files that have the extension .CNP, and are located on your program CD-Rom in Samples|Tutorial|Output|Plot-Designer. If you do not wish to go to the trouble of learning how to edit legends,
you can simply use one of these ready-to-use legends.
Manual
Legends
17
17.2.5
Chapter 17 Output
If you intend to create your own legend, you may wish to start with
one of the ready-to-use legends included with CadnaA Plot-Designer, and then edit it incrementally. You will likely find this easier than
creating a new legend from scratch.
17
Manual
17.2.6 7
Chapter 17 Output
The Cell Types
17.2.6 The Cell Types

At the time being eight different cell types exist additionally to the three
container types which organize the alignment of celles.
The alignment of cells - side by side (in x-direction: these cells contain a
horizontal row of other cells), among each other (in y-direction: these cells
contain a vertical column of other cells) or overlaped (in z-direction) - are
specified by the container cells, which accommodate the other cell types
like the Plan or 3D cell. Thus you have to insert a container cell first before you can include other cell types. The standard is that at least one container cell must exist, known as root container. If this container is the only
one in your legend you cannot delete this container only its properties can
be changed. .
x-Container
y-Container
Container
Cells
17.2.6
z-Container
To insert a cell highlight either a container cell or an other cell type included in a container cell.
The Plan cell accommodates your CadnaA graphics - your plot itself - like
your noise map which is displayed immediately after inserting this cell type. The part of the plan which is displayed depends on the settings in the
Edit Cell dialog (see the next chapter).
Plan Cell
The 3D Cell displays a 3D-Special-View which has been created by an

Aux. Polygon either as shaded or as wireframe presentation. The Aux. Polygons must be named to identify them in the Edit Cell dialog where they
can be selected.
3D Cell
The Text Cell contains text or possibly pertinent Key Words (see chapter
17.4) to automate standard print outs, like #(Scale) which displayes the
Text Cell
17.2.6
17.2.6
17.2.6
Manual
17
17.2.6
Chapter 17 Output
The Cell Types
graphical scale or #(Text, Name) which displayes the contents of Textblocks (see chapter 16.6).
The text in a Text Cell can be arbitrarily long but there is no automatic
word wrapping. For that use the RETURN key.
The Symbol Cell can contain internal CadnaA Symbols like a north arrow
or the symbols contained in the symbols library (see chapter 16.5).
Symbol Cell
17.2.6
Bitmap Cell
17.2.6
The Bitmap Cell displays images (pictures, logos, digital photographies)

in bitmap format (TIF, BMP, JPEG, PCX, PNG etc.). For that the CadnaA
option BMP is required (see Chapter 14 Pictures).
CadnaA-user who have not purchased the option BMP can insert bitmaps only either with the corresponding key word #(Bitmap), which
has to be entered in a Macro Cell (see further below) or by a Symbol
Cell as symbol.
The Legend Cell displays the grid- (color-noise level-scale), object- or

land use legend.
Legend Cell
17.2.6
The Macro Cell is actually not necessary but it gives you the possibility to
use your already predefined old template files for plot print out.
Macro Cell
17.2.6
Placement Cell
17
17.2.6
In that case copy the contents of your template file into the Macro Cell
and delete all other Plot-Designer cells not needed - except the root container with your Macro Cell.
A Placement Cell is a cell which cannot have any entries. It just filles out
the spaces not needed and forces all other cells on its position. If you insert
a cell, it does not matter which cell type, and if this cell is the only one, it
occupies normally the whole space in a container. Now if you insert more
cells then they all have to share this space. How the sharing looks like depends on the properties of all cells and the selected container type. So if a
cell type does not need the whole space you must insert a Placement Cell
in any case to force the cell on its position.
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The Cell Types
17.2.6 9
Edit Legend Cell Dialog Box see chapter 17.2.5.

Example and Training see Programm-CD:
Samples|Tutorial|Output|Plot-Designer.
17
Manual
10
17.2.7
Chapter 17 Output
17.2.7 The Cells Properties

The Edit Legend Cell dialog box is a multiple Page Dialog and it allows
you to inspect and change the properties of the selected cell. Click on the
desired page tab to select an other page.
Page General
General
17
17.2.7
On the page General you can enter a name for the selected cell which is
displayed in the cell list.
Deactivated
You can deactivate the cell if you mark the option Deactivated. Thus the
cell and its contents are invisible - it seemed to be deleted. It does not affect your legend anymore.
Do not render in
Plot-Designer
The option Do not render in Plot-Designer serves to accelerate the

screen update. The contents of the cell is not displayed.
Manual
17.2.7 11
Chapter 17 Output
The Size page allows you to specify both the height (vertical size) and the
width (horizontal size) size of the cell. Since the width and height are specified in an analogous manner, only the width is described in detail.
Size
17.2.7
Page Size
Determine cell width automatically - CadnaA Plot-Designer will automatically calculate an appropriate width of the cell. For text cells, the
width is computed from the text being displayed. For container cells, the
width is computed from the widths of the cells child cells.
Cells Width
As large as possible - The cell will be as wide as possible: it will fill the
horizontal space available for it.
At least, exactly, at most - Type the width of the cell and choose the corresponding unit from the drop-down list.
At least - Choose At least to allow the cell to be wider. CadnaA will assign the cell a larger width if there is room for it.
Exactly - Choose exactly from the drop-down list to force the cell to be
exactly the width you supplied.
At most - Choose at most to allow the cell to be smaller in case there is
not enough room for it.
Manual
17
12
17.2.7
Chapter 17 Output
The sizes property - at least, exactly, at most - and the setting as large as
possible determine the priority how the space will be shared.
at least
exactly
at most
If there are only cells with the properties at least, exactly, at most, the
space for the cell with the property at least will be accomplished first, then
the space for the cell with the property exactly and at the end the space for
the cell with the property at most. Thus if there is not enough space for all
cells the cell with the size property at least will have the best measurement.
As large
as possible
The cells property As large as possible forces the cell to occupy the utmost space. This is for two cells with the property As large as possible
50% each of the space available.
If only one of the two cells has the size property As large as possible and
the other one the property automatically then the cell with the setting automatically occupies the lowest possible space but again dependent on the
cell type and the style properties of the father cell.
Margins
17.2.7
The Margins page of the Edit Legend Cell dialog box allows you to specify a cells margins. The margins are white space around the edge of the
cell, similar to the margins on a piece of paper. With that e.g. you could indent a text in a text cell or reduce a bitmap in a bitmap cell.
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
17.2.7 13
Page Margins
Choose the method used to specify the margins. You have three choices:
specifying a single margin for all four sides of the cell, specifying different
margins for the left-right and top-bottom sides of the cell, and specifying
the margins for all four sides individually.
17
Manual
14
17.2.7
Borders
Chapter 17 Output
17.2.7
The Borders page of the Edit Legend Cell dialog box allows you to specify a cells borders. The borders are optional lines that can be drawn
around some or all of the four edges of the cell, just outside of the margins.
Page Border
Choose the method used to specify the borders. You have four choices:
displaying no borders, specifying a single border style for all four sides of
the cell, specifying different border styles for the left-right and top-bottom
sides of the cell, and specifying the border styles for all four sides individually.
Select the desired color(s) of the line(s) used to draw the borders.
Type the desired width(s) of the line(s) used to draw the borders, in millimeters. If a width of zero is specified, then the border is not drawn.
17
Manual
17.2.7 15
Chapter 17 Output
The Style page of the Edit Legend Cell dialog box allows you to specify
the visual appearance of a cell: its color, font, and justification.
Style
17.2.7
Page Style
Select the background color and type of the cell. Note that for some container cells, the background color will not be visible, as the entire cell will be
filled with other cells that have their own background colors.
Background
Text Font - Select the font used to display the cells text. This is relevant
only for text cells.
Font
Also the devisee of properties can be defined. If the option inherit is activated the children cells inherit the properties of the father cell.
Inherit
from Father
It is an advantage to make the styles settings in the father cell and to activate the option inherit in the children cells. In case of style changes
you only need to change the style in the father cell and all children
cells adopt the changes too.
Select how the cells contents are justified. Vertical: Top, Center or Bottom, horizontal: left aligned, centered or right aligned.
Manual
17
Aligment
16
17.2.7
Chapter 17 Output
The contens of the last page of the Edit Legend Cell dialog box depends on
the cell type you have chosen.
Cell Type
Plan
17.2.7
Page Plan
The Plan page allows you to choose the Print Range - Limits, Window,
Section - the graphical Scale, Variant and the evaluation parameter. If
you choose Standard for the Print Range to the settings made in the print
dialog is revert to.
With these possibilities you are able to print out several graphics or noise
maps for different evaluation parameters and/or variants in one plot.
17
The option Paint entire cell has only an effect if the Print Range either
Window or Section is chosen. With activated option CadnaA displays
more of the graphics if there is enough room as if the Print Range Window or Section actually would show. (For more information concerning
Print Range see chapter 17.2.3).
The option Axis Labeling allows you to print the coordinates on all four
sides of your plan. A value entered in the option box Margin (mm) produced a white space between the plan and the coordinates.
Manual
17.2.7 17
Chapter 17 Output
The 3D page allows you to choose 3D-Special-Views either as shaded or

as wireframe presentation. For that you need an named Aux. Polygon
which serves as Camera. Select the name of the desired polygon in the
Camera Polygon box.
3D
17.2.7
Page 3D
The option Shaded Presentation allows you to choose the Resolution in

dpi and the option Wireframe Presentation gives the possibilty to enter a
individual graphical Scale. Additionally you can choose the variant from
the drop-down list if you have several variants in your project. Thus you
have the possibility to present different variants in one plot.
Try these possibilities with the file 3DPlot.cna on your Program-CD in
Samples|Tutorial|Output|Plot-Designer.
3DPlot.cna
17
Manual
18
17.2.7
Text
Chapter 17 Output
17.2.7
The Text page of the Edit Legend Cell dialog allows you to enter and
change a text for your legend. Type the desired text in the box provided.
The text can have as many lines as desired: press the ENTER key to insert a
new line.
Page Text
The text can include key words (see chapter 17.4), placeholder for text automatically displayed when the text box is closed by pressing the OK button. For example, the key word for Textblocks #(Text, PI_TITEL) - see
chapter 16.6 - is automatically replaced with the contents of the field Project Name in the menu File|Project-Info. The following key words make
sense, too: #(Scale) to display the graphical scale or #(Datum) to display
the current date or the contents of the description of a Section.
Key Words
17
Symbol
17.2.7
Maintain Aspect Ratio
The Symbol page allows you to select and print a CadnaA symbol (see
chapter 13.11.3).
That the element does not adjust to the cell measurements and gets bulky
activate the option Maintain Aspect Ratio. That keeps the proportion of
the element.
Manual
17.2.7 19
Chapter 17 Output
With the Bitmap page you are able to select a picture in bitmap format.
For that click on the Tab icon and choose the desired bitmap. If you do not
want the bitmap to adjust to the sizes bitmap cell activate the option
Maintain Aspect Ratio.
Bitmap
17.2.7
The Legend page allows you to select from the drop-down list predefined
captions describing the noise map (color-noise level-scale), the used objects or land uses in your plot.
Legend
17.2.7
With a entry in the field Suffix you can determin the unit of the noise level
describing e.g. the grid caption. For example if you enter dB(A)then is
dB(A) displayed in your grid caption as unit for the noise levels .
Suffix
17
Manual
20
17.2.7
Chapter 17 Output
17
Manual

17.2.8 1
17.2.8 Example: Template File for Graphics of a

User-defined Printout
(All key words and explanations are accessible on the online help system
via the search topic " key word...".)
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1)
Key words
17.2.8
Command (see Chapter 17.4.24):

#(PosPush)
Saves the current position for subsequent retrieval. In our example, the
current position is the top left corner (x/y = 0/0 - Standard).
Manual
17
17.2.8

Command (see Chapter 17.4.27):

#(RectAbs,-1,-1)
draws a rectangle from the current position (top left corner) to the positions specified by the parameters 1 and 2. In this case, parameter 1 is the
distance in millimetres from the right page margin (because the value is
negative), and parameter 2 is the distance in millimetres from the bottom
margin (because the value is negative).
The margin is the distance from the permissible printing range of the
printer in question plus the page margins entered on the print menu.
Now the current position is the bottom right corner, 1 mm from the bottom
margin, and 1 mm from the right margin.
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1)#(PosPop,,,z)
The command #(PosPop,,,z) retrieves from the stack (memory) the position previously saved using PosPush (the top left corner in our example),
making it the current position, without removing the saved position from
the stack. The current position is the top left corner again.
#(PosPop,,,z) #(PlanAttr)#(Plan,-60,-1,-1)
The command #(Plan,-60,-1) (see Chapter 17.4.21) identifies the area
where the diagrams are to be placed.
The first parameter defines the position, in millimetres, from the right margin (negative value), i. e. 6 cm from the right margin in our example.
17
The second parameter defines the position, in millimetres, from the bottom
margin, i. e. 1 mm from the bottom print margin in our example.
The third parameter (>0) is the scale factor. 1,000 for example means that
the diagram is printed at a scale of 1:1,000. If the third parameter is negative (as in the example), the scale will be chosen to fit the specified paper
size. If the third parameter is not given, as in #(Plan,-60,-1), the scale specified for the representation on the screen will be used.
Manual

17.2.8 3
The fourth parameter determines whether to print the limits, the area visible on the screen (enter Window instead of Limits), or a Section. In the latter case, the name of the section must be given. If the name of the section
is, e. g., Development_Area, this must be entered. In our example, the set
scale will be used for printing.
If no fourth parameter is given, the option selected on the print dialog is
applied.
#(PlanAttr) (see Chapter 17.4.22) without parameters is drawn in the area

where the graphics are placed without a coordinate scale. This key word
must appear before the command #(Plan). The map attribute #(PlanAttr,20,tblr), on the other hand, draws a coordinate scale at a specified distance (first parameter) of 20 mm from each side of the diagramw. The
second parameter tblr determines which sides to place the scale on top,
bottom, left, right. In this case, all four sides are scaled.
Manual
17
17.2.8

So far the complete command is, including the coordinate scale,

#(PosPop,,,z) #(PlanAttr,20,oulr) #(Plan,-60,-1,)
If you find the distance too large between the scale and the diagram,
change the command to #(PlanAttr,5,tblr). It will only be 5 mm thencommand.
17
#(PosPop)
#(PosPush)
#(PlanAttr,5,oulr)
#(Plan,-60,-1,1,Limits)#(PosPop,x)
The command #(PosPop,x) leaves the current x coordinate unchanged
and, in this example, retrieves from the stack the y coordinate (=0) saved
using #(PosPush).This y coordinate becomes the current position.
Manual

17.2.8 5
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1)#(PosPop)
#(PosPush)#(PlanAttr,5,oulr)#(Plan,-60,-1,-1,
Litmits)
#(PosPop,x)
#(MoveRel,5)
#(Einzug)#(Font,,10)
As a result of the command #(MoveRel,5) (see Chapter 17.4.19), the current position is moved to the right by 5 mm, making this the new current
position.
The command #(Einzug) (see Chapter 17.4.3) indents to this position everything that follows.
The command #(Font,,10) results in all subsequent texts being printed using the Arial font, 10 pt size.
The very first font command in our template file remains valid until the
next font command is given. This means that the coordinate scale of the
map is printed out using Arial font, 6 pt size.
Manual
17
17.2.8

Individual
Text
No RETURN or BLANK should be entered in the commands above,

even if the line grows too long to fit the screen. If a RETURN or
BLANK were entered, this would also be interpreted as a command,
and would be executed accordingly.
The commands for placing the graphics have now been completed.
17.2.8
If you enter this sentence in the template file, it will also be printed.
This means that an individual text for a key can be printed out with the diagrams.
Make sure that the text is placed outside the specified map area - #(Plan,60,-1,-1). This has been taken into account in the commands above.
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1)#(PosPop)
#(PosPush)#(PlanAttr,5,oulr)#(Plan,-60,1,)#(PosPop,x)#(MoveRel,5)#(Einzug)
#(Font,,10)
The commands for placing the graphics
have now been completed.
Whereas no Blanks or Returns should be entered in the commands

controlling the printout of the diagrams/graphics, you may and have
to do so for an individual text. No automatic line breaking is executed!
As a result of our key word commands, an area of 60 mm - 5 mm,

(#(Plan,-60) minus (MoveRel,5)), thus 55-mm-wide, is available for the
text in our example, if this text is to be placed outside the diagrams.
17
#(PosPop)#(PosPush) #(PlanAttr,5,oulr) #(Plan,60,-1,) #(PosPop,x) #(MoveRel,5) #(Einzug)
#(Font,,10)
Manual

17.2.8 7

#(Legende)
A command containing the key word #(Legende), and appearing below
the text entered, results in the level-color palette being printed out.
Insert three or four Returns in the template file before the #(Legende)
command in order to view the effect of this.
Then remove the RETURNS again to gain space for more important information, such as project identification, the name of the person who ordered
the report, or even an image (logo).
The following commands result in a printout as illustrated below.
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,1)#(PosPop)#(PosPush) #(PlanAttr,5,oulr) #(Plan,60,-1,)#(PosPop,x)#(MoveRel,5)#(Einzug)
#(Font,,10)
#(Legende)
#(Text,Project)
Scale 1:#(Scale)
Munich, #(Datum)
#(Text,Adress)
The command #(Text,Project) and #(Text,Address) insert the texts entered
on the menu Tables|Libraries|Text Blocks. "Project" and "Address" are
text blocks.
Manual
17
17.2.8

If you wish to print an image, or a logo, in either bitmap or metafile format, one of the commands #(Bitmap) (see Chapter 17.4.1) or #(Metafile)
(see Chapter 17.4.17) - with the pertinent parameters - must appear in the
template file.
To avoid having to save and retrieve the current position over and over
again using PosPush and PosPop, it is useful to put this command at the
end of the template file, and enter absolute dimensions like in the following example.
#(MoveAbs,-40,110)#(Bitmap,c:\dtp\bilder\schelm01.bmp,10,20)
#(MoveAbs,-40,110) sets the current position to 4 cm from the right margin and 11 cm from the top margin.
#(Bitmap, path + file name, horizontal size, vertical size)
The commands MoveAbs and Bitmap should appear on one line. (Otherwise, an additional RETURN would be made from the absolute position).
17
Manual

17.2.8 9
17
Manual
10
17.2.8

17
Manual
17.2.9 1

Print Preview
17.2.9 Print Preview

The Preview button opens the print preview window with a full-screen display of the diagram/graphics or the report, depending on whether Print
Report (see Chapter 17.2.2) or Print Graphics (see Chapter 17.2.3) was
selected.
In order to obtain a realistic print preview, you must, of course, specify all
printing parameters printer, paper size, page layout, page margins etc.
as customary.
You can Copy the print preview in the Windows clipboard as Metafile or
Bitmap for further use in a third-party software program, e.g., like a wordprocessing or graphics program. If you choose Bitmap you can enter a resolution.
Button
Copy
17.2.9
The Zoom button serves to switch from full-screen to an actual-size preview and back. To zoom in on a particular area of the print preview, click
the desired location once. The next mouse click restores the initial situation.
Button
Zoom
17.2.9
The print command may also be started from the print preview window by
clicking the Print button.
Button
Print
17.2.9
If you have selected user-defined printing, and opened and edited a template file via the Edit button, you need not close this file. CadnaA will update the print preview window each time you save changes to the file. This
is very convenient and comfortable. We recommend you proceed as follows:
1.
Specify all parameters printer, paper size etc. in the dialog Print.
2.
Open the template file for Editing, and
3.
Minimize the window by clicking the minimise button at the top right
corner of the window.
Manual
17
Minimize
17.2.9
Maximize

Print Preview
4.
Click the Preview button on the Print dialog. If you are not satisfied
with the layout you see on the print preview window, do not close the
print preview window, but
5.
Maximise the template file again by clicking the pertinent icon, (this
will now overlap the dialog Print Preview)
6.
edit it as desired,
7.
save it, and
8.
minimise it again.
During this saving procedure, CadnaA has already updated the display on
the print preview window. Continue like this until you are satisfied with
the result. In doing so, make sure that the print preview window and the
edit window of the template file are the same size, and that the active edit
window lies exactly at the same position as the print preview window
(maximise, if necessary).
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
Export
17.3
17.3 1
Export
Instead of applying the Copy button to individual tables to make them

available via the Windows clipboard for further processing in other applications like word processors or spreadsheet calculation software, you can
use the Export command on the File menu or the Export icon on the icon
bar to export all object parameters at once using any of the formats
CadnaA offers you.
After clicking the command File|Export, the dialog Save File As opens.
In this dialog, select the appropriate file format from the list in the editable
list box, then enter a name for the output file, or select an existing file in
the file selection dialog. (That file will then be overwritten.) OK starts the
export procedure.
The Options button in the dialog Save File As leads you to the editable
parameters for the selected file format.
Once all the desired options have been specified, further exports can be
started by simply clicking the icon on the icon bar.
17
Manual
17.3
Chapter 17 Output
Export
17
Manual
Chapter 17.3 Export

Export Formats
17.3.1 1
17.3.1 Export Formats

The following formats are available:
The noise map can be saved in Ascii-format. The file contains then the coordinates of the limits with the left lower and right upper corner, the x-y-z
coordinates of the grid points and maybe their ground height and the noise
level for day- and night-time.
Ascii-Raster
17.3.1
Bitmap Files
BMP
17.3.1
The exported grid can be imported again in CadnaA with the same-named
import format.
The calculated distribution level is saved into a bitmap file as a grid of areas with equal sound sources independent of the chosen settings for appearance. If the option Area of equal sound source (Grid|Appearance) is
chosen, you can also use the option Oversampling to increase the resolution of the grid.
In addition to the export file a second file is created with the extension
WLD in which the coordinates of the grid are saved. With it, it is possible
to again import the grid with reference to its coordinates in a GIS program
like ArcView, MapInfo etc.
Manual
17
17.3.1
Chapter 17.3 Export

Export Formats
Such files are processed by Lima software from the Stapelfeld company.
Limadateien
BNA,BNX
17.3.1
Immis Luft
Dateien dbf
17.3.1
Height Points
of Buildings
17.3.1
Kompact
protocol
17.3.1
Web-Bitmaps
17.3.1
Interface with the software for airborne emissions from the IVU company,
Berlin and Freiburg, Germany.
see Chapter 6.4.13 "Building Height Points"
see Chapter 12.7 "Compact Protocol"
see Chapter 14.4 "Web-Bitmaps"
17
Manual
Chapter 17.3 Export

17.3.2 1
17.3.2 Text Files TXT / RTF

With both formats you can export calculation results or object tables. With
that, you are able to automate the output of reports by entering the corresponding commands in a template file.
The exported file may be an ASCII (File.TXT) or Rich Text (File.RTF)
format. It is advisable to choose the RTF format, if you wish to edit the file
using a word processor capable of handling this format (such as Word for
Windows or WordPerfect). The attributes of the exported data, and any
frames - as, e. g., for tables - will then remain intact (at least most of
them), and can be further processed using the word processor. For any other software, use ASCII format. (This also applies to Excel, for example.)
The name of the template file (see Chapter 17.2.1) to be applied when exporting the result log (when RTF or TXT format was selected) appears in
the field Template File. This template file is selected via the Select button.
17
Manual
17.3.2
Chapter 17.3 Export

17
Manual
17.3.3 1
Chapter 17.3 Export

AutoCad DXF
17.3.3 AutoCad DXF

DXF files are vector files which are usally generated and imported by
CAD programs like, e.g., AUTOCAD. After clicking the button Options
you can make the following settings:
If this box is not checked, DXF files will be created to match the specifications of CAD software like, e. g., AutoCad.
DXF-file for
AutoSketch
17.3.3
A header will be written which enables the import of the Cadna diagrams
in CAD programs with this request.
generate
Header
17.3.3
If this option is activated, horizontal projections of buildings can be represented as 3-D views after having been exported to the CAD program.
Their surfaces may then be edited (using, e. g., shading) depending on the
CAD program.
Use 3DSurfaces
17.3.3
Output as Polyline
If this box is checked, dB contour lines will be exported to the DXF file as
continuous polylines. Otherwise, isolated sections of lines are exported.
Iso-dB-Lines:
17.3.3
If this box is checked, AutoSketch compatible DXF files will be created,

i. e.,
no 3-D information
layer identification for AutoSketch ("1" - "10")
no "complex" objects like 3-D FACE etc.
Height is Level
When this box is checked, the sound level becomes the height (z coordinate) of the Iso-dB-Lines in the DXF file. Otherwise the sound level is
only visible in the DXF layers and the height of the Iso-dB-Lines is zero.
Output as 3D-Grid
When this box is checked, the sound levels are represented as "mountains"
in the CAD program. A sound level will correspond to a "hill", the higher
the sound level at a corresponding grid point, the higher the hill. Howev-
Manual
Iso-DBRaster:
17
17.3.3
Chapter 17.3 Export

AutoCad DXF
er, this will only work if in the menu Grid|Appearance in CadnaA the option Raster is selected (see Chapter 11.5.2).
No Raster Points
If this option is activated the receiver points of the grid are not exported.
Aircraft
Tracks
17.3.3
see special manual of Airport Noise (only available if you have purchased
the CadnaA extension Airport Noise).
see also chapter Import 6.4.2 AutoCad-DXF
17
Manual
Chapter 17.3 Export

ArcView
17.3.4 1
17.3.4 ArcView
If you wish to view CadnaA files in ArcView or ArcInfo, you must export
them as Shape files. As mentioned under Import (see Chapter 6.4.3
"ArcView"), Shape files have a topic-related structure so that you have to
export the object types separately.
To export, proceed as follows:
Choose File|Export|File Format: ArcView
Enter a name for the file to be created.
Select the type of object to be exported under Options.
If heights are to be exported, select the 3-D option, and confirm by

clicking OK.
The actual exporting procedure will be started when you click OK in

the dialog Save As for the second time.
17
Specify the object type when exporting to ArcView.
Manual
17.3.4
Chapter 17.3 Export

ArcView
Grid export for

ArcView
17.3.4
Export Line and Areas

of equal Sound
Levels
for ArcView
17.3.4
In fact with the activated 3D option (button Options) you can export
the heights of the objects but the user of the export file requires for
the import in ArcInfo or ArcView the Spatial Explorer, a program
extension by ESRI.
You have two possibilities to export the grid of receiver points, either the
areas or Iso-dB-lines or as ArcView Grid with the same-named format. In
this case you would get an file including the x-y-z-coordinates and the dB
results on each point.
You have to make the corresponding settings in Grid|Appearance for exporting lines or areas of equal sound levels before you make your export to
ArcView. If you want to export, e.g., areas of equal sound sources you
must activate this option in Grid|Appearance otherwise lines of equal
sound sources. Define also the class width. CadnaA exports for each
colored area a closed polygon which can be colored correspondingly in
ArcView or ArcInfo.
17
Manual
17.3.4 3
Chapter 17.3 Export

ArcView
Choose File|Export|File Format: Arc View
enter a name for the export file, e.g., LevelAreas.shp. (You must
enter the extension shp is necessary)
Click the button Options and activate Export Iso-dB-Lines
Confirm both dialogs and the export will be executed.
Example
17
Manual
17.3.4
Chapter 17.3 Export

ArcView
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
Keywords
17.4
17.4 1
Keywords
Keywords are commands in a print or export template file (see Chapter

17.2.1), and define the output of the data and the layout.
Keywords for template files, general syntax:
#(Key word, Parameter 1, Parameter 2, ...)
Optional parameters may be omitted. The following key words are currently available:
17
Manual
17.4
Chapter 17 Output
Keywords
17
Manual
Chapter 17.4 Keywords

Bitmap
17.4.1 1
17.4.1 Bitmap
Controls the printing of graphics available as bitmap files, such as BMP
files for logos.
Syntax:
Keyword:
Parameter 1:
Parameter 2:
#(Keyword, Parameter 1{,Parameter 2} {,Parameter

3})
Bitmap
File name (including path, if necessary)
Dimension along x axis (horizontal dimension), in mm
with respect to current position
< 0 to the left, > 0 to the right
Parameter 3:
Dimension along y axis (vertical dimension), in mm

with respect to current position
< 0 upwards, > 0 downwards
Example:
#(MoveAbs,50,100)
Comment
current position is 50 mm to the
left of the right margin and 100
mm below the top margin
#(Bitmap, c:\Schulze\Logo.bmp,100,-50) starting from the current position the graphic is inserted to fit
into a rectangular window
which extends 100 mm to the
right and 50 mm upwards
17
Manual
17.4.2

Datum
17.4.2 Datum
Results in the current date being printed.
Syntax:
Keyword:
#(Keyword)
Datum
Example:
#(Datum)
Comment
Prints the current system date.
17
Manual

Einzug
17.4.3 3
17.4.3 Einzug
Sets an x value for indentation, or a left margin for all subsequent line
breaks.
Syntax:
Keyword:
Parameter 1:
#(Keyword, Parameter 1)
Einzug
indent relative to left margin
> 0 in mm
< 0 in units of one character width of current
font
0,default: sets indentation mark to current
position
Example:
#(Einzug,150)
Comment
sets indentation mark to 150 mm from
left margin.
17
Manual
17.4.4

File
17.4.4 File
Triggers the output of the current file name of the project.
Syntax:
#( Keyword, Parameter)
Keyword:
File
Parameter:
Components of the file name to be exported/printed:

L
(or D) Disk drive
Path
Name (without extension)
Extension
default
NE
Example:
Comment
#(File, LPNE)
results in the output

C:\Projects\A-town\SAN1.CNA, if the project
file is SAN1.CNA and was saved on drive C:\ in
the directory Projects\A-town.
17
Manual

FileDatum
17.4.5 5
17.4.5 FileDatum
This command gives out the creation date of the project file.
Syntax:
Keyword:
#( Keyword)
FileDatum
17
Manual
17.4.6

FileExpIn
17.4.6 FileExpIn
Starts the output of the template file selected for exporting.
Syntax:
#(Keyword)
KeywordKeyword:
FileExpln
Example:
Comment
#(FileExpln)
triggers the output of the name of the template file chosen for exporting the report, e.
g. Export.TXT.
17
Manual

FileExpOut
17.4.7 7
17.4.7 FileExpOut
Starts the output of the export target file.
Syntax:
#( Keyword)
Keyword:
FileExpOut
Example:
Comment
#(FileExpOut)
triggers the output of the name of the

target file chosen for exporting the
report, e. g. SAN1.RTF.
This Keyword can only be used for template files in TXT format which
control printing (not exporting).
Using the RTF format for template files allows you to choose settings for
characters, paragraphs, and tab stops already in the word processor.
17
Manual
17.4.8

FilePrint
17.4.8 FilePrint
This command gives the name out of the Print Report template file.
Syntax:
#( Keyword)
Keyword:
FilePrint
Example:
Comment
#(FilePrint)
gives the name out of the template file chosen for

printing the report, e. g. Druck.TXT.
17
Manual

FileZeit
17.4.9 9
17.4.9 FileZeit
This command gives the time out at which the project file has been created.
Syntax:
Keyword:
#( Keyword)
FileZeit
17
Manual
10
17.4.10

Font
17.4.10 Font
Switches to the desired font. This setting remains valid until the next font
commend is encountered.
Syntax:
#( Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2,

Parameter3)
Keyword:
Font
Parameter 1:
Font name (Default Arial)
Parameter 2:
Font size in pt (Default 10)
Parameter 3:
fkus (Style: f: Bold k: Italics, u: Underlined, s: Strikeout)
Example:
Comment
#(Font, Courier, 12, fk)
results in a text output using 12 pt bold

face italic Courier font. If one parameter
is omitted, the corresponding attribute
remains unchanged.
#(Font,,12,fk)
results in a text output using 12 pt bold

face italic Arial (default) font.
17
Manual

If, Tag
17.4.11 11
17.4.11 If, Tag

The keyword If, Tag enables the output of an individual text, depending
wether the noise map of daytime or nighttime is displayed on the screen.
Syntax:
#(Keyword, daytime-string, nighttime-string)
Keyword:
If, Tag
daytimestring:
output of the text for the noise map for daytime
Nighttimestring:
output of the text for the noise map for nighttime
Example:
#(If,Tag, Noise Map of Daytime, Noise Map of Nighttime) causes the output of the term Noise Map of Daytime if the level of the daytime is displayed on the screen otherwise the second term Noise Map of Nighttim.
17
Manual
12
17.4.12

Legende
17.4.12 Legende
controls the layout of the key (orientation with respect to current position
and assigning of colours to levels).
Syntax:
#(Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2)
Keyword:
Legende
Parameter 1:
Character string
f frame (Key appears in a box)
horizontal character justification
l Left
m Centre
r Right
Vertical character justification
u Bottom
b Centre
o Top
default: lo
Parameter 2:
17
Character string printed as unit after the values

listed in the key - default: "dB"
Example:
Comment
#(Legende,,deziBel)
> 30 decibels
Manual

LegendeNutz
17.4.13 13
17.4.13 LegendeNutz
Steuert den Ausdruck der Legende - Gebietsausweisung - (Ausrichtung
relativ zur aktuellen Position sowie Zuordnung Farbe-Gebiet)
Manipulates the output of the caption - area of designated land use (alignment relativ to the current position and assignment color-area)
Syntax:
Keyword:
LegendeNutz
Parameter 1:
character-String
f frame (caption is framed)
Oriantation of the caption starting from the current
position
Horizontalausrichtung
Horizontal Adjustment
l left
m center
r right
Vertikalausrichtung
Vertical Adjustment
u below
b center
o above
default: lo
Hint: the caption of the area of designated land use can also be directly
inserted in the graphics via the toolbox icon
Manual
17
14
17.4.14

LegendeObj
17.4.14 LegendeObj
Steuert den Ausdruck der Objektlegende. Nur fr die Objekte, die sich in
der Projektdatei befinden wird eine Kurzbeschreibung mit grafischen Elementen ausgegeben.
Manipulates the output of the object legend. Only for the objects used in
the project file is given out the short description with graphical elements.
Syntax:
Keyword:
LegendeObj
Parameter 1:
character-String
f frame (caption is framed)
Zeichen Horizontalausrichtung
Character for the horizontal adjustment
l left
m center
r right
Zeichen Vertikalausrichtung
Character for the vertical adjustment
u below
b center
17
o above
default: lo
Hint: the caption / legend of objects can also be directly inserted in the
graphics via the toolbox icon.
Manual

LineAbs
17.4.15 15
17.4.15 LineAbs
draws a line from the current position to the specified coordinates.
Syntax:
Keyword:
LineAbs
Parameter 1:
x co-ordinate of line end point in mm,

0 from left margin
< 0 from right margin
0 (default): no change in x
Parameter 2:
y co-ordinate of line end point in mm,

> 0 from top margin
< 0 from bottom margin
0 (default): no change in y
Example:
Comment
#(MoveAbs,20,30)
sets current position to 20/30
#(LineAbs,40,60)
draws line from 20/30 to 40/60.

17
Manual
16
17.4.16

LineRel
17.4.16 LineRel
draws a line from the current cursor position to the end point specified by
displacements along x and y axes.
Syntax:
Keyword:
LineRel
Parameter 1:
displacement along x (horizontal) axis in mm

> 0 to the left
< 0 to the right
Parameter 2:
displacement along y (vertical) axis in mm

< 0 upwards
> 0 downwards
Example:
Comment
#(MoveAbs,50,50)
#(LineRel,30,-20)
draws line from 50/50 to 80/30.
17
Manual

Metafile
17.4.17 17
17.4.17 Metafile
Controls the output of graphics which are available as metafile.
Syntax:
#(Keyword, Parameter 1{,Parameter 2}

{,Parameter 3})
Keyword:
Metafile
Parameter 1:
File name (including path, if necessary)
Parameter 2:
Dimension along x axis (horizontal dimension),

in mm
starting from the current position
< 0 to the left, > 0 to the right
Parameter 3:
Dimension along y axis (vertical dimension),

in mm
starting from the current position
< 0 upwards, > 0 downwards
Example:
Comment
#(MoveAbs,50,100)
starting from the current position the graphic is inserted to fit

into a rectangular
window which
extends 100 mm to
the right and 50 mm
upwards
Manual
17
18
17.4.17

Metafile
#(Metafile, c:\Schulze\Logo.wmf,100,-50)
starting from the current position the graphic is inserted to fit

into a rectangular
window which
extends 100 mm to
the right and 50 mm
upwards
17
Manual

MoveAbs
17.4.18 19
17.4.18 MoveAbs
Sets the current position to the given co-ordinates.
Syntax:
Keyword:
MoveAbs
Parameter 1:
x (or horizontal) co-ordinate in (mm) from page

margin
> 0 from left margin
< 0 from right margin
0 (default): no change in x
Parameter 2:
y (or vertical) co-ordinate in (mm) from page

margin
> 0 from top margin
< 0 from bottom margin
0 (default): no change in y
Example:
Comment
#(MoveAbs,-50,100)
sets current position to 50 mm from

right margin, 100 mm below the top
margin.
Manual
17
20
17.4.19

MoveRel
17.4.19 MoveRel
Sets current position by specification of displacements along the x and y
axes.
Syntax:
Keyword:
MoveRel
Parameter 1:

> 0 to the left
< 0 to the right
Parameter 2:

< 0 upwards
> 0 downwards
Example:
Comment
#(MoveAbs,50,50)
#(MoveRel,30,-20)
sets current position to 80/30.
17
Manual

NeueSeite
17.4.20 21
17.4.20 NeueSeite
Forces a pagebreak and sets the current cursor position to the beginning of
the new page, (0/0).
Syntax:
#(Keyword)
Keyword:
NeueSeite
Example:
Comment
#(NeueSeite)
subsequent text will appear on the next

page.
characters, paragraphs, tab stops, and pagebreaks already in the word processor.
17
Manual
22
17.4.21

Plan
17.4.21 Plan
Sets size and scale, and specifies trimmed area of the map (graphic) for the
printout.
Syntax:
#(Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter

3, Parameter 4)
Keyword:
Plan
Parameters 1 and 2 specify a rectangular part of the map with respect to

the current position. The x co-ordinate of the second corner is specified
by parameter 1, its y co-ordinate by parameter 2.
Parameter 1:
width of printout in mm
> 0 x position of second corner with respect to current
position
< 0 distance of second corner from right page margin
Parameter 2:
height of printout in mm
> 0 y position of second corner with respect to current
position
< 0 distance of second corner from bottom page margin
Parameter 3:
17
scale factor (If the scale is 1:1000 the scale factor will
be 1000)
> 0 scale factor
< 0 fit map
0, default: use current scale
Manual

Plan
Parameter 4:
default
character string specifying the trimmed area of the graphic to be printed

Window
prints the part visible on the screen
Wrap-Around
prints the entire limits (defined

under Options|Wrap-Around)
Name
prints the trimmed area of the specified name
Co-ordinates
x,y top left and x,y bottom right in

mm (e. g. 10,20,120,250)
If Parameter 4 is not specified, the settings made under

Print Graphic (Limits, Window or Trimmed Area)
will be applied.
Example:
Comment
#(MoveAbs,50,50)
set current position to 50/50.
#(Plan,150,100,,0,0,1200,2500)
In the horizontal (x) direction, the

space reserved for the graphic
extends from 50 mm to 200 mm, in
the vertical (y) direction from 50
mm to 150 mm. The scale used is
that of the current on-screen display, and the trimmed area shown is
that part of the map between 0/0
and 1200/2500 m, which fits into
the reserved space at that scale.
Manual
17.4.21 23
17
24
17.4.22

PlanAttr
17.4.22 PlanAttr
sets attributes for the representation of scales
Syntax:
Keyword:
PlanAttr
No parameter
no co-ordinate scales are drawn
Parameter 1:
width reserved for scales and labelling of axes

within the frame of the representation of the map,
in mm
Parameter 2:
string for the specification of frame lines (axes) to

be labelled
l scale and label at left margin
r scale and label at right margin
o or t scale and label at top margin
u or b scale and label at bottom margin
default: no labelling of axes
17
Example:
Comment
#(PlanAttr,lrbt)
All four sides are labelled.
Manual

PosPop
17.4.23 25
17.4.23 PosPop
Gets position saved using PosPush from stack making it the current position.
Syntax:
#(Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3)
Keyword:
PosPop
Parameter 1:
if not void leave x unchanged
Parameter 2:
if not void leave y unchanged
Parameter 3:
if not void, stack remains unchanged

default: remove last entry from stack
Example:
Comment
#(PosPop,,y)
Gets x co-ordinate from stack
#(PosPop,x)
Gets y co-ordinate from stack
#(PosPop,,,z)
Gets saved position from stack leaving stack

unchanged.
17
Manual
26
17.4.24

PosPush
17.4.24 PosPush
Saves current position (x/y) on stack - no parameters.
Syntax:
#(Keyword)
Keyword:
PosPush
Example:
Comment
#(PosPush)
Saves x and y co-ordinates of current position.
17
Manual

Range
17.4.25 27
17.4.25 Range
The keyword displays the contens of an attribut from a section, e.g. ID,
BEZ or MEMO_X (wereas X a variable in the MEMO field is) which can
be used in a textbox or text cell of the Plot-Designer but the contents is
only shown by printing. This enables you to create a printlayout for several
sections with output of their individual description.
Syntax:
Schlsselwort:
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
#(Schlsselwort)
Range
#(Range, Parm1, Parm2)
identifier of the attributt which has to be printed, e.g.
ID, BEZ (=Description, also multiline)
iis optional the name of a Plan cell in the Plot-Designer in which the section is displayed. With that you
can also refer to several section beyong a cell (e.g. as
a legend)
Example: see file AusschnittSectionDescription.cna
17
Manual
28
17.4.26

RasterBewertung
In the left-hand section a textbox is included which contains the keyword

#(Range,BEZ). The description of the section is not directly displayed but
only if you print the plan via the Plot-Designer.
The section on the right-hand side includes also a description but the keyword is only used in the textcell of the Plot-Designer with refers to the
plan cell in which the section is displayed. In such case the content of the
choosen attribut is displayed outside the plan cell.
17.4.26 RasterBewertung
Syntax:
Keyword:
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
#(Keyword)
RasterBewertung
#(RasterBewertung, Bez_Rasterbewertung, t/n, x)
Name of the formula for grid evaluation
t/n (t:Day, n:Night) - if this parameter is not used the
current value for day and night is displayed if the display is switched from day- to night-time, otherwise
only the day-time value (t) or the night-time value (n)
is displayed independed from display.
decimal place
17
Manual

RectAbs
17.4.27 29
17.4.27 RectAbs
draws a rectangle with one corner point lying at the current position, and
the opposite corner lying at the co-ordinates to be specified. Sides are parallel to x and y axes.
Syntax:
#(Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2))
Keyword
RectAbs
Parameter 1:
x co-ordinate of specified corner in mm from page

margin
> 0 to the left
< 0 to the right
0 (default): no change in x co-ordinate
Parameter 2:
y co-ordinate of specified corner in mm from page

margin
from top margin
from bottom margin
0 (default): no change in y co-ordinate
Example:
Comment
#(MoveAbs, 20,50)
#(RectAbs,60,100)
draws rectangle 20/50, 60/50, 80/100, 20/

100.
Manual
17
30
17.4.28

RectRel
17.4.28 RectRel
draws a rectangle with sides parallel to x and y axes, with one corner lying
at the current position and the opposite corner specified by displacements
along x and y axes.
Syntax:
Keyword:
RectRel
Parameter 1:

> 0 to the left
< 0 to the right
Parameter 2:

< 0 upwards
> 0 downwards
Example:
Comment
#(MoveAbs, 20,50)
#(RectRel,60,100)
draws rectangle 20/50, 80/50, 80/150, 20/

150.
17
Manual

Scale
17.4.29 31
17.4.29 Scale
Prints out selected scale (value is allocated automatically).
Syntax:
#(Keyword)
Keyword:
Scale
Example:
Comment
#(Scale)
prints out selected scale
The Keyword #(Scale) can be inserted directly into a text box in the graphical representation. This results in a display and printout of the scale directly within the graphic. If the printing option is set to Re-scale, the
graphical printout will show the scale value determined by the system.
17
Manual
32
17.4.30

Seite
17.4.30 Seite
Triggers the output of the current page number.
Syntax:
#(Keyword)
Keyword:
Seite
Example:
Comment
#(Tabs,150)#(Tab)Seite #(Seite)
sets a tab stop at a distance of 15

cm on the tab ruler, causes the cursor to jump to that stop and "page
3" to be written on the third page.
characters, paragraphs, tab stops, and page numbering already in the word
processor.
17
Manual

Tab
17.4.31 33
17.4.31 Tab
Makes the cursor hop to the next tab stop (like hitting the TAB key in your
word processor).
Syntax:
#( Keyword{,Parameter})
Keyword:
Tab
Parameter:
The number of tab stops the cursor is supposed to jump forward, as an integer
value.
Example 1:
Comment
#(Tab,2)
The cursor moves forward by two tab

stops.
#(Tab)
No parameter - The cursor moves forward

by one tab stop.
Example 2:
Comment
#(MoveAbs,30,100)
Sets current position to (30/100)
#(Tabs,20,50,100)#(Tab,2
) This is a text.
This is a text." is printed at the tab position 100.
This Keyword may be used in headers and footers, too (see Report Print
dialog, Options).
Manual
17
34
17.4.32

Table
17.4.32 Table
Output of the desired object table.
Object Tables
17.4.32
Syntax:
#( Keyword, Parameter)
Keyword:
Table
Parameter 1:
Identification of table
Example:
Comment
#(Table, PPL)
generates a list of the data for parking lots
The following tables can be selected by using the identification of the table
as parameter:
Configurations
Table
Parameter:
Calculation configuration settings
CalcConf
Result Table
Table
Result Table in menu Tables
Parameter:
Ergtab
17
Manual

Table
17.4.32 35
Sources
Table
Optimized source
Area source
Power plant
Table of all parameter
only input data
Emissions spectren
Geometry data
Crossing
Line source
Parking lot RLS
Parking lot
Point source
Directivity
Railway
Road
Tennis point of service
Train class
Numbers of trains
Parameter
Bplan
FQ
FV
Kraftwerk
Kraftwerk
K_Inp
K_Emi
K_Geo
Ampel
LQ
PPLRLS
PPL
PQ
Richtw
Schiene
Strasse
Tennis
SchieneZkl
Zugzahlen
Table
3D-Reflector
Built-up area
Foliage
Ground absorption
Bridge
Line of fault, see Geometry table
Contour line, see Geometry table
Height points see Geometry table
Building
Building evaluation
Barrier
Parameter
Screen3d
Bebauung
Bewuchs
Bodenabs
Bruecke
omitted!!
omitted!!
omitted!!
Haus
Hausbeurt
Schirm
Obstacles
Manual
17
36
17.4.32

Table
Embankment
Cylinder
Wall
Zylinder
Immissions
Table
Parameter
Receiver points
Imm
Night-time immission spectrum
ImmSpekN
Daytime immission spectrum
ImmSpekT
Daytime and night-time immission spectrum ImmSpek
Partial levels
Teilpegel
Night-time partial levels of sources at immis-TeilpegelNacht
sion points
Daytime partial levels of sources at immis- TeilpegelTag
sion points
Spectra of night-time partial levels
TeilpegelNachtS
Spectra of daytime partial levels
TeilpegelTagS
Group
Gruppe
Group with night-time sum-over-the-group GruppeNacht
partial level
Group with daytime sum-over-the-group par-GruppeTag
tial level
Displays the calculated spectra for the group GruppeTagS
of source at the receiver point in the day-time
dito for night-time
GruppeNachtS
Miscellaneous Objects
17
Table
Section
Bitmap
Auxiliary polygon
Area of designated land use
Level box
Calculation area
Parameter
omitted!!
omitted!!
omitted!!
Nutz
omitted!!
omitted!!
Manual

Table
Symbol
Text box
17.4.32 37
omitted!!
omitted!!
Libraries (local)
Table
Absorption coefficient spectra
Sound power spectra
Sound reduction index spectra
Parameter
LibAlf
LibL
LibR
Air-traffic noise
Table
Groups of aircraft with octave-band levels and directivity factors
Groups of aircraft with characteristic quantities
Reference points for airfields
Reference points for airfields with runways
Air routes
Numbers of air routes
Geometry Tables
Parameter
Built-up area
Bebauung_Geo
Foliage
Bewuchs_Geo
Line of fault
Bruch_Geo
Bridge
Bruecke_Geo
Area source
FQ_Geo
FV_Geo
Air route
FlugstreckeGeo
Areas with specified ground absorp-Bodenabs_Geo
tion
Building
Haus_Geo
Contour line
Hline_Geo
Line source
LQ_Geo
Area of designated land use
Nutz_Geo
Manual
Parameter
Aircraft
AircraftZvh
Flugplatz
FlugplatzRwy
Flugstrecke
FlugstreckeAnz
Geometry
Tables
17.4.32
17
38
17.4.32

Table
Parking lot
Railway
Barrier
Road
Cylinder
PPL_Geo
Schiene_Geo
Schirm_Geo
Strasse_Geo
Zylinder_Geo
17
Manual

Tabs
17.4.33 39
17.4.33 Tabs
Marks tab stops on the tab ruler. A maximum of nine positions can be defined individually. Further tab stops after the last tab position defined will
be located equidistantly at the same distance as specified for the last and
the second last tab stops.
Syntax:
#( Keyword,Parameter 1 {,Parameter 2} . . .
{,Parameter 9})
Keyword:
Tabs
Parameter n:
< 0 distance of the nth tab stop from the left margin in units of the character width of the active
font.
> 0 distance of the nth tab stop from the left margin in mm
Default: every 1.25 cm
17
Manual
40
17.4.33

Tabs
Example 1:
#(Tabs,20,40,65)
Tab stops are located at 20 mm, 40 mm, 65

mm, 90 mm, 115 mm etc. from the left
margin.
Example 2:
#(Tabs, -5,-8)
The first tab stop is located at a distance of

5 times the character width of the active
font from the left margin, the second, third,
and fourth stops are located at a distance of
8, 11, and 14 times the character width,
respectively, etc.
17
Manual

Text
17.4.34 41
17.4.34 Text
Output of the local and global text blocks saved under Tables|Libraries|
Text blocks.
Syntax:
#(Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2,

Parameter 3, Parameter 4))
Keyword:
Text
Parameter 1:
Text block name
Parameter 2:
Default text if no textblock (Parameter 1)

exists
Parameter 3:
Prefix, if Parameter 1 exists
Parameter 4:
Suffix, if Parameter 1 exists
Example:
Comment
#(Text, PI_AUTHOR,,
Processor:, \n)
output of the text saved in a textblock

named "PI_AUTHOR". In front of the
text is written Processor: and a carrige
return follows.
Result:
Processor:
Bernd Huber
without Parameter 4
Processor: Bernd Huber

17
Manual
42
17.4.35

Variants
17.4.35 Variants
The keyword enables the output of the variant identifier (Tables|Variant),
e.g., in a text box in the graphics or in the printout.
Syntax:
#(Keyword, Parameter)
Keyword:
Variante or VarianteL
Beispiel:
Kommentar
#(Variante)
output of the short identifier of the variant
#(VarianteL)
output of the variant identifier (the long term)
#(VarianteL,2)
output of the identifier of the variant 2
The term:
The variant #(Variante,2) indicates the status of the #(VarianteL,2).
results in:
The variant P2wNRM indicates the status of the Planning 2002 with
Noise Reduction Measure.
if:
the short identifier of the variant 2 is P2wNRM and if in its field Name is
inserted: Planning 2002 with Noise Reduction Measure.
17
Manual

VarianteM
17.4.36 43
17.4.36 VarianteM
VarianteM enables the output of the contents of the variants Memo-Field.
Syntax:
#(Keyword, Parameter)
Keyword:
VarianteM
Parameter
number of the variant
Example:
Comment
#(VarianteM)
Memo-field of the current displayed

variant
#(VarianteM,2)
Memo-field of the variant no. two
17
Manual
44
17.4.37

Version
17.4.37 Version
Output of the current version number of the CadnaA program.
Syntax:
Keyword:
#(Keyword)
Version
Example:
#(Version)
Comment
e.g. Version 3.2
17
Manual

Zabst
17.4.38 45
17.4.38 Zabst
sets the line spacing (vertical displacement for line breaks) to the desired
value.
Syntax:
#(Keyword,Parameter)
Keyword:
ZAbst
Parameter:
0 line spacing in mm
< 0 line spacing as percentage of the character size
Default -100, i. e. line spacing is 1
Example:
Comment
#(ZAbst, -150)
sets the line spacing to 1.5
17
Manual
46
17.4.39

Zeit
17.4.39 Zeit
Triggers the output of the current system time.
Syntax:
#(Keyword)
Keyword:
Zeit
Example:
Comment
#(Zeit)
Output of current system time.
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The Connection CadnaA with BASTIAN
17.5
17.5 1
The Connection CadnaA with

BASTIAN
BASTIAN is a program for building acoustics by DataKustik, Munich,

Germany. BASTIAN calculates the airborne and impact sound insulation
according to EN 12354 /53/ part 1, 2 and 3 in frequency spectra or with
single number ratings. All performance parameters according to ISO 7171 and -2 /54/ are available. Furthermore BASTIAN enables the calculation
of the structural reverberation time according to EN 12354-1, annex C.
BASTIAN has been developed by Datakustik, Munich.
Now, how does CadnaA work together with BASTIAN?
The sound levels are calculated with CadnaA at defined receiver points e.g., in front of building facades. In the program BASTIAN, when simultanously opened, these receiver points are visible in the list of the outdoor
sources during calculation of sound transmission.
This enables you to calculate the indoor level with a building construction
defined in BASTIAN. With this connection the indoor level is immediately displayed correctly if the outdoor level has been changed - e.g., because
a noise barrier has been inserted in CadnaA. The corresponding construction of the building then follows with BASTIAN.
17
Manual
17.5
Chapter 17 Output
The Connection CadnaA with BASTIAN
17
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 18 Project Organisation
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
18
Manual

Contents
18.1 1
18.1 Contents
18.2
Groups
18.2.1
18.2.2
Defining Groups
Partial Sound Levels of Groups
18.3
Variants
18.4
Date of Objects in Info box
18.5
Managing Project Variants

Using Folders
18.6
PCSP - Program Controlled

Segmented Processing
18.7
Batch Operation
18.8
Prototype File
18.9
Automatic Saving of Files
18.10 Project Information

18.11 Purge Tables
Manual
18
18.1

Contents
18
Manual

Groups
18.2
18.2 1
Groups
By means of the ID (see Chapter 5.5.3) for all objects and by the group
definition relying on it, CadnaA offers a versatile and powerful tool for
data management. If appropriate rules are observed in the definition of the
ID, a project and the data stock it is based on can be supplemented at any
time by entering or importing further data without creating problems with
either the clear identification of the individual sources or with the definition of groups. If the syntax is strictly observed, data stocks may be combined with other stocks at any time. This means that establishing and
observing strict ID syntax rules will, in the end, determine the value of a
data stock. Such issues are dealt with in detail in the "Advanced CadnaA"
training course.
Open the list of groups on the Tables|Group menu - the edit dialog Group
opens. The list is empty if no groups have been defined.
A group is a labelled selection of objects. All objects belonging to one
group are identified by the character string entered in the Expression box
which refers to the object ID (see Chapter 5.5.3 "The Dialog Boxes Name,
ID, INFO").
The following features are available for groups:
Activation and deactivation for the calculation (to calculate variants)

Presentation of partial sum-over-the-group levels at receiver points
Presentation of partial levels of the individual sources within one group
(which allows you to establish priorities for noise-control measures)
Editing objects belonging to one group by various actions (see Chapter
5.7.2 "Modify Objects") such as deleting, conversion to other types of
objects, transforming (rotating, shifting) etc.
18
Manual
18.2

Groups
Groups have a hierarchic structure. This is achieved in the order in

which the groups are arranged in the list of groups because this list is
checked from top to bottom when verifying the activation state of an
object. If you activate or deactivate a group of objects in one line, any
specification in groups further down the list will be ineffective for
these objects.
see also Quick Start chapter 4.15 Create Groups and chapter 20.10 The
Grouping Concept in CadnaA.
18
Manual
Chapter 18.2 Groups

Defining Groups
18.2.1 1
18.2.1 Defining Groups

Whether or not an object belongs to a group is determined by the Expression string entered in the group dialog. If the specified Expression string
matches the ID string of an object, this object belongs to the group.
Wildcards may be used in the definition of Expression strings (see Chapter 2.8 "Strings and Operators").
18
Manual
18.2.1
Example
Defining a
Group
Chapter 18.2 Groups

Defining Groups
Source1: ID = Prod_102, Source 2: ID = Prod_105

18.2.1
Express:
Prod*
Source 1 and Source 2 are assigned to the

group
Match:
Prod_??5
Source 2 is assigned to the group
Match:
Prod_102|Prod_105
Source 1 and Source 2 are assigned to the

group
Match:
*2
Only Source 1 is assigned to the group
With extensive projects you should define the IDs while considering the
intended group concept.
Example
Hierachy of Groups and
their Partial
Sum Level
18.2.1
The sequence of the groups in the list and their composition has an effect
on the calculation of the partial sum-over-the-group levels shown on the
list.
18
Note that you can only manipulate by grouping those objects whose
ID has been switched to neutral (grey, i. e., neither activated nor
deactivated) in the edit dialog of this object. Therefore, objects activated in the edit dialog cannot be deactivated by grouping, and vice
versa.
Six groups have been defined in the above example.
Manual
Chapter 18.2 Groups

Defining Groups
18.2.1 3
The first group contains all sources in the "Production" group.

The second contains Source 1, ID Prod_102, of "Production Hall 10.
The third contains Source 2, ID Prod_105, of "Production Hall 10.
The fourth contains the entire Hall 10 of "Production.
The fifth contains Hall 12 with the source ID Prod_123.
The sixth contains Hall 13 with the source ID Prod_135.
None of the sources or groups were activated or deactivated during the calculation, but the Neither option was selected. This means that all groups
and sources are considered in the calculation. Therefore, you can see the
pertinent partial sum-over-the-group levels at the existing immission
points.
If you were to deactivate the first group, "Production - which contains all
the sources of all halls - for a calculation, none of the groups following below would be considered in this calculation. Even if they were activated,
this would not have any effect. The sequence of the groups is therefore decisive.
Now edit the string on the Expression box of the third group to read
Prod_??5, and deactivate this group. This would automatically deactivate
the sixth group as well because the string on the Expression box would
apply for this group, too. You would be unable to re-activate this group unless you either moved the sixth group before the third one and activated it
explicitly, or you activated the sources in the edit source dialog.
18
Manual
18.2.1
Chapter 18.2 Groups

Defining Groups
If the activate option were selected, all sources with matching IDs would
be calculated.
18
Manual
Chapter 18.2 Groups

18.2.2 1
18.2.2 Partial Sound Levels of Groups

If you click the Partial Levels button on the edit dialog Group you can
see the total amount of noise at receiver points resulting from a user-defined group of noise sources.
In Tables|Partial Level, you can view the sound levels resulting from
each sound source included in the calculation for all existing receiver
points.
18
Partial Level in the dialog of the receiver point see Chapter 11.2.5.
Manual
18.2.2
Chapter 18.2 Groups

18
Manual

Variants
18.3
18.3 1
Variants
The formation of groups offers a very flexible logic for switching between
different states of a project. The integration of these group structures into
the newly set-up management of variants (Tables|Variant) offers you an
even more efficient tool for working on your projects.
Variant.cna
Name M.
ID
Height
Begin
End
(m)
(m)
mount 10.00
valley -10.00
topo
0.00
Contour lines with ID (Tables|Obstacles|Contour Line)
18
Example: Industrial project with contour lines
Manual
18.3

Variants
In the menu Tables|Variant the following dialog can be opened where you
can define up to 16 different variants.
Keywords
18.3.0
Output Memo-Field #(VarianteM, Parameter) and output name of variant

#(Variante) or #(VarianteL) see Chapter 17.4.35 ff
Management of variants in the menu Tables|Variant
To do this just click on the relevant line in the list box, activate use variant and enter the desired name in the text box name. After clicking the
i-button you can enter more detailed information. In our example the variants have been defined as follows:
V01 (all objects),

V02 (roads deactivated and the industrial enterprise sunk in a valley)
and
V03 (industrial sources deactivated, industrial enterprise located on top
of a mount)
If you now open the dialog in the menu Tables|Groups, these short names
appear as column headings. After the desired groups have been formed in
the way you already know, you can set-up a defined on- or off-state for
each variant by entering + or -.
18
Activate or deactivate the different groups for the variants by entering + or - directly into the group table of the relevant variant
column. Do not use the group dialog because the options activated
there will only be valid for the variant currently selected.
Manual

Variants
18.3 3
In
V01 all groups are activated

V02 the roads and the mountain contour lines are deactivated (the
industrial enterprise is located within the -10m contour line and therefore in a hollow)
V03 all objects of the industrial enterprise except the residential building as well as the 10m contour line are deactivated (the building is
therefore located within a 10m contour line on top of an elevation)
Group table with variants and results of the calculated variant V01.
If this assignment is executed, you can easily switch between the different
project variants in the corresponding list box of the icon bar.
The variants in use can be selected with a mouse click in the list box
In the given example variant V02 has been selected. The representation of
the project and especially the cross section show the consequences expected for this case:
Manual
18
18.3

Variants
Variant V02 is activated - roads and mountain contour lines are deactivated (the industrial
enterprise is located within the -10m contour line and therefore in a valley)
Cross section of the above image - industrial enterprise located in a valley
When the calculation is executed, the results relate to the variant defined
this way. In the group dialog the rating for the proportionate sound level
for each activated group of sources is shown in each table column (receiver points).
18
Manual

Variants
18.3 5
List of groups with variants - contour lines with the ID mount are activated in variant V03
According to this, by selecting and calculating variant V03 the project is

depicted without industrial sources, but with roads.
Representation of variant V03 without industrial sources, but with roads
Manual
18
18.3

Variants
Cross section of above Fig. with elevated building
With this description of a simple example only the proceedings in principal shall be explained. There are numerous ways of applying this technique in practice, be it switching between different states of operation with
a facility, different architectural variants of buildings or different groups of
measures within a reorganization project.
Indications for the calculation of variants
Calculate
Variants
18
By clicking the icon Pocket Calculator on the icon bar only the currently active variant will be calculated.
In the menu Calculation|Calculate you are able either to calculate

all or only the selected or current variant. You only have to enter the
corresponding options in the dialog that has been opened.
Dialog opens after clicking Calculate in the menu Calculation
Manual
18.3 7

Variants
In the dialog Group Tables|Groups only the results are shown for
the currently selected variant independent, of whether all variants are
calculated simultaneously. The same applies for the list of partial levels at the receiver point and in the menu Tables|Partial Level.
To display all results of the calculated variants use the Result Table
from the menu Tables. Then use the corresponding layout of the
table (see Chapter 15.3). You can also save the layout of the result
table contained in the file Variantes.cna under a different name and
adapt it as desired.

Result Table
Variant03.cnt
A file with activated variants contains only one receiver-point grid

because of memory space. In case you want to make grid calculations
use the commands for Save and Open in the menu Grid.
18
Manual
18.3

Variants
18
Manual
18.4 1

18.4
The Date Interval in the field Info of an object dialog enables you to enter
a date or date interval for each type of object. By entering a reference date
you can also define whose objects are valid for the execution of a calculation. This application is appropriate for, e.g., the execution of long-term
noise abatement measures for which the effects of partial measures shall
also be recorded at the receiver point.
You enter the reference date in the menu Tables|Variant for the corresponding variant. All objects that do not correspond to the given date will
then be deactivated.
If there is no date entered in the field info, all objects will be valid, even if
a reference date for the calculation has been entered.
If you define a date, only the objects corresponding to the date interval of
the reference date in addition to those objects that have no date will be taken into consideration in the calculation.
Date interval from: 01.10.1999 - reference date 30.09.1999 - the object is
not considered in the calculation.
Example
Date interval to: 1.10.1999 - reference date 30.9.1999 - the object is taken
into account for the calculation.
Date interval from: 1.1.1999 to: 31.12.1999 - reference date 30.9.1999 the object is also taken into account for the calculation.
18
Manual
18.4

18
Manual

Managing Project Variants Using Folders
18.5
18.5 1
Managing Project Variants

Using Folders
If you have extensive files and maybe long-term projects it could be useful
to separate objects - like, e.g., buildings, road traffic or industry - by saving them in different files and linking them on demand via import for a
calculation.
This has the advantage that only the mother-files have to be updated in
case of alterations and not all possible copies of this file.
You will often import separately managed files in one common file to perform a calculation.
In order to avoid having to do this manually, and to gain control of the lots
of little "Sticky Notes" listing all the files belonging to one project,
CadnaA offers you the "Folder" tool called Mappe-file.
The CadnaA folder is an ASCII file listing the names of all CadnaA
files to be combined in one project file. As soon as you open this
Mappe-file, CadnaA automatically loads all files listed in it.
You may specify an arbitrary name for the Mappe file. (In the example below, we choose PROJECT.CNA.). As it is an ASCII file, you may edit it
using any editor (also a word processor, such as MS WORD but then
make sure you save the file as *.TXT.). An example of such a file might
look like this:
18
Manual
18.5

Explanation
Text in Project.cna
Cadna/A Mappe 1.0
This text is compulsory (and must

appear on the first line!!). Switch to
next line by pressing RETURN:
;now follow the files
This is a comment line.
Ground.cna
In this example a file containing

only contour lines. Press RETURN.
Road.cna

only roads. Press RETURN.
Building.cna

only buildings. Press RETURN.
e:\tmp\folder5\folder2000\Area
s.cna
A file lying in certain directory. The

path must be specified whenever a
file is to be included which does not
lie in the same directory as the folder file.
Each file, which is to be imported, must appear on a separate line

(RETURN). You can also insert other folders in a folder file.
This is what the above file should look like:

Cadna/A Mappe 1.0
;now follow the files
Ground.cna
Road.cna
Bulding.cna
e:\tmp\mappe5\mappe2000\Areas.cna
18
You should write-protect this file!
Manual

18.5 3
When you open the Project.cna file in CadnaA, using the File|Open File
command, CadnaA opens the first file listed in Project.cna Ground.cna
in our example , and imports the files listed after it. By default, the name
of the resulting combined file will be the name of the Mappe file. If you
wish to keep this file, use Save File As to give it a different name.
Ground.cna
Road.cna
18
Manual
18.5

Building.cna
Project.cna (folder file)

loads all the
desired files
simultaneously
and into the
same file.
Example
Demo1.cna
18
Try for yourself:
Check this procedure using the file Demo1.cna which you already
know. Create a few files, each of which contains only one type of
objects, i. e., one file each for roads, buildings etc. To achieve this,
use the context menu command Modify Objects (see Chapter 5.7.2).
Open file Demo1.cna.
Select any building by clicking it with the right mouse button. Select
Modify Objects|Action: Delete from the context menu.
Manual

In the dialog Modify Objects, click the All button, then click Road
while holding the CTRL key down. This excludes the roads from the
action.
Activate all three options Inside, Outside, On Polygon Borderline.
Click OK. Then confirm All in the next dialog. All objects except the
roads will have been deleted. (Sorry, not all: The selected building is
still there and must be deleted using the DEL key.)
Save file as enter a name e. g., Road.cna.
18.5 5
Create further files with the separate object types. (Such as railways
Train.cna, area sources Industry.cna, buildings Building.cna). Finally,
the calculated grid with the calculation configuration is to be saved. To this
end, delete all objects, except the BMP file, as described above. Then save
the grid as Result.cna.
Now open an editor (such as Wordpad) or a word processor. In our example we used MS Word. Create a new file and enter the object files you created.
Cadna/A Mappe 1.0
Result.cna
Road.cna
Industry.cna
Train.cna
Building.cna
Save this file as a text file named Project2.cna (You can also save it
as Project2.TXT) CadnaA will recognise this as a folder file).
Close the file.
Run CadnaA. File|Open File, and select Project2.cna (or

Project2.txt). The complete file that used to be Demo1.cna will be
restored.
Manual
18
18.5

You should note this: A calculated grid, like, e. g, a noise map, cannot be imported. This is why you should list the result file first.
Remember: The first file in the folder is opened, whereas all others
are imported into the opened file. This is also why the first file should
contain all the settings, such as the calculation configuration,
because the file that is open determines the calculation configuration
and all other settings.
18
Manual
18.6 1

PCSP - Program Controlled Segmented Processing
18.6
PCSP - Program Controlled

Segmented Processing
CadnaA is able to process more than 16 million objects per object type
without any problems, even models of cities. Therefore the limit for the
size of a processable file is normally defined by the capacity of the computer. With PCSP even this limit is broken.
Program controlled segmentation with user-defined partitioning allows
you to load automatically the segments one after another for calculation.
Thus the RAM is able to work without hard disk access.
If several CadnaA computers are at your disposal for calculation, e.g.,
within a network, they can simultaneously work on the same project file.
PCSP with its PCSP-Part-Viewer by CadnaA automatically organizes and
manages the required processes.
1.
Cover your file, which is to be calculated, with tile-like sections - we

call this "tiling" (see Chapter 13.10)
How to activate PCSP
2.
give the Section a special title - PART: xyz (for xyz you can choose
any other name)
Quick instruction
3.
start CadnaA in the batch mode (see Chapter 18.7) for calculation
Step 1 and 2 does CadnaA automatically with the command Tables|Miscellaneous|PCSP|Generate PCSP Tiles.
This produced quadrate PCSP tiles with the entered length and the essential identifier in the field ID e.g. PART:030. Dont delete this entry - it is
mandatory for the PCSP calculation.
Before generating PSCP tiles you have to define a calculation area

first!
Manual
Generate
PSCP-Tiles
18.6.0
18
18.6

Calculate Grid
The option Calculate Grid produced quadrate tiles with the defined
length for the whole calculation area .
Calculate Receiver / Buildings Evaluation
The option Calculate Receiver / Buildings Evaluation produced quadrate tiles with the defined length which includes all receiver points and buildings evalualtion symbols.
User-defined
segmentation
with Tiles
Naturally you can partition your project on your own with arbitrarily
amounts of tiles and user-defined dimensions by inserting them manually
or with the command Duplicate which is described step by step in the following. Skip this instruction if not neccessary and go on with step 3 Start
CadnaA in the batch mode (see Chapter 18.7) for calculation.
18.6.0
18
Manual
18.6 3

"Tile" file with Sections
Step by Step
Step 1:
To follow this example, open the file Demo1.cna - it is on your

CadnaA CD-Rom by default.
Demo1.cna
Delete the grid (GRID|Delete)
Save the file under a different name, e.g., DemoPCSP.cna
Paste a correspondingly large Section - in the given example in the

upper left-hand corner - in the file you would like to calculate. The
Section may have any desired size.
Subsequently, duplicate this Section in a way that will cover your

project file entirely and seamlessly. In the given example there are
two horizontal sections and two vertical sections, altogether 4 sections. (Mark Section with the RIGHT mouse key and select Duplicate
from the context menu.) The receiver-point grid will only be calculated in the Section created this way.
18
Manual
18.6

First Section in this example
Settings to duplicate the Section
18
Manual
18.6 5

Here is an example of a "tiled" file with 4 sections from which a receiverpoint grid is to be calculated. You could further modify this by pasting a
calculation area covering all Sections. In this case only the calculation
area within the tiles would be calculated.
Name Sections
Open the table Section (Table|Other Objects|Section)
Open the table context menu by clicking on the column Name with
the right mouse key and select Change Column.
To give all Sections the name PART: and a consecutive numbering,

enter the necessary information into the dialog box as is shown in the
following picture.
Manual
Step 2:
18
18.6
Step 3:
18

Note that the word PART: must be written in capitals. The two # will
automatically number the Section with two-digit numbers. Behind
the colon, however, you can enter any desired name, but you must
not leave it without a name. In the given example these tiles/segments are named PART:01 to PART:04.
Enter the desired spacing for the grid of receiver points in Grid|Properties. This setting will apply to all tiles.
Enter the corresponding settings in Calculation|Configuration.

Above all, note the Max. Search Radius in the General tab (see step
3.).
For the calculation start CadnaA in the batch mode

(see Chapter 18.7)
After you have created and named all the Sections, save the file in the corresponding IN-directory!!! When you have tiled a file in the described
way, CadnaA will automatically create a second file with the extension
Part (e.g. DemoPCSP.cna.part). This file must also be located in the INdirectory. Therefore it is easiest to save the tiled file directly in this directory because CadnaA automatically saves it in the same directory. Now
Manual
18.6 7

start CadnaA in the batch mode. (If necessary, refer to the manual or online help - keyword: batch).
CadnaA now recognizes that this file is segmented. The program calcu-
lates each tile separately, taking into account not only those objects located
within the tile, but also those objects located within the selected search radius. Then CadnaA saves the calculated grid in the corresponding OUTdirectory . These grid files have the same names as the original files and
are combined with the extension of the Section name but without
"PART":. In our example it would be DemoPCSP.cna.01.cna, DemoPCSP.cna.02.cna a.s.o.
So, if you have several computers in a network or multi-processor computers at your disposal, they can calculate the individual tiles at the same
time. CadnaA automatically organizes the distribution of the tiles to the
computers/processors involved. In this case all the computers involved
have to be started in the batch mode, and all of them have to "observe" the
same IN-directory. When working with a multi-processor computer
CadnaA must be started as many times as there are processors in the computer.
Refresh PCSP Tiles see paragraph PCSP-Part-Viewer below.
After calculation fetch the results - grid and/or the calculated building
evaluation and receiver points - with the command Tables|Miscellaneous|PCSP|Load Tiles .
Refresh
PCSP Tiles
18.6.0
Load Tiles
18.6.0
18
In order that the receivers or building evaluation are not doubled included
in the project file they will be deleted before loading the results if this option is activated.
Manual
Delete Receivers/
Building Evaluation
before Loading
18.6

In case only the grid has been calculated without receivers /building evaluation deactivate this option.
Delete Tile-Files
after loading
The calculated tile-files, which are loacated in the OUT-directory, are deleted automatically if this option is activated.
PCSP-part-viewer
Refresh PCSP
Tiles
18.6.0
The PCSP-part-viewer shows the progress of calculation by colored tiles.

By this feature you receive an up-to-date information about the calculation
progress, in special with large projects.
Displaying the calculation

progress
18.6.0
Select from the menu Tables|Miscellaneous the command "Refresh PCSPtiles". Upon selection the predefined tiles are colored:
red = unprocessed tiles
blue = tiles presently being processed
green = finalized tiles
The display of the calculation process is not updated automatically, but has
to be engaged manually by reselection of the command "Refresh PCSPtiles". This procedure ensures that the calculation is not slowed down by
continuous queries.
Displaying the processing

status of the tiles after a
calculation
18.6.0
Normaly all tiles should be calculated and therefore displayed green. If

not, look up the processing status in the Info-field of the relevant tile. The
following variables can be displayed:
Example:
STATUS=2
COMPUTER=LIPRO
TIMEBEG=28.05.2004 15:44:52
TIMEEND=28.05.2004 15:44:58
TIMESECS=5
18
Manual
18.6 9

STATUS =
0 not calculated (rot) ;
1 calculation is in process (blau),
2 calculation is finished (grn),
3 calculation interrupted (grau)
COMPUTERComputer name
TIMEBEGbegin tile calculation
TIMEENDend tile calculation
TIMSECScalculation time of the tile in seconds
During the BATCH calculation CadnaA automatically creates a local textblock with the name PCSP which contains information of the file processing status after a calculation, e.g.:
PARTS=25
RADMAX=2000.00
TIMEBEG=28.05.2004 15:44:13
TIMEEND=28.05.2004 15:45:38
TIMESECS=76
PARTS
number of calculated tiles
RADMAX
addional calculation radius (m) around a tile
The time displays the begin and the end of calculation and the total calculation time (sec) of all tiles together.
To watch the calculation process of a CadnaA-file with PCSP which is
saved on a server and which has been started in Batch-mode, just open this
file from your client without batch-mode. In this case serves the CadnaA
window as monitor.
Monitor
18.6.0
18
Manual
10
18.6

18
Manual
18.7 1

Batch Operation
18.7
Batch Operation
It is possible with CadnaA to automatically calculate in succession a grid

or individual receiver points. This is especially interesting for long-term
calculations if you, e.g., want to calculate different variants during the
weekend or over-night.
The following steps are necessary:
To define the calculation that shall be carried out in the batch process, a
text block named CNABATCH has to be created. As an example you may
enter the following commands:
CNABATCH
Change Command
starting CadnaA
On the Windows desktop activate the CadnaA icon by clicking it

once.
Then select File Properties and insert the following string (including
one blank before it!) in the last line of the command:
/batch=1
Create a directory CNABATCH on your hard drive C:. In CNABATCH,

create two sub-directories called IN and OUT.
CNABATCH
IN and OUT
Naming the sub-directories IN and OUT is mandatory!!!
CNABATCH is the default directory for the batch feature. If you use this
name, no modification of the Cadnaa.ini file is required. (If you wish to
use a different name, see below.)
The paths then are:
Manual
18
18.7

Batch Operation
C:\CNABATCH\IN
C.\CNABATCH\OUT
Entry in Cadnaa.ini
if necessary
Copy all those *.CNA files to be processed into the IN directory. It

goes without saying that in each project file the calculation configuration and the immission point grid must be defined appropriately.
If you do not stick to the default directory name CNABATCH on drive C,

an entry must be made in the file CADNAA.INI residing in the Windows
directory (e.g., ...\WINDOWS (for Windows 3.11/95) or ...\WINNT (for
Windows NT) etc.).
Open this file using an editor and insert the path where your two
directories IN and OUT are, in the series of commands following the
header [Main]. If, for example, the directory is WEEKEND instead
of CNABATCH, and WEEKEND itself contains in a directory
CADNAA_W, you will have to insert the following line:
BatchDir=C:\CADNAA_W\WEEKEND
)
Launching the
automatic calculation
Then save the file and close it.
When CadnaA is launched with the parameter /batch=1 on the expanded

command line, it will check the IN directory for files every 30 seconds. If
any files are found, these will be opened and calculated one by one. The
results will be saved under the same name in the OUT directory, and the
files already calculated are deleted from the IN directory.
Once CadnaA has processed all files, close the program as usual.
CadnaA should not run in the batch mode when project files are edited
18
rather than calculations carried out because in the batch mode the program
tries to open any files from the IN directory and this may cause problems.
In order to save the trouble of having to delete and re-enter the batch parameters on the command line over and over again, you may wish to create
an additional CadnaA icon on the desktop (e. g. by copying) where the
Manual

Batch Operation
18.7 3
batch parameter is permanently set. For clarity, the new icon might be
named, e. g., CADNA-BATCH. Use this icon to launch the program when
you wish to carry out several calculations in a series.
This enables a highly professional way of working with CadnaA - particularly if such a machine with a corresponding processor is available in a
network.
In this context also pay attention to the comprehensive facility of PCSP
(Program Controlled Segmented Processing) - (see Chapter 18.6).
18
Manual
18.7
Optionen BATCH
Command

Batch Operation
With the BATCH command it is possible to execute calculations automatically for grids (noise map) or individual receiver points for several files or
to continue a stopped calculation at the point where it has been stopped.
The selection of the desired mode is controlled by parameters in text
blocks (see Chapter 16.6). If you do not create a textblock a grid is calculated automatically.
To define parameters for calculations in the Batch mode create a local text
block named CNABATCH (pay attention to the capital letters). Enter one
or more of the following commands to execute the corresponding calculation:
Parameter
calculation of
CALC_IMM
receiver points (currently displayed variant)
CALC_IMM
receiver points (all variants)
CALC_IMM
no receiver points (default)
CALC_ RASTER
grid (default)
CALC_ RASTER
no grid
UPDATE_RASTER
continue calculation at the interrupted position (as Shift+calc

grid)
CALC_MESSAGE
Computer1
Note: CALC_IMM corresponds as well to the individual inserted

receivers as to the building evaluation.
18
Manual
18.7 5

Batch Operation
Textblock in CadnaA
Access to the same folder/directory through several computers is unambiguously regulated in the Batch mode. If a file is opened, the extension of
this file is renamed from CNA in CNC - another opening of this file is
therefore impossible. After finishing the calculation the extension is again
renamed in CNA and saved in the corresponding OUT directory.
Several Computers and

the Batch
Command
18.7.0
You can get an electronic message if a calculation is completed by

CadnaA. For that it is required that you have installed a message program
(e.g. WinPopUp) on your computer and that you have created a local text
block named CALC_MESSAGE in your file. In this textblock the computer path or the computer which should get the message must be contained.
Message after
finishing the
calculation
18.7.0
18
Manual
18.7

Batch Operation
18
Manual

Prototype File
18.8
18.8 1
Prototype File
The menu command Options|Prototype allows you to save to a CadnaA

file pre-defined program settings, thus making them the preferences for future projects. Once a prototype file has been selected, CadnaA will always
load all the parameters specified in this prototype file when it is launched
again or when opening a new file.
Open a new file.
Specify the desired parameters for, e. g., calculation configuration,

assignment of levels to colours, etc.
Save this file as usual. Since it will also be a CNA file, it may be useful to create a new folder for prototype files for better distinction.
Open the menu Options|Prototype, and select the file just saved.
Close the dialog again by pressing the Open button.
Now select File|New: CadnaA opens a new file featuring the settings
that you have previously defined on the prototype file. There is no
risk of overwriting since the new file was opened "with no name".
CadnaA will open any new file with the settings of the selected prototype
file until you select a different prototype file, delete the active prototype
file, or move it to a different folder. If CadnaA cannot find the selected
prototype file, it automatically uses the default settings.
18
Manual
18.8

Prototype File
18
Manual

18.9
18.9 1
In CadnaA you can either save your work automatically at specified intervals, or have yourself reminded to save the file at specified intervals
For that, specify the desired option on the Options|Auto Save dialog. If no
file name is specified under Auto Save As:, CadnaA will save the file as
autosave.cna in the program directory.
Dialog Auto Save
If you run CadnaA with the batch command (see Chapter 18.7), any
selected auto save option will be deactivated.
18
Manual
18.9

18
Manual

Project Information
18.10 1
18.10 Project Information

You can enter project information in the menu File|Project-Info; information such as the name of the client, the titel of the project, the date etc. If
information has been entered you can find it again in
1.
the file option in Windows explorer (RIGHT mouse click on the file
name) and
2.
as local text blocks automatically generated from CadnaA in

Tables|Libraries (local)
The name or the number of the program version is always visible in the
Windows explorer independent of any entry in the Project-Info.
CadnaANumber of the Version
If you have entered information, then you can see it without opening the
CadnaA file if you click with the RIGHT mouse key on the file name in the
Windows explorer and on the corresponding command. Furthermore, if
you want to find a CadnaA file on your computer, you can also enter a
string of project-info as a search criterion on the Windows desktop.
File
Information
18
Manual
18.10

Project Information
Locale Text blocks
If you enter project information, CadnaA automatically generates a text

block for the corresponding field. The names of all these so generated local text blocks start with PI_. The name is written in capital letters.
18
Manual
18.10 3

Project Information
If you make an entry in the field Project Name, a local text block is generated and named PI_TITLE. This can now be despicted with the keyword
#(Text, PI_TITLE).
Exampel:
With that you are able to simplify your print templates

In case you fill out the corresponding fields, the following text blocks are
generated:
Name of the Textblocks
Field of the Projekt-Info
PI_TITLE
Project Name
PI_CLIENT
Client
PI_PROJEKT
Project
PI_COMMENTS
Remarks
PI_AUTHOR
Editor
PI_KEYWORDS
Keyword
See also chapter 16.6 Text Blocks
18
Manual
18.10

Project Information
18
Manual

Purge Tables
18.11 1
18.11 Purge Tables

The Tables|Miscellaneous|Purge command acts as follows:
Deleting duplicate groups and groups which are not used. This may be
the case when a file containing groups was imported.
Deleting lists of numbers of trains (see Chapter 8.12.2) which are allocated to none of the railway sections.
Deleting duplicate Areas of Designated Use (Table|Other Objects)|.
Deleting duplicates of text blocks from the local library (Tables).
Deleting duplicates of spectra from the local library or spectra which

are not used from any noise source.
Deleting duplicates of Directivity from the local library or deleting

Directivities which are not used by any noise source.
18
Manual
18.11

Purge Tables
18
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 19 Air Pollution
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
19
Manual

Contents
19.1 1
19.1 Contents
19.2
Air Pullotion according to MLus-92
19.3
Calculation of Air Pollution using

CadnaA-APL
19
Manual
19.1

Contents
19
Manual

19.2
19.2 1
CadnaA enables you to calculate air pollution caused by road traffic ac-
cording to the MLuS 92, Issue 96 /46/. The current issue, which is recommended by, e.g., the Bavarian Government, is integrated and put at your
disposal within the scope of a further update as soon as it is published in a
form applicable for software matters.
Handling in CadnaA is similar to noise calculation according to the method "Long Straight Road " - By clicking on a road in the CadnaA project
with the right mouse key you can select from the opening context menu
the command Air Pollution which will transfer the relevant parameters of
this road automatically to the edit box. Another alternative is opening the
edit box via Tables|Miscellaneous|Air Pollution. In this case you would
have to enter (by keyboard) the relevant parameters like MDTD, Truckpercentage and so on.
Representation of values in red will indicate an infringement or an incorrect entry.
19
Manual
19.2

19
Manual

Calculation of Air Pollution using CadnaA-APL
19.3
*
19.3 1
Calculation of Air Pollution using

CadnaA-APL
The Option APL (Air Pollution) is an additional option for CadnaA

and runs with the basic version only. The option APL is accessible if
it has been purchased.
By the option CadnaA-APL the range of applications of CadnaA are extended by the calculation, the assessment, and the presentation of air pollutants impact. The option CadnaA-APL makes use of the calculation
model AUSTAL2000 being developed by the German Federal Environmental Agency (Umweltbundesamt, Berlin).
CadnaA-APL allows to calculate immission maps showing the distribution of air pollutants, such as fine particulates (PM10), NO2, benzene, SO2
and others, based on the digital town model already been used for the calculation of noise level distribution. The influence by buildings and the terrain on the distribution of air pollutants can be accounted for.
By the powerful PCSP-calculation technique (Program Controlled Segmented Processing) the calculation job can be shared by several PCs connected in network. This technique enables to calculate immission maps for
areas of arbitrary size.
CadnaA-APL calculates the traffic induced distribution of air pollutants
for road schemes including the effect by buildings. This allows to assess
areas with high exposure to air pollutants and to take reasonable measures
to reduce both, noise and air pollutants impact.
As CadnaA-APL also calculates the number of exceedances for the pollutants PM10 (24-hour limit value of 50 g/m3) and for NO2 (hourly limit
value of 200 g/m3) a direct comparison with the limiting values fixed in
the European guideline 1999/30/EG is possible. Thus, the calculation of
air pollutants exposure using CadnaA-APL serves as the basis for action
planning in the context of mitigation plans for air pollution.
Manual
19
19
19.3

Calculation of Air Pollution using CadnaA-APL
You will find more information on your CadnaA-CD-ROM in \Manual\Samples\19_Luftschadstoffe_AirPollution\Option APL.
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Tutorial
Chapter 1
Contents
Chapter 2
Register
Chapter 3
Introduction
Chapter 4
The First Steps
Chapter 5
Basics
Chapter 6
Import
Chapter 7
Digitalize
Chapter 8
Sources
Chapter 9
Obstacles
Chapter 10
Topography
10
Chapter 11
Immissions
11
Chapter 12
12
Chapter 13
Graphics
13
Chapter 14
Pictures
14
Chapter 15
Tables
15
Chapter 16
Libraries
16
Chapter 17
Output
17
Chapter 18
18
Chapter 19
Air Pollution
19
Examples
Manual
Tutorial
Tutorial
20
Manual
Tutorial
Examples
Examples
The examples supplement the CadnaA manual. They are - where needed - step-by-step instructions. If required further examples will follow. Suggestions are wellcome.
You will find all examples as PDF files on your CadnaA CD-Rom in
the directory SAMPLES|TUTORIAL. Open the files with the AcrobatReader by ADOBE. If you have not installed the ACROBAT-Reader
yet you may install it now from your CadnaA CD. Alternatively you
can download the program from http://www.adobe.com without any
fee. Please pay attention that we dont give any support for third-party
programs and that we are not responsible for them.
Tutorial
Tutorial
Tutorial
Contents
Contents
AdjustRoadDTM.PDF
MultiStoreyGarage.PDF
RadiationTunnelOpenings.PDF
MagneticLevitationTrain.PDF
LandUsePlaning.PDF
MeteorologyCmet.PDF
ODBC_ASCII.PDF
CreatingLegend.PDF
ReadyToUseLegends.PDF
RefTime_Eval_1 to 3.PDF
Adjust Road to Ground Height

Modeling Multiple Storey Garages
The radiation from tunnel openings
Calculation of the Noise Distribution Caused by a Magnetic
Levitation Train
Noise Quota for Urban Land-Use Planning
Calculation of the Meteorological Correction Cmet
ODBC Import Ascii
Creating a Legend with the CadnaA Plot-Designer
Ready-to-Use-Legends
Three files corresponding to how to define evaluation parameters und
reference time.
Tutorial
Tutorial

CadnaA - Manual V3 - 5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CadnaA - Manual V3 - 5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual

The First Steps

The First Steps

The First Steps

Conventions Used in this Manual

Operators and Functions

Strings and Operators

IMPORTANT NOTICE TO USER: THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND

trademarks and commercial names used by DataKustik GmbH

supplier, and to demand delivery of a new software version. If

Deactivate Point Objects in Buildings

Copy Data Records 15.2.7-1

Initial string 7.2-4

objects edit dialog 5.5.1-1

Hierachy of Groups and their Partial Sum

Hardlock-Key (Dongle) 4.3-1

Import / Export of Tables listing number of

Line-like Objects 10.3.2-1

Moving a Polygon Point 5.4.1-1

areas with specified ground absorption

Land Use 11.4-1

traffic-count calculator 8.12.4-1

Display real Width of Roads 8.9.1-1

Save Settings 4.12-1

Sound-radiatin Area (m) 8.6.5-1

Building Height Points 6.4.13-1

Conventions Used in this Manual

The following list comprises all conventions used in this manual.

With the key

A Step-by-Step instruction, which can be omitted

two new rows

alerts you to essential information.

For the stated example you will find a file on the

Attributes and Abbreviations

Buildings reflecting=0/absorbent=1/highly absorbent=2

Mean distance between buildings (m)

Absorption coefficient alpha left

Absorption coefficient alpha right

Option FLG: Number of exceedings (T) day or (N) night at the

x coordinate, right (AzB module)

y coordinate, top (AzB module)

area (in square meters)

see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"

see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"

see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"

short name of land use

land use integer (0 = without use; 1 = first typ of land use in

long name of land use

determine designated land use

intern - not relevant

density of the buildings (%)

basic source (Power Plant Option!)

Parking lots occupied (%) night-time

Parking lots occupied (%) daytime

Parking lot events per hour, night-time

Parking lot events per hour, daytime

- (only for program-internal use)

Bitmap reference of coordinates of the left lower and the right

Horizontal Overhang by Cantilevers

Vertikal Length of the Overhang by Cantilevers

Attenuations 1 through 10 (power plant module)

Attenuation from Foliage and Building developement (RLS90)

Distance of building development (left/right)